A Government - Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation

202 

MAHARASHTRA INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION 

(A Government of Maharashtra Undertaking) 

DETAILED ITEMWISE SPECIFICATIONS 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

NAME OF WORK - Construction of Guest House for MIDC at Kudal. 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

NOTE:- Reference to a number of Items appearing in this document are the reference 

numbers of items in the MIDC's Standard Specifications Book of Specifications 

which are available in MIDC Offices for ready reference. Bidders are requested to 

refer to the Standard Specifications before submitting their offers. 

SUBESTIMATE NO. 1 

EXCAVATION + R.C.C. 

Sub Estimate No. 1 :- RCC & Civil work. 

Item No.1:- Dismantling of existing building include B.B masonry, stone masonry, 

cement concrete of all grade, RCC work of all grades concrete, Removing door & 

windows with frame and shutter, removing tile flooring, removing cement plaster 

and disposing of all materials as per direction of Engineer - in - charge etc. 

complete including all leads and lifts. 

General: Dismantling of existing building include B.B masonry, stone masonry, 

cement concrete of all grade, RCC work of all grades concrete, Removing door & 

windows with frame and shutter, removing tile flooring, removing cement plaster 

and disposing of all materials as per direction of Engineer - in - charge etc. complete 

including all leads and lifts. 

Method Of Work : Dismalting the existing building of guest house having total built 

up area of 275.00 Sqm area at ground floor and 275.00 Sqm area at first floor 

including removing the A.C sheet roofing. The item includes removing of all type of 

RCC works, brick mansonry, doors & windows, flooring, structural steel work of 

roofing, all electrical fixture and wiring and foundationof building. 

The various item removed such as doors, windows, m.s bars, structural steel, 

tiles, electrical item etc. whether usable or not will be the property of contractor. The 

contractor should offer the rebate in the tender for these material. The other 

unusable material has to dispose off in the industrial area as per the direction of 

Engineer – in – charge. 

Mode of Measurement : It is complete job for removing the existing building and 

paid as a job work. 

SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR 

SIGNATURE OF EXE. ENGINEER

203 

Item No.2:- 

Excavation in trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations, column footings, walls etc. in 

earth’s soils of all types, gravel, sand, soft & hard murum, and boulders up to 0.03 

cum. size including all lift & lead, stacking or spreading as directed, bailing of 

sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation etc., and back filing the 

excavated pit or trench using the excavated material in layers including watering 

and ramming as required or as directed by Engineer-In-charge, including all 

labour and materials complete. 

2.1 General: The item refers to the excavation, in earth, soils of all types, gravel, 

sand, soft and hard murum and boulders up to 0.03 cum size. The excavation 

shall be for trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations, column footings, walls etc. 

and may be in wet or dry, in earth, and similar other soft or loose material. 

2.2 Site Preparation : The site as directed by the Engineer-in-charge, on which the 

construction, as per the drawings, is to be started shall be first cleaned and 

cleared of all obstructions. The loose stones, bushes, rubbish, brushwood, trees 

along with roots, etc. shall be removed. The material shall be stacked or disposed 

off as directed. All the material shall be the property of MIDC. After clearing the 

site, the alignment or center lines or points shall be given by the Engineer-incharge. 

The contractor shall establish the reference marks, benchmark pillars in 

masonry with M.S. Plate top of which shall be bench mark connected to GTS. The 

B.M. Pillars shall be maintained undisturbed by the contractor etc. and the 

widths for excavations shall be clearly marked by the contractor as directed, true 

to line, curve, level and slope. The contractor shall provide all labour and 

marking material such as wooden/steel pegs, white lime powder, oil paint, or 

any other suitable marking material at his own cost and he shall be fully 

responsible for the correctness of the line, curve and levels and slopes. 

2.3 Excavation : Before starting actual excavation work, contractor shall notify the 

Engineer-in-charge for taking the necessary measurements of cross sectional 

levels along the alignment for measurement purposes. The levels recorded in 

the field book shall be signed by the Engineer-in-charge and authorised 

representative of the contractor in token of acceptance. The contractor shall 

remove all the material from the marked area of excavation by using labour, 

tools and equipments most suitable for excavation of soft material as 

enumerated in the item in wet or dry conditions. The excavation shall be true to 

line, curve, shape, level grade as per the drawings or as directed. The widths of 

excavations shall be as minimum to the widths required at the bottom and the 

vertical faces shall be as far as possible in plumb. Unless provided in the 

contract, no extra payment shall be made for the excavation on side slopes for 

stability of slopes. Contractor shall be fully responsible for the correctness of the 

excavation. Whenever the strata of different grade of soil not covered in this 

item is met, the excavation shall be stopped and the Engineer-in-charge shall be 

notified to take the cross-sectional levels for taking the measurements and the 

same shall be recorded and practice as mentioned above shall be adhered to. 

The extra excavation in depth or on sides shall not be paid and the contractor 



204 

will have to fill the extra excavated depths in layers to bring the correct level by 

watering and ramming at his own cost. 

2.4 Foundation Preparation : The foundation for column footing and for structural 

components such as wall shall not be provided on soft strata covered under this 

item of excavation. The foundations for rafts, embedment of pipelines for water 

supply or drainage or gas may be laid on the foundation prepared on soft strata. 

The foundation level even if is confined within the soft layer, the final layer of 

excavation watered and brought to the required level and slope by ramming. The 

contractor shall not excavate below the line shown in the drawing or as directed. 

No foundation of any sort shall be laid unless the Engineerin- charge approves 

the strata on which foundations are to be laid and passes the depth of excavation 

to lay foundation and record the dimensions and elevations and types soils of the 

foundation pit, trench excavated, and shall be recorded in the field book adopting 

system already explained above. 

2.5 Shoring and Strutting : The cost of shoring and strutting shall not be paid 

separately unless provided in the contract. The type and designing of shoring 

shall be decided by the contractor, and shall get approved from the Engineer in 

Charge. 

Pay Slopes : In lieu of shoring and strutting pay slopes for excavation of 

trenches/pits shall be stipulated and paid accordingly. 

2.6 Disposal of Excavated Material : All the material obtained from clearing the 

site or from excavation shall be the absolute property of MIDC. All materials 

obtained from clearing the site and excavation shall be disposed off or spread 

or stacked within a lead of 50 meters beyond the excavated area as directed by 

the Engineer in Charge. Materials suitable for back-filling or other use shall be 

stacked at a convenient place within a lead of 50 meters as directed for refilling 

or reuse. No excavated material shall be kept within 1.5 m distance from the 

outer top edge of excavation to avoid the falling of the stuff in the pit or trench. 

Surplus materials shall be used for levelling the ground around as directed 

within a lead of 50 meters. 

2.7 Dewatering : It is the responsibility of the contractor to remove the water 

accumulated in the pit or trench, from sub-soil water or from rains or from any 

other natural source, by manually or by pumping out as required. Unless 

provided for in the contract separately, no payment shall be made for bailing 

out the water. The contractor may be required to provide temporary bunds, or 

provide byepass arrangements to avoid entering of water in the excavation at 

his own cost. The drained water shall be properly disposed off, so as not to 

cause any damages to the excavated area nor to the surrounding structures. The 

contractor shall keep the excavated area dry for measurements and for laying of 

foundation mortar or concrete. 

2.8 Side Slips and Blows : Even after sufficient care of sides, slips or blows occur, 

they shall be removed at contractor’s cost. 

2.9 Backfilling : After excavation is completed, measurements recorded by the 

Engineer in-charge and the foundation raft masonry above is constructed or the 

pipeline is laid, all the shoring shall have to be removed. The backfilling of the 

pit or trench to the original level or as shown in the drawing or as directed shall 



205 

be made from the selected excavated material stacked separately for that 

purpose. The material shall be laid in layers of 15 to 20 cm in thickness, watered 

and then rammed properly. The backfilling shall only be done after receiving 

orders from the Engineer-in-charge and without damaging the foundation raft 

or the pipeline etc. 

2.10 Protective Measures : All the excavated pits, trenches etc. shall be properly 

protected from any accidents by providing strong fencing around. At night red 

lantern and watchman shall be kept in proper position to indicate the danger 

zone. It is the responsibility of the contractor to take the adequate protective 

measures and safety of the excavation, people and workmen and surrounding 

properties and will have to bear the damages if caused. All the cost of 

protective measures shall be included in the item rate. 

2.11 Item to Include : The rate for this item, as per the agreement includes all labour 

and tools for clearing the site, marking out the excavation line outs, shoring and 

strutting, excavation of pits or trenches, bailing or pumping out water if not 

provided separately, removal of excavated material and disposal of material as 

directed, refilling of pits or trenches, adequate protective measures etc. 

Contractor shall also make the necessary arrangements for taking 

measurements. The rate also includes the cost of repairs due to excess 

excavations or slips. The item also includes payment of the damages if any, by 

the contractor. The disposal of the material is included within 50 m radius from 

the edge of excavation. The lift for excavation of 1.5 m is covered by this item. 

2.12 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurements of the original 

ground profiles at selected locations shall be taken after clearing the site. The 

measurements of the final excavated profile shall be taken if the excavation is 

less or more as directed by the Engineer-in- charge or shall be measured as per 

drawings. Excess excavation shall be recorded but shall be paid to the limited 

quantity as explained above. The quantity shall be measured in cubic meters 

and paid at the rate as per the contract agreement. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.3:- 

Excavation for trenches, pits, pipelines, foundations, column footings, walls etc. in 

soft rock and boulders between 0.03 TO 0.30 Cu.M. in size including all lifts & 

leads. breaking the boulders into 225 mm size rubble including stacking the same 

(rubble as well as soft rock) and / or spreading as directed, bailing out water if 

any, preparing the bed for foundations & necessary back filling the excavated pit / 

trench as directed by Engineer-in-charge all labour and materials complete. 

3.1 General : The item refers to the excavation, in soft rock and boulders between 

0.03 and 0.30 cum size. The excavation shall be for trenches, for pipelines, pits, 

foundations, column footings, walls etc. and may be in wet or dry, in soft rock, 

and similar other material. 



206 

3.2 Site Preparation : As per Item No.Gen/A/1.2. Site preparation may not be 

required if the classified layer lies below the item of excavation in soils 

classified as per Item No.Gen/A/1. 

3.3 Excavation : As per Item No.Gen/A/1.3. The contractor shall excavate and 


tools and equipments most suitable for excavation of soft rock in wet or dry 

condition. 

3.4 Foundation Preparation : In this classified strata, the foundation for column 

footing and for structural components such as wall may be provided. Also the 

foundations for rafts, embedment of pipelines for water supply or drainage or 

gas may be laid in this type of classified soft rock. The foundation shall be 

cleared of all loose material and shall be dressed by chiseling to the correct line 

and level. The contractor shall not excavate below the line shown in the 

drawing or as directed. No foundation of any sort shall be laid unless the 

Engineer-in-charge approves/passes the depth of excavation to lay foundation 

and record the dimensions and elevations and types soils of the foundation pit, 

trench excavated. 




Charge. 

Pay Slopes : In lieu of shoring and strutting pay slopes for excavation may be 

stipulated according to which excavation has to be carried out and shall be 

paid. 

3.6 Disposal of Excavated Material : The boulders obtained during the excavation 

shall be broken into the rubble of size of about 225 mm. This rubble shall be 

stacked in measurable hips and at locations, as directed, within the initial lead 

of 50 m from the edges of excavation as directed. The rubble shall be disposed 

off by the contractor at his cost if it is not usable as certified by the Engineer-incharge. 






provide bypass arrangements to avoid entering of water in the excavation at his 

own cost. The drained water shall be properly disposed off, so as not to cause 

any damages to the excavated area nor to the surrounding structures. The 






Engineer-in-charge and the foundation raft and masonry/structure there on or 

the pipeline is laid, all the shoring shall have to be removed. The backfilling of 



207 

the pit or trench to the original level or as shown in the drawing or as directed 

shall be made from the selected excavated material stacked separately for that 












3.11 Item to Include : As per Item No.Gen/A/1.11, but for soft rock classified 

material. The lift for excavation upto 1.5 m is covered by this item. The item 

also include breaking boulders into rubble of 225 mm and stacking within lead 

of 50 m. 







and paid at the rate as per the contract agreement. Deductions for voids shall 

be made @ 40% if quantity paid on stack measurements. The size of stacks shall 

be 3.0 m X 2.0 m X 1.0 m size preferably. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.4: 

Excavation for trenches, pits for pipe lines, foundations, column footings, 

drainage lines etc in hard rock, manjarya rock & laterite by chiselling, wedging, 

line drilling etc. including trimming and levelling the bed, including all lift & 

leads, stacking as directed, de-watering back filling in layers, watering ramming 

etc. as required or as directed by Engineer In Charge, all labour and materials 

complete. 

c) Hard Rock 

4.1 General: This item pertains to excavation in Hard rock of Laterite, Manjarya or 

of similar type without blasting. When local conditions prevent the use of 

blasting, excavation shall be done by chiselling, wedging or line drilling or as 

specified by the Engineer-in-Charge. 



208 

4.2 Site Preparation : Site preparation may not be required if the classified layer lies 

below the item of excavation in soils and soft rock classified as per Item 

No.Gen/A/1 and Gen/A/3 respectively. However if rock is exposed the same 

will have to be arranged as per Item No.Gen/A/1. 

4.3 Excavation : The contractor shall excavate the hard rock by chiselling, wedging 

or line drilling or as specified in the contract or as directed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge, as required and as and remove all the material from the excavated area 

by using labour, tools machinery and equipments most suitable for excavation 

of hard rock by chiseling wedging and line drilling, in wet or dry condition. 

The most suitable method to be adopted shall be got approved from the 

Engineer-in-charge. The contractor may be permitted to use expanding 

compounds like “Acconex” or equivalent in case he desires at no additional 

cost. Such use shall be permitted on case-to-case basis and shall be carried out 

as per manufacturers instructions. In special cases excavation may be carried 

out by using heating techniques. Contractors shall have to take all precautions 

regarding fire and other 

hazards. 

4.4 Foundation Preparation : In this classified strata, the foundation for column 

footing and for structural components such as wall may be provided. Also the 

foundations for rafts, embedment of pipelines for water supply or drainage or 

gas may be laid in this type of classified soft rock. The foundation shall be 

cleared of all loose material and shall be dressed by chiselling to the correct line 

and level. The contractor shall not excavate below the line shown in the 


Engineer-in- charge approves/passes the depth of excavation to lay foundation 

and record the dimensions and elevations and types soils of the foundation pit, 

trench excavated. 

4.5 Pay Slopes : Normally for excavation in hard rock pay slopes are not necessary. 

However in respect of deep foundation pay slopes may be stipulated according 

to which excavation shall be carried out and paid for. 

4.6 Disposal of Excavated Material : All the material obtained from clearing the site 

or from excavation shall be the absolute property of MIDC. All materials 



the Engineer-in-charge. Materials suitable for back-filling or other use shall be 



outer top edge to avoid the falling of the stuff in the pit or trench. Surplus 

materials shall be used for levelling the ground around as directed within a 

lead of 50 meters. 



209 






provide bypass arrangements to avoid entering of water in the excavation at his 

own cost. The drained water shall be properly disposed off, so as not to cause 

any damages to the excavated area nor to the surrounding structures. The 






Engineer-in-charge and the foundation raft after construction of 

masonry/structure or the pipeline is laid, all the shoring shall have to be 

removed. The backfilling of the pit or trench to the original level or as shown in 

the drawing or as directed shall be made from the selected excavated material 

stacked separately for that purpose. The material shall be laid in layers of 15 to 

20 cm in thickness, watered and then rammed properly. The backfilling shall 

only be done after receiving orders from the Engineer-in-charge and without 

damaging the foundation raft or the pipeline etc. 








4.11 Item to Include : Excavation of trenches in hard rock of laterite or Manjarya 

type classified material. The cost of drilling holes and use of expanding material 

or heating process, with all labour, material and tools and equipments and 

responsibility are included in the contract rate of this item. The lift for 

excavation upto 1.5 m is covered by this 

item. The additional lifts shall be paid under Item No.4 below. 







and paid at the rate as per the contract agreement. Deductions for voids shall be 



210 

made @ 40% if quantity paid on stack measurements. The size of stacks shall be 

3.0 m X 2.0 m X 1.0 m size preferably. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.5:- 

Providing and laying in position plain cement concrete using granite or black 

trap graded metal including mixing in a mechanically operated mixer, dewatering, 

compacting, curing as required complete for all lifts up to a + 5 M. above or below 

the ground level where concrete is proposed, including shuttering using ordinary 

Portland cement. 

b) In 1:3:6 proportion. 

C) In 1:2:4 porportion 

5.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying in position Plain Cement 

Concrete (PCC) of specified proportion. The work includes providing all 

material, mixing, compacting, curing, shuttering, dewatering etc. complete up 

to lift of ± 5 m. 

5.2 Material: 

1. Cement : Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) as specified at item Gen/C/0.2.1. 

2. Fine Aggregate (Sand) : specifications shall conform to item Gen/C/0.2.2. 

3. Coarse Aggregate : specifications shall conform to item Gen/C/0.2.3. Grading 

and maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as specified in the drawing. 

Normally the maximum size should not be more than 40 mm or 25 % of the 

minimum dimension of the member, whichever is less. 

4. Water : specifications shall conform to item Gen/C/0.2.4. 

5.3 Mix Proportion and Mixing : The mix proportion as specified on the drawing, 

separately for each component shall be provided. For detailed specifications 

refer to item No.Gen/C/0.5. For mixing without mechanical mixer, prior 

permission from the Engineer-in-charge shall be obtained. Specifications for 

mixing shall conform to item Gen/C/0.7. 

5.4 Formwork and Scaffolding : Formwork shall be provided for giving the 

desired shape and sizes for the PCC as per the drawings. The specifications 

shall conform to item Gen/C/0.19.7. The striping time also shall be as specified 

in the item. The scaffolding shall be normally provided of steel tubes. The 

specifications for scaffolding also shall conform to item Gen/C/0.19.8. 

5.5 Transportation, Placing and Compaction : Specifications shall conform to item 

Gen/C/0.8. 



211 

5.6 Field Tests : The appropriate field tests as directed by the Engineer-incharge 

shall be carried out as explained in item Gen/C/0.15. 

5.7 Inspection & Testing of Structure : As per the contract conditions inspection & 

testing of a structure shall be carried out in accordance with item Gen/C/0.16 

5.8 Finishing of Concrete : The finishing of concrete surface shall be as per item 

Gen/C/0.17. 

5.9 Special Features : Special requirements such as Architectural shapes/ finishes, 

Expansion joints, Construction joints, Water stops, grouting, etc. shall be 

provided as shown on drawing/s and as directed by Engineer in Charge. For 

specifications for these the appropriate clauses of item Gen/C/0 shall be 

referred. 

5.10 Curing : As per item Gen/C/0.5. 

5.11 Item to Include : This item for providing Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) with 

specified mix proportion at specified locations with initial lift of + 5 m above or 

below ground level includes all ingredients of concrete i.e. water, cement, fine 

and coarse aggregates, all transportation, dewatering, tools and plants, all taxes, 

royalties, labour, formwork, testing, curing etc. complete. 

5.12 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurements of the concrete laid 

shall be taken on volumetric basis in cum. The openings shall be deducted. 

The unit rate of concrete per cum of specified proportion includes all the 

items as explained in Gen/C/0.25. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.6:- 

Filling in plinths and floors with hard murum or sand brought by Contractor from 

his own borrow area in layers of 150 to 200 mm including watering compaction for 

all lift and leads complete. 

a) Filling with murum 

6.1 General : This item includes all the leads and lifts involved in the execution for 

the materials brought by the contractor from his own barrow area. The material of 

filling shall be murum or sand and shall be got approved from the Engineer-incharge 

before bringing it for filling. 

6.2 Material : The plinth filling material such as hard murum or sand shall be 

stacked separately as classified and approved by the Engineer in Charge. The 

stacked material shall be cleaned of all grass, vegetation and rubbish. The clods of 

murum shall be broken down to size below 50 mm. Black cotton soil shall never be 

used for filling in plinth and floor and such clods shall be removed. 



212 

6.3 Method of Work : The ground between the plinth walls shall be first cleaned of 

all grass, rubbish etc.. If directed by the Engineer-in-charge, near the sides of plinth 

walls special material such as specified graded murum or sand will have to be filled. 

The material shall be conveyed to the site and spread in 150 to 200 mm layers & shall 

be compacted with either manual or by mechanical means. Adequate watering shall 

be done to achieve required compaction. The procedure shall be repeated with each 

layer, till the required thoroughly compacted level is achieved. Care shall be taken 

not to damage the plinth constructions and footings below during the process of 

filling and compaction. Filling shall be carried out for structures etc. as per the 

direction of Engineer in Charge. This item includes a lift of 1.5 m from the ground 

level. 

6.4 Item to Include: Cleaning of ground in plinth, cleaning of the selected material 

for filling, breaking of clods to size below 50 mm, conveying and filling the same in 

the layers, watering and compaction, all labour and equipments, and materials 

specified, graded murum or sand be also used if directed by Engineer in Charge. 

6.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement of the volume actually 

filled by the contractor encased between plinth walls shall be measured in cum 

without any deduction for voids. The level of the ground at all four corners and at 

other locations if required for correctness, shall be recorded by the Engineer-incharge 

before starting the actual filling in plinths. Such measurements shall be 

recorded for each filling area separately. The average ground level shall be 

determined for each filling zone. The volume thus filled in and compacted as per the 

specifications above between the ground level and the top level shall be paid at the 

unit rate per cum as per the contract. 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item Noi. 7 :- Supplying and stacking at work site 225 mm size trap stone rubble for 

soling including all leads and all taxes and royalty. 

a) Quarry 

rubble 

7.1 General : The item provides the supply of stone rubble of 225 mm size and 

stacking at the road side including obtaining the rubble from approved sources, 

conveying to the site of work including all the lifts and leads upto 10 km. 

7.2 Material : Rubble shall be obtained from the approved quarries as specified 

below: 

7.2.1 Quarries : The contractor may obtain the rubble of the approved quality to the 

extent required for the work from approved and authorised quarries. He shall, 

however, obtain the necessary permissions from the competent authorities, pay 



213 

royalties and be liable to pay compensation for any damage caused to the quarries or 

the land or property either deliberately or through negligence or otherwise, or from 

waste of materials in obtaining the requisite quantity of rubble. Blasting, if required, 

shall be done with utmost care according to specification by obtaining necessary 

permission for blasting operation from the competent authorities and the contractor 

shall be fully responsible for all accidents and compensations resulting there for. 

The contractor shall make his own arrangement for to supply rubble of approved by 

the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all 

compensations to be paid as royalty, rents, octroi & duties or damages to properties 

and injuries to persons etc., caused in obtaining the rubble. No claim on account of 

any obstruction caused in collection of materials or difficulties or action arising out 

of quarrying in private land shall be entertained and MIDC will remain indemnified 

with regard to such action and payment. Quarrying shall be done only from sound 

portions of approved quarries, the disintegrated and weathered portions of rock 

being rejected. 

No rubble shall be obtained from within the road land unless so permitted in writing 

by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

7.2.2 Rubble : 

Quality : The rubble of the trap stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, 

clean, of close texture and free from unsound material, cracks, decay and 

weathering. The water absorption shall be as low as possible but not more than 2 per 

cent. They shall generally be broken rubble. 

Size : The shape of the stones shall be as regular as can be obtained by quarrying 

without attempt at shaping or dressing. They shall be sufficiently flat bedded. The 

stone shall be broken with the smallest dimensions equal to the 225 mm thickness of 

soiling. The length and breadth should not 

generally exceed twice its thickness. Before starting collection, the contractor shall 

get a sample conforming to the required quality shape and size approved from the 

Engineer-in-Charge who will preserve it in his site office for reference. 

7.3 Conveyance to Site : Materials shall be brought to site sufficiently in advance of 

construction. The contractor shall be responsible to see that vehicles used for 



214 

transporting materials do not drop any of the contents on the road and thus cause 

nuisance to traffic. The contractor shall also be responsible for any damage or 

accident arising out of any such material falling on the road or elsewhere and shall 

attend to all complaints in this regard. The Engineer-in-Charge may order the 

removal of such materials at the expenses of the contractor in case of negligence. 

Vehicles conveying or delivering materials shall not obstruct traffic. All lifts and 

leads upto 10 km is included in the rate for the item. 

Once the material is brought to site of work, the contractor shall be responsible for 

safety of the material. In case of theft and damages to the material is noticed, equal 

quantity shall be replaced as per the specifications without any extra claims and 

costs. 

7.4 Stacking : The rubble shall be stacked uniformly along the roadside or as 

directed in regular stacks of 6m X 3m X 1 m unless other sizes are ordered by the 

Engineer-in-Charge. The stacking shall be done only after the quality, shape and size 

of the rubble are approved. The stacks shall be made without appreciable hollows 

without making special efforts to hand-pack the material. The stacks shall be free of 

earth, rubbish, vegetation and shall conform size specified. One stack in each unit 

section may be of different length, if necessary, to make up the total quantity in that 

particular section. Low and wide stacks with outer retaining walls and the center 

filled in loosely shall not be permitted. The material shall be stacked entirely clear of 

the carriage way and as far a possible beyond the side widths and the side drains, on 

even ground or in the absence of such even ground the platforms prepared in 

advance for the purpose by the contractor at his cost. If no 

such land is available, the width of the stack may be reduced and the stacks may be 

laid on the side widths with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such stacks 

shall be protected from being 

disturbed. Necessary precautions to provide barricading, signs and signals shall 

invariably be taken, the contractor being responsible for any accident, injury and 

compensation due to his negligence in this respect. On hill roads material shall be 

stacked only at places on the side of the road as directed, without interfering 

drainage flow and traffic. 



215 

The Engineer-in-Charge may, if required, get the stacks coming in the way of or 

obstructing the traffic, removed at the cost of the contractor and the contractor shall 

not be entitled to claim any loss or damage to the materials on that account. The 

stacking operations shall be started at the point farthest from the quarry and carried 

towards the nearest point. The stacks shall not be laid at such places where they are 

likely to be damaged on account of the traffic, washing out by rains or floods or 

drainage, slides of the banks or the slopes of cutting. The contractor without extra 

claims shall make any loss on account of these or such other reasons good. 

As far as possible the rubble shall be stacked evenly on one side of the road only and 

in such quantities per unit length as will be required for that particular length or as 

ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

7.5 Special Points : The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining consent of 

owners of quarries and lands, payment of royalties, fees, rents, taxes, octroi & duties 

etc. compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in any way 

connected with the execution of this item and for loss of materials due to improper 

stacking etc. And shall make good the losses without extra claims. 

The contractor shall also responsible for the blasting operations required for 

obtaining the rubble. 

7.6 Item to Include : 

(1) Obtaining rubble of approved quality, shape and size by blasting if required and 

payment of royalties, fees, rents, octroi,duties etc. where necessary. 

(2) Conveying to roadside including all leads and lifts specified in the item. 

(3) Stacking. 

(4) All sorts of compensations involved in the execution of the item. 

(5) Opening up of new quarries or reopening old ones including removal of 

overburden. 

7.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be for one cubic 

meter of rubble supplied at site in stacks of approved size. When the rubble stacking 

in instructed in to be of uniform size, smallest stack may be chosen in the particular 

km or unit section and measured for its length, breadth and depth. The cubic 

contents of this stack shall be multiplied by the number of such stack in the km or 



216 

unit section to arrive at the quantity in the particular km or unit section. The 

Engineer may measure any other heaps also for verification. When the sizes of stacks 

are not uniform, each stack shall be measured individually. 

The dimensions shall be measured correct to two places of decimal of a meter and 

quantity worked out correct to two places of decimals of a cubic meter. If there is 

reason to believe that the stacks are very loose and are having unduly large hollows 

and or materials not satisfying the specifications, the stacks may be got opened and 

restacked properly after removing the inferior material by the Engineer-in-Charge at 

the cost of the contractor. The measurements of such a stack shall then be taken and 

if they are less than those of a normal heap, the quantity of the restacked stack shall 

be multiplied by the no. of stacks to arrive at the quantity in the particular unit or 

length. No deduction shall be made for voids. 

Rubble shall not be used until the full quantity is collected in km and measured. All 

stacks measured shall be marked with lime wash bands to distinguish them to avoid 

double measurement. 

If the material is found to be of inferior quality or of size not satisfying the 

requirements, the same may be rejected summarily. All labour, materials etc. 

required for measuring, restacking, checking, 

lime washing, etc., shall be at the cost of contractor.. 

Item No. 8 :- Laying in compact layer rubble duly hand packed for soling in 225 mm 

layer to required camber and gradient including filling in the interstices with stone 

chips, spalls and oversize metal (quantity excluding oversized metal). 

8.1 General : The item provides the labour work for laying rubble soling of 225 mm 

thickness of stones over the subgrade to proper section and hand packing the rubble 

chips to the required line, curve, grade and section. 

8.2 Material : The rubble to be used for soling work, shall be freshly quarried and 

supplied by the contractor or obtained from cutting. The spalls and chips as obtained 

while breaking the rubble shall be used of breaking oversize/size metal. 

8.3 Soling work : 

8.3.1 Laying Soling : Before commencement of soling work it should be ensured that 

sub grade, finished embankment/cutting is with specified camber and gradients. 



217 

The rubble shall be laid with the largest face downwards and interlocked with each 

other. The stones shall break joint. The full layer of the soling shall generally be 

made with one stone only. The junction of the old and the new road shall be 

diagonal in plan and the soling shall be in level with the corresponding course of the 

old road. 

The width of the soling shall be about 30 cm more than that of the road width as 

specified in the plans or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The thickness of soling 

shall be uniform camber should not be adjusted providing rubble of differential 

depths. 

8.3.2 Hand Packing : The soling shall be hand-packed by wedging and packing with 

oversize metal, chips, spalls in the joints of the soling and driving them by hammers 

in place to fill the 

voids. The soling shall be laid and hand packed true to camber grade and sections 

and these shall be often checked by boning rods, template boards and finish line etc. 

the grades, sections etc., of 

the soling shall correspond to those of surfacing coming on it. The soling shall be 

finished by knocking out projecting stones and filing depressions by chips to come 

up to the grade and camber. 

8.4 Item to Include : All labour, tools and equipment for conveying the rubble from 

stacks on the roadside and laying the soling to the required line, curve grade and 

section including clearing, sectioning, dressing grades and section and hand packing 

with oversize metal. 


meter of soling laid hand packed and finished of specified thickness. 

No deduction shall be made for voids. 

Item No.9:- Providing and laying in position Cement Concrete for RCC work 

using granite / black trap metal including mixing in mechanically operated mixers, 

compacting by mechanical or manual means as may be required and directed by 

Engineer-In-Charge, including steel or plywood shuttering, centring, formwork 

dewatering, for all elements in foundation, plinths, of building works, where 

reinforced cement concrete is proposed to be used upto +/-5 m from the average 

ground level including all labour and material complete, finishing the surface 

with 1:3 cement mortar. etc complete. 

f) In design mix concrete grade M-25. 



218 

9.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying in position Cement Concrete 

of specified proportion or by in design mix grade for Reinforced concrete works in 

foundation or plinth. The work includes providing all material, mixing, compacting, 

curing, shuttering, dewatering, etc. complete upto lift of ± 5 m. Providing the 

reinforcement steel shall be carried out by item No. Gen/C/0.2.5 

9.2 Material : As per item Gen/C/0.2. 

9.3 Mix Proportion and Mixing : As per item Gen/C/0.5. 

For providing Concrete of specified grade by designing the mix of concrete, please 

refer to specifications as per item Gen/C/0.4 and 0.5. The design mix shall be got 

done from the approved laboratories and got approved by the Engineer-in-charge. 

9.4 Formwork and Scaffolding : As per item Gen/C/0.19. 

9.5 Transportation, Placing and Compaction : Specifications shall conform to item 

Gen/C/0.8. 

9.6 Field Tests : The appropriate field tests as directed by the Engineer-incharge 

shall be carried out as explained in item Gen/C/0.15. 

9.7 Inspection & Testing of Structure : As per the contract conditions inspection & 

testing of a structure shall be carried out in accordance with item Gen/C/0.16 

9.8 Finishing of Concrete : The finishing of concrete surface shall be as per item 

Gen/C/0.17. 

9.9 Special Features : Special requirements such as Architectural shapes / finishes, 

Expansion joints, Construction joints, Water stops, grouting, etc. shall be provided as 

shown on drawing/s. For specifications for these the appropriate clauses of item 

Gen/C/0 shall be referred. 

9.10 Curing : As per item Gen/C/0.14. 

9.11 Item to Include : This item for providing Cement Concrete with specified mix 

proportion or specified grade, at specified locations with initial lift of ± 5 m above or 

below ground level includes all ingredients of concrete i.e. water, cement, fine and 

coarse aggregates, all transportation, dewatering, tools and plants, all taxes, loyalties, 

labour, formwork, testing, curing etc. complete. The provision of reinforcement steel 

is not included in this item. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurements of the concrete laid shall 

be taken on volumetric basis in cum. The openings shall be deducted. The unit rate 

of concrete per cum of specified 



219 

proportion includes all the items. For more details regarding mode of measurement 

and payment please 

refer item Gen/C/0.25. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No 10:- 

Providing and fixing in position reinforcement of all dia for RCC piles, pile 

caps, footings, foundations, slabs, columns, beams, canopies, staircase, 

newels, chajjas, lintels pardis, copings, fins, arches etc. as per detailed 

designs, drawings and schedules including cutting, bending, hooking the 

bars, binding with wires or tack welding and supporting as required at 

all locations and height all labour and materials and testing complete. 

c) TMT bars 

10.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing in position 

reinforcement of all dia for RCC piles, pile caps, footings, foundations, 

slabs, columns, beams, canopies, staircase, newels, chajjas, lintels pardis, 

copings, fins, arches etc.. 

10.2 Material: The reinforcement shall be of TMT bars as indicated on the 

drawings. The material shall conform to item Gen/C/0.2.5 of general 

specification of concrete 

10.3 Construction: Contractor shall provide the reinforcement bars of TMT steel 

of specified dia. at locations in numbers or at spacing, as per detailed 

designs, drawings and schedules including cutting, bending, hooking 

the bars, binding with wires or tack welding and supporting as required 

at all locations and height. The work shall be carried out as specified 

in Gen/C/0.2.5 of General Specifications of Concrete. The 

reinforcement shall be got checked by the Engineer-in-charge or his 

representative before concreting. The contractor shall provide and fix in 

position any additional reinforcement, if directed, in addition to the 

reinforcement shown on drawing. 

10.4 Item to Include : The item includes all the material of reinforcement bars, 

binding wires, welding rods and labour and tools and equipment for cutting, 

bending welding, testing charges etc. complete as per drawings and as 

directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 

10.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement of the 

reinforcement bars shall be taken in metric tons. The measurement shall be 

taken according to item C/0.25.2.of general specification of concrete. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



220 

Item No 11:- Providing Burnt Brick masonry with conventional type brick in 

cement mortar 1:3 in half brick (115 mm thick) including mild steel longitudinal 

reinforcement of 2 bars of 6 mm dia or hoop iron strip 100 mm x 1.6 mm at every 

third course properly bent and bonded at ends or R.C.C. M-15 band every 1 m 

height of 75 mm thickness with 8 mm dia 2 bars longitudinally and 8 mm 

distribution @ 150 mm c/c including scaffolding, raking out joints and curing etc. 

complete. 

11.1 General : The item pertains to providing II class Burnt Brick (BB) Masonry in 

specified proportion of Cement Mortar as per drawing / contract, in foundation 

and upto plinth level. The item covers bailing out water striking out joints on 

exposed faces, scaffolding, curing etc. 

11.2 Material : 

1. II-Class Burnt Bricks : Second Class Burnt bricks shall conform to the 

specifications as per Gen/D/0.2.2. Approval to samples of locally available bricks 

shall be taken from the Engineer-in-Charge and samples shall be preserved to 

compare with the supply to work site. 

2. The Sand or Fine Aggregate : The sand or fine aggregate for mortar shall be 

natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand. The specifications shall 

conform to item Gen/C/0.2.2. 

Test results of the grading of sand shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for 

approval. The decision in accepting the sand, which has deviation from 

specification, is left to the Engineer-in-Charge. 

3. Cement : Cement to be used shall conform to Specifications as per item 

Gen/C/0.2.1. 

4. Water : Water shall conform to Specifications as per item Gen/C/0.2.4 

11.3 Construction Procedure : 

1.3.1 Cement Mortar : Cement mortar shall meet the requirements of IS: 2250 and 

shall be prepared by mixing cement and sand by volume. Proportion of cement 

and sand shall be as specified or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge or as shown 

in drawings. The sand being used for mortar shall be sieved. The mortar shall be 

used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun to set and in any case 

within initial setting time of cement after water is added to the dry mixture. Mortar 

unused for more than initial setting time of cement, shall be rejected and removed 

from the site of work. 

Proportioning : The unit of measurement for cement shall be a bag of cement 

weighing 50 kgs and this shall be taken as 0.035 cubic metre. Sand shall be 

measured in boxes of suitable size on the basis of its dry volume. In case of damp 

sand, its quantity shall be increased suitably to allow for bulkage. 

Mixing : The mixing of mortar shall be done in mechanical mixer operated 

manually or by power. The Engineer-in-Charge may however, permit hand 

mixing, as a special case, taking into account the magnitude, nature and location of 

work. The Contractor shall take the prior permission of Engineer-in- Charge in 

writing, for using hand-mix, before the commencement of work. 



221 

Mixing in Mechanical Mixer : Cement and sand in specified proportions, by 

volume, shall be thoroughly mixed dry in a mixer. Water shall then be added 

gradually and wet mixing continued for at least one minute. Care shall be taken 

not to add more water than that which shall bring the mortar to the consistency of 

a stiff paste. Wet mix from the mixer shall be unloaded on watertight masonry 

platform, made adjacent to the mixer. Platform shall be at least 150mm above the 

leveled ground, to avoid contact of surrounding earth with the mix. Size of the 

platform shall be such that it shall extend at least 300mm around the loaded wet 

mix area. Wet mix, so, prepared shall be utilised within initial setting time [thirty 

(30) minutes for ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS:269] after addition of 

water. Mixer shall be cleaned with water each time before suspending the work. 

Hand Mixing : The measured quantity of sand shall be leveled on a clean 

watertight masonry platform and cement bags emptied on top. The cement and 

sand shall be thoroughly mixed dry by being turned over and over, backward and 

forward, several times till the mixture is of uniform colour. The quantity of dry mix 

that can be consumed within initial setting time of cement shall then be mixed with 

just sufficient quantity of water to bring the mortar to the consistency of stiff paste. 

11.3.2 Brick Work : 

Soaking of Bricks : Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period that is 

sufficient for the water to just penetrate the whole depth of bricks as well as to 

remove dirt, dust and sand. Proper soaking of bricks shall prevent the suction of 

water from the wet mortar as otherwise mortar will dry out soon and crumble 

before attaining any strength. The bricks shall not be too wet at the time of use as 

they are likely to slip on mortar bed and there will be difficulty in achieving the 

plumb line of wall as well as proper adhesion of bricks to mortar. The period of 

soaking shall be determined at site by field test by immersing the bricks in water 

for different periods and then breaking the bricks to find the extent of water 

penetration. The least period that corresponds to complete soaking, will be the one, 

to be allowed for in the construction work. The soaked bricks shall be removed 

form the tank, sufficient early, so that at the time of laying, they are skin dry. The 

soaked bricks shall be stacked over a clean place, on wooden planks or masonry 

platforms to avoid earth, dirt being smeared on them. 

Laying of Bricks : 

Brick Work (one or more brick thickness) : Brickwork (one or more brick 

thickness) shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. Half or cut 

bricks shall not be used except when needed to complete the bond. In no case the 

defective bricks shall be used. A layer of average thickness of 10 mm of cement 

mortar shall be spread on full width over a suitable length of lower course or the 

concrete surface. In order to check and achieve uniformity in masonry, the 

thickness of bed joints shall be such that four courses and three joints taken 

consecutively shall measure equal to four times the actual thickness of the brick 

plus 30 mm. Each brick with frog upward shall be properly bedded and set in 

position by gently tapping with handle of trowel or wooden mallet. Its inside faces 

shall be buttered with mortar before the next brick is laid and pressed against it. 

After completion of the course, all vertical joints shall be filled from top with 



222 

mortar. All brick course shall be taken up truly plumb; if battered, the batter is to 

be truly maintained. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and vertical joints 

shall be truly vertical. The level and verticality of work in walls shall be checked up 

at every 1- metre interval. The masonry walls of structures shall be carried up 

progressively, leaving no part one metre lower than the other. If this cannot be 

adhered to, the brick work shall be raked back according to bond (and not left 

toothed) at an angle not more than 45 degrees but raking back shall not start within 

60 centimetres of a corner. In all cases returns, buttresses, counter forts, pillars etc. 

shall be built up carefully course by course, and properly bonded with the main 

walls. The brickwork shall not be raised more than fourteen (14) courses per day. 

At the junction of any two walls, the bricks shall at each alternate course, be carried 

into each of the respective walls so as to thoroughly unite the work. The courses at 

the top of plinth and sills, at the top of the wall just below the soffit of the roof slab 

or roof beam and at the top of the parapet, shall be laid with bricks on edge. Brick 

on edge course shall be so arranged as to tightly fit under the soffit of the roof 

beam or roof slab, restricting the mortar layer thickness 

upto 12mm, however, any gap between the finished brick work and soffit or roof 

slab/beam shall be suitably sealed with the mortar. 

Brick Work (Half Brick Thickness) : For brick walls of half brick thickness, all 

courses shall be laid with stretchers. Wall shall be reinforced with 2 nos. - 6 mm 

diameter mild steel reinforcement bars, placed at every third course. The 

reinforcement bars shall be straightened and thoroughly cleaned. Half the mortar 

thickness for the bedding joint shall be laid first and mild steel reinforcement, one 

on each face of the wall, shall be embedded, keeping a side cover of 12 mm mortar. 

Subsequently, the other half of the mortar thickness shall be laid over the 

reinforcement covering if fully. The reinforcement bars shall be carried atleast 150 

mm into the adjoining walls or RCC columns. In case the adjoining wall being of 

half brick thickness, the length of bars shall be achieved by bending the bars in 

plan. At the junction of two walls, the brick shall, at each alternate course, be 

carried into each of the respective walls so as to thoroughly unite the work.The 

brick masonry work shall not be raised more than 14 courses per day. Brick course 

under the soffit of beam or slab, shall be laid by restricting the mortar thickness to 

12mm. However, any gap between the finished brickwork and soffit of slab/beam, 

shall be suitably sealed with the mortar. After every 1.0 m height of masonry C.C. 

M-15 grade band of 80 mm thick with 2 Nos. 6 mm M.S. Bars. 

Circular Brick Work : The detailed specification for brick work as above shall 

apply, in so far as these are applicable. Brick forming skewbacks, shall be dressed 

or cut so as to give proper radial bearing. Defects in dressing of bricks shall not be 

covered up by extravagant use of mortar, nor shall the use of chips etc, be 

permitted. The circular brickwork shall be carried up from both ends 

simultaneously and keyed in the centre. The bricks shall be flushed with mortar 

and well pressed into their position so as to squeeze out a part of their mortar and 

leave the joints thin and compact. All joints shall be full of mortar and thickness of 

joints shall be between 5 mm and 15 mm. 

Jointing : Joints shall be restricted to a width of 10mm with brickwork of any 

classification. All bed joints shall be normal to the pressure upon them i.e. 



223 

horizontal in vertical walls, redial in circular brick masonry and at right angles to 

the face in the battered retaining walls. The vertical joints in alternate courses shall 

be taken that all the joints are full of mortar, well flushed up. In case no pointing is 

to be done, cement mortar shall be neatly struck as the work proceeds. The joints in 

faces, which are to be plastered or pointed, shall be squarely raked out to a depth 

of 12mm while the mortar is still green. The rake joints shall be brushed to remove 

loose particles. After the day’s work, the faces of the brick shall be cleaned on the 

same day with wire brush and all mortar dropping removed. 

1.3.3 Bad Workmanship : If the workmanship of the brick work laid, or the 

strengths of mortar after testing found to be not of acceptable standard, the 

Engineer-in-charge shall ask the contractor to demolish the brickwork and redo the 

brickwork of good quality at the contractors cost. 

11.4 Curing : Green work shall be protected from rain or any other running water 

or accumulated water from any source, by suitable means. Masonry works, as it 

progresses, shall be kept thoroughly wet by sprinkling water at regular intervals, 

on all faces. Curing shall be done after 24 hours of completion of day’s work and 

shall be done for atleast 7 days after completion. Proper watering cans with spray 

nozzles, rubber or PVC pipes shall be used for this purpose. 

11.5 Testing : The testing of Bricks for its crushing strength, water absorption test 

etc. shall be carried out as specified in Gen/D/0.2. Tests for grading of sand / fine 

aggregate, bulkage etc shall be as specified at Gen/C/0 and Gen/C/0.2.2. Tests for 

cement shall be as specified at Gen/C/0.2.1. 

All the tests shall have to be carried out as directed and the cost of contractor. The 

test records shall be maintained and kept at site for inspection. 

11.6 Staging/Scaffolding : Staging/scaffolding shall be properly planned and 

designed by the Contractor. Use of only tubes is permitted for staging/scaffolding. 

Design of staging/scaffolding shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer-in- 

Charge, before commencement of work. Single scaffolding having one set of 

vertical support, shall be used and other end of the horizontal scaffolding member 

shall rest in a hole provided in the header course. The supports shall be sound and 

strongly clamped with the horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks 

shall be fixed. The holes left in the masonry works for supporting the scaffolding 

shall be filled and made good with plain cement concrete of grade 1:3:6 during 

plastering. Suitable access shall be provided to the working platform area. The 

scaffolding shall be strong enough to withstand all loads likely to come upon it and 

shall also meet all the requirements specified in IS : 2750. Double scaffolding shall 

be provided for pillars less than one metre in width or for the first class masonry or 

for a building having more than two storeys. The following measures shall also be 

considered during erection of the scaffolding/staging. 

a) Sufficient sills or underpinnings, in addition to base plates, shall be provided, 

particularly, where scaffoldings are erected on soft grounds. 

b) Adjustable bases to compensate for uneven ground shall be used. 



224 

c) Proper anchoring of the scaffolding/staging at reasonable intervals shall be 

provided in each direction with the main structure wherever available. 

d) Horizontal braces shall be provided to prevent the scaffolding from rocking. 

e) Diagonal braces shall be provided continuously from bottom to top between two 

adjacent rows of vertical supports. 

f) The scaffolding/staging shall be checked at every stage for plumb line. 

g) Wherever the scaffolding/staging is found to be out of plumb, it shall be 

dismantled and re-erected afresh. Effort shall not be made to bring it in line with a 

physical force. 

h) All clamps and couplings shall be properly tightened with nuts and bolts to 

avoid slippage. 

i) Erection work of a scaffolding/staging under no circumstances shall be left 

totally to semiskilled of skilled workmen and shall be carried out under the 

supervision of contractor’s technically qualified civil engineer. For smaller works 

or work in remote areas, wooden ballies or bamboos may be permitted for 

scaffolding/staging by the Engineer-in-Charge at his sole discretion. The contractor 

must ensure the safety and suitability of such works as described under clause 3.5.1 

11.7 Embedment of Fixtures : All fixtures, pipes, conduits, holdfasts of doors and 

windows etc. required to be built in walls, shall be embedded in plain cement 

concrete of grade 1:3:6 at the required position as the work proceeds. 

11.8 Item to Include : Item includes supply of accepted standard IInd class bricks, 

all other material viz. cement, sand or fine aggregate, water; all labour; scaffolding; 

tools and equipment; bailing out the water, mixing of mortar, laying of the 

brickwork as specified above etc.. The cost of testing, the machinery 

hire/depreciation charges, charges for scaffolding, curing etc. are deemed to be 

included in the item rate for the brick work. Item also includes providing openings, 

fixtures, preparing soffits for beams or other elements, racking of joints on outer 

surface etc. upto a lift of + 5 m. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement of brickwork will be on sq. 

meter basis of actual work done for ground floor. Deduction for openings shall be as 

per IS: 1200. 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 

Item N0.12:- 

Providing Laterite Stone masonry for below plints & above plinth including 

bailing out water striking out joints on exposed faces, curing, scaffolding etc. 

complete (not less than 18% of mortar to be used) 

a) 1:6 Cement Mortar. 

12.1 General : The item pertains to providing Laterite Stone masonry in foundation 

and plinth and stone masonry works shall comply with all requirements of IS : 1597- 

1992 with relevant clause. 



225 

12.2 Material : Laterite stone shall conform to Specification at Gen/E/0.1. 

12.3 Cement Mortar : Cement mortar of the specified proportion shall be prepared 

as per item Gen/E/0.2. 

12.4 Staging/Scaffolding : Normally for foundation and plinth work no staging and 

scaffolding required. However if required it shall be as per item Gen/E/0.3. 

12.5 Embedment of Fixtures : All fixtures, pipes, conduits, holdfasts of doors and 

windows etc. required to be built in walls, shall be embedded in plain cement 

concrete of grade 1:3:6 at the required position as the work proceeds. Embedments 

and fixtures as specified in the drawings shall be provided as per item Gen/E/0.4. 

12.6 Construction of Masonry : Construction of Laterite Stone masonry shall be as 

per item Gen/E/0.5.1. Stone dressing, laying, Hearting stones, bond stones, chips 

insertion, quoins, masonry joints etc shall also conform to the item Gen/E/0.5.1 

12.7 Curing : As per item Gen/E/0.6. 

12.8 Item to Include : The item includes providing all materials for masonry 

construction, including transportation, royalty for material, all labour, tools and 

plants, machinary and equipments, staging, scaffolding, bailing out water, curing 

and construction as per above specifications etc. complete. 

12.9 Mode of Measurement and Payment : As per item Gen/E/0.7 and shall be 

made on cubic meter basis on the volume of work done, to be measured as per IS : 

1200. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.13:- 

Providing plaster in cement mortar in 1:3 without neeru finishing to concrete 

or masonry surface in all position including scaffolding and curing complete. 

b) 12 mm thick single Coat 

c) 20 mm Thick Two Coats. 

13.1 General : The item pertains to providing Plaster in CM 1:3, without neeru 

finish to concrete or masonry surface. 


Cement : As per item Gen/C/0.2.1. of General specifications of Concrete 

Sand : As per item Gen/C/0.2.1 of General specifications of Concrete 

Neeru : Standard brand instant neeru or sanala may be used. 

Water : As per item Gen/C/0.2.4 of General specifications of Concrete 

13.3 Cement Mortar : Cement mortar shall meet the requirements of IS:2250 and 

shall be prepared by mixing cement and sand by volume. Proportion of 



226 

cement and sand shall be 1:3 (one part of cement and threee parts of 

sand) or as specified or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge or as shown in 

drawings. The sand being used for mortar shall be sieved. The mortar shall 

be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun to set and 

in any case within initial setting time of cement after water is added to 

the dry mixture. Mortar unused for more than initial setting times of 

cement, shall be rejected and removed from the site of work. 

13.4 Preparation of Surface : The joints in masonry shall be raked out properly. 

Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out properly. Efflorescence if any, 

shall be removed by brushing and scrapping. The surface shall then be 

thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is 

commenced. 

13.5 Scaffolding : The contractor shall provide scaffolding required for facility 

of construction. Quoted rates are deemed to included the cost of 

scaffolding as required. Scaffolding will be double or single as is 

warranted by the work. Scaffolding shall be erected with steel sections or 

pipes, bullies or bamboos of adequate strength so as to be safe for all 

construction operations. The contractor shall take all measures to ensure 

the safety of the work and working people. Any instruction of the Engineerincharge 

in this respect shall also be complied with. The contractor shall be 

entirely responsible for any damage to property or injury to persons 

resulting from ill erected scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or 

otherwise arising out of his default in his respect. Proper scaffolding shall 

be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work. Overhead 

work shall not be allowed. 

13.6 Application of Plaster : Before commencing the plastering the surface to the 

plastered shall be made wet sprinkling water. The patches of mortar, 

with thickness equivalent to thickness shall be provided on the area to be 

plastered. It shall be ensured that the surface all such patches is in true 

level/batter/plumb as the case may be; to achieve this the thickness of 

patches may vary marginally, but average thickness shall not be less than 

that specified. 

1. Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster. 

2. Plastering shall be started from the top and worked down towards 

the floor. All putlog holes shall be properly filled in advance of the 

plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. To ensure even 

thickness and a true surface, plaster about 15x15 cm shall be first 

applied, horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2 m intervals 

over the entire surface to serve as gauge. The surfaces of these gauged 

areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The 

mortar shall then be laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel. 

The mortar shall be applied in a uniform surface slightly more than 

the specified thickness and then brought to a true surface by 

working a wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges, with 

small upward and side ways movements at a time. Finally the surface 

shall be finished off true with trowel or wooden float according as a 



227 

smooth or a sandy granular texture is required. Excessive trawling or 

over working the float shall be avoided. During this process a solution 

of lime putty shall be applied on the surface to make the later 

workable. 

3. All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or 

horizontal as the case may be and shall be carefully finished. 

Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, provision of grooves at 

junction etc. where required shall be done without any extra 

payment. Such rounding, chamfering or grooving shall be carried out 

using proper templates or battens to the sizes required. 

4. When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, 

cut clean to line both horizontally and vertically. When 

recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be 

scrapped cleaned and wetted with lime putty before plaster is applied 

to the adjacent areas, to enable the two to properly joint together. 

Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the body of 

wall and not nearer than 15 cm to any corners or arises. It shall not be 

closed on the body of the features such as plasters, bands and 

cornices, nor at the corners of arises. Horizontal joints in plaster 

work shall not also occur on parapet tops and coping as these 

invariably lead to leakage. No portion of the surface should be left 

out initially to be patched up later on. 

5. The surface of the under coat on which the punning is to be done shall 

be left rough. The punning shall be applied, when the under coat is 

still green. The mortar for punning shall be applied in a uniform layer 

slightly more than 3 mm thick between gauged pads, with which to 

ensure an even and uniformly thick surface by frequent checking 

with a wooden straight edge. It shall be finished to an even and 

smooth surface with trowels. 

13.7 Finish : The plaster shall be finished to a true level and plumb surface and 

to the proper degree of smoothness as required. The work shall be 

tested frequently as the work proceeds with a true straight edge not less 

than 2.5 m long and with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and surfaces shall 

be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the work 

proceeds. 

13.8 Thickness : The thickness of the plaster specified shall be measured exclusive 

of the thickness of key i.e. grooves or open joints in brick work. The 

average thickness of plaster shall not be less than the specified thickness or 

12mm. The minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall not 

be less than specified thickness by more than 3 mm. The average 

thickness should be regulated at the time of plastering by keeping suitable 

thickness of the gauges. Extra thickness required in doubling behind 

rounding of corners at junction of wall or in plastering of masonry cornices 

etc. shall not be paid for. 

13.9 Curing : Curing shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster. The 

plaster shall be kept wet for a period of seven days. During this period, it 



228 

shall be suitably protected from all damages at the contractor’s expenses 

by such means as the Engineer-in-charge may approve. The dates on 

which the plastering is done shall be legibly marked on the various sections 

plastered so that curing for the specified period thereafter can be watched. 

13.10 Precautions : Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which 

sound hollow when tapped, or are found to be soft or otherwise defective 

shall be cut out in rectangular shape and replastered as directed by 

Engineer-in- charge. When ceiling plaster is done, it shall be finished to 

chamfered edge at an angle at its junction with a suitable tool when 

plaster is being done. Similarly when the wall plaster is being done, it shall 

be kept separate from the ceiling plaster by a thin straight groove not deeper 

than 6 mm drawn with any suitable method while the plaster is green. 

To prevent surface cracks appearing between junction of column/beams and 

walls 150 mm wide chicken wire mesh should be fixed with U nails 150 

mm c/c in one vertical plane should be carried out in one go. For 

providing and fixing chicken wire mesh with U nails, payment shall be 

made separately under relevant item. 

13.11 Item to Include : The item includes providing all materials for 

plastering, including transportation, royalty for material, all labour, tools 

and plants, machinery and equipments, staging, scaffolding, bailing out 

water, testing, curing and construction as per above specifications etc. 

complete. 

13.12 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The plaster area shall be measured in 

sqm as detailed below and shall be paid at the contract rate per sqm. 

Measurements : 

1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall 

be calculated in m2 correct to two places of decimal. 

2. Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. 

grooves, or open joints in brickwork. 

3. The measurement of wall plaster shall be taken between the walls or 

partitions (the dimensions before the plaster shall be taken) for the 

length and from the top of the floor of skirting to the ceiling for the 

height. Depth of covers or cornices if any shall be deducted. 

4. The following shall be measured separately from wall plaster. 

• Plaster bands 30 cm wide and under 

• Cornice beading and architrave’s or architrave’s moulded 

wholly in plaster. 

• Circular work not exceeding 6 m in radius 

5. Plaster over masonry pilasters will be measured and paid for as 

plaster only. 

6. A coefficient of 1.63 shall be adopted for the measurement of one side 

plastering on honeycomb work having 6 x 10cm opening. 



229 

7. Moulded cornices and coves 

• Length shall be measured at the centre of the girth. 

• Moulded cornices and curves shall be paid in m2 the area being 

arrived at by multiplying length by the girth. 

• Flat or weathered top to cornices when exceeding 15 cm in width 

shall not be included in the girth but measured with the general 

plaster work. 

• Cornices, which are curved in their length, shall be measured 

separately. 

8. Exterior plastering at a height greater than 10 m from average 

ground level shall be measured separately in each story height. Patch 

plastering (in repairs) shall be measured as plastering new work, 

where the patch exceed 2.5 m2 extra payment being made for preparing 

old wall, such as dismantling old plaster, raking out the joints and 

cleaning the surface. Where the patch does not exceed 2.5 m2 in area it 

shall be measured under the appropriate item under sub head ‘Repairs 

to Building’ 

9. Deductions in measurements for opening, etc. will be regulated as 

follows. 

No deduction will be made for openings or ends of joints, beams, posts, 

girders, steps etc. up to 2.0 m2 in area and no additions shall be made either 

for the jambs, soffits and sills of such openings. When plastered an one face 

when plaster is provided on both faces the area of opening shall be 

deducted from one side. In respect of large openings with area more 

than 2.0 Sqm. The deduction for opening shall be made and jambs will be 

paid. The above procedure will apply to both faces of wall. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.14:- 

Providing sand faced plaster (sponged external) in cement mortar 1:3 in all 

positions including base coat scaffolding, keeping the surface of base coat 

rough to receive sand faced treatment, curing etc. complete. 


14.1 General : The item pertains to providing Sand faced plaster in CM 1:3, to 

external surface or as directed. All the provisions of item No.7 are 

applicable except for providing sand facing as specified below. 

14.2 Sand Faced Plaster : Before commencing the plastering the surface to the 

plastered shall be made wet sprinkling water. The patches of mortar, 

with thickness equivalent to thickness shall be provided on the area 



230 

to be plastered. It shall be ensured that the surface all such patches is in 

true level/batter/plumb as the case may be; to achieve this the 

thickness of patches may vary marginally, but average thickness shall not be 

less than that specified. 

1. Base Coat : The base coat plaster shall be of cement mortar 1:3. Water 

proofing compound of approved make like Pudlo, Sika. Accorproof 

shall be added according to the maker’s instructions to make the 

mortar waterproof. The plaster with this mortar shall be laid as 

specified with thickness as specified. Keys shall be formed on the 

surface by thoroughly combing it with wavy horizontal lines about 

12 mm apart and about 3 mm deep when the mortar is still plastic. 

The base coat shall be cured for not less than two days. 

2. Sand Faced Plaster : The cement mortar for sand faced plaster shall 

have approved sand with slightly larger proportion of coarse 

material. The proportion of cement to sand shall be 1:3. The water is 

added gradually to make the mixture homogeneous. The thickness of 

finishing coat shall not exceed 8 mm. After application, the surface 

should be finished with a wooden float lined with sponge and trapped 

gently to retain a coarse surface texture. When the finishing coat has 

hardened, the surface shall be kept moist continuously for 5 days. 

14.3 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurements for sand faced 

plaster (sponged external) in C.M. (1:3) for finished area shall be measured in 

sq. meters and shall be paid at the contract rate per sq. meter. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 15:- 

Providing and laying Vitrified tiles in flooring (equivalent to Johnson, Peddar and 

Kajaria RAK etc.) conforming to relevant Standards, of approved colour including 

20 to 40 mm thick cement mortar bedding in 1:3 including cement float, filling the 

joints with matching colour, with pigments added to white cement slurry cleaning 

etc. complete. 

a) In white/Ivory colour with any pattern/design 

15.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying ceramic tiles of standard 

make such as Johnson, Peddar, Kajaria, RAK etc. 

15.2 Material : Vitrified tiles notic shall be of approved make and quality and shall 

conform to IS:777-1988 in all respect. Samples of tiles shall be got approved by 

the Engineer-in-Charge, who shall keep them in his office for verification and 

composition. White cement shall be of approved make. The samples of the tiles 



231 

shall be got tested from the approved laboratory as per provisions in IS:777- 

1988 by the contractor at his cost. The test results be submitted to the MIDC for 

record. 

15.3 Mortar Bedding : The mortar shall be of 1:3 proportion and shall be about 30 

mm thick average, laid on prepared sub-base of appropriate level and grade. 

The amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be the minimum 

necessary to give sufficient plasticity for laying. Care shall be taken in the 

preparation of the mortar to ensure that there are no hard lumps that would 

interfere with even bedding of the tiles. Before spreading the mortar bed, the 

base shall be cleaned of all dirt, scum or laitance and loose materials and then 

well wetted without forming any pools by the use of screed battens to proper 

level of slope. The thickness of the bedding shall not be less than 20 mm any 

one place. The tiles shall be laid on the bedding mortar when it is still plastic 

but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm cushion for the tiles. 

15.4 Fixing Tiles : The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 

hours. Tiles which, are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall be so arranged 

that the surface of the round edge tiles shall correspond to the skirting or dado. 

Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread over the bedding 

mortar just to cover so much area as can be tiled within half an hour. The edges 

of the tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry or coloured cement 

slurry matching colour of the tiles and fixed in this grout one after the other, 

each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is 

properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows 

in bed or joints. The joints shall be kept as close as possible and in straight lines. 

The joints between the tiles shall not exceed 1.5 mm wide. The joints shall be 

grouted with slurry of white cement. Where ceramic tiles are specified joint 

shall be grouted with a slurry of white cement mixed with appropriate colour. 

15.5 Curing : After fixing the tiles finally in an even plane, the flooring shall be 

covered with wet saw dust and allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days. 

15.6 Cleaning : After the tiles have been laid in a room or at the day's fixing work is 

completed, the surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall 

be cleaned off before it sets. Once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully 

washed clean and dried. When dry, the floor shall be covered with oil free dry 

saw dust which shall be removed only after completion of the construction 

work and just before the floor is occupied. 

15.7 Item to Include : The item shall include all labour, materials, cement mortar 1:3 

mortar bedding tools and equipment required for the operations to carry out 

the for providing and fixing the white or coloured glazed tiles as specified 

above 



232 

15.8 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The area of the flooring shall be 

measured in sqm correct up to 2 decimals. 

The contract rate shall be per sqm for the specified quality of Vitrified tiles as 

specified. 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.16:- 

Providing & fixing in position 18 mm thk. Flame Finish Granite in flooring 

set to pattern as per drawing in floor including average 20mm thick cement 

mortar 1:4 mix bedding, floated with neat cement slurry, filling the joints 

with matching colour pigment mixed with cement laid to perfect line & level 

& pattern. Rate shall be applicable to all levels & heights. The work to be 

complete as per drawings & directions. 

16.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying Flame Finish granite stone 

flooring confirming to IS:1237-1998. The design of the tiles shall be got 

approved from the Engineer in Charge. 

16.2 Material : These shall be granite stone of the colour and pattern as approved by 

the Engineer-in-charge. The sizes of granite slab shall be approved by the 

Engineer-in-Charge. The granite slab shall be of the colours to suit the design. A 

few specimen of the granite slab to be used as approved by the Engineer-in- 

Charge, shall be deposited by the contractor in the office of the Engineer-in- 

Charge for reference. 

16.3 Dressing of Slabs : The every granite stone shall be cut to the required size and 

shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the full depth so that a straight edge 

laid along the side of the granite stone shall be fully in contact with it. 

16.4 Laying for Floors : Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the granite slabs are 

to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the granite 

slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4: in approved floor pattern as given in the 

description of the item. 

The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the granite slab shall be 20 

mm and the thickness at any place under the granite slab shall be not less than 

20 mm. 

The granite slabs shall be laid in the following manner. 

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each granite slab, 

roughly to the thickness specified in the item. The granite slab shall be washed 

clean soaked in water for a period not less than 2 hrs. before laying. It shall be 

laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the 

adjoining granite slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the 

mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is 



233 

allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry with colour pigments matching to 

colour of granite of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the 

rate of 4.4kg of cement per m2. The edges of the granite slab already paved 

shall be buttered with gray or white cement with or without admixture of 

pigment to match the shade of the granite slabs as given in the description of 

the item. 

The granite slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and 

tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to 

the adjoining granite slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs 

shall be laid in the same manner. After each granite slab has been laid, surplus 

cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be 

cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid 

shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

Due care shall be taken to match the grains of slabs which shall be selected 

judiciously having uniform pattern of veins/streaks or as directed by the 

Engineer-in-charge. 

The granite slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the 

Engineer-in-charge. The granite slabs, which are fixed in the floor adjoining the 

wall, shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster skirting or dado. The 

junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without 

waviness. 

16.5 Granite Stone in Floors : Granite stone slabs and dressing of Slabs shall be as 

specified, except that the thickness of slabs shall be 18 mm. A tolerance of + 3 

mm shall be allowed, unless otherwise specified in the description of the item. 

Preparation of Surface : Where necessary, the wall surface shall be cut 

uniformly to the requisite depth so that the skirting face shall have the 

projection from the finished face of wall as shown in drawings or as required 


Laying : The Granite flooring shall be in gray or white cement admixed with or 

without pigment to match the shade of the stone, as specified in the description 

of the stone, and description of the item, with the line of the granite slab at such 

a distance from the wall that the average width of the gap shall be 12mm and at 

no place the width shall be less than 10mm, if necessary, the granite slabs shall 

be held in position by temporary MS hooks fixed into the wall at suitable 

intervals. 

16.6 Item to Include : Item includes all material, labour, tools and equipment for 

cutting, dressing laying of the Granite slabs for treads and risers of steps and 

for flooring etc. complete. 



234 

16.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be recorded in 

sqm correct up to 2 decimals. Granite stone flooring with different kind shall be 

measured separately and in square meter correct up to two decimal. Length 

and breadth shall be measured correct to a meter before laying skirting, dado or 

wall plaster. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 

0.20 square meters. Deductions for ends of dissimilar materials or other articles 

embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 square meter. 

Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different levels in the same 

room. Steps and treads of stairs paved with Granite stone slabs shall also be 

measured under the item of Granite Stone flooring unless otherwise specified. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.17:- 

Providing and laying ceramic tiles (equivalent to Bell Spartek, Johnson, Peddar 

and Kajaria etc.) conforming to IS:13712-1993, of approved colour including 20 mm 

thick cement mortar bedding in 1:3 including cement float, filling the joints with 

matching colour, with pigments added to white cement slurry cleaning etc. 

complete. 

a) Any size with approved design 

17.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying ceramic tiles of standard 

make such as Regency, Spartek, Johnson, Peddar, Kajaria etc. 

17.2 Material : Ceramic tiles shall be of approved make and quality and shall 

conform to IS:777-1988 in all respect. Samples of tiles shall be got approved by 

the Engineer-in-Charge, who shall keep them in his office for verification and 




record. 

17.3 Mortar Bedding : The mortar shall be of 1:3 proportion and shall be about 20 

mm thick average, laid on prepared sub-base of appropriate level and grade. 

The amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be the minimum 




base shall be cleaned of all dirt, scum or laitance and loose materials and then 

well wetted without forming any pools by the use of screed battens to proper 

level of slope. The thickness of the bedding shall not be less than 20 mm any 

one place. The tiles shall be laid on the bedding mortar when it is still plastic 

but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm cushion for the tiles. 

17.4 Fixing Tiles : The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 

hours. Tiles which, are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall be so arranged 



235 

that the surface of the round edge tiles shall correspond to the skirting or dado. 

Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread over the bedding 

mortar just to cover so much area as can be tiled within half an hour. The edges 

of the tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry or coloured cement 

slurry matching colour of the tiles and fixed in this grout one after the other, 

each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is 

properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows 

in bed or joints. The joints shall be kept as close as possible and in straight lines. 

The joints between the tiles shall not exceed 1.5 mm wide. The joints shall be 

grouted with slurry of white cement. Where ceramic tiles are specified joint 

shall be grouted with a slurry of white cement mixed with appropriate colour. 









17.7 Item to Include : The item shall include all labour, materials, cement mortar 1:3 

mortar bedding tools and equipment required for the operations to carry out 

the for providing and fixing the white or coloured glazed tiles as specified 

above. 

17.8Mode of Measurement and Payment : The area of the flooring shall be 

measured in sqm correct up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm for 

the specified quality of ceramic tiles as specified. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.18:- 

Providing and fixing Kottah stone flooring 20 mm thick using pre polished kottah 

stone, slabs of approved size, laying on 20 mm cement mortar bed 1:4, filling the 

joints with a mixture of cement slurry and pigments as required, curing, 

polishing, all labour & materials complete. 

Item No. 18 a. 

Providing and fixing machine cut, machine polished Granite stone for treads and 

risers of stairs, stones being 25 to 30 mm thick single piece including provision of 

3 grooves at the edge for treads, over 25 mm thick bedding of cement mortar 1:4 

including polishing etc. complete. 

Item No. 18 b. Add for moulding and edge polishing. 



236 

1 General : The item pertains to providing Kottah stone for treads and risers of 

stairs and also for flooring of specified thickness over specified thickness of CM 

bedding. 

2 Material : Kota Stone Slab : The slabs shall be of selected quality, in one piece 

of specified length and width as directed by Engineer in Charge, hard sound, 

dense and homogeneous in texture free form cracks, decay, weathering and 

flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness. They shall 

be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge. 

The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to 

site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. 

Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved 


3 Dressing : Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel 

dressed on the sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side 

of the stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides (edges) shall be table 

rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and 

edges of the slabs shall be true, corners at right angle and free from Chippings 

and the surface shall be true and plane. 

The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20 to 30 mm or as specified 

in the description of the item. Tolerance of + 2 mm shall be allowed for the 

thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of + 5 mm for 

hand cut slabs and + 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed. 

4 Preparation of Surface and Laying : The edges of the slabs to be jointed shall 

be buttered with gray cement, with admixture of pigment to match the shade of 

the slab. Before laying, the stone, flags shall be thoroughly wetted with clean 

water. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread on the 

mortar bed over as much area as could be covered with the slabs within half an 

hour. The specified type of stone flags shall be laid on the neat cement float and 

shall be evenly and firmly bedded to the required level and slope in the mortar 

bed. Each flag shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is firmly and 

properly bedded. There shall be no hollows left. If there is a hollow sound on 

gentle tapping of the slabs, such slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The 

mason shall make the joints of uniform thickness and in straight lines. The 

joints shall not be thick more than 1.5 mm for rough stone flooring and filled 

solidly with mortar for their full depth. The joints shall be struck smooth. But 

there shall be no smearing on mortar over the slabs. When pointing is to be 

done the joints shall be raked out for not less than the width of the joints when 

the mortar is green. The flags shall be laid so as to give continuous parallel long 

joints with cross joints at right angles to them. The edges of the adjoining slabs 

shall be in one plane. Where the slabs cover open edges, of floor or window sills 

the edges shall be neatly rounded off. This shall be included in the rate. 



237 

When diamond pattern paving is provided in the item, the slabs shall be square 

and laid to the diamond pattern with triangular shaped slabs to make up the 

edges. In plain pattern stones on each course shall break joint with those in the 

next. 

5 Polishing and Finishing : The specifications shall be as described, for polishing 

of except that (a) first polishing with coarse grade Carborundum stone shall not 

be done, (b) cement slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied on the 

surface before polishing. 

6 Item to Include : Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, 

tools and equipment for cutting, dressing laying and polishing of the kottah 

slabs for treads and risers of steps and for flooring etc. complete. 

7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be recorded in 

sqm up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm of kottah flooring or 

treads and risers laid for item No.10 & 11a. The contract rate shall be per Rmt. 

For item No.11b. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 19. 

Providing and laying pre polished granite flooring of 18 mm thickness, size and 

colour including cutting to the required size, laying jointing and grouting the 

joints with cement slurry of required colour made of white cement and colour on a 

bed of 1:4 cement mortar all labour & materials etc. complete. 

19.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying pre polished granite stone 

flooring confirming to IS:1237-1998. The design of the tiles shall be got 

approved from the Engineer in Charge. 

19.2 Material : These shall be granite stone of the colour and pattern as approved by 

the Engineer-in-charge. The sizes of granite slab shall be approved by the 

Engineer-in-Charge. The granite slab shall be of the colours to suit the design. A 

few specimen of the granite slab to be used as approved by the Engineer-in- 

Charge, shall be deposited by the contractor in the office of the Engineer-in- 

Charge for reference. 

19.3 Dressing of Slabs : The every granite stone shall be cut to the required size and 

shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the full depth so that a straight edge 

laid along the side of the granite stone shall be fully in contact with it. 

19.4 Laying for Floors : Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the granite slabs are 

to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the granite 



238 

slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4: in approved floor pattern as given in the 

description of the item. 

The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the granite slab shall be 20 

mm and the thickness at any place under the granite slab shall be not less than 

20 mm. 

The granite slabs shall be laid in the following manner. 

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each granite slab, 

roughly to the thickness specified in the item. The granite slab shall be washed 

clean soaked in water for a period not less than 2 hrs. before laying. It shall be 

laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the 

adjoining granite slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the 

mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is 

allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry with colour pigments matching to 

colour of granite of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the 

rate of 4.4kg of cement per m2. The edges of the granite slab already paved 

shall be buttered with gray or white cement with or without admixture of 

pigment to match the shade of the granite slabs as given in the description of 

the item. 

The granite slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and 

tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to 

the adjoining granite slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs 

shall be laid in the same manner. After each granite slab has been laid, surplus 

cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be 

cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid 

shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

Due care shall be taken to match the grains of slabs which shall be selected 

judiciously having uniform pattern of veins/streaks or as directed by the 


The granite slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the 

Engineer-in-charge. The granite slabs, which are fixed in the floor adjoining the 

wall, shall enter not less than 12 mm under the plaster skirting or dado. The 

junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without 

waviness. 

19.5 Granite Stone in Floors : Granite stone slabs and dressing of Slabs shall be as 

specified, except that the thickness of slabs shall be 18 mm. A tolerance of + 3 

mm shall be allowed, unless otherwise specified in the description of the item. 

Preparation of Surface : Where necessary, the wall surface shall be cut 

uniformly to the requisite depth so that the skirting face shall have the 

projection from the finished face of wall as shown in drawings or as required 




239 

Laying : The Granite flooring shall be in gray or white cement admixed with or 

without pigment to match the shade of the stone, as specified in the description 

of the stone, and description of the item, with the line of the granite slab at such 

a distance from the wall that the average width of the gap shall be 12mm and at 

no place the width shall be less than 10mm, if necessary, the granite slabs shall 

be held in position by temporary MS hooks fixed into the wall at suitable 

intervals. 

19.6 Item to Include : Item includes all material, labour, tools and equipment for 

cutting, dressing laying of the Granite slabs for treads and risers of steps and 

for flooring etc. complete. 

19.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be recorded in 

sqm correct up to 2 decimals. Granite stone flooring with different kind shall be 

measured separately and in square meter correct to two places of decimal. 

Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a meter before laying skirting, 

dado or wall plaster. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not 

exceeding 0.20 square meters. Deductions for ends of dissimilar materials or 

other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 square 

meter. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different levels in the 

same room. Steps and treads of stairs paved with Granite stone slabs shall also 

be measured under the item of Granite Stone flooring unless otherwise 

specified. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 20 a. 

Providing and fixing machine cut, machine polished Granite stone for treads and 

risers of stairs, stones being 25 to 30 mm thick single piece including provision of 

3 grooves at the edge for treads, over 25 mm thick bedding of cement mortar 1:4 

including polishing etc. complete. 

Item No. 20 b. Add for moulding and edge polishing. 

1 General : The item pertains to providing Kottah stone for treads and risers of 

stairs and also for flooring of specified thickness over specified thickness of CM 

bedding. 

2 Material : Kota Stone Slab : The slabs shall be of selected quality, in one piece 

of specified length and width as directed by Engineer in Charge, hard sound, 

dense and homogeneous in texture free form cracks, decay, weathering and 

flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness. They shall 

be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge. 

The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to 

site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. 



240 

Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved 


3 Dressing : Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel 

dressed on the sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side 

of the stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides (edges) shall be table 

rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and 

edges of the slabs shall be true, corners at right angle and free from Chippings 

and the surface shall be true and plane. 

The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20 to 30 mm or as specified 

in the description of the item. Tolerance of + 2 mm shall be allowed for the 

thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of + 5 mm for 

hand cut slabs and + 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed. 

4 Preparation of Surface and Laying : The edges of the slabs to be jointed shall 

be buttered with gray cement, with admixture of pigment to match the shade of 

the slab. Before laying, the stone, flags shall be thoroughly wetted with clean 

water. Neat cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread on the 

mortar bed over as much area as could be covered with the slabs within half an 

hour. The specified type of stone flags shall be laid on the neat cement float and 

shall be evenly and firmly bedded to the required level and slope in the mortar 

bed. Each flag shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is firmly and 

properly bedded. There shall be no hollows left. If there is a hollow sound on 

gentle tapping of the slabs, such slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The 

mason shall make the joints of uniform thickness and in straight lines. The 

joints shall not be thick more than 1.5 mm for rough stone flooring and filled 

solidly with mortar for their full depth. The joints shall be struck smooth. But 

there shall be no smearing on mortar over the slabs. When pointing is to be 

done the joints shall be raked out for not less than the width of the joints when 

the mortar is green. The flags shall be laid so as to give continuous parallel long 

joints with cross joints at right angles to them. The edges of the adjoining slabs 

shall be in one plane. Where the slabs cover open edges, of floor or window sills 

the edges shall be neatly rounded off. This shall be included in the rate. 

When diamond pattern paving is provided in the item, the slabs shall be square 

and laid to the diamond pattern with triangular shaped slabs to make up the 

edges. In plain pattern stones on each course shall break joint with those in the 

next. 

5 Polishing and Finishing : The specifications shall be as described, for polishing 

of except that (a) first polishing with coarse grade Carborundum stone shall not 

be done, (b) cement slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied on the 

surface before polishing. 



241 

6 Item to Include : Item includes all material, bedding cement mortar 1:4, labour, 

tools and equipment for cutting, dressing laying and polishing of the kottah 

slabs for treads and risers of steps and for flooring etc. complete. 

7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be recorded in 

sqm up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm of kottah flooring or 

treads and risers laid for item No.10 & 11a. The contract rate shall be per Rmt. 

For item No.11b. 

Item No.21:- 

Providing and laying white glazed tiles conforming to IS:777-1989 for flooring 

including 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 including neat cement float, filling joints 

with neat cement slurry, curing and cleaning complete (Indian make glaze tiles of 

standard make) 

c) 150 x 150 mm first quality colour tiles. 

For fixing the tiling in the skirting and dado. 

21.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying white/colour glazed tiles 

for flooring of specified size and quality. 

21.2 Material : White or colour glazed tiles including specials, if any, shall be of 

approved make and quality and shall conform to IS:777-1988 in all respects. 

Samples of tiles shall be got approved from the Engineer in- Charge, who shall 

keep them in his office for verification and composition. White or colour cement 

shall be of approved make. Thetiles shall tested as per IS:777-1988 from the 

approved Laboratory by the contractor at his cost and test reports be furnished 

the Engineer-in- Charge who will property record the same. 

21.3 Plastering to wall : Providing cement plaster 1:3, 20 mm thick or similar to 

providing of mortar bed in item Bd/A/8, i.e. providing plaster to walls is 

included in the item. 

21.4 Fixing of Tiles : Dado or skirting work shall be done only after fixing tiles on 

the floor. The white/coloured glazed tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 2 

hours before being used for skirting or dado work. Tiles shall be fixed when the 

cushioning mortar is still plastic and before it gets very stiff. The back of tiles 

shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the tile shall then be 

pressed in the mortar and gently tapped against the wall with a wooden mallet. 

The fixing shall be done from the bottom of wall upwards without any hollows 

in the bed or joints. Each tile shall be fixed as close as possible to the one 

adjoining. The tiles shall be joined with white cement slurry in respect of white 

tiles and coloured cement slurry matching the colour of the tiles in respect of 

coloured tiles. Any difference in the thickness of tiles shall be evened out in 

cushioning mortar to that all tile faces are in one vertical plane. The joints 



242 

between the tiles shall not exceed 1.5 mm in width and they shall be uniform. 

While fixing tiles in dado work care shall be taken, not to break joints vertically 

if the pattern of fixing tiles have not been specified. After fixing the dado, 

skirting etc., they shall be kept continuously wet for 7 days. If doors, windows 

or other openings are located within the dado area, the sills, jambs, angles etc., 

shall be provided with glazed tiles and appropriate specials according to the 

foregoing specification and such tiled area shall be measured net along with the 

dado. 









21.7 Item to Include : The item includes all material, labour, tools and equipments, 

for providing mortar cushioning, fixing of tiles, filling of joints, curing cleaning 

etc, complete. The item also include 20 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 plaster. 

21.8 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be the area of 

the dado or skirting provided in sqm correct up to 2 decimal. The tile area 

provided for jambs, sills etc. shall be measured, net along with the area of dado 

or skirting. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.22 : 

Providing and constructing 600 mm Wide Granite Pantry Platform by using 18 

mm thick (+/- 2 mm tolerance ) mirror polished granite stone at top to be laid on 

25mm thick cuddappah stone base, set in cement mortar 1:4, all exposed edges to 

be rounded and polished. Also providing vertical facia of granite as shown on 

drawing. Rate to include making opening for wash basin and pillar tap with all 

exposed edges polished . All joints shall be made water tight in perfect line, level 

& slope as desired including curing, polishing & cleaning all joints and floating 

in coloured cement mortar. Granite shall be of approved colour & shall be as per 

Architects approved lot. (Only plan area will be measured. Wastage due to 

dimensional difference, pattern, cutting sizes available will be to the contractors 

account). Rate to include all holes & openings required for fixtures and fittings. 

All as per drawing and instructions from Engineer in charge. SS Sink / Sink to be 

Paid Separately. 

The item shall be executed as per the item wording and as per the directions of 

Engineer In Charge 



243 

Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be on RM basis. The 

Contract rate shall be per RM of 600 mm Wide Granite Pantry Platform provided. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.23 : 

Providing and fixing in position & in stepped manner one side mirror polished 

machine cut Granite slab Jamblining for Door / Window frames of width upto 

100mm of 18mm thickness (+/- 2 mm tolerance) in cement mortar bedding (1:4) of 

required thickness. Joints, edges to be floated and finished on neat cement of the 

same colour as the slab. After setting, the slabs (if read) are to be machine 

polished at site to obtain perfect finish. All exposed edges to be rounded & 

polished. The rate to include all necessary chipping of brickwork / concrete so that 

the slab is 12mm projects from plaster / POP surface with rounding of edges, 

polishing etc. complete as shown on drawing & as per directions of Engineer In 

charge. Note: No payment will be made for overlapped portion of the jamb 

lining. 

23.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing in position & in stepped 

manner one side mirror polished machine cut granite slab 18mm thickness 

jamb lining for door / window frames of specified width in cement mortar 

bedding (1:4) of required thickness. All exposed edges to be rounded & 

polished as per drawings and as per best engineering practice or as per IS 

wherever they apply for and as per instructions of Engineer In charge and with 

necessary materials and labour costs etc. complete. 


a) Granite Slab 18mm thick (+/- 2 mm tolerance) 

b) Cement mortar bedding (1:4) 

c) Rounding & Polishing of edges 

23.3 Fixing : Providing and fixing in position & in stepped manner one side mirror 

polished machine cut granite slab 18mm thickness jamb lining for door / 

window frames of specified width in cement mortar bedding (1:4) of required 

thickness. Joints, edges to be floated and finished on neat cement of the same 

colour as the slab. After setting, the slabs (if reqd) are to be machine polished at 

site to obtain perfect finish. All exposed edges to be rounded & polished as per 

drawings and as per best engineering practice or as per IS wherever they apply 

for and as per instructions of Engineer In charge. 

23.4 Item to Include : The rate to include all necessary chipping of brickwork / 

concrete so that the slab is 12mm projects from plaster / POP surface with 

rounding of edges, polishing etc. complete as shown on drawing & as per 

directions of Engineer In charge. Note: No payment will be made for 

overlapped portion of the jamblining. 

23.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment: The Granite Jamblining is recorded 

separately for each item and measured in Rmt of exposed face. 

The contract rate shall be per Rmt for the specified quality of Granite Jamb 

lining as specified. 



244 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.24 

Providing and fixing Granite Skirting – 100mm wide as per approved patterns of 

approved colour and make, with the help of cement mortar of 1 : 3 proportionate 

(1 cement :3 sand) including floating & filling joints with white/coloured joint 

filling compound, curing etc. complete in all respects as per drawings and / or 

directions of Engineer In charge. 

For fixing the Granite tile in skirting and dado. 

24.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing the Granite tiles as 

specified in the item 18 in skirting & dado 

24.2 Material : Granite tiles including specials if any shall be of approved make and 

quality and shall conform to IS:777-1988 in all respect. Samples of tiles shall be 

got approved by the Engineer-in- Charge, who shall keep them in his office for 

verification and composition. White or coloured cement shall be of approved 

make. The samples of the tiles shall be tested as per provisions in the IS:777- 

1988 in the approved laboratory and test reports be furnished to MIDC for 

record. 

24.3 Plastering to Walls : Providing cement plaster 1:3, 20 mm thick or similar to 

providing of mortar bed in item 18, i.e. providing plaster to walls is included in 

the item. 

24.4 Fixing of Tiles : Dado or skirting work shall be done only after fixing tiles on 

the floor. The Granite tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours before 

being used for skirting or dado work. Tiles shall be fixed when the cushioning 

mortar is still plastic and before it gets very stiff. The back of tiles shall be 

covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the tile shall then be pressed 

in the mortar and gently tapped against the wall with a wooden mallet. The 

fixing shall be done from the bottom of wall upwards without any hollows in 

the bed or joints. Each tile shall be fixed as close as possible to the one 

adjoining. The tiles shall be joined with white cement slurry in respect of white 

tiles and coloured cement slurry matching the colour of the tiles in respect of 

coloured tiles. Any difference in the thickness of tiles shall be evened out in 

cushioning mortar to that all tile faces are in one vertical plane. The joints 

between the tiles shall not exceed 1.5 mm in width and they shall be uniform. 

While fixing tiles in dado work care shall be taken, not to break joints vertically 

if the pattern of fixing tiles have not been specified. After fixing the dado, 

skirting etc., they shall be kept continuously wet for 7 days. If doors, windows 

or other openings are located within the dado area, the sills, jambs, angles etc., 

shall be provided with Granite tiles and appropriate specials according to the 

foregoing specification and such tiled area shall be measured net along with the 

dado. All other provisions of item 18 are also applicable for this item 



245 

24.5 Item to Include : The item includes all material, labour, tools and equipments, 

for providing mortar cushioning, fixing of tiles, filling of joints, curing cleaning 

etc, complete. The item also includes 20 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 plaster. 

24.6 Mode of Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be the length of 

the dado or skirting provided in Rmt correct up to 2 decimal. The tile area 

provided for jambs, sills etc. shall be measured, net along with the area of dado 

or skirting. 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.25:- 

Providing and laying patented water proofing treatment for sanitary block using 

required thickness of brick bat and cement mortar 1:3 with proper levelling 

including mixing with cement mortar the patented water proofing material of 

approved manufacturer and finishing the surface including guarantee of 5 years 

for water tightness and effective function. 

25.1 General : This specification applies to patented waterproofing carried out as 

per specifications of leading waterproofing agencies like NINA Industries, 

Likproof India Water Proofing. Hindustan Water Proofing or such other 

agencies, which shall be qualified for water proofing work. 

25.2 Construction : Patented or proprietary waterproofing shall be used wherever 

directed for toilet portions where brickbat coba type of waterproofing is carried 

out. Waterproofing is provided with properly arranged brickbats with proper 

slope as directed. Brick bat coba in rich cement mortar 1:3 with such admixtures 

as may be provided by the agency carrying out the work. If treatment is 

proposed for sunken slab, the treatment shall be for full depth of sunken slab. 

The top surface shall be finished with Indian patent stone flooring. 

25.3 Testing : All areas where proprietary water proofing is provided, such terraces 

are tested by providing water to a height of 30 cms for a period of 1 week and 

observed for leakage and any leakage’s rectified by the specialist agency. 

Similarly toilet sunken portion is also tested by pounding water. 

25.4 Guarantee : Special agencies shall furnish a guarantee for their water proofing 

for a period of 5 years on stamp paper. 

25.5 Item to Include : The item includes all material, labour, tools and equipment, 

testing required to execute the work as per specifications. 

25.6 Mode of Measurement and Payment : This item shall be paid on sqm basis 

correct into 2 decimals. 

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



246 

Item No.26:- Providing and carrying out water proofing of toilets as per the 

following. 

a) Treatment to the over the side walls with water proofing plaster of thickness 25 

to 30 mm thick, Giving 5 years guarantee for water tightness The above work shall 

be carried out through approved agencies, etc. 

26.1 General : This water proofing treatment is required for basements, cellars, pits 

and under ground structures. 

26.2 Construction : 

1. The base and side walls are first receive water proofing of 25 to 30 mm thick rich 

as per item Gen/J/5. 

2. Above the water proofing mortar layer on base and sides rough Shahabad ladi 

of 30 mm thick in cement mortar with addition of water proofing compound is 

provided. Over the layer of Shahabad ladi, waterproofing plaster is provided. 

This item of work is like a box type waterproofing and includes Shahabad or 

rough kottah stone lining. 

3. The contractor has to provide 5 years guarantee for the waterproofing provided 

as per the specifications, on stamp paper of Rs.100/-. 

26.3 Testing : All areas where water proofing is provided, shall be tested by 

providing water to a height of 30 cms for a period of 1 week and observed for 

leakage and any leakage’s observed shall be rectified by the specialist agency. 

26.4 Item to Include : The item includes all material, labour, tools, testing and 

equipment required to execute the work as per specifications. 

26.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : This item shall be paid on sqm basis 

correct into 2 decimals. The dimension for measurement is for the surface 

which receives the treatment. Any Water Proofing admixture added to cement 

mortar shall be paid separately and shall be payable on Weight basis. 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.27:- 

Providing and fixing colour Manglore tiled roofing with class " AA" tiles 

including securing the last course of tiles near the eaves with steel flats of 40mm x 

3 mm and 1.22 mm wire, fixing 50 x 25mm horizontal teak wood battens, all iron 

work and oiling ahte battens and planing the underside of battens complete. 

(excluding ridge and hip tiles) 

27.1 General : 

The item shall be executed as per the wording of item & direction of Engineer 

In Charge 



247 

27.2 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, materials and equipment to 

provide and fix the & manglore tile roofing. The fixtures are included in the 

item. 

27.3 Mode of Measurement and Payment : 

The specified type of roofing shall be measured in sqm upto 2 decimals. The 

rate for manglore tile shall be per sqm. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No:-28 

Providing and fixing in position 12 mm thick Toughened Clear Glass single leaf 

Door by using various glass patch fittings to be fixed with necessary fittings on 

the ceiling duly finished without giving any load on the false ceiling by using 

necessary hardware what ever necessary and required numbers to complete the 

job in all respect. Rate including cost of door opening with approval hardware 

such as patch fitting lock, handle, Floor Spring of approved make. Contractor is 

advised to submit working drawing with details patch fitting, sizes of glass 

panels etc and take approvals of consultants before execution of works. complete 

as per detail drawing, as specified and as directed by Engineer In Charge. 

28.1 General : Providing and fixing in position Fully Glazed door made of patch 

fitting as per approved designs pattern. Glass 12mm thk with acid etching. All 

complete as per drawing, instructions & approval of Engineer in charge. 

28.2 Material : The floor spring boxes shall be conforming to IS 7197 and shall be of 

best quality available in the market. The swinging shall be of 1800. The spring 

box shall be capable of taking the door load. The floor spring box shall be got 

approved from the Engineer in Charge of the work before it is fixed. 

28.3 Fixing: The floor spring box shall be fixed at the location as shown on drawing 

or as directed. The pit in the floor, for fixing the box shall be cut exactly of the 

size of the box. The top of the box shall be true to the top of floor level. Any 

over cuts or damages to the floor shall be made good by the contractor at his 

own cost. The distance of the box from the wall shall be correct so that swinging 

of door is free. 

28.4 Item to Includes: The item includes all labour, materials and equipments to 

provide and fix the floor spring box for swinging type doors with all fixtures. 


The Door shall be measured out to out dimension in sqm. The dimensions shall 

be measured correct upto 1 Sqm. 

The contract rate shall be on square metre basis. 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



248 

Item No:-29:- 

Providing and fixing in position superior quality Flush Door made up of 40 mm 

thick approved flush door of approved size with solid core Boiling Water Proof 

(Marine) type hot pressed conforming to IS:2202 (Part I, II) 1999, 1.5 mm thick 

approved laminated on both in estimate 1.5mm thick laminate is taken approved 

beading,approved moulding including necessary hardware,approved 

adhesive,fittings & fixtures as specified, melamine polish to all exposed surfaces 

etc complete as per detailed drawing,as specified & as directed by Engineer In 

Charge. 

29.1 General: Providing and fixing superior quality Flush Door (Marine) type hot 

pressed conforming to IS:2202 (Part I, II) 1999 including finishing both sides 

with 1.5mm Thick Laminate on both faces etc. with 12 mm teak wood bedding 

all around, 12 mm thk moulding finished with 3 coats of melamine polish . 

Also, providing and fixing best quality superior Indian teak wood frame for 

doors including all moulding, rebating, jointing, hold fasts of MS flats of 

minimum size 

20 x 3 mm, having length of 225 mm for doors and finishing with 3 coats of 

Melamine polish as directed etc. complete. 

29.2 Material: The teak wood beading for fixing around the flush door shall be of 12 

mm thick and of the width flush to the flush door. 

Shutter: The solid core shutter shall be of the ply finish type of the exterior or 

interior grade as mentioned in the item or drawing. It shall confirm to the 

relevant specifications for the type and grade given in IS 2202/1999. 

Specifications for wooden Flush Door Shutters (solid core type). It shall be 

obtained from manufacturers from the approved list. The finished thickness of 

the shutter shall be as mentioned in the item. If decorative finish is specified 

from exterior or interior side or both sides the same shall be paid extra under 

relevant item incorporated in the tender concealed lock rail of teak wood shall 

be provided in shutter. Specific instructions be issued to the manufacturer 

while placing the order. 

Frame: - Providing and fixing best quality superior Indian teak wood frame for 


minimum size 20 x 3 mm, having length of 225 mm for doors and finishing 

with 3 coats of Melamine polish 

28.3 Finishing: The Flush Door shall be finished with 1.5 mm thick Lamionate on 

both faces as mentioned as specified or as directed. 

28.4 Item to Include: The item includes solid core shutter, Teak wood frame, all 

labour, materials and equipment to provide and fix the solid core flush doors 

and frame as specified. The fixtures shall be included in the item. 



249 

28.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment: 

The Door shall be measured out to out dimension of frame in sqm. The 

dimensions shall be measured correct upto 1 cm. 


---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No:-30:- 

Providing and fixing in position superior Flush Door made up of 40 mm thick 

approved flush door of approved size with solid core Boiling Water Proof 

(Marine) type hot pressed conforming to IS:2202 (Part I, II) 1999,3.4 mm thick 

approved vinner on both approved beading,approved moulding including 

necessary hardware,approved adhesive,fittings & fixtures as specified, melamine 

polish to all exposed surfaces etc complete as per detailed drawing,as specified & 

as directed by Engineer In Charge. 

30.1 General: Providing and fixing superior quality Flush Door (Marine) type hot 

pressed conforming to IS:2202 (Part I, II) 1999 including finishing both sides 

with 3 – 4 Thick Veneer on both faces etc. with 12 mm teak wood bedding all 

around, 12 mm thk moulding finished with 3 coats of melamine polish . Also, 

providing and fixing best quality superior Indian teak wood frame for doors 

including all moulding, rebating, jointing, hold fasts of MS flats of minimum 

size 

20 x 3 mm, having length of 225 mm for doors and finishing with 3 coats of 

Melamine polish as directed etc. complete. 

30.2 Material: The teak wood beading for fixing around the flush door shall be of 12 

mm thick and of the width flush to the flush door. 

Shutter: The solid core shutter shall be of the ply finish type of the exterior or 

interior grade as mentioned in the item or drawing. It shall confirm to the 

relevant specifications for the type and grade given in IS 2202/1999. 

Specifications for wooden Flush Door Shutters (solid core type). It shall be 

obtained from manufacturers from the approved list. The finished thickness of 

the shutter shall be as mentioned in the item. If decorative finish is specified 

from exterior or interior side or both sides the same shall be paid extra under 

relevant item incorporated in the tender concealed lock rail of teak wood shall 

be provided in shutter. Specific instructions be issued to the manufacturer 

while placing the order. 

Frame: - Providing and fixing best quality superior Indian teak wood frame for 


minimum size 20 x 3 mm, having length of 225 mm for doors and finishing 

with 3 coats of Melamine polish 



250 

30.3 Finishing: The Flush Door shall be finished with 1.5 mm thick approved 

laminated on both faces as mentioned as specified or as directed. The Frame 

Shall be finished with 3 coats of Melamine polish. 

30.4 Item to Include: The item includes solid core shutter, Teak wood frame, all 

labour, materials and equipment to provide and fix the solid core flush doors 

and frame as specified. The fixtures shall be included in the item. 


The Door shall be measured out to out dimension of frame in sqm. The 



---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No:-31 

Providing & Fixing folding sliding panel partition of approved make like Dorma / 

Haffle with the all glass look. Track roller position at the end of every second 

panel, without floor guide, with aluminium track rail, 72 x 75 mm, prepared for 

underbolting to aligned substructure by other. Folding panels with integrated face 

mounted security floor bolts engaging in recessed floor bushing which cannot be 

operated from the outside. Panel equipped with easy action plastics tyred track 

rollers and top brush seals. Two part glazing rail top and bottom, can be aligned 

with the panels hung using alternative side screw fixing etc complete as per 

direction of Engineer - in charge. 



In Charge 


provide and fix the & door. The fixtures are included in the item. 


The shutters shall be measured of the clear unrebated opening of the door in 

sqm. The dimensions shall be measured correct upto 1 cm. 

The contract rate shall be for one square metre. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.32:- 

Providing and fixing anodised (anodic film must not be less than 15 microns i.e. 

AC-15 as per IS, the anodising must be scaleted by keeping the anodised section 

in boiling de-anodised water for a period of one hour) aluminium sliding type 

windows conforming to IS: 1948, 1961 (all shutters sliding) with hollow bottom 

section and standard four track frame section all round (top, bottom and sides) 

with shutter frame made up of standard handle section standard interlocking 



251 

section and standard top and bottom section with 5 mm thick clear sheet glass 

with nylon guides, gliders glass fixing, PVC weather strips, PVC weep holes etc. 

complete with approved type of locking arrangement, handles and other fixtures 

including fixing, cleaning polishing the aluminium section with petrol and/ or 

other agents as specified by the manufacturers etc. complete. (The rate shall be 

inclusive of silicon sealant / neoprene gasket) 

a) Aluminium Section Used. 

b) 5 mm Glass Section Used. 

32.1 General: The item pertains to providing and fixing anodized aluminium sliding 

type windows. 

32.2 Material: 

Aluminium Alloy Extruded Sections : Aluminium alloy used in the 

manufacture of extruded window sections shall correspond to IS designation 

HE9-WP of IS:773 latest edition. Specification for wrought aluminium and 

aluminium alloys, bars, rods and sections (for general engineering purpose). 

Hollow aluminium alloy sections used shall conform to IS designation HE9-WP 

of IS:1285 latest edition. Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium 

alloys, extruded round tube and hollow sections(for general engineering 

purpose). 

Dimensions and weight per metre run of the extruded sections shall be as given 

in the standard or in the description of the item. 

Coupling Sections : Aluminium alloy coupling sections used shall conform to 

IS designation HV9-WP of IS:1285 latest edition. 

Glass Panes : Glass panes shall be 5 mm thick and weigh at least 12.5kg/m2 

and shall be free from flaws, specks, or bubbles. 

Screws : Screw threads of machine screws used in the manufacture of 

aluminium doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to the requirement of 

IS:1362 latest edition. Dimensions for screw threads for general purposes (dia 

range 0.25 to 39 mm). Other threads shall be permissible if agreed to between 

the purchaser and the vendor. 

32.3 Fabrication & Fixing : 

Frames : In the opening for the window aluminium rectangular tube frame 

with width equivalent with of 4 track aluminium section and depth 40 mm 

shall be fixed. The frame shall have true right angle corners with diagonals 

when checked shall be same. This frame shall be fixed in the opening for the 



252 

windows firmly using screws rawal plugs, with screws fixed not more than 300 

mm apart. 

Within this frame four track frames shall be fixed. It should be ensured that the 

corners are right angle. 

The sliding shutters shall be fabricated cut of the sections of stipulated size. It 

should ensured that all the four corners are at true right angle. 

The frame shall be dismantled. 

A rubber/PVC gasket of 5 mm with glass shall be fixed on all four sides of 

glazing. Such glass be fixed in the sliding shutter frame using glass. The PVC 

rollers shall be fixed to the shutter for smooth sliding. Top track members shall 

be removed four sliding shutters shall be placed one shutter in each track of top 

track and placed over bottom track. After ascertaining in each track one shutter 

is placed top track shall be fixed again to top frame with machine screws. 

The loading arrangements as stipulated at end shutters and tracks shall be fixed 

along with sliding locks to the each shutter. The arrangements handling sliding 

shutters as approved shall be fixed. 

32.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, materials and equipments to 

provide and fix the fully glazed anodised aluminium sliding type windows. It 

also includes, cleaning, polishing of the aluminium section and fixing of 

approved fixtures such as handles & locking arrangement etc. The fixtures are 

included in the item. 


a. The aluminium sections used shall be measured in kg upto 1 gram. The rate for 

aluminium section shall be per kg. The cleats for joining the member shall not 

be paid extra. 

b. The specified type of glass shall be measured in sqm upto 2 decimals. The rate 

for glass shall be per sqm. 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.33:- 

Providing and fixing best quality superior Indian teak wood frame for doors, 

windows and ventilators including all moulding, rebating, jointing, hold fasts of 

MS flats of minimum size 20 x 3 mm, having length of 225 mm for doors & 150 

mm for windows and finishing with 3 coats of French polish or one coat of primer 

and synthetic enamel paint in two coats as directed etc. complete. 



253 

33.1 General : The item pertains to supply of Indian Teak Wood, preparation of 

frame for doors, windows and ventilators as per the drawings and fixing the 

frame in position, with hold fast, polishing or painting as directed. 


Indian Teak Wood : The Teak wood shall be well seasoned wood. It shall be 

free from decay, knots rotten portion, termite or other insects, damaged 

portion. The wood section used for frame shall be used from the heart of the 

teak tree of matured growth. It shall be of uniform grains, substance, straight 

fibres and shall be free from cluster knots, flaws, bends, warp, or defect of any 

other kind. The Teak wood shall be of uniform colour and grains and well 

seasoned. Section of teak wood as be of such a size that after plaining the size of 

frame shall be as stipulated and shown on the drawing. 

33.3 Frame Making : The Teak wood section for preparing the frame for doors, 

window or ventilator shall be used as mentioned in the drawing or as directed 

maintaining true right angle. The material, workmanship, construction, 

finishing etc. shall conform to IS: 1003. The vertical and horizontal members of 

the frame shall be of uniform section. For doors and windows with or without 

ventilators, the vertical post of the frame shall extend beyond the top of the 

head for the ventilator portion. The horns shall be interlocked with the heads 

for about the full section. Normally now the all the joints of Teak Wood frame 

shall be tongue and groove type. The length of tongue and groove shall be 

equivalent to width of frame. Two holes shall be drilled at each tongue and 

groove joint in which small wooden pegess shall be driven to bring fixity to the 

joint. The nail or screws shall not be used in lieu of wooden pegs. No horizontal 

horns be provided with top and bottom members of frame but cut, since such 

horns oue to swelling develop cracks in the wall. The vertical and horizontal 

member of the frame abutting wall shall be provided with 6 mm x 6 mm groove 

on the faces right angle to wall to provide key with plaster provided on jam's. 

The faces of horizontal and vertical members of the frame abutting wall shall be 

provided with two coats of bitumen to arrest for the safely of the Teak Wood 

frame. The sections of vertical frame of doors to be embeded in the concrete 

shall be provided with 2 coats of bitumen for the safety of the Teak Wood 

frame. Teak wood sills are not provided for doors and hence the vertical posts 

shall be fixed in the concrete for floor for a depth not less than 100 mm till the 

frame is fixed in position, a wooden batten of section 40 mm x 15 mm shall be 

fixed temporarily at bottom to keep the vertical members in true alignment and 

position. Three MS hold fast each of 20 x 3 mm size and 225 mm in length shall 

be fixed on both sides of the frame with screw and shall not be nailed. All the 

joints shall be properly tight and the mouldings if used shall be fixed in 

position. 

33.4 Fixing : The frame shall be erected in position by tying the same and checked 

for plumb line from all directions. The frame shall be fixed in the wall as the 



254 

work progresses and the hold fast shall be embedded in the wall in C.C. M-15 

grade as it is being built. After finishing the construction of wall the frame shall 

be further fixed by plastering on both the sides of the frame. 

33.5 Finishing : The exposed portion of the frame shall be polished with three coats 

of French polish, after finishing the wood by emery paper. If directed the frame 

shall be painted with 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved colour and 

shade and of approved make, over one coat of wood primer. 

33.6 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, materials and tools and 

equipment for preparing the frame for doors, windows or ventilators as per 

above specifications. It also includes fixing of the frame in position and 

finishing the same with French polish or synthetic enamel paint as directed. The 

embedded portion shall be painted with coal tar paint in two coats wherever 

necessary or as directed. 

33.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement of the woodwork 

shall be in cum of teak wood used. The sectional measurement shall be correct 

upto ± 2 mm and the lengths shall be measured in m, correct upto 1 cm. The 

mouldings if used shall be measured considering the least dimensions of the 

rectangular section form, which the moulding or the rounding could be 

prepared. The dimensions shall be measured limited to as shown in the 

drawings or as directed. The contract rate shall be for the cum of the teak wood 

used for the frame including the cost of hold fast, screw fixing, finishing etc. 

complete as specified. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 34: 

Designing, fabricating, supplying, erection and fixinging Aluminium structural 

glazing with 20 microm integral colour & shade, fixing 6mm Azur/green Glass of 

shopt coating to Aluminium frame work. The frame work to comply all specified 

design requirements including wind pressure, thermal and seismic forces as per 

the relevent IS codes etc. with all necessary structural supports, hardware 

including all other accesorries in the glazing with all extrusion fittings, stainless 

steel, bolts, screws, all weather elements such as flashing, coping and sealing the 

joints with approved Dow corning sealents etc. to make the system completely 

water proof. It also includes smokes seals openabel sashed units etc. all as shown 

on drawing and specified. 

AND 

Item No. 35: 

Aluminum frame work as per item No.34, but 4mm thick Aluminium Composite 

Panels intead of 6mm Glass. ACP shall be from ACP shall be fixed with A 

specially drawn aluminium profile to take care of Thermal movement. Detail As 

per GWS/ACP/35 or eqivalent. All joints shall be sealed with wheather silicon 

DOW 789 and backer rods. 



255 

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 

The scope of works under this contract includes design, supply, installation, 

protection, guarantees, testing and maintenance upto the defects liability period 

Structural Glazing, Trellis, Canopy, Aluminium Cladding, Entrance Doors, 

Aluminium fins. 

The work under this section includes all labour, materials, equipment and 

services as required for the complete design, engineering, testing, fabrication, 

assembly, delivery, anchorage, installation, protection and waterproofing of the 

aluminium structural glazing system, cladding and aluminium fins etc. All in 

on the drawings or described in the specification provided that the same can be 

reasonably inferred accordance with the true intent and meaning of the 

specification and drawings taken together, regardless of the whether the same 

may or may not be particularly shown there from. Anchorage includes all 

primary and secondary anchor assemblies and supportive structural framing as 

required to secure aluminium structural glazing system, cladding and canopy 

to the building structure. 

The detailed scope of work is outlined hereunder: 

1. The aluminium structural glazing system, Trellis, canopy, Aluminium 

cladding, Entrance doors, Aluminium fins hereafter shall include but will 

not necessarily be limited to the following: 

a. Frames, vision panels, spandrels, doors and ventilators. 

b. Openable panels where indicated, inclusive of all accessories, fittings etc. 

c. Copings, soffit trimmers, and external metal cladding panels for both metal 

cladding and structural glazing system. 

d. Aluminium fins wherever indicated. 

e. All caulking, sealing and flashing including sealing at junctions with roof 

waterproofing and exterior wall, flashing at doorway, raised kerbs and in 

window surrounds. 

f. Sealant within and around the perimeter of all work under this section. 

g. Separators /EPDM and silicon gaskets and trims etc. 

h. All steel structural framing and beam supports, anchors and attachments 

as required for the complete installation of the whole system wherever 

specified. 



256 

i. Inserts in concrete, anchor fasteners etc. for the anchorage of all work under 

this section to the approval of structural consultants. 

j. Isolation of all dissimilar metal surfaces as well as moving surfaces similar or 

dissimilar. 

k. Fire-stops, Flashings, Sealing of all interfaces with buildings etc. 

l. Protection of work during storage and construction until handing over. 

m. Engineering proposals, drawings and data. 

n. Shop drawings, engineering data and structural calculations of all systems 

including framing, fasteners and cladding. 

o. Scheduling and monitoring of the work. 

p. All samples, mock-ups and test units. 

q. Coordination with work of Main civil Contractor and other agencies/subcontractors 

employed on site. 

r. All final exterior and interior cleaning of the aluminium structural glazing 

system, metal cladding, Entrance doors, Aluminium fins etc. 

s. Hoisting, staging, scaffolding and temporary services. 

t. Specified tests, inclusive of necessary reports. 

u. Maintenance manuals. 

v. Design and Performance guarantees. 

w. Periodic inspection, supervision, and advice by tenderer’s Principal as 

well as a back-up guarantee in an acceptable format by the Principal for 

the quality and performance of the system/installation. 

x. Construction monitoring for regular quality control and technical 

inspection to ensure the work conforms to the shop drawing details 

(including any modification made during testing) and acceptable 

standards of quality. 

1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS 

1.2.1 Materials and workmanship shall comply with but shall not be limited to the 

latest editions of the following standards as a minimum. 

ANSI Z97.1.84 Safety Glazing materials used in Buildings 

ASTM C 1036-90 Specification for float glass 

ASTM C 1048-90 Specification for Heat treated Float Glass 

ASTM E 774-88 Specification for sealed Insulating Glass 

Units 

ASTM C 1172-91 Specification for Laminated Architectural 

Glass 



257 

ASTM C 864-90 Specification for compression Seal Gaskets 

ASTM C 1115-89 Specification for Silicon Rubber Gaskets 

ASTM C 920-87 Specification for Sealants 

ASTM C 509-90 Specification for sealing material 

CPSC 16 CFR 

1201 

GTA Specification 

Specification for Safety Glass 

Specification for environment durability for 

heat strengthened Spandrel Glass with 

Applied opacifiers 

BSCP 118 Structural use of Aluminium 

In general the Contractor may follow any International Standards subject to his 

satisfying to the MIDC that these specifications are equivalent to latest 

specifications issued by ASTM. 

Copies of all codes proposed to be followed for design, materials, installation 

and testing shall be submitted to the MIDC within 2 weeks of issue of Works 

Order. 

1.2.2 Building Regulations 

Design of the aluminium structural glazing system shall comply with all 

Government codes and regulations. For wind design / seismic design, all 

calculations shall comply with the requirements of the relevant National 

Building Code and Indian Standards Code, unless specified otherwise. 

1.3 GUARANTEE 

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for and shall guarantee in an 

approved format proper design and performance of his installed systems for 

a period of 10 years from handing over of works. 

The design and installation shall be to the best international standards and 

shall specially take account of wind and seismic loads, Storms, air pollution, 

thermal stresses, building movements and alikes. 

In addition to above specific 10 years guarantee in approved formats shall be 

given for performance of glass, single glazed units, PVDF and sealants. All 

the Guarantees shall be submitted within 15 days after virtual completion of 

structural glazing works. 

1.4 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 

1.4.1 The Contractor’s responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to the 

following items: 

a) The Contractor shall provide and install all supplementary parts necessary to 

complete all items generally implied in the drawings and in the specifications 

though not specifically shown or mentioned. 



258 

This shall include the design and sizing of all sections and anchor assemblies to 

meet the performance and design requirements, furnishing and installation of 

all inserts, fasteners, clips, bracing and framework as required for the proper 

anchorage of the structural glazing system elements to the structure, unless 

otherwise noted or specified to be furnished/installed by another contractor. 

Alternate anchorage proposals shall be considered, if, in the opinion of the 

MIDC that the general design and intent of the drawings and specifications are 

maintained. The Contractor’s system therefore must perform satisfactorily as a 

whole. 

b) Design Responsibility: Drawings and specifications indicate the required basic 

dimension, profiles, and performance criteria. The Contractor shall have the 

option of modification and addition of details subject to MIDC’s approval and 

provided the visual concept and performance requirements are fulfilled. 

Proposed modifications shall be clearly shown on shop drawings as “Design 

Modifications” and acceptance of the same will not relieve the Contractor from 

sole responsibility for performance of the aluminium structural glazing system 

and cladding. The contractor shall be solely and fully responsible for proper 

design, installation and satisfactory performance. If the design is upgraded and 

revised due to structural requirement, Contractor shall be bound to that and 

nothing extra shall be paid for that. 

c) In-plant and job site inspection : The Contractor shall allow the MIDC or their 

authorized agent full access to plants, shops and assembly points to view and 

inspect the processes and methods employed in the fabrication, assembly and 

finishing of the aluminium structural glazing system and metal cladding for 

this project. 

MIDC will have the right to reject any and all aluminium structural glazing 

system and metal cladding components and assemblies during assembly and 

erection if the workmanship and intent are not in strict conformity with the 

approved shop drawings, structural calculations, documentation, certifications, 

samples and mock-up. 

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS 

1.5.1 Within one month upon award of contract, the contractor shall prepare shop 

drawings by necessary modifications to the preliminary drawing and two 

copies of all shop drawings shall be submitted to the MIDC for review and 

approval. The MIDC’s review of all shop drawings will be limited to their 

conformity to the design concept and specifications. MIDC’s approval of the 

shop drawings will not relieve the contractor from any of the responsibilities 

and requirements as stated in Contract Documents. No work shall be 

fabricated until the shop drawings and all other elated submissions, 

documentation, certifications, samples and the mock-up for that work have 



259 

been reviewed and approved by the MIDC. On approval the Contractor shall 

submit 4 copies of shop drawings to MIDC for release on site. 

1.5.2 Shop drawings shall incorporate scaled and dimensioned plans, elevations, 

sections and full size details for all work in this section. 

Shop drawings shall indicate the desired dimensional profiles and modules, 

function, design and performance standards and in general, delineate the scope 

of work. The contractor shall verify and co-ordinate these items with all 

applicable and/or related trades, contract drawings and specifications. Since 

the dimension and modular references shown on the drawings are for specific 

and/or typical detail, the shop drawings shall include a full complete layout of 

all modular and referenced dimensions for all the structural glazing, 

aluminium cladding, Entrance doors and aluminium fins and their related 

elements. All dimensions/modules, etc. shall be field checked as required. 

The full size details shall show and specify all metal sections, types of finishes; 

areas to be sealed and sealant materials; types of gaskets; direction and 

magnitude of thermal expansion; direction and magnitude of all applicable 

construction including fasteners and welds; all anchorage assemblies and 

components; the fabrication and erection tolerances for the work and applicable 

related works adjoining, attached to or in some way related to the work 

covered by these specifications. The location of all static and dynamic anchor 

assemblies, the direction of thermal and other applicable building movements, 

co-ordination with concrete works and the sequence of installation shall be 

designated on the applicable plans, elevations and/or sections. All details shall 

be subject to MIDC’s approval. 

1.5.3 Shop drawings shall indicate the desired profiles, dimensions, details of metal 

finish and in general delineate the scope of work. Profile adjustments in the 

interest of fabrications, erection, weather-ability or ability to satisfy the 

performance requirements may be made only with the written approval of the 

MIDC provided that the general design and intent of the drawings and 

specifications are maintained. 

1.5.4 Four copies plus soft copy of the same in CD each of all final approved shop 

drawings shall be submitted to MIDC. 

1.6 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS 

1.6.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent design engineer to design his systems 

and components. During the design stage, the Contractor shall interact actively 

with the Structural Consultants concerning all aspects of design and shall 

obtain all the information from them concerning the structure, probable 

deflections and other building movements etc. The Contractor shall take full 

account of all possible building movements as well as the movements of his 



260 

structural glazing and cladding systems in his design. The Contractor shall 

submit his detailed structural calculations for the systems and each of their 

typical and non-typical components within 6 weeks of Works Order and shall 

guarantee that his design will ensure the structural safety and integrity of the 

structural glazing, cladding and glass panels against all natural forces, 

superimposed loads, environment and consequent movements. The Contractor 

shall modify his design as required by the Structural Consultants to meet 

structural requirements. 

The Contractor shall obtain the MIDC’s approval to his design calculations and 

to the provisions made in his design for all the building movements at his own 

cost, and shall be responsible to the MIDC, for the correctness of the fixing and 

interaction of the structural glazing with the structure so as to ensure that all 

the movements envisaged between the structure and the structural glazing are 

fully taken care of. However, the Contractor alone shall be responsible for the 

workmanship of fabrication and installation and shall indemnify MIDC against 

all claims due to defects or non-performance during the specified 10 year 

Guarantee period. The provisions of this clause shall not in any way limit 

MIDC’s rights stated under other clauses of the Contract. 

1.6.2 The Grade of R.C.C. in the building structure is as specified in DESIGN DATA. 

The Contractor shall design anchorage / fasteners for this grade of concrete 

with adequate safety factor. 

1.6.3 The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of design calculations to MIDC after they are 

endorsed by the Structural Consultants for compatibility with R.C.C. and steel 

structure. 

1.7 DOCUMENTATION AND CERTIFICATION 

1.7.1 Glass and Glazing Documentation: The approved/short listed glass 

manufacturer (s) shall submit written certification for MIDC’s review and 

approval stating that all glass and glazing requirements as detailed and 

specified on the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved for use 

relative to their specific application and/or design parameters, compatibility to 

adjacent materials and in conformity with all requirements as detailed and 

specified in the Contract Documents. Certification shall further state that the 

proposed glass and glazing materials are most appropriately suited for the use 

or uses intended and recommended for the specific use or the selection of the 

glass and glazing materials including, but not limited dot, gaskets, setting 

blocks, sealant, the design and dimensional parameters of the glass pockets and 

the compatibility of materials. Test Certificate from approved laboratories for 

U-Values and shading factor claimed by the Manufacturer shall be submitted. 

1.7.2 Sealant Documentation: All sealant applications must be clearly designated on 

the applicable shop drawing details and referenced to a master sealant schedule 

specifying materials, special instructions and applications procedures. The 



261 

applicable sealant manufacturers shall submit in writing that all sealant 

requirements as detailed and specified on the shop drawings have been 

reviewed and approved for use relative to their specific application and/or 

design intent, compatibility to adjacent materials and in conformity with all the 

requirements as detailed and specified in the contract documents. The 

manufacturer’s certification shall specify the optimum life expectancy, in years, 

for the proposed sealant materials as detailed and specified on the shop 

drawings and/or master sealant schedule and shall further state that the 

proposed materials are most appropriately suited for the use or uses intended 

and recommended for the specific use or uses. 

1.7.3 Quality Control Documentation: In-plant and job site quality control 

procedures shall be documented in writing for MIDC’s review and approval to 

ensure the design integrity and performance of the as-built approval to ensure 

the design integrity and performance of the as-built product. Documentation 

shall include schedule, detail, isometric and/or schematic explanatory sketches 

cross-referenced to the shop drawings, data sheets, etc., all as required to 

intelligently witness and assess methods and materials; and to ensure that both 

the fabrication and installation are in accordance with the contract documents. 

MIDC shall be given free access to the plant to inspect fabrication procedures. 

a) The in-plant quality control procedures shall include but not necessarily be 

limited to the following items : 

1 Fabrication : Tolerances, Joinery, Sleeves, etc 

2 Finish 

Match 

: Approved finish and controls required for matching 

the exposed surfaces 

3 Assembly : Welds, fasteners, sealants, gaskets, separators, glazing 

etc. 

4 Protection : Handling, protection, shipping etc. 

b) The job site quality control procedures shall include, but not 

necessarily be limited to the following items : 

1 Anchorage : Lines, grades and related building tolerances 

2 Installation : Tolerances, finish match, joinery, sleeves, flashing, 

welds, fasteners, sealants, etc. 

3 Sealing : As recommended by the approved sealant 

manufacturers 

4 Protection 

& Cleaning 

: As recommended by the approved material 

manufacturers 



262 

1.8 SAMPLES & MANUALS 

1.8.1 Within 4 weeks of issue of Work Order, the following samples of actual job site 

materials together with detailed technical data / catalogues shall be submitted 

in duplicate, unless otherwise noted, and in the sizes noted, for MIDC’s review 

and approval. Any omission of an item or items which require the Contractor’s 

compliance with these documents does not relieve him from such 

responsibility. 

Aluminium sheet panel: Each type and thickness; 600 x 600 mm size of the 

specified thickness. 

Aluminium extrusions: One of each section: 300 mm long of specified thickness. 

Glass: Each type and kind, 300 x 300 mm size of specified thickness and 

including frame. 

Glazing gaskets, tapes, separators, glass setting blocks, etc : Each section or 

unit. 300mm long or unit. 

Fasteners and connecting devices: Each type and size. 

Finish samples: After approval of the final finish coating, the MIDC is to be 

provided with approved samples. 

Window and door ironmongery and accessories, as applicable. 

Flashings and finish samples. 

Samples submitted should also include assembly of various components 

forming a typical fixing detail complete with flat sheets, glazing, extrusion, 

fastener, sealants etc. 

1.8.2 Mock-up 

Before the fabrication and site installation is taken up and within 6 weeks of 

issue of Work Order, the Contractor shall put up a mock-up of his proposed 

structural glazing system at least 6.00 m high and 3 modules wide 

incorporating all types of in-fill panels, fire-stop, flashing, shadowbox, 

bracketary, hardware and fixtures. A mock-up of 4 panels of metal cladding 

shall also be put up. The mock-ups are essential for final approval of all 

material and installation details by the Engineer-In-Charge. 

The Contractor shall submit samples and catalogues of door/window furniture 

for approval, as applicable. 



263 

1.8.3 Maintenance Manual: 

Submit three copies each of detailed procedures for the periodic inspection, 

maintenance and cleaning of all the structural glazing, cladding, revolving 

doors, windows and louver elements, other finishes etc. 

1.9 WORK SCHEDULE 

1.9.1 Immediately on receiving Work Order the Contractor shall submit the final 

programmed work schedule for the completion of the whole of the works 

including submittals, approvals, fabrication, supply at site, installation & 

commissioning. The time schedule shall be acceptable to MIDC. 

1.9.2 The time schedule shall be prepared in consultation with MIDC to suit the 

overall project schedule and shall be updated from time to time to suit 

prevailing conditions and co-ordination with other works/activities at site. 

1.10 INSPECTION OF COMPONENTS 

1.10.1 The Contractor shall submit a schedule of material specification and 

procedure for inspection of the quality of components of the metal wall 

cladding/structural glazing during the fabrication in the plant. 

1.10.2 The Contractor shall submit bi-weekly reports on the results of the inspection 

of the components. 

1.10.3 The Contractor shall submit a description of the procedure of delivery, 

hoisting, storage, handling, fixing, scaffolding, temporary working stage or 

gondola, protection and cleaning. 

1.11 STORAGE, PROTECTION AND PROGRAMME 

1.11.1 The contractor shall submit a schedule on the procedure for inspection during 

installation so as to maintain quality control on the job site. 

1.11.2 The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the protection of 

the surface of the aluminium structural glazing & cladding members during 

delivery and erection with description as to when the protection can be 

removed. 

1.11.3 The Contractor shall submit weekly reports on the inspection of erection and 

installation as directed by the MIDC. 

1.11.4 Delivery and Storage of Materials: All materials delivered to site shall be 

stored in allocated spaces where the stored materials will not be exposed to 

rainwater, moisture or damage, and shall permit easy access to and handling of 

the materials. All materials shall be stored neatly and properly stacked. 



264 

a) Aluminium wall cladding/structural glazing units and/or their components 

shall be transported, handled and stored in a manner to preclude damage of 

any nature. 

b) Accessories & materials, required for erection at the site shall be delivered to 

the site in labelled containers by the manufacturer. 

c) Remove all units or components which are cracked, bent, chipped, scratched or 

otherwise unsuitable for installation and replace them promptly. 

1.12 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

All components, assemblies and completed work included in or pertinent to the 

work of this section shall conform to or exceed the following performance 

standards and comply with all applicable and governing building codes and 

regulations. 

1.12.1 Thermal Movement: Provide for noiseless contraction and expansion of 

component materials for an ambient temperature range of + 10 deg.C to 70 

deg.C and a material temperature range of 100 dec.C without buckling, opening 

of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects. 

Make allowance for vertical and horizontal expansion. For fabrication, 

assembly and erection, procedures shall take into account the ambient 

temperature range at the time of the respective operations. 

1.12.2 Building Movement and related Building Tolerance : The design and 

installation of the structural glazing system shall accommodate all inherent 

building movements and /or deflections and the fabrication and installation 

tolerances of all related work not involved in this section without the loss of, or 

any detrimental effect to, the performance requirements herein specified. The 

Contractor shall verify and coordinate all such movements and/or tolerances 

with the Structural Consultants and the MIDC before designing all the 

components of structural glazing and aluminium cladding so that movements 

and deflections in the structure do not affect the integrity and safety of 

structural glazing and aluminium cladding and vice versa. 

1.12.3 Thermal property : All insulation materials, fire-stops and smoke seals shall 

comply with the current requirements of the Chief Fire Officer, Mumbai Fire 

Brigade and other local authorities. 

1.12.4 Structural Properties 

a) The design parameters of aluminium structural glazing system and metal 

cladding and all related components shall comply with the requirements of 

all relevant codes, National Building code, I.S. 875 and Indian Standard 

Code IS: 456-2000. 



265 

b) No aluminium structural glazing system and cladding elements including 

sealants and sealed joints shall sustain permanent deformation or failure 

under loading equivalent to 1.5 times the design wind pressure herein 

specified. 

c) Deflections: The specified deflections must be reduced if they are in any 

way detrimental to the aluminium structural glazing and cladding elements 

and sealants. 

- the maximum deflection on design wind pressure shall 

not exceed 1/240 of height or 15mm whichever is lesser for mullions. 

- No vertical deflection shall exceed 1/300 of span of 

transom/sill/head members 

- Under 1.5 times design wind pressure there should be 

no permanent deflection of framing member exceeding 1/1000 of span 

length. 

- Maximum deflection of glass under design wind 

pressure at centre of any panel shall not exceed 15mm or as recommended 

by the manufacturer whichever is less. 

1.12.5 General 

a) All braces, supports and connections for the aluminium structural glazing 

and cladding shall be designed, provided and installed complete as 

required. 

b) The structural glazing shall be anchored to the R.C.C. floor through 

serrated S. S. Brackets. The contractor shall adjust anchor bolt locations to 

avoid cutting through any reinforcement bar, with the help of re-bar 

position detectors. 

c) Variations from schematic layouts indicated on the drawings may be 

permitted but only if a proposed revision does not, in MIDC’s opinion, 

deviate from the design intent, cause excessive stress in the structure, 

cause excessive deflection, inhibit thermal and building movement or 

conflict with other requirements. 

d) Member shapes and/or profiles if schematically shown on the Architect’s 

drawings are not necessarily the exact shapes required or best suited for 

the particular condition. Final shapes and locations shall be as designed by 

the contractor and are subject to the MIDC’s review and approval. 

e) The height from the finished floor level to the top of the window sill shall 

not be less than as shown in the drawing. 



266 

The horizontal or lateral load on such transom/railing (where not backed 

by an R.C.C. parapet) shall be designed in accordance with the following 

criteria i.e. a horizontal UDL at 90.74 KN/m run, UDL supplied to the 

infill of 1.0 KN/m2 and a point load applied to part of the infill at 0.5 KN. 

f) No holes shall be burned, filed or drilled in any structural steel members 

unless approved by the Structural Consultant in writing. 

g) The contractor shall provide detailed layouts, alignment jigs etc. for the 

proper and exact placement of all welded anchor studs, anchorage 

components, embedded anchor assemblies etc. 

h) All metal structural glazing and cladding elements and their applicable 

anchorage assemblies shall be designed to accommodate all thermal and 

buildings movements without any harmful effect to the structural glazing 

and metal cladding. 

i) No field forming, cutting and/or alterations of primary wall elements will 

be allowed. All framing members shall be shop fabricated and finish 

coated. No unfinished surfaces will be permitted on exposed surfaces. 

1.12.6 Concrete Tolerances. 

The contractor shall take into account tolerances in concrete and masonry 

surfaces to which the structural and glazing framework is fixed. 

1.12.7 Lightning Protection 

The whole of the structural glazing when having insufficient clearance from the 

lightning protection system shall be bonded as directly as possible to the 

lightning protection system. At each end of each continuous length of curtain 

wall, metal cladding or louvers, provision shall be made at top and bottom for 

bonding by the electrical contractor by the MIDC. The exact locations and 

details of the bonding points shall be determined by the MIDC. 

1.12.8 Fire-stop and Interface with building. 

Joints in the structural glazing system between successive floors shall have the 

required fire resistance of at least 2 hours and shall comply with requirements 

of C.F.O., Mumbai/Engineer-In-Charge. 

A fire-stop-cum-smoke seal shall be provided at each window-head level. In 

addition the Contractor shall provide aluminium flashing to approved design 

at the window sill level and on 2 sides of vision panels. 



267 

All interfaces with building structure, and other elements shall be 

sealed/flashed/provided with expandable gaskets to MIDC’s approval. 

1.12.9 Sound Control 

Provisions shall be made (e.g capping of all ends of mullions) to prevent sound 

transmission through the system. Provisions shall also be made to prevent 

metal to metal rubbing noise due to thermal changes and wind pressure. 

1.13 MATERIALS 

1.13.1 Materials and components used shall be of the best quality and suitable for the 

purpose to MIDC’s approval and shall have been tried and tested in 

environments similar to that of Mumbai. 

1.13.2 Aluminium panels shall be of a minimum thickness of 2 mm and of max. 3 

mm for solid stretch- levelled sheets, and 4 mm for insulated composite units. 

1.13.3 All materials shall be free from any defect that may impair the strength, 

functioning or appearance of the glazing and cladding system or adjacent 

construction. 

1.13.4 Testing by independent testing laboratories or review of data by the Engineer- 

In-charge shall not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility to verify for himself 

that the work conforms to the intent of the contract documents. 

1.5 METALS 

1.5.1 In general, metals shall comply with relevant Indian and International 

Standards. 

1.5.2 Aluminium Wall Cladding 

Aluminium Cladding – fabricated either from composite aluminium sheets or 

solid stretch-levelled sheets as specified- shall conform to specifications given 

under section “CLADDING”. 

The panels shall be acceptable to the Engineer-In-Charge. 

1.5.3 Fasteners: The type, size, alloy, quantity and spacing of all fasteners and/or 

anchorage devices shall be as required for the specified performance standards. 

a) Bolts, anchors and other fastening devices shall be approved types as required 

for the strength of the connections, shall be self-locking, unless otherwise noted, 

shall be suitable for the conditions encountered, and shall be torque tightened, 

where required, to achieve the maximum torque tension relationship in the 



268 

fasteners. Washers, nuts and all accessory items shall be of the same material as 

fasteners. 

b) Fastening devices between aluminium and aluminium shall be AISC type 302 

(18-8) stainless steel unless otherwise approved. 

c) Fastening devices between aluminium and dissimilar materials shall be 300 

series non-magnetic stainless steel unless otherwise approved. 

d) Exposed fasteners are subject to MIDC’s approval and shall be stainless steel. 

e) Self-locking fasteners shall be stainless steel with nylon inserts or patches. 

1.5.4 Extrusions : 

All aluminium extrusions shall conform to the system principals specification 

for tolerances which shall, in any case be better than INDIAN standards. Any 

section not conforming to the tolerances shall be rejected. 

In general aluminium alloy for extrusions shall be 6063 T5 as per ASTM B 221. 

However, the grade and tempering specifications shall be as recommended by 

the supplier for each application and shall be approved by the system principal. 

All aluminium sections shall be coated with PVDF as described in 

drawings/specifications/schedule of quantities. 

All surfaces abutting the parent sections and designed to receive sealants shall 

have adequate sealant contact and adhesion. They shall be finished to match 

parent sections. 

1.5.5 Aluminium Flashing 

Flashings concealed from view shall be made of approved shade anodised 

aluminium sheets 1.5 mm thick. Visible flashings (e.g on periphery of vision 

panels) shall be 2 mm thick aluminium sheets anodised in approved shade. 

1.5.6 Capping 

Top capping shall be made from 2 to 3 mm thk stretch-levelled aluminium 

sheets coated with PVDF in approved shade. 

1.5.7 Soffits and Suspended Ceiling System 

Soffits and suspended ceiling system if required shall be of similar metal of the 

aluminium wall cladding with a similar finish. Colour and shape shall be 

selected by the MIDC. 



269 

1.5.8 Fire-stops-cum-smoke seals 

Fire stops-cum-smoke seals shall be provided at successive floor levels and 

shall be two hour fire resistant. Insulation shall be 90-100 mm thk rockwool of 

60kg/m3 density or approved equivalent. 

Metal sections shall be in galvanised steel sections. All details shall be approved 

by the MIDC. 

1.5.9 Protection 

Materials used as permanent or temporary protection for metals shall conform 

with relevant Indian/International Standards. 

1.5.10 Brackets: 

Brackets shall be made from stainless steel sections 316 grade or approved 

extruded aluminium alloy sections. Slots in brackets shall be pre-drilled / 

punched and not flame-cut. The surface shall 

be serrated for additional grip. 

1.5.11 Hardware and Fittings: 

All hardware and fittings such as patch fittings, handles, locks, stay-arms, floor 

springs etc. for doors windows and openable panels shall be to the best 

International Standards. Hinges for openable panels shall be stainless steel 

friction hinges / stays selected for specified wind load and dead loads or 

specifically extruded in-build hinges. All fittings and locks shall be approved 

by MIDC. 

Each openable panel shall be provided with: 

a) 1 No. GIESSE or approved equivalent 4-point cremone locking set with 

die-cast handle turning 90deg. Painted in approved Ral colour and stainless 

steel fixing plate and screws. 

b) 2 nos. COTSWOLD or equivalent heavy-duty top hung stainless steel 

friction stays openable upto 15deg, with stainless steel screws. 

c) 1 no. 70 mm sided triangular 3M film or equivalent sign on outer glass 

surface, with 5 years performance guarantee, and with 40% perforations. 

1.15. SEALANTS & GASKETS : 

1.15.1 All sealant applications must be clearly designated on the applicable shop 

drawing details and reference to a master sealant schedule specifying materials, 

special instructions and application procedures. 



270 

1.15.2 The compatibility and sequence of installation for all sealants must be 

carefully considered in all proposals in order to ensure the required cure and 

optimum performance. Sealants must not degrade and/or fail under all design 

conditions including, but not limited to thermal movement, water, ultraviolet 

exposure and/or other adverse environmental conditions. The following 

sealant materials are specified for performance standards only. All proposals 

must be equal to or better than the materials herein specified. The designation 

of sealant types noted on the drawings is intended for general design guidance. 

Final selection by the contractor for the sealant types shall be based on their 

conformity with the Performance requirements herein specified and meet with 

the MIDC’s approval. Maximum precautions shall be taken to prevent failure of 

sealant. 

1.15.3 Structural sealant: Dow Corning Silicone sealant 98.3 or approved equivalent 

recommended by manufacturer. All exposed and concealed metal to metal 

(including tight or butt type metal to metal assembly prior to assembly), 

perimeter metal to concrete joints shall be silicone base sealant preferably 2 

component, in approved colour, conforming to the manufacturer’s 

recommendations for the specific uses and performance criteria. The 

manufacturer shall conduct laboratory test for adhesion for each lot of 

aluminium sections and glass. Laboratory reports shall be submitted to the 

Engineer-in-charge & the laboratory test shall be conducted in the presence of 

Engineer-in-charge / MIDC’s representative & testing schedule shall be 

informed in advance. In special and isolated cases, silicon sealant may be used 

with prior approval from MIDC. 

1.15.4 Weather Sealant : The grades of sealants for concealed metal to metal and 

metal to concrete joints such as embedment and lapping of flashing where 

elements are to be installed or embedded in a full bed sealant shall be the best 

recommended by the manufacturer for the application.(Dow Corning, GE or 

approved equivalent) 

1.15.5 Joint fillers and back-up materials shall be non-gaseous polyethylene foam, 

sponge neoprene as per the written recommendations from the applicable 

sealant manufacturer for each specific application. Shape, size, hardness, 

compatibility and bond breaking requirements are all factors to be considered. 

1.15.6 All sealants must be non-staining and compatible with adjoining sealants, 

back-up materials, substrate materials and their respective finished and/or 

applied colour coatings. 

1.15.7 Exposed assembly sealant will not be permitted at any wall area. 

1.15.8 All sealants shall be given 10 years Guarantee for materials, workmanship and 

performance from the date of completion of Contract. 



271 

1.15.9 Caulking compound : Dow Corning 790 or approved equivalent, colour to 

match adjacent material or approved by MIDC for use around frame or 

between frame and floor slab. 

1.15.10 GASKETS 

Gaskets and seals shall be extruded steam-cured EPDM of approved quality, 

compatible with substrates, finishes and other components they are in contact 

with. All gaskets exposed directly on the exterior face shall be silicon gaskets. 

Extruded EPDM sections shall have the following properties. 

Shore Hardness 

70 +/- 5A 

Tensile Strength 

Min. 70 Kg/cm 

Elongation 300% 

Ozone Resistance 

No crack at 50 +/- 5 pphm, test temp. of 

40 = 2deg.C, test duration of 96 hours and 

20% strain. 

EPDM spacer block shall have a Shore hardness of 80 or as recommended by 

supplier/system Principal. 

1.16 SEPARATORS 

1.16.1 Separators between steel and aluminium members and wherever required 

shall be of rigid type, high impact, smooth both side Teflon with a minimum 

thickness of 0.8 mm or other non-conducting material as approved by the 


1.17 GLASS 

1.17.1 All glass and glazing materials shall be verified and coordinated with the 

applicable performance requirements. 

Vision and Spandrel glass shall have characteristics close to those specified in 

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTS OF GLASS PANELS, subject to aesthetic 

requirements and specified relative heat gain, all to MIDC’s approval. Minor 

variations in the characteristics of glass shall be made, if required, without extra 

cost. 

Samples of glass shall be available in MIDC’s office. The contractor shall offer 

glass, which is nearest to the sample, in colour and tint subject to MIDC’s 

approval. 

1 .17.2 Furnish and install glass and glazing work as indicated on the drawings and a 

specified herein. All glass shall be cut to required sizes and ready for glazing. 

All glass shall be of accurate sizes with clear undamaged edges and surfaces 

which are not disfigured. Any pane which does not fit any section of the 



272 

structural glazing and shop front will be rejected and a replacement made at 

the Contractor’s expense. 

1.17.3 Glass shall conform to the quality, thickness and dimensional requirements 

specified in ASTM C & respective series of each type. 

1.17.4 Heat strengthened glass shall not deviate in surface flatness by more than 0.23 

mm within 260mm of leading or trailing edge, or 0.076 mm in centre. Direction 

of ripples shall be consistent and extent shall be acceptable to MIDC. Distortion 

of glass shall be controlled as much as possible during heat strengthening. Sag 

distortion shall be uni-directional as per MIDC’s option. Surface compression 

shall be in the range of 320-450 Kg/cm 2 

1.17.5 Permanent identification marking on glass shall be accomplished by a 

technique selected by the manufacturer. The location of the marking shall be 

proposed by the Manufacturer and approved by MIDC. All glass shall be 

delivered to site with the manufacturer’s label of identification attached. 

1.17.6 Submit for MIDC’s approval a complete list of materials to be used, including 

the sealants proposed and such samples as the MIDC may require. All glass 

and glazing methods and materials including the design and profile 

dimensions of glazing pockets shall be as approved and recommended in 

writing by the applicable glass and sealant manufacturers. A sealant-substrate 

test report shall be submitted for each type of sealant for adhesion and 

compatibility. 

1.17.7 Sealants in factory-glazed panels shall be fully cured prior to shipment to 

project site and installation. 

1.17.8 All glass breakage caused by the Contractor or his sub-contractor because of 

negligence or caused by the installation of faulty work by him shall be replaced 

by the Contractor at his own expense without delay to the project completion. 

1.17.9 The Contractor shall be responsible to deliver to the MIDC without charge 

replacement for any unit of glass and glazing that fails within the Guarantee 

period of ten (10) years from date of completion of Contract. 

1.17.10 The glass glazed panels/structural-glazing frames for the structural glazing 

system shall be designed to withstand lateral imposed loads and comply with 

requirements of local building codes. 

1.17.11 Glass thickness should be selected in accordance with AS 1288-1989 “Glass in 

Buildings Selection and Installation” to satisfy design performance 

requirements and local design codes. 

1.17.12 Glass shall be free from defects or impurities detrimental to its performance. 

Defects such as bubbles, waves, spots, scratches, spills, discoloration, visibly 

imperfect coating, chipping and bubbles or delaminating of opacifier film shall 

be limited in accordance with the Manufacturer’s /trade guidelines. The glass is 

to be produced in such a way that the rollers will be parallel to what will be 

horizontal position of the glass. Glass shall be consistent in colour. 



273 

1.17 .13 Manufacturers’ glazing instructions regarding installation, dimensional 

tolerance, bite and edge clearance etc. shall be followed. 

1.17.5 All solar control glass panels shall be stored with particular care and protected 

against abrasion, sun and moisture prior to installation. 

1.17.15 Precautions specified by glass manufacturers to minimize thermal stress 

must be followed. A thermal stress analysis shall be obtained from glass 

manufacturer prior to fabrication and their recommendations shall be followed. 

Allowance shall be made for thermal movements due to an air temperature 

range of 60deg.C and a material temperature range of 100 deg.C. 

1.17.16 Glass Panels shall be selected / rejected on the basis of product quality 

standards specified by the manufacturer concerning scratches, pinholes, 

clusters, distortion, colour variations, flaws in coating and other defects. 

1.17.17 Each type of glass shall be obtained from only one manufacturer and in one 

lot. Adequate spare quantity shall be ordered to cover for breakage and for 

replacement during maintenance period. 

1.17.18 Single glazed units shall be procured only from approved manufacturers. 

Quality control tests shall be performed for mixing, curing, adhesion, dewpoint 

and grammage for molecular seives and DELTA T. The spacers shall be of black 

colour. Capillary tubes shall be provided for pressure equilisation during 

transit. The units shall be guaranteed against condensation and dirt between 

the panes and failure of seal and damage to internal coating. 

1.17.19 Setting block for glass shall be extruded neoprene with minimum 80 

durometer hardness. 

1.17.20 Insulating Units 

Insulating units to be factory assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed 

to spacers forming hermetically sealed dehydrated airspace as per ASTM E 774 

Class A 

Sealing System : Dual seal 

Primary sealent : Polyisobutylene 

Secondary sealant : Silicone 

If the sealed insulating units are fabricated at an elevation significantly different 

from that of the project site provide temporary venting of internal airspace and 

subsequent sealing of vents. 

1.17.21 Laminating Units 

Laminate lites with urethane acrylate resin interlayer in autoclave with heat 

plus pressure. 

To comply with ASTM C 1172 

Interlayer material to be clear or as specified of no tendency to bubble discolour 

or loose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites. 

Laminated panels should be free of foreign substances, air or glass pockets. 



274 

1.17.22 Material Procurement : to be only from one manufacturer, for each type of 

glass panels and where match between vision and spandrel panels is required. 

Label each unit on spacer or pane. 

1.17.23 Glass analysis : 

• Glass analysis report showing the manufacturer’s wind pressure and thermal 

analysis for specified maximum deflections and specified probabilities of 

breakage to be submitted for approval. 

1.17.24 Glass submittals : 

• Product data : Submit manufacturers product data with characteristics and 

specific instructions and recommendations for maintenance procedures, 

handling and installation. 

• Samples of glass 300 x 300 

1.17.25 Glass certifications : 

• Manufacturer shall certify that glass thickness and heat treatment have been 

selected to provide required strength and thermal performance. 

• Sealant substrate test report shall be submitted for each sealant. 

• Insulating unit Warranty by the manufacturer to be submitted. 

1.17.26 Quality assurance : 

• Certified Safety Glazing from Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or 

approval equivalent 

• Insulating units to comply with ASTM E773 & E774 CLASS A with 

compliance certified by independent Certification program, Insulating Glass 

Certification Council (IGCC) level CBA or approved equivalent. 

• Comply with test requirements of 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z 97.1-1984 

• Certify laminated glass to comply with ASTM C 1172, float glass with 

ASTM1036, heat treated glass with ASTM C1048 

1.17.27 Guarantee 

Submit written guarantee from the manufacturer to correct failure in coating, 

insulating and lamination, which occur within the period of Guarantee after 

virtual completion. This is in addition to the Performance Guarantee to be given 

by the Contractor. 

1.17.28 Glass shall meet inspection and acceptance criteria as per ASTM C 1376 

1.17.29 All structurally glazed panes shall have their edges matt finished and not 

highly polished, to avoid internal reflection of light around the edges. Glass 

edges shall be protected against damage at all stages from all manufacture to 

handing over of works. Panes with damaged edges shall be rejected. 

1.17.30 Single glazed units shall be stacked vertically after manufacture. 

1.18 GLAZING COMPOUNDS : 

1.18.1 Provide documentation as per Item 7.1. All EPDM materials shall be extruded 

high quality ozone resistant, cured, elastomeric, virgin neoprene compounds 



275 

with durometer hardness, profiles and design parameters, lengths and locations 

all as required and recommended in writing by the applicable glass 

manufacturers. All EPDM glazing materials shall have smooth neat exposed 

surfaces, all flashings and burrs removed and in profiles, including integral 

locking projections to engage into the parent drawings. Furnish certified test 

reports to establish conformity with the specified standards. 

.18.2 Setting blocks used to support the dead load of the glass shall be extruded in a 

EPDM compound or silicone material conforming to the design criteria, all as 

recommended by the glass manufacturer. 

1.18.3 Jamb shims used to centre and station the glass shall be extruded in a EPDM 

compound or a silicone material conforming to the design criteria, all as 

recommended by the glass manufacturer. Recommendations and detail 

drawing describing the proposed design and installation procedure shall be 

submitted for MIDC’s review and approval. 

1.18.4 Fixed compression and roll-in glazing gaskets shall be extruded in a EPDM 

compound as recommended by the glass manufacturer. Gaskets for any one 

light shall be one piece with injection moulded corners free of all flashing and 

burrs. 

1.19METAL COATINGS 

1.19.1 Aluminium shall be satin anodized to minimum 25 microns as per approved 

colour. 

1.19.2 Metallic colour coatings to aluminium sections and cladding where specified 

shall be PVDF formulated and will consists of a conversion coat and a 3 coat 

system comprising an inhibitive primer, colour coat and clear anti abrasion top 

coat. The coating system shall meet or exceed all the requirements of AAMA 

2605-98. The total dry film thickness shall be minimum 35 microns. 

For solid colour coating a 2 coat system minimum 25 micron shall be used. 

1.19.3 After selection of colour by MIDC, the Contractor shall prepare two sets of 

two samples of each, which shall define the colour and gloss range and submit 

them for approval. 

1.19.4 All samples shall be identified and have a full laboratory report attached. 

1.19.5 The coating system, including materials and application shall conform to the 

requirements and recommendations of the paint manufacturer. 

1.19.6 Wherever the same colour finish is specified for solid and composite 

aluminium sheets, the Contractor shall ensure that the colour of both is 

matched as closely as possible to the MIDC’s satisfaction. 

1.19.7 Testing and Sampling Procedures : 



276 

In-process testing shall be performed on test specimens of equal metal thickness 

pretreated and finished along with the production metal. Specimen shall exhibit 

a test of at least 75 x 300 mm to permit instrument readings. In addition to 

running in-process tests to assure high quality production, additional finished 

extrusions or panels are to be submitted to the coating manufacturer’s 

laboratory for extended exposure testing. 

All test samples shall be properly identified with date, batch number and shift 

indicated. 

Performance Tests : 

The following tests shall be carried out. 

1. Colour uniformity 

2. Specular gloss 

3. Dry Film Hardness 

4. Film adhesion 

5. Impact resistance 

6. Abrasion resistance 

7. Acid resistance 

8. Mortar resistance 

9. Detergent resistance 

10. Window cleaner resistance 

11. Corrosion resistance 

12. Salt spray resistance 

13. Weathering 

14. Colour retention 

15. Chalking resistance 

16. Gloss retention 

17. Resistance to erosion. 

Performance results satisfying AA 2605-98 must be submitted for items 11 to 17 

above. Performance results of item 1 to 10 shall be submitted if required by 

MIDC. 

Field Touch-up and Repair : The contractor and coating manufacturer shall 

supply materials for air dry touch up for spray or brush application per 

instruction of manufacturer. Touch up shall be held to an absolute minimum to 

MIDC’s instruction. 

The manufacturer and the Contractor shall give a written guarantee 

warranting all work in connection with organic coating system to be free from 

defects in materials and workmanship for a period of Ten (10) years from date 

of completion and to correct promptly any defect free of cost. The following are 

considered as defects without being limited thereto: 

i.Peeling 

ii.Cracking 



277 

iii.Chalking shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D659- 

44 (1965) 

iv.Blistering 

v.Uniform Fading or colour change in excess of 5 NBS unit 

when calculated from measurement on a spectrophotometer 

or colour meter capable of colour measurement by 

reflectance reading in accordance with ASTM D244-68 

vi.Uniform glass retention in excess of 50% 

1.20 STRUCTURAL GLAZING AND METAL CLADDING SYSTEMS 

1.20.1 The method of assembly, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminium 

structural glazing/ metal cladding system, where indicated, is schematic. 

Locations and method of providing same shall be the Contractor’s responsibility, 

who shall design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suite each specified 

condition in an acceptable manner complying with the requirements specified 

hereinafter. 

1.20.2 Visible joints shall be shown as per Architect’s drawings & instructions. 

1.20.3 All parts shall be secured by concealed means wherever possible and where 

exposed to view, screw positions are to be indicated on the preliminary 

drawings. Exposed screws shall be of the countersunk type coloured in 

same finish as of aluminium or non magnetic stainless steel and shall be 

evenly and neatly located in the approved manner 

1.20.4 All components shall be assembled, secured anchored, reinforced, sealed 

and made weathertight in a manner not restricting thermal or wind 

movements of the structural glazing. Where possible, sealants shall be 

concealed. 

1.20.5 All fastening into or through aluminium shall be non-magnetic stainless 

steel. 

1.20.6 Free and noiseless movement of all the components of the Structural glazing 

System due to thermal effect, structural effect, wind pressure, seismic forces, 

erection or dead loads, shall be achieved without strain to the glass, without 

buckling of any components and without excessive stress to any members 

or assemblies. 

1.20.7 Aluminium surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster, masonry, wet 

application of fireproofing and absorptive materials shall be coated with an 

anti galvanic, moisture barrier material. 

1.20.8 Waterproofing 

a) A complete drainage system must be incorporated into the structural 

glazing frame. Water leakage and condensation shall be drained or 

discharged to exterior face of the wall and all internal spaces vented by 

acceptable means to ensure air pressure equalization where possible. 

b) Drainage system will be sealed off at every floor to prevent infiltrated 

water from leaking to lower floors. 

c) Movement of water behind and on exposed surfaces must be 

controlled to ensure that water is not retained and that elements will 

not be damaged or corroded by water and to minimize the potential for 

algae and fungus growth as a result of standing or trapped water. 



278 

1.20.9 Anchorage System and Building Frame 

Each glazed unit shall be fixed to the structural slab at each floor level. 

All steel fasteners shall be stainless steel of approved grade. The 

contractor shall also make necessary modifications to the positions of 

anchor fasteners to suit existing site conditions of steel reinforcement 

without additional charge. For this purpose re-bar location detectors 

shall be used. 

1.20.10 Mullions and Transoms 

a) The sections of mullions and transoms shall be designed to 

restrict deflection under wind pressure as specified and shall be rigid 

enough to support and retain the glass spandrel under all conditions. 

The mullions shall be designed if required, to act as guide tracks for 

gondolas to permit its free movement in vertical direction for window 

washing and to sustain concentrated loadings by the gondola cage. 

b) Reinforcing members, where used, and if specifically approved, 

shall be completely enclosed and if fabricated from steel shall be 

galvanised and protected with primer and two coats of zinc chromate. 

1.20.11 Window units (Vision Panels) 

All windows shall be glazed from inside where possible. All cladding as well as 

internal glazing beads, if any (unless otherwise specified) shall be in PVDF 

aluminium. 

1.20.12 Spandrel Units 

a) Spandrel shall be of glass having equal colour matching with 

vision areas after using a shadow box or as specified. 

b) Structural spandrel beam, structural glazing fasteners and other 

construction shall not be seen through the glass from the exterior and 

shall be fully concealed behind the shadow box. 

c) A shadow box shall be provided a distance behind the spandrel 

glass panel. It shall consist of an approved black fiberglass non-woven 

tissue stuck on surface #1, 50 mm semi-rigid fiberglass insulation of 

minimum density of 48 kg/cum, and 0.8 mm galvanized sheet steel 

tray natural finished on surface #2. The periphery shall be properly 

sealed. Surface #1 shall be adequately protected against damage until 

spandrel glazing is done. 

d) Two hour rating fire stops – cum – smoke seals shall be 

constructed continuously at the spandrel to the approval of the Chief 

Fire Officer and other authorities. 

1.20.13 Ventilators, Openable Windows and Doors 

a) Ventilators, windows and doors shall be provided at positions 

as shown on the drawings. The ventilators when in closed position 

shall remain watertight under all weather conditions and pass the 

water tightness tests as specified. 



279 

b) All hardware and accessories shall be supplied by the contractor 

and when exposed shall be of stainless steel or approved aluminium 

alloys in approved aluminium alloys in approved finish. 

c) Minimum aggregate openable area of the ventilator shall be as 

given in the Architect drawings. 

d) The detailed system of the ventilators and doors must be 

proposed by the tenderer keeping the position as shown in the 

drawings. 

1.20.5Coping and Soffit Trimmer 

a) All coping and soffit panels shall receive frame reinforcement 

and be fixed rigidly to the structure. 

b) All joints between coping/soffit panels and between 

coping/soffit panels to structural glazing frame and other sections of 

the work shall be tightly sealed up. Effective drainage system shall be 

provided to drain out the water that may penetrate through the joints. 

1.20.15 CLADDING 

Cladding shall be non-toxic composite aluminium panels of approved make of 

adequate strength with approved details. The panels shall be 4mm thick composite 

units finished with PVDF coating overall 35 micron thick of approved metallic 

colour or 25 micron thick of solid colour. The resin content of the PVDF coating shall 

be minimum 70%. The back of the panel shall be chromatised, compatible with 

adhesives for stiffeners if any and/or given a polymer coating (total protection 3-7 

mm thick). 

The contractor shall submit 3 different samples of gloss in % ages directed by MIDC 

in the range of 30% to 80% gloss to facilitate final selection. 

The fabrication and installation of the cladding systems shall be carried out as per 

manufacturer’s instructions with invisible/concealed fastenings, aluminium substructure, 

silicon sealants (if shown in drawings) properly tooled etc. 

All cladding panels of one kind shall be obtained in one lot from the manufacturers. 

Each panel shall be guaranteed for a flatness of +/- 0.8 mm from the true face after 

installation under no-wind condition. 

Deviations from the true alignment of adjoining panels shall not be cumulative. 

Full load deflections shall be kept to the minimum possible. Each panel shall be 

capable of withstanding 300 kg/sq.m wind pressure without any permanent 

deformation. 

The cladding system shall be adequately ventilated. The air-gap between the 

cladding panels and the concrete block wall ( if any ) shall be at least 50mm to allow 

proper ventilation of the system. The cavity shall be closed by a perforated 

bird/vermin-proof closer at bottom and by a flashing at a top with a built-in 

bird/vermin proof air closet. 



280 

The fabrication processes including cutting, grooving, benching, folding, joining, 

rout-in as well as installation shall be performed as per manufacturer’s instructions. 

The panels shall be backed by approved aluminium support framework, fixed to 

walls ( if any ) with aluminium / galvanised steel brackets. 

The PVDF coating shall be guaranteed for colour retention, chalking resistance and 

gloss retention etc. as specified under Clause 19- METAL COATINGS. 

The composite Aluminium panels shall satisfy the following fire codes requirements. 

BS476 Part 6 Class 0 

Part 7 Class 1 

ASTM E-84 Flame Spread Index 0 

Smoke developed Index

281 

b) All work shall be carefully fabricated and assembled with 

proper and approved provisions for thermal expansion and 

contraction, fabrication and installation tolerances and design criteria. 

c) All forming and welding operations shall be done prior to 

finishing, unless otherwise noted. 

d) All work shall be true to detail with sharp, clean profiles, 

straight and free from defects, dents, marks, waves or flaws of any 

nature impairing strength or appearance; fitted with proper joints and 

intersections and with specified finishes. 

e) All work shall be erected true to plumb, level, square to line, 

securely anchored, in proper alignment and relationship to work of 

other trades and free from waves, sags or other defects. 

Joints in Metal Work 

a) All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce 

continuity of line, design and finish. Joints in exposed work, unless 

otherwise shown or required for thermal movement, shall be 

accurately fitted, rigidly secured with hairline contacts and sealed 

watertight. 

b) Where two or more sections or metals are used in building up 

members, the surface in contact shall be brought to a smooth, true and 

even surface and secured together so that the joints shall be absolutely 

tight without the use of any pointing materials. Extrusions shall be 

tolerated to eliminate any edge projection or misalignment at joints. 

c) Furnish physical samples of all joinery elements as for 

comparative appraisal and approval of the production materials. 

Physical samples of all typical wall intersection assemblies shall be 

colour coded on surfaces and/or areas to receive sealants. 

Shop Assembly 

As far as practicable, all fitting and assembly of the work shall be done in the 

shop. Work that cannot be permanently shop assembled shall be temporarily 

assembled in the shop and marked, before disassembly to ensure proper 

assembly later in the building. 

Sleeves 

Unless otherwise noted, all aluminium sleeves shall be extruded sections 

designed to accurately interlock with adjacent sections and incorporate serrated 

surfaces for the secure bedding of sealant between the parent metal and the 

sleeve. 

Fasteners 

a) All fasteners shall be of stainless steel with self locking devices, unless 

otherwise noted, and of sufficient size and strength to withstand the 

applicable design wind load and dead load forces with safety 

allowance factors as required for the specific materials. The spacing 



282 

and quantities of fasteners shall be as required to develop the 

maximum strength of the member they secure or support. Washers 

and/or other accessory items shall be of the same material as the 

fastener. Torque tighten all assembly fasteners to achieve the 

maximum torque tension relationship in the fastener. 

b) All fasteners shall be concealed unless otherwise shown or approved. 

The head style for all exposed fasteners shall be countersunk oval head 

unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Exposed fasteners shall be 

finished to match surrounding metal finish. 

c) All fasteners including washers and accessory items shall be scheduled 

and designated on the shop drawings so that anyone can witness and 

assess the assembled units to ensure that all fasteners conform to the 

designated and approved type, size, material, spacing, etc. When 

certain items are not readily apparent, such as material and alloy or 

torque tightening requirements, special instructions for the 

identification and appraisal of such items shall be issued 

Protection of Metals 

a) Protection against galvanic action shall be provided wherever 

dissimilar metals are in contact 

b) Aluminium which is to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar or 

plaster shall have the contact surfaces protected, wherever crevices 

between the contact surfaces may entrap moisture and corrosive 

elements. All metals, except stainless steel, which are to be in contact 

with fresh concrete, mortar or plaster, shall have the contact surfaces 

protected with epoxy paint. 

c) Furnish a schedule of all protective coatings and related items 

including the designation of area and/or specific locations, materials 

used, special instructions, specification data sheets etc. 

Welding 

a) All welding in aluminium work shall be done by the inert gas shielded 

arc or fluxless resistant techniques and with electrodes and/or 

methods recommended by the suppliers of the metals being welded. 

Type, size and spacing of welds, shall be shown on approved shop 

drawings. 

b) Welds in galvanised metal shall be touched up with zinc rich paint. 

c) Welds behind finished aluminium surfaces shall be so done as to 

eliminated distortion and/or discolouration on the finished side. Weld 

spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces shall be removed by 

descaling and/or grinding. Provide low heat filled welds using chill 

bar on finished side to eliminate dimpling, distortion and/or 

discolouration on the finished or exposed surface. Plug, puddle, or spot 

welding is not permitted. If weld beads are shown on exposed finished 

surfaces, the surfaces shall be ground and polished to match and blend 

with finish on adjacent parent metal. 



283 

d) Structural welds shall be made by certified welders and shall conform 

to the general recommendations and regulations of AWS Specification 

D1.0-46. 

Dirt grease, lubricant, or other organic material shall be removed by 

vapour degreasing or suitable solvent. 

Joints rejected because of welding defects may be repaired only by 

rewinding. Defective welds shall be removed by chipping or 

machining. Flame cutting shall not be used. 

e) Wherever welding is done in proximity to glass or finished surfaces 

such surfaces shall be protected from damage due to weld sparks, 

spatter or tramp metal. 

f) All welds shall be scheduled and designated on the shop drawings so 

that anyone can witness and assess the assembled units to ensure that 

all welds conform to the designated and approved type, size, spacing 

etc. 

1.22.10 Soldering 

All soldering shall be done as recommended by the suppliers of the metals 

involved. 

1.22.11 Shop painting of Carbon Steel 

Item of carbon steel, unless galvanised or scheduled for other finish, shall be 

thoroughly cleaned of all loose scale, filings, dirt and other foreign matter and 

shall be painted with zinc chromate primer. 

1.22.12 Factory Application 

As much work as possible shall be carried out in the factory. All glazing shall be 

done in the factory. Gaskets shall be pre-positioned and welded in the factory as 

far as possible. Site work shall be kept to a minimum. 

1.23 GENERAL EXECUTION 

1.23.1 The drawings supplied by Architect shall be considered essentially 

schematic, except for profiles of exposed surfaces which shall be as 

indicated. If, in the opinion of the contractor, a change of profiles is required 

in order to meet the specifications, he shall consult Architect for a review of 

the conditions. 

The method of assembling, reinforcing and anchorage of the aluminium 

structural glazing, metal cladding system, where indicated is schematic. 

Location and method of providing same shall be the Contractor’s 

responsibility, who shall design, assemble, reinforce and anchor to suit each 

specified condition in an acceptable manner complying with main building 

structure. 

Visible joints shall be as shown on the Architect’s drawings. 



284 

All parts shall be secured by concealed means and screws exposed to view 

shall not be allowed. 

All components shall be assembled, secured, anchored, reinforced, sealed 

and made weathertight in manner not restricting thermal or wind movement 

of the metal wall cladding/structural glazing system. Where possible, 

sealants shall be concealed. 

Free and noiseless movement of all components of the aluminium structural 

glazing and cladding system due to thermal, structural wind pressure, or 

dead loads, shall be achieved without strain to glass, without buckling of any 

components and without excessive stress to any members or assemblies. 

The entire aluminium structural glazing and cladding system shall be 

assembled and installed so that all leakage and condensation shall be drained 

and discharges to the exterior face of the wall. 

Movement of water behind and on exposed surfaces shall be controlled to 

ensure that water is not retained and that elements will not be damaged or 

corroded by water and to minimize the potential for algae and fungus 

growth. 

Measurements 

The measurements given in Architect’s drawings shall not be used by the 

Contractor for preparing his shop drawings and for executing the work. All 

dimensions shall be actually measured on site and in case of any discrepancy 

between measurements on site and in drawing, modules shall be decided in 

consultation with the MIDC. 

ERFORMANCE TESTING 

1.24.1 Specifications 24.1 to 24.11 apply for pre-construction performance test in 

laboratory conditions. 

Specifications 24.12 applies for site tests. 

The Contractor shall supply copies of shop drawings and calculations to the 

Test Laboratory approved by MIDC prior to installation of the test units. 

These drawings shall include : 

Test elevation and sections 

Full scale typical details of unitized panels including intersections of 

members. 

Typical support details 

Extent of sealants 

Size and number of pressure equalization/drainage slots or holes 

Blanking off details and 

Method of installation. 



285 

Any deviations from the drawings shall be recorded and noted in the final 

report. After approval of structural calculations and shop drawings for the 

structural glazing test units for performance testing of the structural glazing 

system shall be constructed by the Contractor at the testing laboratory. 

1.24.2 Test Units 

1) The test units shall comprise components representative both in size and 

shape of the facade of the building under examination. The width of the 

test sample shall not be less than of three typical adjoining wall 

panels/units. The height of the test sample shall be not less than 2 stories 

high and must contain full height modules of the aluminium structural 

glazing and cladding system. Vertical and horizontal movement joints 

shall be included in the test sample. 

2) Where details of the building facade differ from those in the 

representative test sample, such as at corners, overhangs and the like, 

supplementary tests shall be performed on either composite or part 

sample of the facade. 

3) The materials of the test sample (glass, aluminium, reinforced concrete, 

sealant, gaskets etc.) shall be of the sample, type and size and have the 

same details, methods of construction, flashing and anchorage as the 

building facade. 

4) If not an actual on site representative sample of the wall of the building, 

the test sample shall be mounted and sealed into a simulated building 

frame in the same manner and by the same fixings which are intended to 

attach the facade to the building structure. The support frame shall be of 

equivalent stiffness to that supporting the building to prevent unrealistic 

deflection of the prototype sample. 

5) Simulated floor slabs and spandrel shall be to actual depth if, for example 

in structural glazing system the air seal is connected to the slab. The 

internal finishes and linings shall be installed where they contribute to the 

air seal of the facade. The air seal of the test sample shall be continued to 

the air seal of the test chamber. 

6) All unitized panels and other interconnected joints in the facade shall be 

sealed at the sample boundaries. This is to minimize the effects that the 

surrounding construction will have on the test performance of the 

sample. All pressure equalization and drainage slots or holes in the test 

sample shall be left open. 

7) Transparent viewing panels (or other means of observation such as an 

optical fiber probe) shall be provided so that the performance of the 

facade in areas that are not readily seen can be determined. 

1.24.2 Inspection of test units 

1) The Contractor shall allow MIDC to inspect the test sample regularly 

during erection. At this stage the adequacy and stiffness of the support 

structure shall be assessed. When the installation of the test sample is 

complete, MIDC shall inspect the test sample before shipment to testing 

facility. 



286 

2) Full time attendance by approved representatives of the contractor shall 

be provided for the erection of the test unit and all testing of the test 

units. 

1.24.3 Test program 

The proposed testing procedure and related method shall be conducted in 

accordance with test specifications, or other approved codes and parameters of equal 

or greater severity. 

The following standards shall apply to the tests: 

Air infiltration test : ASTME 283-91 

Water penetration test : ASTME 331-86 

Structural performance test : ASTME 330-90 

Seismic test : AS/NZS 4284:1995 

The test programme will be conducted in the following sequence : 

a) Preliminary loadings 

b) Air infiltration test 

c) Water penetration test (Static pressure) 

d) Water penetration test (Dynamic pressure) 

e) Structural performance test (design pressure) 

f) Seismic test (serviceability limit state) 

g) Structural proof load test 

h) Seismic test (ultimate limit state) 

1.24.4 Preliminary loading 

The test unit shall be subjected to static pressures of + 100 kg/m2 and –100 

kg/m2 for a period of 30 seconds each. 

1.24.5 Air infiltration test – ASTM E 283-91 

This test shall be performed by attaching the test specimen on one side of the 

pressure chamber and sealing it. Air pressure shall then be supplied from the 

chamber simulating pressure applied to the outer face of the specimen at a 

pressure difference of 10kg/m2 in accordance to ASTM E 283-91. At the 

maintained specified test pressure difference across the specimen, measurement 

for the resultant airflow through the specimen shall be recorded. The results of 

the infiltration shall not exceed 1 liter/min per 300 mm run of sash perimeter, 

and for the fixed glass panels air leakage shall not exceed 1 litre/min/m2. 

A stabilised pressure difference of 10kg/m2 shall be maintained across the test 

specimen with it opening being sealed for the first result and then with the seal 

taken off for the second result. Measurement of airflow shall be recorded via the 

air flow meters at the supply source and near the specimen. The difference of the 

two measured airflow shall give the resultant airflow which is converted into 

units of liters per minute per length or area to be compared with the acceptance 

criteria. 



287 

1.24.6 Water Penetration test – ASTM E 331-86 

a) STATIC PRESSURE 

This test shall be performed by attaching the test specimen on one side of 

the pressure chamber and sealing it with the same type of sealant as 

would be used on site. Uniform pressure difference of 60kg/m2 shall be 

introduced into the chamber in one step for ten minutes. The test shall 

then be repeated with a pressure difference of 120 kg/m2 (60% of positive 

wind pressure) for 5 minutes. 

Water jet sprays shall be introduced into the specimen at a rate of 3.40 

liter per square meter per minute. 

b) DYNAMIC PRESSURE 

The procedure for the dynamic pressure test shall be similar to that for 

the static pressure, the only difference being that for the dynamic 

pressure test, pulsating pressure difference instead of uniform pressure 

difference will be used. The pulsating pressure shall fluctuate from 0 to 30 

kg/cm2 for 15 minutes. The above test shall be repeated for pulsation 

between 60 kg/m2 and 12 kg/m2 for 15 minutes. The pulsating pressure 

shall be in cycles of between 3 to 5 seconds. 

For both the static and cyclic water penetration tests, no leaks shall be 

acceptable. A leak shall be considered to occur if 

i) Uncontrolled water appears on any inside surface of the facade. 

ii) Water appears on inside surface of the facade and is visible from the 

occupied building space. 

iii) Water appears that is likely to wet insulation, fixtures, and 

finishes. 

iv) Water appears in other locations specified as unacceptable. 

1.24.7 Structural performance test – ASTM E 330-90 

The test specimen shall be installed on one side of the pressure chamber and 

sealed. Air pressure shall then be supplied to (positive pressure) and exhausted 

from (negative pressure) the chamber. At specified maintained pressure 

difference across the specimen, observation, measurement, and record of 

deflection shall be carried out. The design wind pressure used for the test shall be 

+200 kg/m2 and –200 kg/m2. Displacement transducers accurate to +/- 0.25 mm 

shall be fixed to the test unit at selected locations to be approved by the 

architect/structural engineer. 

Transducers shall be attached to 

i) 2 mullions at 9 locations at brackets, joints with horizontal members 

and mid spans 

ii) 2 transoms at mid-spans and joints with vertical members 

iii) 2 sill/gutters at mid-spans and joints with vertical members 



288 

iv) Centers of fixed vision panel, openable vision panel and 2 spandrel 

panels. 

v) 2 transoms and 2 sill/gutters at mid-spans for vertical displacement 

vi) Any other critical points if required by the architect/structural 

engineer. 

(a) Static Pressure Test-Design Pressure 

The proposed testing method shall be in accordance with procedure B 

of ASTM E 300-90. There will be four incremental loadings at 50 

kg/m2, 100 kg/m2, 150 kg/m2 and 200 kg/m2 for positive pressures 

and at –50kg/m2, -100 kg/m2, - 150 kg/m2, -200 kg/m2 for negative 

pressures. 

Acceptance Criteria for Static Test 

At 100% design pressure and load: 

i) Net deflection perpendicular to enclosure surface for framing members shall 

not exceed span/240 or 15mm whichever is less and shall not exceed span/300 

for glass supporting members. 

ii) In the plane of the wall, deflection of horizontal rails shall not reduce the glass 

bite below 75% of the dimension, and shall not reduce the glass edge clearance 

below 25% of the design dimensions of 3 mm whichever is greater. 

iii) At connection points of framing members anchors, anchor deflection shall not 

exceed 1mm 

iv) Glass panel centre deflection shall not exceed span/90, or 15mm whichever is 

less. 

(b) 

Proof Load Test 

The maximum pressure for the proof load test shall be 300 kg/m2. The method 

of testing shall be as follows: 

+150 kg/m2 - to remove slack 

+ 300 kg/m2 - at proof load 

- 150 kg/m2 - to remove slack 

- 300 kg/m2 - at proof load 

Acceptance Criteria for Proof Load Test 

Under proof load test there shall not be: 

a) dislodgment of any glass 

b) dislodgment of any frame, panel or any part thereof. 

c) Failure of any fixings that connect the facade to the 

building structure 

d) Failure of any accessory, locking device, hinge etc. which 

would allow an opening light to come open. 



289 

Any permanent distortion of a panel shall be documented. The residual 

deflection of any member shall be nil. The slippage at support shall not 

exceed 1 mm. 

1.24.8 Seismic Test – AS/NZS 4284:1995 

a) Serviceability Limit State: 

The test unit shall be displaced by subjecting it to cyclic movement at the rate 

of 1 cycle/sec. for a period of 30 seconds (One cycle is movement from 

original setting to extreme, then to the other extreme and back to original 

setting). The max. displacement shall be +/- 12mm from the original setting at 

the seismic loading floor. 

b) Ultimate Limit State : 

The procedure (a) above will be repeated with max. displacement of +/- 

18mm. 

The test unit shall not collapse during or after the seismic test at serviceability 

and ultimate limit state displacements. Any damage to seals, members or 

panels shall be recorded. Collapse shall mean any one or more of the 

conditions (a) to (d) described under Proof Load Test in 24.8 (b) above. The 

test unit shall be subjected to and shall pass the criteria set for dynamic water 

penetration test, after the seismic test at serviceability and ultimate limit state 

displacements. Any damage to seals, members or panels shall be recorded. 

Collapse shall mean any one or more of the conditions (a) to (d) described 

under Proof Load Test in 24.8 (b) above. The test unit shall be subjected to and 

shall pass the criteria set for dynamic water penetration test (specification 

24.7b) after the seismic test at serviceability limit state displacements. 

1.24.10 Form of Report 

Details of the test sample (including an outline of the stimulated building 

frame) and the test apparatus, instrumentation and method shall be clearly 

given in a report in triplicate. 

The report shall include the following: 

a) an identification and general description of the facade and Certificate of 

Identity from the contractor 

b) Drawings of the actual test sample showing modifications, if any. 

c) Test sequence and procedure with pressures used in all tests. 

d) Location of all transducers for the structural performance test and moving 

support beam for seismic test. 

e) Displacements, span/deflection ratios, air infiltration rates and water 

leakage details, permanent distortion or collapse, and damage to seals 

members or panels. 

f) Other pertinent observations. 

The testing laboratory shall keep a copy of approved test unit, shop drawings 

and calculations at testing laboratory accurately and neatly record on the above 



290 

mentioned shop drawings all changes, revisions, modifications etc. made to test 

unit, which shall become the record drawings. 

At completion of testing and after approval of test reports, the testing laboratory 

shall submit the final record drawings to the MIDC. 

1.24.11 Cost of Performance Testing 

The Contractor shall allow for the cost of fabrication, shipping, testing, erection, 

modifications to and the demolition of the test unit. If the test unit fails to pass 

the initial testing, the Contractor shall make the necessary modifications to the 

test unit and shall have the test unit retested by the Testing Laboratory until it 

passes the test. Cost of modifications to the test unit and cost of retesting shall be 

borne by the by the Contractor. 

1.24.12 Site Tests 

The Contractor shall carry out site tests at his own cost to determine resistance to 

water leakage as per recommendations given in AAMA 501.2-94 for “Field Check 

of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water 

Leakage. 

The test areas shall be selected by MIDC, at random in typical and non typical 

locations, one for every 600 Sqm approx. of installed structural glazing system. In 

case of any test failing, the MIDC shall order more tests to be conducted at the 

Contractor’s cost. 

Each test area shall be 

a) 10 sq. mm minimum or 

b) 25 m. Run of perimeter of vision and spandrel units 

c) 4 entire panels of standard types, whichever is the least. 

1.25 INSTALLATION 

1.25.1 Quality Control: See previous item 7.3 

1.25.2 Qualification of workmen : 

All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, especially trained and 

experienced in the applicable trades employed in full conformity with applicable 

provisions of the listed References and Standards and/or as otherwise noted on 

the Architect drawings or as specified herein. The qualification of the 

Contractor’s installation workmen shall first be filed with and approved by 

MIDC. 

1.25.3 Setting out : 

Bench marks for elevations and building line offset marks for alignment shall be 

established on each floor level by the Main Contractor ; any error be found in 

their location, the Contractor shall notify the MIDC in writing and installation 

work shall not proceed in the affected area until the errors have been corrected. 

Within 6 weeks upon the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit the 

structural glazing anchorage plan for endorsement by MIDC. The Contractor 



291 

shall co-ordinate his system of anchorage with MIDC according to site 

conditions. 

1.25.4 Prior Inspection of the Structure : 

After the setting out has been established and before beginning installation in 

any area, the Contractor shall examine all parts of the structure on which the 

Structural Glazing System/metal wall cladding are to be placed in that area. 

Should any conditions be found which, in his opinion, will prevent the proper 

execution of his work or endanger its permanency, he shall report such 

conditions in writing to MIDC. Installation work shall not proceed in that area 

until such conditions are corrected or adjusted to the satisfaction of MIDC. 

1.25.5 .Workmanship 

All parts of the aluminium structural glazing and metal cladding system shall be 

erected true to plumb and in proper alignment and relation to established setting 

out, as shown on approved shop drawings. 

1.25.6 Erection Tolerances 

The installed metal wall cladding / structural glazing system components shall 

conform to the following erection tolerances under no-wind conditions: 

a) Amount of total deviation and / or misalignment in any direction for 

vertical members: 3 mm maximum in a height of 4 m (non-cumulative) and 

maximum 7 mm in full height of metal cladding / structural glazing 

system. 

b) Amount of total deviation and / or misalignment in any direction for 

horizontal members : 3 mm max in a length of 7 m / 50 

c) Maximum offset from true alignment between two abutting members 

shall be 1 mm. No edge projection or misalignment will be permitted. 

d) Maximum joints, gaps or openings between removable glazing stop and 

adjacent member shall be 1mm and / or maximum 1mm cumulative 

opening at both ends of removable members (0.5mm each end) 

e) Deviation in spacing of brackets : +/- 3 mm. 

f) Allowances for the cumulative effect of all tolerances (fabrication, 

assembly, thermal and erection) must be made to ensure a workman like 

installation. The documentation and distribution of this information to all 

applicable installation and inspection personnel is essential in order to 

ensure the standard of quality and workmanship required. 

1.25.7 Installation within and / or adjacent to concrete: 

Where work is to be installed within and / or adjacent to concrete, no 

aluminium structural glazing and cladding system components other than 

built in anchor devices shall be put in place until the concrete work is 

completed, including the removal of all forms, shoring etc. 

1.25.8 Anchorage 

a) Anchorage of the aluminium structural glazing and cladding system to 

the structure shall be by approved methods and in strict accordance with 

approved shop drawings. After the aluminium structural glazing and 



292 

cladding system are properly positioned, all connections so designated on 

approved shop drawings shall be rigidly fixed by welding or other 

positive means. 

b) All anchorage assemblies and their related components shall be 

thoroughly scheduled and described on the shop drawings so that 

anyone can evaluate an installation and ensure its compliance with the 

contract documents. Designate trades responsible for furnishing and/or 

installing materials if other than the Contractor. Descriptive items shall 

include the access, removal, movement and tolerances of related building 

and the aluminium structural glazing and cladding system, direction and 

magnitude of thermal expansion, materials, sizes, quantities, and any 

special instruction as may be required. All primary aluminium structural 

glazing and cladding, anchorage assemblies shall receive a 100% 

inspection. 

1.25.9 Welding 

All welding shall be done by skilled mechanics, qualified or licensed in 

accordance with local building regulations. Welds and adjoining burnt areas in 

prime coated surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of 

primer. Welds in galvanized steel shall be coated with two coats of zinc rich 

paint. Special care shall be taken to protect glass and other furnished surfaces 

from flame and welding spatter and to prevent fires. 

1.25.10 Use of Sealing materials 

a) Sealing materials shall be used in strict accordance with the 

Manufacturers printed instructions and shall be applied only by 

workmen specially trained or experienced in their use. Before applying 

sealant, all mortar, dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign matter shall be 

completely removed from surfaces it will contact. Adjoining surfaces 

shall be masked when required to maintain a clean and neat appearance. 

Sealing compounds shall be tooled to fill the joint and provide a smooth 

finished surface. 

b) The manufacturers of the applicable materials shall, when required, 

render technical assistance prior to the application of any sealant and 

witness the first applicants as well as periodic site inspections thereafter. 

The Contractor shall witness and document all inspections performed by 

the sealant manufacturer and provide close supervision of all workmen 

used to apply the sealant. 

1.25.11 Coping and Soffit trimmer 

Installation of coping and soffit panels and field sealing between the copings and 

other trades shall be performed by the Contractor. 

1.25.12 Tensioning of Bolts 

All bolts shall be correctly tensioned. The tension shall be specified on shop 

drawings. At last 100% of bolts shall be mechanically checked for correct tension. 

1.25.13 Sequence of Installation 



293 

If so directed by the MIDC, installation of the aluminium structural glazing and 

cladding shall be postponed in areas as designated by the MIDC for a specified 

period of time so as to facilitate moving materials / equipment into and out of 

the building and installation of M & E (Mechanical & Electrical) fittings during 

construction. The Contractor’s work is to proceed along guidelines and schedule 

as directed by MIDC. 

1.25.5 Removal of Debris 

All debris by or incidental to the installation work shall be promptly removed 

from the job site as the work progresses. Weep holes and drainage channels shall 

be unobstructed and free of dirt, rubbish and sealant. 

1.25.15 Protection and Cleaning 

a) The Contractor shall adequately protect all aluminium sections, glazing, 

cladding sheets, components, and accessories from damage during 

shipment, storage, erection and after completion of the work by use of 

protective film / foil of approved non-staining quality. 

b) At such time as may be directed by MIDC, the Contractor shall remove 

all protective coverings and / or coatings and clean surfaces free of all 

soil and discoloration. All cleaning agents shall be acceptable to the 

applicable aluminium, glass and coating manufacturers, and where 

doubt exists, spot tests shall be made to satisfy MIDC. 

1.26 ENTRANCE DOORS 

The contractor shall design, supply and install glazed entrance doors at locations 

as shown in the drawings. The contractor shall prepare shop drawings in 

consultation with MIDC. 

The glazed entrance doors shall be designed to be frameless and shall be jointed 

with patch fittings. Glass fins shall be provided if required as per structural 

design. 10 mm thk clear toughened glass shall be suspended with the help of 

patch fittings suspended above false ceiling and protected with primer and 2 

epoxy coats. Glass shall be fully toughened with a surface compression of 700 

kg/cm2 and shall be heat soaked. The double door shall be provided with a pair 

of heavy duty floor springs with stainless steel cover plate and approved door 

patch fittings. 

1.27 CANOPY 

The contractor shall design, supply and install a glass canopy with stainless steel 

(grade 316) framework. The glass panels shall be 16.50 mm thk. consisting of 

outer 9 mm thk clear heat strengthened glass & 6 mm thk clear toughened glass 

with a 1.50 mm clear PVB interlayer. The canopy shall be having spider fittings 

for fixing the glass with framework. 

There shall be aluminium cladding above canopy in structural channel support 

framework to support the canopy. The cladding shall be in 3 mm thk stretch 



294 

levelled PVDF coated aluminium sheets. The aluminium cladding shall be 

having extruded polysterne board insulation behind. 

The canopy shall be designed for its dead load plus a live load of 75kg/m2 plus 

an upward or downward wind load of 200 kg/m2, allowing for edge conditions 

and adequately restricting long-term deflections to avoid any cracking of glass. 

1.28 DESIGN DATA 

Temperature Range : 60 deg.C Ambient 

100 deg.C for Materials 

Wind Load : 200 kg/sqm 

Seismic Load : As per I.S. Codes 

Deflections 

(System and all components including glass 

in edge zones on each side of building 

corners shall be designed for heavier wind 

suction as require by design code) 

- Mullions : Max L/240 or 15mm whichever is less 

- Transoms, sills, heads, gutters : Max L/300 

- Permanent deflection in 

Mullions 


transoms, sills, heads, gutters 


cladding frame members 

: Max L/3000 at 300 kg/sqm wind pressure 

: Nil at 1.5 times dead load 

: Nil at 300 kg/sqm wind pressure 

- Glass panels : Max 15mm or as recommended by glass 

manufacturer for each typical panel, which 

ever is less 

R.C.C. Grade : M20 (with minimum cement content 360 

kg/cm) 

Anticipated Building Movements 

The following movements are anticipated by the Structural Consultants after the 

building structure is completed. The Contractor shall adequately allow for these 

movements in his design. 

Differential horizontal displacement of building face between +/- 

12mm 

Consecutive floors due to wind or earthquake 



295 

Differential vertical displacement of building face at any floor 6 

mm 

Max. axial compression in columns per floor height 1.6mm 

Differential horizontal displacement between 2 consecutive 

Steel floor trusses in atrium 

Expansion / Contraction of R.C.C. fascia per 10m length per +/- 12mm 

+/- 12 mm 10 deg.C temperature difference. 

1.29 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF GLASS PANELS 

Characteristics 

Outer Lief 

Monolithic Glass Panels 

6mm heat strengthened tinted 

reflective float glass 

Inner Lief Blue Green 

Space - - 

Light Transmittance approx 56% 55% 

Light Reflectance apprx Ext 7% 7% 

Light Reflectance approx Int 10% 9% 

Energy Reflection 6% 6% 

Solar Factor 45% 42% 

Energy Absorbed appros 60% 64% 

Shading Coefficient ASHRAE approx 0.52% 0.48% 

Ultraviolet transmission 21% 5% 

Max Relative Heat Gain-w/m2 361 339 

U-Value 4.1% 4.1% 

Note 

1 The characteristics given above are the Standard characteristics of glass 

& the tenderers may offer makes which shall satisfy the above, providing a 

sample of the proposed alternative glass and the glass characteristics are 

submitted to the Engineer-in-charge at least 10 days before the date of 

opening of tender and duly approved by a tender Bulletin. Some variation in 

colour and light characteristics may be accepted at the Engineer-in-charge’s 

discretion. The relative gain offered shall not exceed that specified by more 

than 3%. 



296 

2 The variation in values specified shall be + 10%. 

3 MIDC reserves the right to change the color of the glass before the 

award of the work 

1.30 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND CERTIFICATION 

The contractor shall carry out the following tests in approved independent 

laboratories in manufacturer’s test facilities/ in his fabrication shop / on site as 

applicable and shall submit test reports in duplicate to MIDC. The cost of the 

tests shall be borne the contractor and shall be deemed to be included in his 

prices. The extent of tests shall not be limited to the list given hereunder. The 

manufacturers shall carry out all other tests on materials during and after 

processing as required by codes/trade practice and shall produce test certificates 

if so demanded by MIDC. 

Structural Glazing System 

Performance Tests 

The tests as specified in Specifications 24.1 to 24.11 shall be performed in an 

approved laboratory to prove the performance of the contractor’s design and 

details prior to construction. 

The Contractor shall provide attendance for the full duration of the test 

including installation in laboratory and modifications to the test unit. The test 

shall be performed in the presence of MIDC if so requested. 

Site tests for water penetration 

Site tests shall be performed as specified in Specification 25.12 

7 nos. Tests shall be performed on structural glazing in locations selected by 

MIDC and 1 no. Test shall be carried out on Entrance Door. 

2. Glass 

Tests in Approved independent laboratory 

3 samples of each type of vision and spandrel panels (except for glass with 

ceramic frit) shall be tested for: 

American summer U Value in W/m2 (ASHRAE standard) 

Shading coefficient (ASHRAE standard) 

Certification by Manufacturer 

For each lot of glass supplied, the Manufacturer shall certify the following: 

Characteristics 

- Light Transmittance (380 to 780) mm % 

- Light reflectance (external) % 

- Light reflectance (internal) % 

- UV Transmittance (280 to 380 mm) % 



297 

- Direct energy transmittance (300 to 2150) mm % 

- Energy reflectance % 

- Energy absorption % 

- Shading Coefficient % 

= Total Solar energy flux entering thru glass 

0.87 x incident solar energy 

- U value (American summer) 

w/m2K 

ASHRAE conditions 

Compliance with Codes 

- ASTM 1036-91 for vision glass 

-ASTM C 1048-92 for spandrel glass 

-CBA rating with IGCC in accordance with ASTM 

E 773 and E 774 for insulating glass 

-ASTM C 1048 – 92 for heat processing 

-ANSI Z 97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 for safety 

glazing 

Sealant – Substrate test report 

Surface compression in heat strengthened glass 

Manufacture’s certification of cyclic thermal stress 

test as per ASTM C 1048-92 on heat processed 

glass 

Manufacturers report on heat –soaking program 

for each lot of glass supplied 

Visual Inspection Reports 

- Thickness and dimension tolerances 

- Pinholes 

- Uniformity of colour and opacity 

- Distortion 

- Scratches 

STRUCTURAL SEALANT 

Tests on 1 – component sealants 

3.1.1 Skin – overtime / Elastomeric tests 

Perform tests in fabrication shop on each new lot and 

once a week to check on shelf life of one part sealant as 

recommended by the manufacturer. 



298 

Weather Sealant 

3.1.2 Standard Field adhesion test 

Perform 10 tests for the first 300m of sealant application 

and one test for every 300 m thereafter in fabrication shop 

as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 

Tests on 2-component sealants 

Deglazing 

Perform test every time mixing pump is started up 

to check on adequate mix of base and curing agent 

components. 

Snap time test 

Perform test daily to relate the mix proportion to 

the curing rate of the sealant recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

Deglaze complete panels from frame confirm proper adhesion 

and joint fill. 

Inspection of at least 3% of first 100 glazed panels and at least 

1% of panels thereafter shall be carried out after deglazing in 

presence of sealant manufacturer. 

The following documentation shall be certified jointly by the 

sealant manufacturer and the contractor: 

a) size of structural bite-design and actual 

b) size of structural glue-line 

c) adhesion of sealant with panel and frame 

d) joint type/condition/penetration of sealant applied. 

Laboratory tests by manufacturer 

a) Peel adhesion test as per ASTM C 794-93 

b) Compatibility test for sub strates as per ASTM C 1248-93 

c) Indentation Hardness durometer test as per ASTM C 661- 

93 

d) Adhesion and Cohesion test under cyclic movement as 

per ASTM C 719-93 

e) Tensile adhesion test as per ASTM C 1135-90 

f) Ultimate elongation and tensile strength as per ASTM D 

412 

The sealant manufacturer shall submit laboratory test results for 

adhesion and compatibility for each lot of aluminium extrusions 

and glass. 

Laboratory tests by Manufacturer 



299 

2 Aluminium Extrusions 

a) Durometer Shore Hardness as per ASTM D 

2240 

b) Tensile strength @ 150% elongation as per 

ASTM D 412 

c) Staining Test as per ASTM D-510 

1 set of test certificates shall be submitted for each 

lot supplied. 

2.25 Each lot and type of aluminium extrusions shall be accompanied with : 

a) certificate of mechanical properties and chemical compositions 

b) certificate of dimensional tolerances to DIN standard 

c) certificate of temper 

2.26 The contractor shall certify minimum anodising thickness for each lot and type 

of aluminium extrusions. 

2.27 Anodising thickness shall be checked on site on 10% of extrusions 

2.28 PVDF coating thickness shall be checked on site on 10% of extrusions 

6 Composite Aluminium Panels 

6.1 The manufacturer shall submit one test certificate for each lot type of 

composite aluminium panels for : 

a) Tensile strength and yield strength of composite panels as per ASTM 

E-8 

b) Tensile and yield strength of aluminium skin 

c) Elongation as per ASTM E 8 

d) Punching shear resistance as per ASTM D 732 

e) Impact test for denting (DUPONT) (0.5 kg and 1 kg steel balls at 500 

mm heigt) 

6.2 The following test result from approved fire test laboratory shall be submitted 

a) Flame spread and smoke developed indices as per ASTM E-84 

b) UBC 26-9 & NFPA for 30 minute Intermediate scale multi-storey 

apparatus test to prove no flame spread beyond area exposed directly 

to fire source. 

6.3 The following test certificates shall be submitted for PVDF/fluoropolymer 

coating satisfying AA 2605-98 

a) Corrosion resistance 

b) Salt spray resistance 

c) Weathering 

d) Colour retention 

e) Chalking resistance 

f) Glass retention 

g) Resistance to erosion 



300 

6.4 The coating agency shall certify performance requirements of all tests as per 

AAMA 2605-98 – voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test 

Procedure for superior performing organic coating on Aluminium Extensions 

& panels. 

6.5 The coating agency shall certify the minimum thickness of PVDF coating 

6.6 The Manufacturer shall certify conformance with BS 476, part 6, Class 0 and 

Part 7, Class 1 6.5. The manufacturer shall certify the percentage of resin in 

PVDF coating. 

7. EPDM. 

For each lot of EPDM, test certificates shall be submitted for 

a) shore hardness 

b) tensile strength 

c) elongation 

d) ozone resistance 

8. PTFE (Teflon) 

For each lot of polytetrafluorothylene (TEFLON) seperators, a set of 

manufacturer’s test certificates shall be supplied for 

a) tensile strength for elongation as per ASTM D-557 

b) compressive strength as per ASTM D-695 

c) shore D-hardness as per ASTM D 2240 

d) flexural strength as per ASTM D 790 

e) Impact strength as per ASTM D 256 

f) Deformation as per ASTm D 621 

g) Coefficient of friction 

9. Foam spacers and Mounting Tapes : 

For each lot, manufacturer’s test certificates shall be submitted for 

a) weathering 

b) tensile strength 

c) compression 

d) elongation 

SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES 

PREAMBLE 

1 General 



301 

The schedule of Quantities inclusive of its preamble shall be read in 

conjunction with all other section of tender/contract documents and drawings 

and, after award of contract, with approved shop drawings. 

The contractor’s rates and prices shall be deemed to include compliance with 

the above mentioned documents. The Contractor shall tender on the basis of 

the design, supply, installation, guarantees, testing, protection and 

maintenance up to the defects liability period Aluminium Structural Glazing, 

metal cladding, entrance doors. 

2 Item Description 

The cost of the following shall be deemed to be included in the rates of all 

items of aluminium structural glazing / Curtain wall system, Metal Cladding, 

Entrance Doors. 

a) Complete design, supply, installation, guarantees, testing and 

maintenance. 

b) Labour and all cost in connection therewith. 

c) Materials including those required for wastage, lapping, joinery and their 

transport and delivery to site 

d) Unloading, storing, packing, handling, hoisting and replacement of 

defective and rejected materials. 

e) Fabricating, assembling, setting, fitting, and fixing materials in position. 

f) All taxes (inclusive of works contract tax) duties, levies, octroi and fees 

payable to authorities and others in connection with all aspects of the 

works. 

g) Use of construction equipment, tools, scaffolding and temporary supports, 

ties/struts. 

h) Overhead charges and profits. 

i) Protection as specified and required as per site conditions including peeloff 

film and cleaning on completion of the works. 

j) Providing samples, mockups, engineering design, calculations and testing 

as specified in the technical specifications. 

k) Preparing preliminary drawings, shop drawing and as-build drawings. 

l) Energy for installation on site. 

m) Insurance and guarantees for design and installation. 

n) Compliance with the drawings, specifications and conditions of contract. 

o) Everything necessary-whether specified or otherwise to manufacture and 

install the items to best standards and trade practices. 

p) Co-ordination of site activities and program with those of the Contractors 

working on site under MIDC’s directions. 

q) Structural glazing and cladding shall have provision of perforated 

bid/vermin proof closures at bottom as required. 

3 Structural Glazing System 

a) the prices for the structural glazing system, cladding, doors, windows and 

louvers are to include for : 

Supports, mullions, transoms, sills, closures and sealing at all interfaces 

with structure, blind or shade pockets, splices, linings, fixing accessories, 



302 

brackets, shims, expansion joints, caulking, flashing, cappings, sealants, 

sealant backing materials, gaskets, drainage, sealing screw and bolt heads 

etc. hardware, weather stripping around openings, sashes, access hatches 

and panels, windows and doors, fixed and openable panels, bird-andvermin-proof 

closers, bimetallic isolation, moiseless joints, and specified 

lightening protection and all other items required for proper completion. 

b) The prices for glazed panels shall include grinding, polishing and swiping 

glass edges, glazing beads, gaskets, glass adaptors, setting blocks, glazing 

sealants, accessories for fixing, replacing damaged or defective glass and 

all other items required for proper completion. 

4 CLADDING SYSTEM 

The rate for cladding shall include for factory-fabricated composite cladding 

panels, brackets, shims, fixing accessories, closures, and sealing at interfaces 

with structure, flush setting of windows and louvers, drainage, sealants, birdand-vermin-proof 

closers and all other items required for proper completion. 

Mode of measurement & Payment : 

The measurement shall be on Sqm basis measured upto correct centimeter & 

contract rate shall be on square meter basis of the respective item executed 

satisfactorily. 

Item No. 36: 

Providing, erecting & commissioning of lift for 6 passenger to travel from ground 

floor to third floor which has 2 stop and 2 opening including materials, labours, 

connections, metering, cabling & supplying spares as listed in detailed item wise 

specifications. ………. Etc complete. 

The work shall be carried out as per the technical specifications given below. 

The Vertical Transportation Requirement 

Application 

No. of 

Units 

Capacity 

No of 

stops 

Total 

Travel 

App. 

meters 

In 

Speed 

Passenger 1 6 Pass 2 4 m 1 Mtr / Sec 

PROJECT DATA 

Type of Elevators 

Capacity 


Passenger Elevator 

6 Passenger / 408 Kgs 


303 

No. of Elevators 

Total no. of stops /landings 

Travel Height (in meters) 

Speed 

1 unit 

2 stops /2 openings 

4 m 

1.0 Mtr / Sec 

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET 

Model 

Drive 

Control 

Speed of Travel 

Power Supply 

Capacity & Load 

Shaft Dimensions 

Pit Depth (mm) 

Door Width (mm) 

Overhead HeightRequired (mm) 

Lintel HeightRequired (mm) 

ThyssenKrupp Easy MR 

VVVF 

Simplex full Collective 

1.0 meters per second 

AC 415/415V, 3 Phase and Single Phase, 

50 cycles/sec. 

408 kgs. (6 persons) 

1500 mm x 1400mm deep 

1350 mm 

800 mm x 2000 mm 

4200 mm 

2230 mm from FFL 

Car Size (mm) 

1100 (w) x 2100 (d) 

Car Design 

_ Car in SS hairline finish with rear glass 

panel 

_ Flooring: Anti Slip Dimpled Rubber. 

_ Diffused fluorescent lighting 

_ Car operating panel in Painted finish 

with luminous buttons 

_ Ventilation by pressure fans 

Car Entrance 

Automatic Telescopic opening in SS 

hairline finish 

Hoist way Entrance Automatic Telescopic opening SS 

hairline finish at all floors 

Special Features 

_ Call Registration in car and all 

(common) 

landings. 

_ Digital position indicators in car and all 

landings. 

_ Battery operated emergency light and 

alarm bell. 

_ Visual confirmation of call registration. 

_ Infra red detector to car door. 

_ Door open button. 

_ ARD ( Automatic Rescue Device) 

_ Intercom. 



304 

Mode of Measurement and Payment :- The measurement shall be on per No. 

basis. The contract rate shall be per No. of lift provided, erected and commissioned 

as per specified. 

Item No. 37: 

Providing and fixing Glass Mosaic tiles for dado in required color, position in 

approved pattern and in inlays laid on a backing coat of plaster of required 

thickness in Cement Mortar fixed using Diamond Star polymer cement base 3 mm 

of Bal Endura and filling joints with white cement with matching color pigment, 

curing and cleaning etc. complete as per detail drawing, as specified and as 

directed by Architect. 

37.1 General : The item pertains to providing and laying Marble Mosaic tiles flooring 

conforming to IS:1237-1990. The design of the tiles shall be got approved from the 


37.2 Material : The terrazzo cement tiles shall be of the colour and pattern as 

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge with chips of the sizes mentioned in the 

wording of the item and shall conform to IS:1237-1990. The sizes of tiles shall be one 

of the following approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, and shall be of 20 cm x 20 cm, 

25 cm x 25 cm, 30 cm x 30 cm. The thickness of tiles shall be 25mm. The tiles shall be 

of the colours to suit the design of the floor. The specimen of the tiles to be used shall 

be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge, who shall deposit in the office for 

reference. The cost of testing the tiles shall be borne by the Contractor. The samples 

tiles shall be got tested from the approved laboratory as per provisions in the 

IS:1237- 1990. 

37.3 Laying of Tiles : 

1. Bedding : Cement Mortar 1:4 for the bedding and neat cement mortar for pointing 

shall be of the proportion as specified in the item. When sand bed is mentioned in 

the item, sand used shall be coarse and shall not contain more than 5 percent of clay. 

The base of cement concrete bedding shall be laid and compacted to a reasonably 

true plain surface and to the required slopes and below the level of the finished floor 

to the extent of the thickness of the Marble Mosaic Tiles and mortar bedding. 

Cement concrete bedding if directed, shall be paid under a separate item. Cement 

mortar for bedding may be mixed manually or by a mechanical mixer. The amount 

of water added shall be the minimum necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for 

laying satisfactory bedding. Care shall be taken in preparing the mortar to ensure 

that there are no hard lumps that would interfere with the even bedding of the 

stones. Before 

spreading the mortar, the sub-floor or base shall be cleaned of all dirt, scum or 

laitance and of loose material and then well wetted without forming any pools of 

water on the surface. In case of R.C.C. floors, the top shall be left a little rough. All 

points of level for the finished paving surface shall be marked out. The mortar shall 



305 

then be evenly and smoothly spread over the base by the use of screed battens only 

over so much area as will be covered with tiles within half an hour. The thickness of 

the mortar bedding shall be about 20 mm. The required slope shall be given to the 

bed. When, sand bed is provided sand shall be spread to give a thickness of about 12 

mm. Cement mortar for the bedding and cement slurry for pointing shall be of the 

proportion as specified in the item. When sand bed is mentioned in the item, sand 

used shall be coarse and shall not contain more than 5 percent of clay. 

2. Fixing Cement Tiles : Before laying, the tiles shall be thoroughly wetted with 

clean water and sodleed in water for atleast 2 hours. Neat cement grout of honey like 

consistency shall be spread on the mortar bed over as much area as could be covered 

with the tiles within half an hour. The specified type of tiles shall be laid on the neat 

cement float and shall be evenly and firmly bedded to the required level and slope in 

the mortar bed. Each tile shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is firmly 

and properly bedded. There shall be no hollows left below tiles. If there is a hollow 

sound on gentle tapping of the tiles, such tiles shall be removed and reset properly. 

The mason shall make the joints of uniform thickness and in straight lines. The joints 

shall be 1 mm to 1.5 mm at the flooring and filled solidly with cement slurry for their 

full depth. The joints shall be struck smooth. But there shall be no smearing on 

mortar over the tiles. The tiles shall be laid so as to give continuous parallel long 

joints with cross joints at right angles to them. The edges of the adjoining tiles shall 

be in one plane. Where the tiles cover open edges, of floor or window sills the edges 

shall be neatly rounded off. This shall be included in the rate. When diamond 

pattern paving is provided in the item, the tiles shall be square and laid to the 

diamond pattern with triangular shaped tiles to make up the edges. In plain pattern 

stones on each course shall break joint with those in the next. 

The additional provisions are as under 

1. The thickness of joints shall not exceed 1.5mm. 

2. Joints shall be grouted with neat cement slurry in respect of gray cement tiles and 

coloured cement grout matching the colour of the tiles in respect coloured cement 

tiles. 

3. When the bedding and joints of the flooring have completely set, the surface shall 

be machine polished to give a smooth, even and true plane to the floor and 

thoroughly cleaned 

3. Polishing and Finishing : Polishing, finishing etc., shall conform to IS:1443. 

Polishing shall be done by machine to a smooth and plain surface. When a border of 

coloured tiles is included in the item, the tiles of the specified colour shall be laid in 

one tile width all round near the border. If a pattern of coloured tiles is to be 

provided it shall be mentioned in the special provisions and/or shown in the 

drawings. The joints of the plain tiles shall be filled with neat cement slurry and of 

coloured tiles with coloured cement slurry. 

37.4 Curing : The flooring shall be kept well wetted with damp sand or water for 

fourteen days. It shall be kept undisturbed for at least seven days. 



306 

37.5 Cleaning : All flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned and handed over clean and 

free from any mortar stains, etc. 

37.6 Item to Include : The item shall include all labour, material, tools and 

equipment, polishing the flooring, cleaning the sub-base, laying mortar bed cement 

mortar 1:4 and cement grout, fixing cement tiles as specified above and making up 

the joints. 

37.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The area of the flooring shall be 

measured in sqm correct up to 2 decimals. The contract rate shall be per sqm for the 

specified proportion of mortar bed. All other provisions of item Bd/A/7 are 

applicable for this item also. 



307 

SUBESTIMATE NO. 2 : PLUMBING WORKS 

Item No. 1 :- 



cum. size including removing the excavated material upto a distance of 50 M beyond 

the edge of excavation including the initial lift of 1.5 M, stacking or spreading as 

directed, bailing of sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation etc., and back 

filing the excavated pit or trench using the excavated material in layers including 

watering and ramming as required or as directed by Engineer-In-charge, including 

all labour and materials complete. 

1.1 General : The item refers to the excavation, in earth, soils of all types, gravel, 

sand, soft and hard murum and boulders up to 0.03 cum size. The excavation shall 

be for trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations, column footings, walls etc. and may be 

in wet or dry, in earth, and 

similar other soft or loose material. 


construction, as per the drawings, is to be started shall be first cleaned and cleared of 

all obstructions. The loose stones, bushes, rubbish, brushwood, trees along with 

roots, etc. shall be removed. The material shall be stacked or disposed off as directed. 

All the material shall be the property of MIDC. After clearing the site, the alignment 

or center lines or points shall be given by the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor 

shall establish the reference marks, benchmark pillars in masonry with M.S. Plate 

top of which shall be bench mark connected to GTS. The B.M. Pillars shall be 

maintained undisturbed by the contractor etc. and the widths for excavations shall 

be clearly marked by the contractor as directed, true to line, curve, level and slope. 

The contractor shall provide all labour and marking material such as wooden/steel 

pegs, white lime powder, oil paint, or any other suitable 

marking material at his own cost and he shall be fully responsible for the correctness 

of the line, curve and levels and slopes. 


Engineer-in-charge for taking the necessary measurements of cross sectional levels 



308 

along the alignment for measurement purposes. The levels recorded in the field book 

shall be signed by the Engineer-in-charge and authorised representative of the 

contractor in token of acceptance. The contractor shall remove all the material from 

the marked area of excavation by using labour, tools and equipments 

most suitable for excavation of soft material as enumerated in the item in wet or dry 

conditions. The excavation shall be true to line, curve, shape, level grade as per the 

drawings or as directed. The widths of excavations shall be as minimum to the 

widths required at the bottom and the vertical faces shall be as far as possible in 

plumb. Unless provided in the contract, no extra payment shall be made for the 

excavation on side slopes for stability of slopes. Contractor shall be fully responsible 

for the correctness of the excavation. Whenever the strata of different grade of soil 

not covered in this item is met, the excavation shall be stopped and the Engineer-incharge 

shall be 

notified to take the cross-sectional levels for taking the measurements and the same 

shall be recorded and practise as mentioned above shall be adhered to. The extra 

excavation in depth or on sides shall not be paid and the contractor will have to fill 

the extra excavated depths in layers to bring the correct level by watering and 

ramming at his own cost. 


components such as wall shall not be provided on soft strata covered under this item 

of excavation. The foundations for rafts, embedment of pipelines for water supply or 

drainage or gas may be laid on the foundation prepared on soft strata. The 

foundation level even if is confined within the soft layer, the final layer of excavation 

watered and brought to the required level and slope by ramming. The 

contractor shall not excavate below the line shown in the drawing or as directed. No 

foundation of any sort shall be laid unless the Engineerin- charge approves the strata 

on which foundations are to be laid and passes the depth of excavation to lay 

foundation and record the dimensions and elevations and types soils of the 

foundation pit, trench excavated, and shall be recorded in the field book adopting 

system already explained above. 



309 


separately unless provided in the contract. The type and designing of shoring shall 

be decided by the contractor, and shall get approved from the Engineer in Charge. 



1.6 Disposal of Excavated Material : All the material obtained from clearing the site 

or from excavation shall be the absolute property of MIDC. All materials obtained 

from clearing the site and excavation shall be disposed off or spread or stacked 

within a lead of 50 meters beyond the excavated area as directed by the Engineer in 

Charge. Materials suitable for back-filling or other use shall be stacked at a 

convenient place within a lead of 50 meters as directed for refilling or reuse. No 

excavated material shall be kept within 1.5 m distance from the outer top edge of 

excavation to avoid the falling of the stuff in the pit or trench. 

Surplus materials shall be used for levelling the ground around as directed within a 

lead of 50 meters. If the surplus materials are required to be conveyed and used or 

stacked beyond 50 meters 

contractor shall be paid for extra lead or the extra conveyance as per the terms of 

contract. 


accumulated in the pit or trench, from sub-soil water or from rains or from any other 

natural source, by manually or by pumping out as required. Unless provided for in 

the contract separately, no payment shall be made for bailing out the water. The 

contractor may be required to provide temporary bunds, or provide byepass 

arrangements to avoid entering of water in the excavation at his own cost. The 

drained water shall be properly disposed off, so as not to cause any damages to the 

excavated area nor to the surrounding structures. The contractor shall keep the 

excavated area dry for measurements and for laying of foundation mortar or 

concrete. 





310 


Engineer-in-charge and the foundation raft masonry above is constructed or the 

pipeline is laid, all the shoring shall have to be removed. The backfilling of the pit or 

trench to the original level or as shown in the drawing or as directed shall be made 

from the selected excavated material stacked separately for that purpose. The 

material shall be laid in layers of 15 to 20 cm in thickness, watered and then rammed 

properly. The backfilling shall only be done after receiving orders from the Engineerin-charge 

and without damaging the foundation raft or the pipeline etc. 



lantern and watchman shall be kept in proper position to indicate the danger zone. It 

is the responsibility of the contractor to take the adequate protective measures and 

safety of the excavation, people and workmen and surrounding properties and will 

have to bear the damages if caused. All the cost of protective measures 

shall be included in the item rate. 

1.11 Item to Include : The rate for this item, as per the agreement includes all labour 

and tools for clearing the site, marking out the excavation line outs, shoring and 

strutting, excavation of pits or trenches, bailing or pumping out water if not 

provided separately, removal of excavated material and disposal of material as 

directed, refilling of pits or trenches, adequate protective measures etc. Contractor 

shall also make the necessary arrangements for taking measurements. The rate also 

includes the cost of repairs due to excess excavations or slips. The item also includes 

payment of the damages if any, by the contractor. The disposal of the material is 

included within 50 m radius from the edge of excavation. The lift for excavation of 

1.5 m is covered by this item. 

The additional lifts shall be paid under Item No.Gen/A/2. The lead beyond 50 m 

shall be paid extra under Item No.Gen/A/9. 



measurements of the final excavated profile shall be taken if the excavation is less or 

more as directed by the Engineerin-charge or shall be measured as per drawings. 



311 

Excess excavation shall be recorded but shall be paid to the limited quantity as 

explained above. The quantity shall be measured in cubic meters and paid at the 

rate as per the contract agreement. 

Item No. 2:- 

Providing and laying galvanised irons pipes conforming to IS: 1239-1992 (Part I 

& II) and jointing etc. complete including cost of all specials for jointing of 

pipes using sun and safeda to be used for making joint perfectly watertight 

necessary scaffolding for internal and external work including taxes and 

duties , octroi etc. complete. ( Excluding excavation) 

C] HEAVY CLASS (Red) 

a) 15mm diameter 

b) 20mm diameter 

c) 25 mm diameter 

d) 32 mm diameter 

e) 40 mm diameter 

f) 50 mm diameter 

g) 65 mm diameter 

2.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing of Light, Medium and 

Heavy class, galvanised iron pipes and specials, of specified diameter, with 

screw and spigot joints, for external works with GI fittings and all 

connections, including excavation, in all strata backfilling & scaffolding, 

making holes in masonry/ concrete, remaking the same properly etc. 

complete. 

2.2 Materials : The galvanised iron pipes and specials shall be of the class 

and diameter nominal bore specified and shall conform to IS:1239- 1982. The 

pipes and fitting of which the galvanised has been damaged shall not be 

used. Unless otherwise specified, For water tight joints sun & safeda shall be 

applied. 

2.3 Excavation : The excavation shall be through all strata’s met with all lifts. 

The excavation shall be done only so much in advance of laying of pipes as to 



312 

cause least damage to the trench. In case of excavation across, a road, 

permission of road authorities shall be obtained for the excavation of the road 

surface which shall be made good and restored to the original condition at the 

contractor’s cost. At all road crossings, the trench shall be dug only for half the 

width of the road and pipe is laid at a time. The other half shall be excavated 

only after back filling is done over the laid pipe and making it suitable for the 

traffic. Care shall be taken to avoid accidents and inconvenience to public 

shall be minimum. All the pipes, water mains, cables, etc., met in the 

excavation shall be carefully protected and supported. Any damage done shall 

be made good by the contractor at his own cost and risk. The pipe shall be laid 

on a well-compacted bed in the trench. The trench after laying the pipe shall be 

refilled except at the joints, in layers and manually rammed. Care shall be 

taken to see that no earth, etc., gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be kept 

raised by about 5 cm for subsequent settlement. In the case of trench through 

rock, a bedding and cushioning of murum, good earth or sand shall be 

provided for the pipe. The trench at the joints shall be filled similarly after 

satisfactory testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff shall be disposed of 

satisfactorily without causing nuisance and any extra cost. The payment for 

excavation shall be paid under relevant item. 

2.4 Laying and Fixing : The plumbing contractor shall lay the pipeline as per 

the approved layout drawings issued by MIDC. The pipes shall be generally 

so laid or fixed as not to be exposed to the heat of the sun or be subject to any 

injury or risk to the pipe. As far as possible, the pipes shall be laid plumb 

and in straight and parallel lines. The pipe shall be laid to falling or raising 

gradients or dead level so as to avoid air locks. It should be possible to 

empty the pipes readily and completely by hydrostatic pressure. All watersupply 

pipes shall as far as possible, be kept outside of walls, partitions 

and floors and be exposed to view and accessible. They shall be used in 

standard lengths cut lengths being use only where necessary to make up 

the exact lengths. The pipe shall be laid into the trench and screwed with 



313 

sockets elbows, tees, bends, etc. as necessary. In making the joints, sun and 

safeda shall be used to make the joint watertight. No joint shall be located in 

the thickness of the walls. 

If the pipe is required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the 

cut end shall be file smooth and any obstruction in the bore shall be entirely 

eliminated. The rate includes wastage in cutting, etc. When the pipe is to be 

fixed to walls it shall be fixed with standard brackets, clips or holder bates 

keeping the pipe about 12 mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to 

the wall horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another when more 

than one pipe is laid unless unavoidable. The supporting clips, etc., for the 

pipe shall be spaced at about two metres or so as necessary. When holes are 

not left during construction they shall be cut into the walls or slabs, etc., to 

pass the pipe through or to fix clamps, etc. After fixing of the pipes, clamps 

etc., these shall be neatly made good. The scaffolding should be provided 

without any extra cost during laying, fixing & testing operations. 

2.5 Testing : On completion of laying the pipe line and fixing taps, etc. the 

pipeline shall be tested with a hydraulic pump for a pressure of 7 kg/sq. cm. or 

for any other pressure as directed. No leakages at the joints are allowable. 

Any leakage found shall be removed by redoing the joint satisfactorily, without 

extra cost. 

2.6 Item to Include : The item includes supply of galvanised iron pipes of 

specified diameter and class and specials, laying, jointing and fixing the pipe 

with the fittings including cutting pipes, wastage and threading the ends, 

testing the joints and all necessary labour, materials and tools, including 

scaffolding, making holes in masonry/ concrete, remaking the same properly. 

2.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The length shall be measured net 

on the straight and bends along the centre line of the pipes and fittings correct 

upto a cm. The contract rate shall be for one metre of specified class and 

diameter of pipe laid complete with fittings, clamps etc., as specified. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



314 

Item No.3:- 

Providing at department store Water Meters conforming to ISI marked class (B) 

confirmation to IS : 4064/1 excluding Non-return valve, external strainer etc. 

complete, for type & dia. Specified including taxes , duties and octroi. a ) 

Domestic Type 

6) 40 mm diameter ( Multi Jet ) 

This item covers the specifications for Water Meters conforming to 

IS : 4064/1, for following types for domestic & bulk supply of water. 

a) DOMESTIC TYPE: 15 mm to 50 mm dia. 

b) Bulk Type with removable mechanism: (Enclosed) 50 mm to 600 mm dia. 

3.2 Water Meter (Domestic Type) : 

2.2.1 Materials : The materials of different components shall conform to IS: 4064/1. 

The general requirements shall be as follows: 

2.2.1.1 The Body, Registration Box : The body and Registration box of water metre 

shall be made either from Type B materials as specified in the agreement, as stated 

below : 

Type A : The body of water meters shall be made from bronze, brass or any 

other corrosion resistant material e.g. Grey iron castings, blackheart malleable 

iron, pherodial graphite iron casting. 

Type B : The body of the water meters shall be made form suitable plastics. 

Note : Plastics shall have following qualities. 

i) It shall not affect the potability of water. 

ii) Elongation, 15 percent, Min. on a specimen of length 150mm (for 

procedure of determination of elongation) 

iii) Water absorption on immersion for 24 hours should not exceed 0.6 

percent by weight (for procedure of determination of water 

absorption). 

iv) It shall be capable of withstanding temperature up to 550 C 

without undergoing deformation or softening and becoming 

unsatisfactory in performance. 



315 

3.2.1.2 The Cap of water meter of type A may be of bronze, brass, plastics or 

aluminium alloy. For type B plastic aluminium alloy can be used. The cap shall be 

transparent and provision for locking shall be made. The wiper from inner side shall 

be provided for dry type water meters. 

3.2.1.3 Impeller and Piston, Impeller and Measuring Chamber, Gears and Piston, 

Bearings, Counter, Dial, Sealing etc shall be conforming to IS : 4064/1. The dial shall 

be marked with indestructible numbers and the measuring unit, which shall be in 

‘LITRES’. 

3.3 Manufacture : The manufacturing and the assembly shall be conforming to IS: 

4064/1. Filter or dirt box of adequate effective area shall be fitted on the upstream 

side of the meter. Water meters and their parts, especially parts coming in 

continuous contact with water shall be made of materials resistant to corrosion and 

shall be non-toxic and non-training. Use of dissimilar metals in contact under water 

shall be avoided as far as possible in order to minimise electrolytic corrosion. 

3.4 Performance Requirements : As per clause of IS : 4064/1, which are spelled out 

below : 

1. Temperature suitability at 450 C. 

2. Hydrostatic Test at 2 MPa. 

3. Head loss in the meter for nominal capacity 10 m and for continuous 

capacity 3 m 

4. Accuracy: + 2 %. 

3.5 Tests : Conforming to IS : 4064/1 which are spelled out below : 

1. Type test to check performance and characteristics of the meter. 

2. Production routine tests as per of the IS. 

3. Acceptance tests if specified in the agreement, the production routine tests 

shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer-in-charge or his 

representative. 

3.6 Markings : 

1. Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark, 

2. Nominal size in mm, 

3. Direction of flow on both sides of the meter, 



316 

4. Type of meter, 

5. Serial No. 

6. ISI or any Standard Mark. 

3.7 Bulk Type with removable mechanism: (Enclosed) 50 mm to 600 mm dia. 

3.7.1 The materials, manufacturing, testing, markings etc. will be similar to that 

specified for domestic type except for capacity rating and dimensions to measure 

large quantity of water. The casing of the meter shall be in Cast Iron. The unit of 

measurement marked on the dial in ‘LITRES’ or ‘KILOLITRES’, depending on the 

rating and size of the water meter. 

3.8 Item to include : The supply of water meters at the Departmental stores 

specified, as per the purchase order / tender and according to the respective 

specifications, including the complete assembly of the meters as per specifications, 

transportation upto the store, loading unloading, stacking at the location as directed, 

all taxes, levies, octroi etc. complete. 

3.9 Mode of Measurement & Payment : The Water Meters shall be measured in 

numbers for each type and size separately and paid fully on supply at departmental 

stores and on production of test/performance certificate or on acceptance testing 

carried out in presence of the Engineer-in-charge or his representative, as per the 

agreement. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.4:- 

Providing & fixing1984 in position heavy duty CP brass plug cock/screw cock/stop 

cock conforming to IS:781/1984 including necessary socket/union nut etc. complete 

for fixing cocks, sun and safeda must be used to make joint perfectly watertight. 

a) 15 mm diameter 

b) 20 mm diameter 

c) 25 mm diameter 

d) 32 mm diameter (Wheel valve Brass) 

e) 40 mm diameter (Wheel valve Brass) 

f) 50 mm diameter (Wheel valve Brass) 

4.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing screw down type plug cock 

or stop cock of heavy duty CP brass, of the specified diameter including necessary 

accessories. 



317 

4.2 Materials : The bib or stop cocks shall conform to IS:781. 

4.3 Fixing : The bib or stop cock shall be fixed into the pipe line with necessary 

sockets or union nut in places indicated on the drawing or as directed. Sun and 

safeda shall be used for complete watertight joint. If leakages observed on test, the 

joint shall be remade to make it leak proof. 

4.4 Item to Include : The item includes providing the screw down type CP brass bib 

cock or stop cock of the specified diameter, sun & safeda, all necessary materials, 

labour and use of tools. 

4.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be per number of 

screw down bibcock or stopcock fixed. Measurement shall be for the number of 

cocks fixed. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

------------------ 

Item No.5:- 

Providing and fixing screw down 65 mm (21/2") dia. wheeled stop tap of gun 

metal bearing I.S.I mark including sockets, union nut complete. 

5.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing screw down type plug cock 

or stop cock of heavy duty CP brass, of the specified diameter including necessary 

accessories. 

5.2 Materials : The bib or stop cocks shall conform to IS:781. 

5.3 Fixing : The bib or stop cock shall be fixed into the pipe line with necessary 

sockets or union nut in places indicated on the drawing or as directed. Sun and 

safeda shall be used for complete watertight joint. If leakages observed on test, the 

joint shall be remade to make it leak proof. 

5.4 Item to Include : The item includes providing the screw down type CP brass bib 

cock or stop cock of the specified diameter, sun & safeda, all necessary materials, 

labour and use of tools. 

5.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be per number of 

screw down bibcock or stopcock fixed. Measurement shall be for the number of 

cocks fixed. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



318 

Item No.6:- 

Providing and fixing 45 cm wide steel ladder of 40 mm x 6 mm mild steel flat 

stringers and steps of 18 mm diameter mild steel bar including fixing it in 1:2:4 

cement concrete block 60 cm x 30 cm x 30 cm and painting the ladder. 

Item shall be executed as per the wording of Item, approved drawing and direction 

of Engineer In Charge. 

Item to include : The item includes providing & fixing 45 cm wide steel ladder with 

all material, labour etc complete. The ladder shall be fixed in 1:2:4 C.C. block of size 

60 cm x 30 cm x 30 cm. The ladder shall be painted with one coat of red oxide & two 

coats of anticorrosive paint. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : Measurement shall be per RM .The contract 

rate shall be per running meter of ladder fixed. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 7:- 

Providing and fixing Wall Mounted European type commode including 

outlet, inter connections through walls including all fittings etc. complete.As per 

direction of Engineer - in - Charge. 

b) In Approved Colour (Torrin EWC of Hindware make ) 

7.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing the European type white 

glazed earthenware commode of white or of approved colour as specified with all 

necessary pipe connections up to the soil and vent pipes fixed on the outside of the 

wall. 

7.2 Materials : 

Commode : The European type water-closet pan (commode) shall conform to IS:2556 

with ‘S’ trap. The water-closet pan shall be of the best Indian make available in the 

market unless one of a particular make and quality and shall be white or of specified 

colour as specified in the item. This colour and the make of the commode shall be 

got approved by the Engineer-in-charge. 

Plastic Seat & Covers : The seat and cover shall be of thermosetting or thermoplastic 

conforming to IS:2548 as specified. Unless and otherwise specified these shall be of 

closed pattern. Thermosetting plastic used shall conform to grade 2 or 3 of IS:1300 

when it is phenolic or IS:3389 when of urea formaldehyde. 



319 

Thermo plastic materials used may be of Polystyrene conforming to type 2 or 

3 or IS:2267 or of polypropylene, appendix A of IS:2548. In public buildings where 

rough and heavy use of seats and covers are common, plastic seats shall be flat with 

solid moulding. 

The hinging device shall be bronze or brass with nickel chromium plating 

confirming to IS:2548 and the seat shall have not less than three rubber or plastic 

buffers unless otherwise specified. The cover shall be fitted with the same number of 

buffers as provided for the seat. Seats shall have a smooth finish and shall be non 

absorptive and free from cracks and crevices. They shall be capable of being easily 

cleaned and shall not be adversely affected by common solvents or household 

cleanser. 

Strength : The seats shall withstand without permanent distortions of the seat or 

hinge fittings as prescribed in IS:2548. 

7.3 Fixing : The European types water –closet pan and shall be fixed into the places 

indicated on the drawings or as directed. The vent and soil pipes shall run through 

the holes left in the floor and walls and the walls and floor made good. If holes are 

not left in the floor and wall, they shall be cut and the cavity surrounding the pipes 

made good properly after fixing the pipes. 

The pan shall be fixed into position in 1:1 cement mortar with the connecting 

‘S’ trap and pipes duly concealed including the lead PVC pipe from flushing cistern. 

All other fittings including the flushing cistern pipes etc., and the tests shall be 

carried out for leakages. 

The seat and lid shall then be fixed to pan with chromium-plated hinges. 

7.4 Item to Include : The item includes providing European type water closet 

(commode) pan ‘S’ trap, seat and lid cover, cast iron pipes, fitting and stop tap, lead 

pipe with nuts, fixing the pan and making good after fixing of pipes, testing the 

installation to give satisfactory results including all necessary labour, materials and 

use of tools etc. complete. 

7.5 Mode of Measurement of Payment : The measurement shall be number of 

European type WC (commodes) provided and fixed with accessories and the 



320 

contract rate shall be per number of European type water–closet (commode) of 

specified colour. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.8:- 

Providing and fixing of Over Counter wash hand basin Boul type with nickel / 

chrome plated fittings inlet and outlet connection, nickel plated pillar cock, down 

take GI pipes with C. P. bottle trap (with concealed nut bolt) cutting out in for 

below CI bracket etc. complete. As per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. (Make ; 

Optra of hinware) 

8.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing coloured wash hand basin of 

the specified size including all necessary fixtures and pipe connections up to the 

outside face of the wall and outlet waste pipe upto nearest nahani trap. 

8.2 Material : The wash hand basin shall conform to IS:771. The brackets shall 

conform to IS:775. Brass waste shall be 32mm and of standard pattern with standard 

pattern plug and brass chains. The lead PVC and galvanised pipes shall conform to 

IS:404 and IS:1239. The 15 mm CP brass pillar taps shall conform to IS:1795 & stop 

cock for inlet. 

8.3 Fixing : The basin shall be fixed at the location and level as per the drawings or 

as directed. The basin shall be supported on a pair of steel or cast iron cantilever 

brackets securely embedded in wall or fixed to wall with wooden cleats and screws. 

The height of the top of the basin from the floor shall be 75 cm or as directed. The 

waste pipe shall run through the wall. If holes are not left in the wall, they shall be 

cut and the cavity surrounding the pipes made good after fixing of the pipe. All the 

pipe connections shall be made as shown on the drawings or as directed. Brass stop 

tap shall be fixed on the supply pipe. The pipe connections shall conform to IS:1742. 

The lead waste pipe shall be provided with a trap. All the exposed pipes and 

brackets shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two coats of good oil paints 

of approved shade. 

8.4 Item to Include : The item includes providing of Basin of specified size and type, 

pillar taps brass stop tap, plug with chain, brackets, pipes, chromium bottle plated 

trap, painting, fixing of brackets, basin taps, plugs, lead PVC and galvanised pipes 



321 

up to the outside face of the wall and painting pipes, cutting and waste, making 

good damages, etc. including all necessary labour, materials and use of tools. 

8.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be number of 

wash hand basins of specified size and type provided and fixed with all accessories 

as per specifications. The contract rate shall be per number of wash hand basin of 

specified size and type provided and fixed. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No 9:- 

Providing and fixing stainless steel sink of 

ISI or Salem mark with waste 

coupling downtake 40 mm GI B Class pipe of required length or up to nahani trap 

etc. complete. 

a) 610mm x 510mm 

The work shall be carried out as per the item wording and as per directions of 

Engineer in charge. 

Item to Include : The item includes providing and fixing stainless steel sink of ISI or 

Salem mark with waste coupling downtake 40 mm GI B Class pipe of required 

length or up to nahani trap etc. complete. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The stainless steel sink fixed shall be 

measured in nos. The contract rate shall include the cost of all the materials and 

labour involved in all the operations described above and shall be per no. 

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.10 : 

Providing and fixing 10cm Nahani trap fixed with PVC plug bend and piec of 

PVC pipe up to plug bend scapolding etc. complete as per direction of Engineerin-charge.. 

b) 100 mm size 

10.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing cast iron nahani trap of 

specified size for sinks and baths, urinals etc. including the PVC grating, bends and 

cast iron pipe. 

10.2 Material : The PVC nahani trap, bend and pipe grating of specified size shall be 

used of the best available in the market and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. 



322 

The diameter of the PVC nahani trap shall be as specified in the item, which shall be 

the inside diameter of the bore of the pipes. 

10.3 Fixing : The PVC nahani trap with the bend and pipe piece shall be fixed in 

position as per the drawings or as directed. The joints shall be packed with wetted 

spun yarn in cement slurry sealed with 1:1 cement mortar. This shall conform to 

IS:1942. The joint with pipe/special within wall width shall be avoided. 

10.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, material, tools and equipments, 

cutting of holes / excavation and making good the cut holes etc. to complete the 

item satisfactorily. 

10.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be for one number 

of Nahani trap fixed including all fitting. Cutting and waste will not be paid for 

separately. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No 11:- 

Providing and laying UPVC pipes of standard make in line and level including 

necessary labour, bends, tees, fixtures etc. and testing the pipes complete. 

A] U.P.V.C pipes as drainage lines 

ii) 110 mm dia. 

B] U.P.V.C pipes as rain water down take pipes 

ii) 110 mm diameter 

11.1 General : The item covers specifications for providing and laying UPVC Pipes 

with all fixtures, bends tees etc. for drainage lines, rain water down take pipes. 


11.2.1 Rigid (Un plasticized) PVC Pipes : are widely accepted for applications such 

as cold water services internal/external water supplies systems, water mains, rain 

water system, soil waste piping system, and under ground (sewage pipes) drainage 

piping system. Rigid PVC is three times as rigid as polyethylene. It is also much 

stronger and will withstand much higher pressure for a given wall thickness. Joints 

can easily be made in rigid PVC pipes by solvent welding, and a whole range of 

injection moulded matching fittings and specials are available for these pipes. Rigid 

PVC pipes are normally available in the following shades: 

i)White/Cream, ii)Light to Dark Gray, iii)Black. 



323 

In general rigid PVC is resistant to most inorganic acids, alkalies and salts, as well as 

many organic chemicals. It is quite resistant to most effluents, salt water and plating 

solutions, corrosive fumes, soils which lead to its applications over a wide field. The 

material is also perfectly safe with potable water, whether hard or soft, and in the 

former case it tends to retard the formation of scale. Those materials, which do attack 

it, include concentrated oxidizing acids, esters, ketones, aromatic and chlorinated 

hydrocarbons, organonitro compounds, organoamino compounds, lacquer solvents 

and acetic anhydride. 

The pipes shall be reasonably round and shall be supplied in straight lengths 

with socketed ends. The internal and external surfaces of pipes shall be smooth & 

clean, free form grooving and other defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and square 

with the axis of the pipe. The pipe shall be designated by external diameter and shall 

conform to IS: 4985 (revised) in all respects. 

11.2.2 Fittings: Fittings used shall be of the same make as that of PVC pipes, injection 

moulded or made in cast iron and shall conform to Indian Standard wherever 

available. 

Laying : 

11.3.1 Trenches : The trench bottom shall be carefully examined for the presence of 

hard objects such as flints, rock protrudes or tree roots etc. Pipes shall be bedded in 

sand or soft soil free form rock and gravel. Back fill 15cm above the pipe shall also be 

of fine sand or soft soil. The width of trench shall not be less 

than outside di a metre of pipe plus 15cm on either side of pipe. In case of gravel 

soils, pipes shall be laid at least 90cms below the ground level (measured from 

surface of the ground to the top of the pipe). 

11.3.2 For Rain Water down take Pipes : The pipe shall fixed along the surface of wall 

in true vertical line. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall by providing M.S. galvanised 

clamps, which shall nailed to wooden pegs embedded in the masonry. The M.S. 

clamps shall be provided at a distance not more than 2.0 m. To cover the offsets in 

the masonry offsets shall be used. At the cover end of pipe shoe shall be provided 

the M.S. clamp shall be fixed at every joint in pipe/fixture/offset, shoe. 

11.4 Jointing : 



324 

11.4.1 Solvent Welded Joints : Non Heat Application Method : In this method, 

instead of forming a socket on one pipe and spigot on other, an injection moulded 

socket fitting or coupler is used, with a provision to take in the pipes at both ends. 

After properly cleaning ends of both the pipes the solvent cements are applied on 

the surfaces to be jointed and the joint is made at ambient temperature. Injection 

moulded fittings only shall be used in preference to fabricated fittings. Only solvent 

recommended by the manufacturers of the pipes shall be used and full load on the 

joints applied only after 24 hours. The pipe shall be cut perpendicular to the axis of 

the pipe length with a metal cutting saw. Pipe ends have to be beveled slightly with 

a beveling tool (Remer) at an angle of about 30 degree. The total length of insertion 

socket (injection moulded socket or couplet) shall be marked on the pipe and 

checked how far the pipe end could be inserted into the fitting socket. Attempt shall 

be made to push the pipe to marked distance, if not possible it shall at least be 

pushed for 2/3 of this distance. 

Dust, oil, water grease etc. shall be wiped out with a dry cloth from the 

surface.Further the grease should be thoroughly removed with a suitable solvent, 

such as methylene chloride or as an alternative the outside surface of the pipe and 

the inside of the fitting may be roughened with emery paper. 

Generous coatings of solvent cement shall be evenly applied on the inside of 

the fittings around the circumference of the full length of insertion and on the 

outside of the pipe end up to the marked line with a brush of suitable dimension. 

The pipe shall be pushed into the fitting socket and held for 2 minutes as otherwise 

the pipe may come out of the fitting due to the slippery quality of cement and the 

tapering inside bore of the fitting. The surplus cement on the pipe surfaces shall be 

wiped out. If the solvent cement has dried up too much or the tapering of the socket 

is too steep, jointing will not be proper and pipe will come out of the fitting. 

In summer months joints shall be made preferably early in the morning or in 

the evening when surrounding environment is cooler. This will prevent joint from 

pulling apart when the pipe cools off at night. Heat application method for jointing 

shall not be allowed. 



325 

11.4.2 Flanged Joints : For jointing PVC pipes particularly of larger size to valves 

and vessels and larger size metal pipes where the tensile strength is required the 

joint is made by the compression of a gasket or ring seal in the face of CI flange. 

Flanges solvent welded to the PVC pipes shall be supplied by the manufacturers. 

11.4.3 Rubber Ring Joints : Rubber ring joints can provide a watertight seal but do 

resist pull. As such these may be used only as repairs collar and for jointing pipes 

larger than 110mm. Such joints may be provided on pipes, which are buried in the 

ground and supported throughout on bedding so that they are not subject to 

movement and longitudinal pull. The material of rubber ring shall conform to IS : 

5382-1985, where aggressive soil are met with, synthetic rubbers perform better for 

jointing. The ring shall be housed in a groove formed in plastic or metallic housing. 

The ring shape and the method of compressing the ring vary considerably in 

different type of joints. Most joints often require the application of lubricating paste, 

which shall be procured from the manufacturer of PVC pipes. 

11.5 Measurements : The length shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm 

for the finished work which shall include PVC fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, 

reducer, crosses, plugs, sockets, nipples and nuts, but exclude, taps, valves, etc. All 

pipes and fittings shall be classified according to their outside diameter. Reducer 

shall be measured along with the larger diameter pipe. As far as jointing is 

concerned even though explained in foregoing paras the jointing of 

pipes shall be carried out as per the code of practice if specified by the manufacture 

and the deviations of any in the code of practice by the manufacturers be strictly 

taken care off. 

11.6 Rate : The rate shall include the cost of labour and material in all the operation 

described above except excavation in trenches, sand filling all around the pipes, 

metal pipe used for encasing PVC pipe and anchor blocks, unless otherwise 

specified. 

Item No.12: 

Providing and fixing Stainless steel Continental towel ring square with 20 mm 

diameter pipe in bathrooms and wherever necessary manufactured as per best 



326 

engineering practice or as per I.S. wherever applicable with necessary materials 

and labour cost etc. complete. As per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. (Jaquor 

Make) 

12.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing stainless steel towel ring of 

20 mm diameter of specified size in bathrooms. 

12.2 Material : The stainless steel material shall be used for manufacturing towel rod. 

Stainless Steel Fittings : These shall be stainless steel conforming to SS 316. These 

shall be manufactured from hot rolled stainless steel tubes and plates. These shall be 

well made and free from flaws and defects of all kinds. 

Screw Holes : The screw holes shall be suitable for counter sunk head wood screws, 

and of specified sizes. The size of the holes shall be such that when it is counter sunk 

it shall be able to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk head of wood screw 

specified. The towel rod to be actually provided in a particular work shall however, 

be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. Screws used for fittings shall be of the same 

metal, and finish as the fittings. However, chromium plated brass screws or stainless 

steel screws shall be used for fixing fittings. These shall be of the size as indicated in 

respective figures. The towel rod of specified size and design, manufactured as per 

best engineering practice and as approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be used. 

The sample, approved shall be kept in the office of the Engineer-in-charge for 

verification. 

12.3 Fixing : The towel rod shall be fixed at the position and level from the floor as 

shown in the drawing or as directed. The holes in the walls shall be drilled by the 

drilling machine. The screws shall be fixed in the holes by inserting the rawal plugs 

of appropriate size. On fixing of the towel rod, the damages if any caused to walls 

shall be made good by the contractor at his cost. 

12.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, material, tools and equipment for 

providing and fixing the towel rod of specified size and material. 

12.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be per number of 

the towel ring provided and fixed and the contract rate shall be per number of 

specified size and material. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



327 

Item No.13:- 

Providing and fixing 32 mm diameter Bottle trap P.V.C. polymer scratch resistant, 

antistatic with guarantee against any manufacturing defect including socket, 

union nuts etc. complete. Spec: (As directed by Engineer-in-Charge) (make : Allied 

Range Jaquor) 

The work shall be executed as per item wordings & as per the directions of Engineerin-charge. 

The work shall be carried out as per the specifications. The materials used 

for the work shall conform to the relevant IS Specifications and as per approved 

make. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be on per No. basis. 

The contract rate shall be on per No of 32 mm diameter Bottle trap provided & fixed 

as specified. 

Item No.14:- 

Providing and fixing 15 mm diameter Angle cock with flange P.V.C. polymer 

scratch resistant, anti-static with guarantee against any manufacturing defect 

including socket, union nuts etc. complete. Spec: (As directed by Engineer-in- 

Charge) (Kubix Rang Jaquor make ) 




make. 


The contract rate shall be on per No of 15 mm diameter Angle cock provided & fixed 

as specified. 

Item No 15:- 

Providing and fixing soap dish with all types of fixtures including labour charges 

including transport charges etc. complete. (Continental Jaquor Make) 



328 

15.1 General : The item covers providing and fixing soap dish. 

15.2 Material : The soap dish shall be of the manufactured of S.S, flow/fault, strong, 

and resistant wear. It shall be of approved make size and colour. Unless ordered the 

colour of the soap dish shall be matching to the colour of tiles fixed for dado. 

15.3 Fixing : The soap dish shall be fixed at 450 mm to 600 mm above floor as 

approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The item includes 20 mm C.M. 1:3 plaster and 

neat cement paste as bedding to fix the soap dish. The joints between files and soap 

dish shall be neatly finished as per tiles fixed for dado. The location of soap dish 

fixing shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge. 

15.4 Item to Include : Item includes providing soap dish, C.M. 1:3 plaster, cement 

paste, labour etc. 

15.5 Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be number of soap 

dish fix. The contract rate shall be per no of soap dish fixed. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.16:- 

Providing and fixing 15 mm dia 2 Way BIB cock long body with flange P.V.C 

polymer scratch resistance, anti - static with guarantee against any manufacturing 

defect including socket, union nuts etc. complete.As per direction of Engineer - in 

- Charge. 




make. 


The contract rate shall be on per No of 15 mm diameter 2 Way Bib cock provided & 

fixed as specified. 

Item No 17:- 

Providing and fixing Jet Spray with flange P.V.C polymer scratch resistance, anti - 

static with guarantee against any manufacturing defect including socket, union 



329 

nuts etc. complete.As per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. (Allied Range Jaquor 

Make) 




make. 


The contract rate shall be on per No for Jet Spray provided & fixed as specified. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No 18:- 

Providing and fixing Flush Valve of approved quality etc complete. As per 





make. 


The contract rate shall be on per No for Flush Valve provided & fixed as specified. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No 19:- 

Providing and fixing 15 mm dia Piller cock P.V.C polymer scratch resistance, 

antistatic with guarantee against any manufacturing defect including socket, 

union nuts etc. complete. As per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. (Kubix 

Jaquor Make) 




make. 


The contract rate shall be on per No of 15 mm diameter Piller Cock provided & fixed 

as specified. 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



330 

Item No 20:- 

Providing and Fixing of Mirrors in Toilets of approved Indian quality, copper 

plated with 10 mm thick plywood backing in the masonry etc. complete.As per 





make. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be on per Sqm. basis. 

The contract rate shall be on Sqm for Mirror in Toilet provided & fixed as specified. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 21: 

Providing and Fixing of Automatic Censors Urinals with all fitting and fixture etc 

complete as per direction of Engineer - in - charge. (Hindware make) 

21.1 General : The item pertains to the provision and fixing of white porcelain lined 

urinal pot, and spreader arrangement as mentioned in the item including all fitting 

and down take pipe connection. 

21.2 Materials : Lipped Urinal Pot: Urinal basins shall be of flat back or corner wall 

type lipped in front. These shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS:2556 

(Part VI) Sec. The urinals shall of one piece construction. Each urinal shall be 

provided with not less than two fixing holes of minimum dia 6.5mm on each side. 

Each urinal shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type and inlet or supply 

horn for connecting the flush pipe. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the selfdraining 

type. It shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet of the urinals. At the 

bottom of the urinals an outlet horn for connecting to an outlet pipe shall be 

provided. The exterior of the outlet horn shall not be glazed and the surface shall be 

provided with groves at right angles to the axis of the outlet to facilitate fixing to the 

outlet pipe. The inside surface of the urinal shall be uniform and smooth throughout 

to ensure efficient flushing. The bottom of pan shall have sufficient slope form the 

front towards the outlet such that there is efficient draining. The following tolerances 

may be allowed on the dimensions: 

a) On dimension 50mm and over + 5 percent 

b) On dimension less than 50mm + 2 mm 

c) On all angles + 3 degree 

20.3 Fixing : Lipped urinal (Single or range) installation shall consist of an automatic 

flushing cistern, GI flush and waste pipe. The capacity of flushing cistern and 

relevant sizes of flush pipe for urinals in a range shall be as per drawing or as 

directed. Flushing cistern shall be paid separately under relevant items. Waste pipe 



331 

shall be of 32 mm nominal bore GI pipe and shall be paid separately. Urinals shall be 

fixed in position by using wooden plugs and screws. It shall be at a height of 65 cm 

from the standing level to the top of the lip of the urinal, unless otherwise directed 

by the Engineer-in-Charge. The size of wooden plugs shall be 50 mm x 50 mm at 

base tapering to 38 mm x 38 mm at top and of length of 5.0 cms. These shall be fixed 

in the wall in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand). After the plug fixed in the 

wall, the mortar shall be cured till it is set. Each urinal shall be connected to 32 mm 

dia waste pipe which shall discharge into the channel or a floor trap. The connection 

between the urinal and flush or waste pipe shall be made by means of putty or white 

lead mixed with chopped hemp. 

20.4 Item to Include : The item includes providing the lipped urinals of specified 

size with all accessories, fixing and jointing all inlets and outlets, with all labour and 

use of tools etc. complete. 

20.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : Urinals provided and fixed shall be 

measured in numbers. 

The contract rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all 

the operations described above and shall be per number. 

Item No. 22: 

Providing & fixing Shower cubical with all fitting and fixture and 8 mm toughened 

clear glass etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in - charge. (Droma make) 

21.1 General : Providing & fixing Shower cubical with all fitting and fixture and 8 

mm toughened clear glass etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in - charge. 

22.2 Materials : Hinge for glass / Wall, Bracket, Water disperser, Magnetic seal, Soft 

Nose seal, Towel rod with handle, Handle, In line support ber with clamps with 8 

mm Toughned Clear Glass. 


The contract rate shall be on Sqm for Glass in Toilet provided & fixed as specified. 

Item No. 23: 

Providing and supplying TOTO make Renesse Shower tower Thermostatic of 

code TMX95A V200 with push buttons active operation of shower, handshower 

and 3 body spray, Temperature control handle, Volume control switch etc 

complete as per direction of Engineer - in - charge. 





332 


make. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be on No. basis. The 

contract rate shall be on No for Panel in Toilet provided & fixed as specified. 

Item No. 24: 

Constructing 0.3 m x 0.3 m (internal size) BB masonry, 230 mm thick in 1:6 cement 

mortar chamber for gully trap; with stone ware gully trap 100 mm including 100 

mm cement concrete bedding, 1:4:8 inlet connections etc. complete up to 1.5 m 

depth and 20 mm thick cement plaster, 1:3 cement mortar both for inside and 

outside faces etc. complete including cost of CI frame and cover etc. complete. 

(Including excavation) 

a) With CI covers. 

24.1 General : The item pertains to the providing and fixing of stoneware gully trap 

outside the building including cast iron grating in the sink, connecting glazed 

stoneware pipe, brick masonry chamber with cast iron lid and cast iron grating for 

the gully trap including providing and fixing cover to chamber as specified. If 

necessary, the excavation shall be done in all strata. The cost of the excavation is 

included in the unit rate of the item. 

24.2 Materials : Cast iron grating in the sink shall be of the size as shown on the 

drawings or as directed. A similar cast iron grating shall be provided for the trap in 

the chamber outside. The chamber shall have a 

cast iron frame and cover or RCC cover. Stoneware gully trap shall be 100 mm size 

and shall be the best quality available in the market and approved by the Engineer. 

Stoneware pipes shall conform to IS:651 and shall be of the internal diameter 

indicated on the drawings or as directed. The bricks and the mortar shall conform to 

the general specifications for the respective items. 

24.3 Fixing : The position and construction of gully trap chamber shall be as per 

drawing or as directed. The general construction shall be as per following. The gully 

trap shall be set into 1:4:8 cement concrete extending 30cm. beyond the trap on three 

sides over which shall be constructed one brick masonry chamber of the dimensions 

0.3 x 0.3 m. There will be wall on the fourth side. The brick masonry of 230 mm thick 

shall be constructed in the cement mortar 1:6. The inside shall be plastered with 

cement mortar 1:3. The outside chamber above ground shall be plastered 20 mm 

thick C.M. 1:3 150 mm below natural ground. The top lid of cast iron along with the 

cast iron frame shall be fixed in brick masonry CC 1:2:4 and neat cement finished. 

Stoneware pipe shall run through the hole kept through wall. Cast iron grating shall 



333 

be fixed in the bath or the site and the hole shall be made good properly. The trapin 

the chamber shall have a similar cast iron grating. 

24.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, material (Gully trap,C.I. grating 

pipes and fittings, bricks, mortar etc.), tools and equipment, construction of chamber, 

CI frame and cover or RCC cover of required thickness etc. to complete the item 

satisfactorily. (CI frame as cover up to 8 kg 1 No) 

24.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be for one gully 

trap fixed. The measurement shall be for the number of gullytraps fixed including 

chamber etc. as described in the item. 

Item No. 25: 

Construction of BB masonry (230 mm thick in CM 1:6) sewer trap chamber or 

ordinary chamber with 20 mm. thick cement plaster in 1:3 CM cement concrete 

bedding M-75 grade concrete and CI grating, including RCC precast frame and 

cover etc. complete for depth upto 1.50 m (including cost of grating and 

excavation) 

a) 60 x 60 cm (internal size) 

b) 90 x 45 cm (internal size) sewer trap chamber. 

25.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing of sewer trap outside the 

building including cast iron grating, construction of brick masonry chamber of 

specified size, with RCC precast frame and cover etc. of 80 mm thickness in the 

grade of M-20 

25.2 Materials : The bricks and the mortar shall conform to the general specifications 

for the respective items. 

25.3 Construction : The position and construction of sewer trap chamber shall be as 

per drawing or as directed. The general construction shall be as specified in the 

wording of item of specified size. 

Fixing : The position and construction of sewer trap chamber shall be as per drawing 

or as directed. The general construction shall be as per following. The sewer trap 

shall be set into 1:4:8 cement concrete extending 30 cm beyond the trap on three 

sides over which shall be constructed one brick masonry chamber of the dimensions 

0.3 x 0.3 m. There will be wall on the fourth side. The brick masonry shall be 

constructed in the cement mortar 1:6. The inside shall be plastered with 20 mm 

cement mortar 1:3. The part of chamber above ground shall be plastered 20 mm thick 

CM 1:3 for 150 mm below natural ground. The top lid of cast iron along with the cast 

iron frame shall be fixed brick masonry and plaster. Stoneware pipe shall run 

through the hole kept through wall. Cast iron grating shall be fixed in the bath or the 

site and the hole shall be made good properly. The trap in the chamber shall have a 

similar cast iron grating. 



334 

25.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, material (pipes and fittings, 

bricks, mortar etc.), tools and equipment, construction of chamber, RCC precast 

frame and cover etc. to complete the item 



of sewer trap chamber of specified size. 

Item No. 26: 

Providing and fixing in position salt-glazed earthen ware sewer trap with 

necessary M-15 grade CC bedding, CI grating etc. complete. 

a) 100 x 100 mm diameter. 

The item is similar to item Bd/F/23 for providing and fixing Nahani tarp. In this 

item instead of Nahani trap sewer trap of specified size shall be provided and fixed. 

All the provisions of item Bd/F/23 are also applicable for this item also. 

26.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing earthenware sewer trap of 

specified size for sinks and baths including the cast iron grating, bends and cast iron 

pipe. 

26.2 Material : The earthen ware sewer trap, bend and pipe grating of specified size 

shall be the best available in the market and approved by the Engineer. The C.I. 

granting shall be provided. 

26.3 Fixing : The earthenware sewer trap with the bend and pipe piece shall be fixed 

in position as per the drawings or as directed. The joints shall be sealed with 1:1 

cement mortar. This shall conform 

to IS:1942. 

26.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, material (Earthen ware sewer 

trap, C.I. grating pipes and fittings), tools and equipment, cutting of holes and 

making good the cut holes etc. to complete the item 



of Earthen ware sewer trap fixed including all fitting. Cutting and waste will not be 

paid for separately. 



335 

SUBESTIMATE NO. 3 : INTERIOR WORKS 

Item No.1: 

Providing & Applying Plaster of Paris Punning in average 12 to 25mm thickness 

to walls, ceiling, beams & columns to bring the surface in plumb Line & Level 

including making the surface smooth, providing required grooves on top of 

skirting etc. complete as per direction of Engineer In Charge. 

1.1 Description: Providing & applying plaster of paris punning in average 12mm 

thickness on walls, ceiling, beams & columns to bring the surface in plumb line 

& level, including making the surface smooth, providing required grooves on 

top of skirting & other locations complete as per directions. 

** Rate including cost of chipping & scrapping neeru or any other finish on the 

existing plastered surface. 

** Rate including cost of transportation, loading, unloading, scaffolding, 

wastage, taxes etc. Nothing will be paid extra. 

1.2 Workability: Workability should be satisfactory to the Engineer- incharge/consultant. 

Anything defective or not accepted by Engineer-incharge/consultant 

should be removed/ rectified without delay & with the cost 

& risk of contractor 

** All complete as per approval & instructions of Engineer-incharge. 

1.3 Mode of Measurement & payment: Measurements shall be actual executed 

area measured in Sqm & paid accordingly. 

** The contract rate shall be per SqM basis. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.2: 

Providing and applying washable oil bound distemper conforming to IS:428-1993 

of approved colour & shade to old and new surface including scaffolding 

preparing the surface to receive primer & finishing coats. 

b) Two coat 

2.1 General : The item pertains to providing and applying washable Oil Bound 

Distemper of approved colour to old or new plastered or masonry surfaces for 

the specified number of coats. 

2.2 Material : Oil emulsion (Oil Bound) washable distemper (IS:428) of approved 

brand and manufacture shall be used. The primer where used as on new work 

shall be cement primer or distemper primer as described in the item. These 



336 

shall be of the same manufacture as distemper. The distemper shall be diluted 

with water or any other prescribed thinner in a manner recommended by the 

manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for day’s work 

shall be prepared. The distemper and primer shall be brought by the contractor 

in sealed tins in sufficient quantities at a time to suffice for a fortnight’s work, 

and the same shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the 

Engineer-in-Charge. The empty tins shall not be removed from the site of work, 

till this item of work has been completed and passed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge. The empty carriers shall be the property of the contractor and however 

will not be removed from site without permission of Engineer-in-Charge. 

2.3 Scaffolding : 

1. Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports tied 

together by horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No 

bullies, bamboos or planks shall rest on or touch the surface. 

2. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to 

avoid damage or scratches to walls. 

3. For white washing the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected. 

2.4 Preparation of Surface : 

1. For new work the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or 

colour wash by washing and scrubbing. The surface shall then be allowed to 

dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be sand papered to give a smooth and 

even surface. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of 

plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the 

undulations and then sand papering the same after it is dry. 

2. In the case of old work, all loose pieces and scales shall be removed by sand 

papering. The surface shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt etc.\ Pitting in plaster 

shall be made good with plaster of Paris mixed with the colour to be used. The 

surface shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paper and 

made smooth. A coat of the distemper shall be applied over the patches. The 

patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of 

distemper is applied. 

2.5 Priming Coat : The priming coat shall be with distemper primer or cement 

primer, as required in the description of the item. The application of the 

distemper primer shall be as described above. 

Note : If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely, cement primer shall 

be applied before distempering the walls. But if distempering is done after the 

wall surface is dried completely, distemper primer shall be applied. 



337 

2.6 Application of Oil Bound Distemper : 

1. Oil bound distemper is not recommended to be applied, within six months 

of the completion of wall plaster. However, newly plastered surfaces if 

required to be distempered before a period of six months shall be given a 

coat of alkali resistant priming paint conforming to IS: 109 and allowed to 

dry for at least 48 hours before distempering is commenced. For old work 

no primer coat is necessary. 

2. Distemper Coat : For new work, after the primer coat has dried for at least 

48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth for 

receiving the distemper, taking care not to rub out the priming coat. All 

loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. One coat of distemper 

properly diluted with thinner (water or other liquid as stipulated by the 

manufacturer) shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes in both 

direction followed immediately by vertical ones in both direction, which 

together constitutes one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied in the 

same way. Two or more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be 

applied over the primer coat to obtain an even shade. A time interval of at 

least 24 hours shall be allowed between successive coats to permit proper 

drying of the preceding coat. For old work the distemper shall be applied 

over the prepared surface in the same manner as in new work. One or more 

coats of distemper as are stipulated shall be applied to obtain an even and 

uniform shade. 15 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall be used. After 

each days work, brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap 

solution and hung down to dry. Old brushes, which are dirty and caked 

with distemper, shall not be used on the work. 

2.7 Protective Measures : Doors, windows, floors, article of furniture etc. and such 

other parts of the building not to be white washed, shall be protected from 

being splashed upon. Splashing and droppings, if any shall be removed by the 

contractor at his own cost and the surfaces cleaned. Damages if any to furniture 

of fittings and fixtures shall be recoverable from the contractor. 

2.8 Item to Include: Item includes all labour, material, equipments such as brushes, 

scrappers, polish papers etc., scaffolding, cleaning of the area etc. complete as 

per the specifications. The item also includes removing nails, marking good 

holes, cracks, patches etc. The item also includes cleaning of windows / doors / 

flooring etc spoiled during painting. 


1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. and area shall be 

calculated in m2 correct to two place of decimals. The contract rate shall be 

on Sqm basis. 



338 

2. Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and the area so 

measured shall be increased by the following percentages to allow for the 

girthed area. 

Corrugated asbestos cement sheet 20% 

Semi corrugated asbestos cement sheet 10% 

3. Cornices and other such wall or ceiling features, shall be measured along 

the girth and included in the measurements. 

4. The number of coats of each treatment shall be stated. Not exceeding 50 

sqm. each with material similar in composition to the surface to be 

prepared. 

5. Work on old treated surfaces shall be measured separately and so described. 

The contract rate shall be per sqm area painted including all material and 

labour involved in all the operations described above. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.3: 

Providing & Applying superior quality of Luster Paint on wall of approved make 

& shade, filling the dents with approved filler putty. gypsum/approved crack 

filler ,binder, cleaning & making the surface dust free, preparing surfaces, 

applying a coat of sealer or primer as per the manufacturers specifications, 

applying two undercoats & one finished coat of approved paint to achieve the 

required finish including scaffolding, cleaning etc. complete as per detailed 

drawing, as specified and as directed by Engineer In Charge. 

General 

i) Double scaffolding shall be used for work. All painting work shall proceed 

from top to bottom. In case of internal painting ceiling shall be painted before 

walls. 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

Materials to be used shall be of 1 st quality from approved manufacturers of 

approved shade. 

Work shall be carried out by experienced and skilled workers. 

Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt, mortar drops oil paints, 

scales etc. by wire brushing, scraper tools. 

v) In case of ready mixed paints are used and if thinning is required, only the 

brand recommended by the paint manufacturer shall be use. 



339 

vi) 

All subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried 

thoroughly. One coat shall constitute of one horizontal stroke immediately 

followed by one vertical stroke, in all cases. 

Paints For Walls / Ceiling 

i) New plaster surfaces shall be completely dry before application of paint. 

ii) Surface shall be prepared as per IS - 2395 (Part - I): 1966. 

iii) A putty of POP and water shall be applied on entire surface including filling up 

of undulations etc. 

iv) The surface shall be sand papered and dusted off with a clean cloth. 

v) Alkali resistant cement primer as recommended by manufacturer of paint, shall 

be applied (one coat only) and allowed to dry for 48 hours. 

vi) Primed surface shall be lightly sand papered and dusted off. 

vii) The thinning of plastic emulsion shall be done with water and a thinned coat of 

paint shall be applied on the absorbent surface as primer. Surface shall be 

perfectly dry before priming coat of Paint is applied. 

viii) No subsequent coats shall be applied till the preceding coat has dried for 2 to 3 

hours and gets hard. Two or more coats shall be applied on the priming coat 

by using roller or spray gun to get a flat uniform and velvet smooth finish. 

ix) Washing of surface shall not be done with 3 to 4 weeks of application of paint. 

Materials of paint shall be from the approved Manufacturers 

The rate of application shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. 

Item to include providing and applying Lustre Paint of superior quality and of 

approved make, colour and shade to the new surfaces in 3 or more coats including 

preparation of surfaces, to receive the paint and applying primer and putty etc. all 

complete as per manufacturers specification as per direction of Engineer In Charge. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : 



on Sqm basis. 



girthed area. 







340 



prepared. 




---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.4: 

Providing and applying plastic emulsion paint conforming to IS:5411- 1991 part I 

of superior quality of approved make, colour and shade to the old & new surfaces 

in two coats, over primer including scaffolding, preparing the surfaces to receive 

the paint and applying putty etc. complete. 

4.1 General : The item pertains to providing and applying plastic emulsion paint of 

approved colour to old or new plastered or masonry surfaces for the specified 

number of coats. 

4.2 Material : Plastic emulsion paint shall be conforming to IS:5411. Paints, oil 

varnish etc. of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. Only ready 

mixed paint (Exterior grade) as received from the manufacturer without any 

admixture shall be used. If for any reason, thinning is necessary in case of ready 

mixed paint, the brand of thinner recommended by the manufacturer or as 

instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be used. Approved paints, oil or 

varnishes shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in their original 

containers in sealed condition. The material shall brought in at a time in 

adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least of fortnight’s work. 

The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the 

Engineer-in-Charge. The empties shall not be removed from the site of work, 

till the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from 

the Engineer-in-Charge. The empties shall be property if the contractor. 


1. Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports 

tied together by horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be 

fixed. No bullies, bamboos or planks shall rest on or touch the surface. 

2. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their 

tops to avoid damage or scratches to walls. 

3. For white washing the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected. 



341 

4.4 Preparation of Surface : The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted 

off. All rust, dirt, scales, smoke splashes, mortar dropping and grease shall be 

thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall have 

received the approval of the Engineer-in Charge after inspection, before 

painting is commenced. Painting shall not be started until the Engineer-in- 

Charge has inspected the items of work to be painted, satisfied himself about 

their proper quality and given his approval to commence the painting work. 

Painting of external surface should not be done in adverse weather condition 

like hail storm and dust storm. Painting, except the priming coat, shall 

generally be taken in hand after practically finishing all other building work. 

The rooms should be thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up, 

at least one day in advance of the paint work being started. 

4.5 Application : Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be 

stirred thoroughly in its containers, when applying also, the paint shall be 

continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that its consistency is kept 

uniform. The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of 

crossing laying off, the latter in the direction of the grains of wood. The crossing 

and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the 

surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite 

direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at 

right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the 

laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute 

one coat. Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done by spraying. Spray 

machine used may be (a) high pressure (small air aperture) type, or (b) a lowpressure 

(large air gap) type, depending on the nature and location of work to 

be carried out. Skilled and experienced workmen shall be employed for this 

class of work. Paints used shall be brought to the requisite consistency by 

adding a suitable thinner. Spraying should be done only when dry condition 

prevails. Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly and rubbed smooth 

before the next coat is applied. This should be facilitated by thorough 

ventilation. Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly rubbed down with 

sand paper or fine pumice stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat is 

laid. No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, 

the containers shall be kept properly closed. No hair marks from the brush or 

clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels, angles of moulding etc. shall 

be left on the work. In painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass 

panes must also be painted but care must be taken to see that no paint stains 

etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces in similar hidden 

locations shall not be left out in painting. However, bottom edge of the shutters 

where the painting is not practically possible, need not be done nor any 

deduction on this account will be done but two coats of primer of approved 

make shall be done on the bottom edge before fixing the shutters. On painting 

steelworks, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts rivets 

overlaps etc. The additional specifications for primer and other coats of paints 



342 

shall be as according to the detailed specifications under the respective 

headings. 






4.7 Item to Include : Item includes all labour, material, equipments such as 

brushes, scrappers, polish papers etc., scaffolding, cleaning of the area etc. 

complete as per the specifications. The item also includes removing nails, 

marking good holes, cracks, patches etc. 




on Sqm. basis. 



girthed area. 







prepared. 

5. Work on old treated surfaces shall be measured separately and so 

described. The contract rate shall be per sqm area painted including all 

material and labour involved in all the operations described above. 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.5: 

Providing and applying TEXTURED paint of approved colour and shade 

including preparing surface using roller to grt approved texturised surface 

complete as per direction & manufacture specification & instruction of 

Engineer - in - charge. 



343 

5.1 General : The item pertains to providing and applying TEXTURED of 

approved colour to old or new plastered or masonry surfaces for the specified 

number of coats. 

5.2 Material : The TEXTURED shall be (conforming to IS:5410) of approved brand 

and manufacture. The TEXTURED shall be brought to the site of work by the 

contractor in its original containers is sealed condition. The material shall be 

brought in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work or at 

least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the 

Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge. The empties shall not be removed from 

the site of work till the relevant item of the work has been completed and 

permission obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge. 


1. Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports 

tied together by horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be 

fixed. No bullies, bamboos or planks shall rest on or touch the surface. 

2. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops 

to avoid damage or scratches to walls. 

5.4 Preparation of Surface : For New work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned 

of all mortar dropping, dirt dust, algae, grease and other foreign matter by 

brushing and washing. Pitting in plaster shall be made good and a coat of water 

proof TEXTURED shall be applied over patches after wetting them thoroughly. 

5.5 Cement Primer Coat : Cement primer coat is used as a base coat on wall finish 

of cement, lime or lime cement plaster or on asbestos cement surfaces before oil 

emulsion distemper paints are applied on them. The cement primer is 

composed of a medium and pigment, which are resistant to the alkalis present 

in the cement, lime or lime cement in wall finish and provides a barrier for the 

protection of subsequent coats of oil emulsion distemper paints. The cement 

primer shall be applied with a brush on the clean dry and smooth surface. 

Horizontal strokes in both directions shall be given first and vertical strokes in 

both directions shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire operation 

will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible 

leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours, before 

oil emulsion paint is applied. 

5.6 Preparation of Mix : TEXTURED shall be mixed in such quantities as can be 

used up within an hour of its mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and 

thick, affecting flow and finish. TEXTURED shall be mixed with water in two 

stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of TEXTURED and one part of 

water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be 

taken to add the TEXTURED gradually to the water and not vice versa. The 

second stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and 



344 

stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In 

all cases the manufacture’s instructions shall be followed meticulously. The lids 

of TEXTURED drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by 

exposure to atmosphere the TEXTURED rapidly becomes air set due to its 

hygroscope qualities. In case of TEXTURED brought in gunny bags, once the 

bag is opened, the contents should be consumed in full on the day of its 

opening. If the same is not likely to be consumed in full, the balance quantity 

should be transferred and preserved in an airtight container to avoid its 

exposure to atmosphere. 

5.7 Application : 

1. The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes 

or spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the 

period of application. It shall be applied on the surface, which is on the 

shady side of the building so that the direct heat of the sun on the surface is 

avoided. The method of application of TEXTURED shall be as per 

manufacturer’s specification. The completed surface shall be watered after 

the day’s work. 

2. The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 

24 hours. Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface 

of the previous coat shall not be wetted. 

3. For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coats of water 

proof TEXTURED as found necessary to get a uniform shade. 

4. For old work, the treatment shall be with one or more coats as found 

necessary to get a uniform shade. 

5. After completing the work painted surface shall be kept wet for 7 days by 

sprinkling water for curing of paint. 

5.8 Precaution : Water proof TEXTURED shall not be applied on surfaces already 

treated with white wash, colour wash, distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, 

paints etc. It shall not be applied on gypsum, wood and metal surfaces. 






5.10 Item to Include: Item includes all labour, material, equipments such as brushes, 

scrappers, polish papers etc., scaffolding, cleaning of the area etc. complete as 

per the specifications. The item also includes removing nails, marking good 

holes, cracks, patches etc. 



345 



calculated in m2 correct to two places of decimals. The contract rate shall be 

on sqm basis 



girthed area. 

Corrugated asbestos cement sheet 20% Semi corrugated asbestos cement sheet 

10% 





prepared. 




Item No.6: 

Providing and applying Exterior grade Antifungus Paint - of superior quality and 

of approved make, colour and shade to old and new surfaces in two coats 

including scaffolding for all heights. The item includes preparation of the 

surfaces to receive the paint, that is, removing of all dust, grease, chalky and 

powdery material, algae and fungus growth, etc by using suitable methods, all 

cracks should be filled up using cement and sand in ratio 1:3.and applying one 

coat of Weather coat Exterior primer or 100% diluted paint all complete as per 

manufacturers specification and to the satisfaction of Engineer In Charge. 

Product Description: 

100% Acrylic exterior paint is premium water based, high performance, long lasting 

exterior paint, formulated to suit extreme tropical conditions of high rainfall, 

humidity and heat. The paint should have properties that prevent the fungal and 

algae growth and ensures constant surface activity against these irritants for a long 

period. 

Surface Preparation: 



346 

The Surface to be prepared must be free of all dust, grease, traces of paint flakes, 

algae, and fungus etc. the surface previously coated with paint must be cleaned 

thoroughly with a stiff coir brush, to remove dust, dirt, chalking or any friable 

material and loose flakes. Wash thoroughly with water and allow to dry. This 

ensures proper adhesion of the new paint system. In case of a fungus affected area, 

apply a liberal coat fungicidal solution. Allow to react for minimum 6 to 8 hours. For 

parapet tops and other horizontal surfaces, application of 3 coats is recommended. 

All structural cracks must be opened in a V shape and filled with white cement / 

cement based plasters and leakage should be topped before actual painting. Freshly 

plastered surfaces must be allowed to cure completely. 

Item to include providing and applying Exterior grade Antifungus Paint - of 

superior quality and of approved make, colour and shade to old and new surfaces in 

two coats including scaffolding for all heights. The item includes preparation of the 

surfaces to receive the paint, that is, removing of all dust, grease, chalky and 

powdery material, algae and fungus growth, etc by using suitable methods, all 

cracks should be filled up using cement and sand in ratio 1:3.and applying one coat 

of Weather coat Exterior primer or 100% diluted paint all complete as per 

manufacturers specification and to the satisfaction of MIDC. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment: 


calculated in m2 correct to two places of decimals. The contract rate shall be 

on sqm basis 



girthed area. 

Corrugated asbestos cement sheet 20% Semi corrugated asbestos cement sheet 

10% 





prepared. 




-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



347 

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTERIOR WORKS 

The detailed specifications given herein after are for the items of works described in 

the schedule of quantities attached herein, and shall be guidance for proper 

execution of work to the required standards. It may also be noted that the 

specifications are of generalized nature and these shall be read in conjunction with 

the description of item in schedule of quantities and drawings. The work also 

includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and fairly intended 

and which may not have been referred to in these documents but are essential for the 

entire completion in accordance with standard Engineering practice. 

Unless specifically other wise mentioned, all the applicable codes and standards 

published by the Bureau of Indian Standards latest revision and all other standards 

which may be published by them before the date of receipt of tenders, shall govern 

in all respects of design, workmanship, quality and properties of materials and 

methods of testing, method of measurements etc. In case there in no I.S.I. (B.I.S) 

specification for the particular work, such work shall be carried out in accordance 

with instructions in all respects, and requirements of the MIDC /Consultant. 

The contractor shall take instructions from the MIDC/Consultant regarding 

collection and stacking of materials. No building materials shall be stacked on areas 

where other buildings, roads, services, compound walls etc. are to be constructed. 

The contractor shall maintain in perfect condition all works executed till the 

completion of the entire work allotted to him. Where phased delivery is 

contemplated, this provision shall apply to each phase. 

The contractor shall clear the site thoroughly of all scaffolding materials and rubbish, 

etc. left out of this work to the satisfaction of the MIDC/Consultant before the work 

is considered as complete. 

In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications / drawings 

and the description in the schedule of quantities, the schedule of quantities 

shall take precedence. In case of any difference or discrepancy between 

specifications and drawing, the specifications shall take precedence. 

Site books / Reports 



348 

For the purpose of quick communication between the Consultant/ MIDC and the 

Contractor or his Agent or representative, Site Instruction Books shall be maintained 

at Site in the manner as described below: 

Any communication, relating to the works, may be conveyed through records in the 

Site Instruction Books. Such communication from the consultant/MIDC to the 

contractor shall be deemed to have been adequately served in terms of the contract. 

Each Site Instruction Book shall have machine-numbered pages in triplicate and 

shall be carefully maintained and preserved by the Contractor. Any instruction or 

other orders which the consultant/MIDC may like to issue to the Contractor may 

be recorded by him in the Site Instruction book and one copy thereof issued to the 

Contractor. 

Furnishing of Reports, Statements, returns, etc., by Contractor 

All reports, statements, returns, diagrams, or drawings, etc., which the Contractor is 

required to submit during the progress of the works to the Consultant/MIDC shall 

unless otherwise directed, to be furnished in triplicate and at expense of the 

Contractor. 

Contractor to Verify Site Measurements 

The Contractor shall check and verify all Site levels and measurements whenever 

requested by other specialized Contractors to enable them to prepare their own shop 

drawings and pass on the information with sufficient promptness, this will not in 

any way delay the works. A copy of all such information passed on shall be given to 

the Consultant/MIDC. 

Materials & Samples 

1. Materials to be New 

The whole of the materials / fittings / equipments employed in connection with the 

permanent work shall be new and of the best quality and description of their 

respective kinds and shall conform to the relevant Code (latest applicable standard) 

and to the approval of the consultant/MIDC. The Contractor shall be responsible to 

ensure that the material used is suited to the specific conditions including the 

climatic and environmental conditions prevailing at the site. 



349 

1. All proprietary material shall be of approved make and the type as 

stipulated. A list of approved makes are given at the end of this 

document. It will be deemed that the Contractor has priced the 

respective items on the basis of those approved makes. However, it 

shall be the prerogative of the client to choose any particular make 

among the list as the most appropriate one and the Contractor shall be 

bound to provide the same without any variation in the contract rate. 

2. Approval of Manufacturers 

Sufficiently before ordering materials of any description, the 

Contractor shall submit samples to the Consultant/MIDC along with 

the names of the manufacturers and / or supplier proposed and shall 

obtain approval thereof in writing from the Consultant/MIDC well in 

advance of commencement of work & procurement of materials at site 

for use. 

3. Copies of orders 

The contractor shall supply to the Consultant/MIDC in triplicate 

copies of all orders placed by him for the supply of materials or any 

item of permanent work or materials for the fabrication thereof. The 

specialist sub – contractors, also shall supply, through the Contractor, 

three copies of all orders they may place for items of work or materials 

for fabricating any article or thing for which they have been subcontracted. 

4. Samples of materials and work 

A) Irrespective of the fact that some specific make or type of material has been 

stipulated. No material shall be supplied or used on permanent works until the 

samples of the same are prepared / submitted and have been approved in writing 

by the Architect/MIDC. 

B) In addition to special provision made hereinafter as to sampling and testing of 

materials by particular methods, samples of all materials and work proposed to be 

employed in the execution of the work may be called for at any time by the 

Consultant/MIDC and shall be submitted to the Consultant /MIDC for approval 



350 

without delay by the Contractor. The Contractor shall arrange for the carriage of the 

same to enable the tests and analysis thereof to be made. 

C) Samples of materials of all trades / disciplines supplied shall be such as to have a 

clear idea of the general type and characteristics of the whole of the materials to be 

used in the work. No plea regarding samples supplied being not representative of 

the whole of the material will be acceptable. In case it is not practical to bring or 

make the sample at the site office, the Contractor shall arrange for inspection at the 

Sub-Contractor’s / Supplier’s shop or works at his own cost. In the event of the 

Contractor not submitting for the approval of the Consultant/MIDC samples of 

materials of satisfactory quality and workmanship, the Consultant /MIDC shall 

have the power to specify any particular manufacturer or merchant for the supply of 

such materials and the Contractor shall, without extra charge, obtain such materials 

from the said manufacturer or merchant. Before submitting samples for approval to 

the Consultant /MIDC the Contractor shall satisfy himself that it is in accordance 

with the requirement of the contract. The samples shall also be submitted sufficiently 

early for all procedures to be duly completed including rejection and re-submissions 

if required, so that the approved programme o construction is not adversely affected 

in any way. 

D) Samples, when approved, will be retained by the Consultant/MIDC at site office 

until the completion of the project and for this purpose suitable labeled boxes for 

storage of samples shall be provided by the Contractor. 

E) The Consultant /MIDC shall be at the liberty to reject all materials and 

workmanship at any stages, which are not at least equal in quality and character to 

such approved samples. 

F) The Contractor shall when required by the Consultant/MIDC furnish all 

information as to quality, weight, constituent substances, dimensions, levels, 

strength and description of the materials, test results, full and accurate records of the 

dimensions and positions of all new work and any other information necessary, and 

works and give the Consultant/MIDC such other particulars as may be required 

promptly. 

Inspection and Testing of Materials 



351 

The Consultant/MIDC shall be kept informed as to the progress of all works being 

carried out or materials being manufactured, prepared or supplied so that he may be 

able to make such arrangements for inspection, testing and analysis as he may 

desire. Wherever considered desirable by the Consultant, representative will be sent 

to the Contractor’s, Sub-Contractor’s and / or manufacturer’s premises to test the 

materials or inspect their manufacture. The Contractor shall attend to the Consultant 

or his representative during such inspection to be carried out satisfactorily. Should 

the Consultant decide not to send a representative to the said premises, the 

Contractor shall obtain from the Manufacturer’s certificate of test, proof sheets, mill 

sheets, showing that the materials have been tested satisfactorily in accordance with 

the requirements of the specification relating thereto, but neither omission of the 

Consultant/MIDC to send an Inspector nor the production of manufacturer’s 

certificates of test shall affect the liberty of the Consultant /MIDC to reject after 

delivery of any material found not to be suitable or not in accordance with the 

specifications. 

The Contractor shall provide means of identification of the materials delivered at the 

site with the corresponding certificate of test and manufacturing batch numbers. 

As soon as the materials are delivered at the site the Consultant/MIDC shall be 

informed. Notwithstanding any test that the Consultant/MIDC may direct to be 

carried out at the Contractor’s, Sub-Contractor’s and / or Manufacturer’s premises 

the Consultant/MIDC shall be at liberty to carry out any further test he may desire 

after delivery of materials at the site and may reject any or all materials which fail to 

comply with the approved sample or the required specification. Only after the 

approval of the materials delivered at the site the same shall be used at the works 

and such approval shall not relieve the contractor from fulfilling the obligations 

under the contract. 

The Contractor shall prepare and provide such and so many test pieces of the 

various materials as the Consultant/MIDC may, from time to time, direct or as may 

be specified and the Contractor shall analyze, test and weigh all materials in such 

manner and at such time or times and in such place or places as may be specified or 

directed by the Consultant/MIDC. 



352 

Materials shall be packed, transported, handled and stored on the site carefully and 

in a satisfactory manner so as to prevent any damage and / or deterioration of any 

kind either during transit or storage. Certain perishable materials like cement, lime, 

fittings, doors, windows, glass, etc. are stored in covered go downs to save them 

from sun, rain etc. 

Rejected Materials 

Should the Consultant/MIDC at any time condemn any material or goods intended 

for use in the works as: - 

a) Being inferior to samples previously approved. 

OR 

b) Having deteriorated in transit or on storage or on the site so as to be no 

longer fit for incorporation in the permanent works. 

OR 

c) Not complying with the specification. 

The Contractor shall promptly remove all such material from the vicinity 

of the works to the satisfaction of the consultant and confirm in writing 

immediately after removal. 

Should the Consultant /MIDC discover on the works any material other 

than those approved, he may order their immediate removal from the 

site and the Contractor shall forthwith remove the unapproved materials 

from site within 48 hours. Any work executed with inferior material is to 

be taken out and reinstated with approved material at the Contractor’s 

expenses and within the contracted time period. 

List of Proprietary Materials 

The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive list of all proprietary articles and 

materials used in the works containing catalogue reference numbers, colour shades, 

etc., and the manufacturer’s and or supplier’s names, addresses and where 

appropriate, suppliers names and addresses including a price list CIF to the site of 

works. This list is approved format shall be complete in all respects and shall be 



353 

submitted together with the ‘As – Built’ drawings and operation and maintenance 

manuals. 

Failure to submit the above list will defer issue of the ‘Completion Certificate’. 

Contractor to satisfy himself regarding all requirements 

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the full extent and character of the work’s 

supply and conditions affecting labor, materials and plant, requirements of the 

Employer’s safety and Health Regulations and all local conditions and restrictions 

affecting the works and provide for the same 

The responsibility for carrying out the works and the methods to be adopted under 

this Contract shall rest solely with the Contractor subject always to the approval by 

the Consultant/MIDC of the Contractor’s proposals. Such approvals shall not, 

however, relieve the Contractor in any way of his responsibility for the proper 

execution of works in accordance with the Contract. 

Record Drawings 

The Consultant/MIDC will issue two sets of the drawings / site instructions with 

sketches to the Contractor for the items for which some changes have been made 

from the approved drawings. The Contractor will mark the changes in the main 

original drawings issued for the purpose earlier and keep record of all such changes 

including the changes in levels and dimensions as required at site and issued by 

written instructions of the consultant and shall keep the site drawings fully updated. 

Finally these drawings with all revision shall be maintained as record drawings at 

site and all such revisions / corrections shall be reflected / incorporated in the Asbuilt 

Drawings to be submitted by the Contractor as stated hereinafter and return 

these copies to the Consultant for his approval. In case any revision is required or 

the corrections are not properly marked, the Consultant/MIDc may point out the 

discrepancies to the Contractor. 

As-built Drawings and Completion Photographs 

Two copies shall be submitted of the corrected As-Built drawings to the Consultant 

/ MIDC for his approval. 

The Consultant/MIDC shall return one copy of the same, duly approved, if found 

satisfactory or advise the Contractor on the changes required of discrepancies, if any. 



354 

The Contractor shall resubmit the three copies after incorporating all the corrections 

/ changes etc. as required. 

On receipt of the approved copy of these drawings the Contractor shall submit to the 

consultant/MIDC six print copies of the same along with one reproducible copy and 

as directed by the consultant/MIDC for onward submission to the employer, unless 

otherwise stated. 

Before the works (or any section thereof) are completed in accordance with relevant 

provision of General Conditions of Contract and before submission of the Last / 

Final Bill, whichever is earlier, the Contractor shall furnish to the Consultant/MIDC, 

“As-Built Drawings” or the works as completed, in sufficient details, which in the 

opinion of the consultant/MIDC will enable the employer to maintain, dismantle, 

reassemble and adjust all parts of the works. 

The Contractors and his specialized sub-contractors shall submit “As-Built 

Drawings” for the whole of the works including Electrical and data cabling works 

and all other services if any, fabrication, installation equipment, and their layouts, 

distribution system and all other relevant information as required for approval of the 

Consultant/MIDC. 

On completion, Contractor will engage a professional photographer to take external 

and 10 internal views of the buildings. 3 copies each of enlarge A4 size of these 

photographs will be submitted to the client and one set including the negatives to 

the Consultant/MIDC. 

Care of Works and Properties 

The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as not to damage, close or obstruct 

any utility, highway, road or other property until permits thereof have been 

obtained. If facilities are closed, obstructed, damaged or rendered unsafe by 

Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, make such repairs and 

provide such temporary guards, lights and other signals as necessary or required for 

safety and as will be acceptable to the Consultant/MIDC and / or the owner of the 

utility, highway, road or other property. 



355 

First Aid Service 

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for treatment of accident / 

casualties on the site in such first-aid units as may be thought necessary. The whole 

of the arrangements for the First Aid Service shall comply with local Health 

Authority Regulations and shall at all times be subject to the approval of the 

Consultant and the Contractor shall carry out any instruction given by the 

Consultant/MIDC in this respect. 

Progress Photograph 

The Contractor shall arrange to take Progress Photograph fortnightly. The number 

and positions from which the photographs are to be taken shall be directed by the 

Consultant/MIDC. 

Facilities, Attendance etc. On Nominated Sub-Contractors 

The Contractor shall allow for the provision of facilities, attendance etc. for the 

nominated sub-contractors. 

These facilities, attendance etc. shall include: - 

i) Storage facilities for plant, tools and equipment and products and 

materials; 

ii) The use of sanitary accommodation, medical and welfare 

facilities; 

iii) Facilities as described in Clauses keeping site clean, providing 

drinking and construction water and proper lighting at work site, 

access, scaffolding hoist etc., hereof; 

iv) Watching and lighting and protection of their work as necessary. 

Dispatch of Material 

Materials shall not be dispatched from the Manufacturer’s workshop or to the site 

without authority from the Consultant/MIDC. The Consultant/MIDC shall be 

informed prior to dispatching the materials. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 



356 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTERIOR WORKS 

1 General: This specification is for work to be done, item to be supplied & materials 

to be used in the works as shown & defined on the drawings & described herein, all 

under the supervision & to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. 

1.1 The workmanship is to be the best available & of a high standard, use must be 

made of a special trades man in all aspects of the work & allowance must be made in 

the rates for doing so. 

1.2 The materials & items to be provided by the contractor shall be approved by 

Engineer-in-charge in accordance with any samples which will be submitted for 

approval by Contractor & generally in accordance with the Specifications. Also if 

products are specified in the Specification and/or Bill of quantities with brand, trade 

Name or catlogue reference, the Contractor will be required to obtain the approval of 

the Engineer-in-charge before using alternative brands. The Contractor 

shall produce all invoices, vouchers or receipts for any material if called upon to do 

so by Engineer-in-charge. 

1.3 Samples of all materials are to be submitted to Engineer-incharge for approval 

before the Contractor orders or delivers the materials at site. Samples together with 

their packings are to be provided free of charge by the contractor & should any 

materials be rejected, they will be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. 

all samples will be retained by the Engineer-in-charge for comparison with materials 

which will be delivered at the site. Also, the Contractor will be required to submit 

specimen finishes of colours, fabrics etc for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge 

before proceeding with the work. 

1.4 The contractor shall be responsible for providing & maintaining & boxing 

required for the protection of dresses or finished work if left unprotected. He is also 

to clean out all shelvings, out ends & other waste from all parts of the works before 

in-fillings are done. 

1.5 Templates, boxes & moulds should be accurately set out & rigidly constructed so 

as to remain accurate during the time they are in use. 



357 

1.6 All unexposed surface of timber e.g. false ceilings, backing fillets, backs of door 

frames, cupboard framing, grounds etc. are to be treated with two coats of approved 

timber preservative before fixing or converging. 

1.7 Only first class workmanship will be accepted. Contractor shall maintain uniform 

quality & consistency in workmanship throughout. 

2 Joinery: 

2.1 Joinery is to be prepared immediately after the placing of the contract,framed up, 

bonded & wedged up. Any portions that are wrapped or found with other defects 

are to be replaced before wedging up. The whole of the work is to be framed & 

finished in a workman like manner in accordance with the detailed 

drawings wrought & wherever required, fitted with all necessary metal ties, straps, 

belts, screws, glue etc. Running beaded joints are to be cross tongued with teak 

tongues wherever 1(1/2) thick double cross tongued. Joiners work generally to be 

finished with fine sand/glass paper. 

2.2 Joints: All joints shall be standard mortise & tenon, dowel, dovetall & cross 

halved. Nailed or glued butt joints will not be permitted. Screws, nails etc. will be 

standard iron or wire of oxidized nettle fold tenons should fit the mortises exactly. 

2.3 Nailed/glued butt joints will not be permitted,except, exceptional cases with 

approval of Engineer-in-charge. 

2.4 Where screws shown on a finished surface, those will be sunk & the hole plugged 

with MDF board plug of the same.MDF board & grain of the finished surfaces will 

be neatly punched & the hole filled with MDF board filler to match the colour. 

2.5 If the joints in joinery works open or other defects arise within the period stated 

for defect liability in the contract & the cause thereof be deemed by Engineer-incharge 

to be due to such defective joinery shall be taken down & refilled, 

redecorated &/or replaced if necessary & any work disturbed shall be made good at 

the Contractor's expense. 

2.6 Nails, spikes & bolts shall be of lengths & weights approved by the Engineer-incharge. 

Nails shall comply with IS:1959- 1960 or equivalent approved quality 

sample. Brass headed nails are to comply with BS:1210. Wire staples shall comply 

with BS:1494 or equivalent. 



358 

2.7 The contact surface of dowels, tennons, wedges etc, shall be glued with an 

approved adhesive. 

2.8 Where glued, joinery & carpentry work is likely to come into contact with 

moisture, the glue shall be waterproof. 

3 Hardware & Metals: The hardware through out shall be of approved manufacture 

of supplier well made & equal to in every respect to the samples to be deposited 

with the Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor may be required to produce & provide 

samples from any different source before the Engr-in-charge take decision & he 

should allow his rates for doing so. 

3.1 Fittings generally shall be brass, oxidized, unless otherwise specified & shall be 

suitable for their intended purpose. In any case, it will have to be approved by 

Engineer-in-charge before the Contractor procures it at site of work. 

3.2 Screws are to match the finish of the article to be fixed & to be round or flat 

headed or counter sunk as required. 

3.3 The Contractor should cover up & protect the brass & bronze surfaces with a 

thick grease or other suitable protective material, renew as necessary & 

subsequently clean off away on connection. 

3.4 Aluminium & stainless steel shall be of approved manufacture & suitable for 

particular application. Generally, the surface of aluminium shall have an anodized 

finish & both shall comply with samples approved by the Engineer-in-charge. All 

stainless steel sheets shall be SS-316 Japan or equivalent with gauge as specified but 

not thinner than 16 G. 

3.5 All steel, brass, bronze, aluminium & stainless steel articles shall be subjected to a 

reasonable test for strength, if so, required by Engineer-in-charge at Contractor's 

expense. 

3.6 All brazing & welds are to be executed in a clean & smooth manner rubbed down 

& left in the flattest & tidiest way, particularly where exposed. 

3.7 Chromium plating shall comply relevant IS code or as per approved specification 

for normal outdoor conditions & shall be on a brass material of copper or brass. 

4 Glazier: 



359 

4.1 All glass to be of approved manufacturer complying with IS:3548-1966 as per 

approved quality & sample to be of the selective qualities specified & free from 

bubbles, smoke, air holes & other defects. 

4.2 Polished plate glass shall be "Glazing Glass" (G.G) quality & that for mirrors shall 

be "Silvering Quality"(S.G.) conforming to IS:3438-1965 or as per approved sample & 

quality. 

4.3 The compound for glazing to metal is to be a special non hardening compound 

manufactured for the purpose & of a brand & quality approved by the Engineer-incharge. 

4.4 While cutting glass, proper allowance be made for expansion. Each square of 

glazing to be in one whole sheet. On completion of work clean all glass inside & cut, 

replace all cracked scratched & broken panes & leave in good condition. 

5 Paint & Polishes: 

5.1 All material required for the works shall be of specified & approved 

manufacturer, delivered to the site in the manufacturer's containers with the seals 

etc., unbroken & clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark with a 

description of the contents & colour. All materials are to be stored on the site of the 

work. 

5.2 Spray painting with approved machines will be permitted only if written 

approval has been obtained from the Engineer-in-charge prior to painting. No 

spraying will be permitted in the case of priming coats nor where the soiling of 

adjacent surfaces is likely to occur. The nozzle & pressure to be so operated as to 

given an even coating throughout to satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge. The paint 

used for spraying is to comply generally with the specification concerned & is to 

be specially prepared by the manufacturer for spraying. Thinning of paint made for 

brushing will not be allowed. 

5.3 Wood preservative shall be Solignum or other equivalent & approved 

impregnating wood preservative & all concealed MDF board work shall be treated 

with wood preservative. 



360 

5.4 All brushes, tools, pots, kettles etc. used in carrying out the work shall be clean & 

free from foreign matter & are to be thoroughly cleaned out before being used with a 

different type or class of materials. 

5.5 All iron/steel surfaces shall be thoroughly scraped & rubbed with wire brushes 

& shall be entirely free from rust, mill scale etc. before applying the priming coat. 

5.6 Surfaces of new MDF board work to be painted are to be rubbed down, cleaned, 

down to the approval of Engr-in-charge. 

5.7 Surfaces of previously painted woodwork which are to be painted are to be 

cleaned down with soap & water, detergent solution or approved solvent to remove 

dirt, grease etc. Whilst wet the surfaces shall be flatted down with a suitable 

abrasive & then rinsed down & allowed to dry. Minor areas of defective paint shall 

be removed by scraping back to firm edge & the exposed surface touched in with 

primer as described & stopped with putty, where MDF board work has been 

previously painted/polished & is to be newly polished, scrapping, burning off or 

rubbing down to be done. 

5.8 Surfaces of previously painted metal which shall be painted are to be cleaned 

down & flattened down as described any rust & loose scale shall be removed 

completely by chipping, scrapping & wire brushing back to the bars metal & 

touched in with primer as described. 

6 Upholstery: This will be of first class standard workmanship with webbing, no-sag 

springs, coiled springs, padding & filling as specified on drawing. Covering fabrics 

will be seen, tutted & corded as shown on the drawing & as approved by Engineerin-charge. 

6.1 Cushion Vents: Brass "Cushion Vents" should be installed at the back or under 

side of seat cushions (especially those covered in leather vinyl plastic or very tightly 

woven fabric to allow air to escape easily & to prevent torn seems. 

6.2 Materials: Finished timber shall be of the type specified. Furnishing fabrics, 

colour, pattern, substance to be as specified & manufactured or supplied by the 

Company specified, no variations of this will be permitted unless with prior 

approval of the Engineer-in-charge. 

7 Polish: 



361 

7.1 French Polish: The basic material shall be shellac dissolved in methylated spirit. 

7.2 Preparation: The timber must be well sanded & cleaned & the grain filled with a 

grain filler. Any staining must be done before applying the polish. 

7.3 Equipment: The polishing rubber the most important implement in French polish 

shall consist of a pad of cotton wool, which acts as a reservoir for the polish & a 

cover of soft white linen or cotton fabric, similar to a well worn handkerchief 

which acts as a filter. The rubber must never be dipped into the polish; it should be 

charged by pouring the polish on to the pad with the cover removed. 

7.4 Application: Work evenly over the surface with a slow figure-of-eight motion 

until the timber is coated with a thin layer of polish, the objective is to apply a series 

of thin coats, allowing only a few minutes for drying between the coats. When a 

level & even bodied surface is obtained the work is ready for the second stage ie. 

spiriting off. 

7.5 Allow the work to stand for at least eight hours, then take a fresh rubber with a 

double thickness of cover material & charge it with methylated spirit. The objective 

of spiriting off is to remove the rubber marks & to give the brilliance 

of finish. 

7.6 Finally, work in the direction of the grain & continue until the surface is free from 

smears & rubber marks. Then leave the harden off. 

7.7 Wax Polish: Wax polish shall contain silicons & driers. A good silicon wax is to 

be used not creamy or spray. The timber shall be sealed first with another finish such 

as Ronseal, before applying the wax. 

7.8 Application: Apply a light coat of the sealer by brush or cloth direct to unfilled 

timber, working it well in & finishing evenly with the grain.Allow to dry thoroughly 

then sand lightly with fine abrasive paper. Apply a heavy coat of wax 

by cloth or on flat surfaces, with a stiff brush. Work it well into the timber & finish 

off by stroking with the grain before leaving to harden. Leave for several hours 

before rubbing up with a soft brush. Finally, buff the grain with a soft cloth. 

7.9 Transparent: Coloured Polyurethane (Melamine):This shall be applied where 

natural grain of the MDF board is required to show. Polyurethane gives tough 

surface which resist chipping, Scratching & boiling water. 



362 

7.10 Application: Clean off all grease & wax with an abrasive & white spirit, this 

should not be applied in humid conditions. Apply the first coat, preferably of clear 

hard glaze with a cloth pad Leave this to dry for at least six hours, then apply 

further coats with a paint brush. If you wait for longer than 24 hours between coats, 

rub down the previous coat with fine glass paper or a medium grade of steel wool. 

Obtain a matt finish, if required, by giving a final coat of clear Renseal matt coat. 

Wherever MDF Sections or Boards is mentioned the same shall mean that the Section 

or Boards out of External Grade First Quality Dense Homogeneous Medium Density 

Fibre conforming to IS:12406-1988. All external MDF work such as mouldings, 

facials, jamb lining, skirting etc & veneers shall be finished with a minimum 3 coats 

of melamine polish unless otherwise specified. 

8 Plywood/Particle Boards & MDF Boards. 

8.1 Plywood/medium density fibre board/particle board/veneered board etc,as 

specified in the approved list of manufacturers shall only be used. 

8.2 Only Marine grade plywood generally conforming to ISI:710 of approved make 

only to be used unless otherwise specified. 

8.3 Marine plywood shall generally conform to IS:710-1980 bonded with phenol 

formaldehyde, treated with wood preservative. 

8.4 Only approved makes of wood particle board shall be used. Particle board shall 

be phenol formaldehyde bonded & generally conform to IS:3087-1965. 

8.5 Only 3-4mm thick straight grained group matching approved veneers shall be 

used. Only veneers laminated from species like teak, rose wood, walnut, laurel, 

white cedar & mohogany, shall be considered for approval & use. 

=========================================================== 

Item No.7: Aluminium frame work: Providing & fixing in position Aluminium 

Frame work for Partitions, paneling, boxing, soffits with vertical members at not 

more than 600mm centers & horizontal members not more than 600mm centers 

complete including necessary additional supports, bracing runner etc complete. 

Item to be completed in all respects as per drawings & instructions from engineerin-charge. 

a) Size 50x50x1.62mm 



363 


The work shall be carried out as per the specifications & approved 

drawings. The materials used for the work shall conform to the relevant IS 

Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. The work shall be executed as 

mentioned in the enclosed specifications or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 

Item includes providing & fixing additional aluminium section support at 1 m c/c at 

the top of framework to fix the partition to ceiling. The item also includes cost of 

labour, material, its transportation, loading ,unloading, scaffolding, wastage, taxes 

etc. 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on Sqm basis. The 

contract rate shall be per SqM of frame work provided & fixed. 

============================================================ 

Item No.8: Providing & Fixing in position Marine plywood on existing frame 

work including all materials, labour etc complete. Item to be completed in all 

respects as per drawings & instructions from Engineer - In - Charge. 

i) 9mm thick Marine plywood 

ii)12 mm thk marine plywood 

iii)19 mm thk marineplywood 

 

 

 

 

The work shall be executed as per item wordings & as per the directions of 

Engineer-in-charge. The work shall be carried out as per the specifications & 

drawings given by MIDC. The materials used for the work shall conform to 

the relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. The work 

shall be executed as mentioned in the enclosed specifications or as directed by 

the Engineer-in-charge. 

9mm /12 mm thk. Marine plywood include cutting of ply to any shape / size 

and fixing the same for receiving finish on the same or any cutout required for 

MEP services. 

Plywood should be of approved make. Contractor is advised to take approval 

of plywood before execution of work. 

Workability should be satisfactory to the EIC / consultant. Anything 

defective or not accepted by EIC / consultant should be removed / rectify 



364 

without delay & with the cost & risk of contractor Item to be completed in all 

respects as per drawings & instructions from EIC. The item also includes cost 

of labour, material, its transportation, loading ,unloading, scaffolding, 

wastage, taxes etc. 

Actual executed area will be measured & paid. No deduction below 

0.05Sq.Mt. cutout area. 


contract rate shall be per SqM of Panelling provided & fixed. 

============================================================== 

Item No.9: - Providing & fixing in position Finishes for Partitions / Panelling. Actual 

executed area will be measured as two sides of same partition are likely to have 

different finishes. Rate of this item shall include cost of providing cross matching 

laminate in approved pattern etc. as per details .The finishing material shall be fixed 

in required divisions / panels / pattern with proper grooves etc. as per drawings & 

directions. Item to be completed in all respects as per drgs. & instructions from EIC. 

i) Laminate :- Providing & Fixing Laminates of 1.5mm thickness of approved 

make, shade & Quality. 

ii) Veneer :- Providing & Fixing Veneer of 3 - 4mm thickness of approved make, 

shade & Quality with melamine polish. 







 

 

Laminate should be of approved make. Contractor is advised to take approval 

of laminate before execution of work. 

Veneer should be of approved make & in matching group. It should be free 

from any stain or knots. Contractor is advised to take approval of veneer 

before execution of work. 



365 

 

 

Workability should be satisfactory to the EIC / consultant. Anything 

defective or not accepted by EIC / consultant should be removed / rectify 

without delay & with the cost & risk of contractor Item to be completed in all 

respects as per drawings & instructions from EIC. The item also includes cost 

of labour, material, its transportation, loading ,unloading, scaffolding, 

wastage, taxes etc. 



Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on Sqm basis. 

The contract rate shall be per SqM. 

============================================================== 

Item No.10, 11 & 12 : 

Storages : Providing & fixing in position 460 mm deep storage unit along with 

partitions etc with 1) sides, top, bottom shelves made out of 19 mm marine plywood 

for all inside surfaces 2) 6 mm thk. marine ply backing panels with French polish on 

both sides 3) Shutters made out of 19 mm thick ply finish with material specified 

below from outside and one mm thick laminate for inside of shutters. 6 mm thick 

teakwood leaping with edge moulding of approved profile if any shall be provided 

in all exposed ply edge surfaces& be finished with melamine polish.4) hardware 

such as heavy duty hinges, brass body locks(Elpro make) with extra large group key 

of approved quality, magnetic ball catchers, handles, tower bolt etc. All exposed 

woodwork to be finished with 3 coats of melamine polish & all internal surface 

finished with 3 coats of French polish. The exposed surfaces shall be finished with 

1.5 mm thk. laminate of approved shade & colour. All as per detailed drgs. and 

instructions of EIC / Architect. 

a) Full Height Storage 

b) Wadrobe 

 

Actual The work shall be executed as per item wordings & as per the 

directions of Engineer-in-charge. The work shall be carried out as per the 

specifications & drawings given by MIDC. The materials used for the work 

shall conform to the relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed 



366 

specifications. The work shall be executed as mentioned in the enclosed 

specifications or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Neki make 150mm long handle - SS finish. 

Brass tower bolt on top & bottom portion of shutter. 

7 lever brass lock with duplicate keys, along with SS key hole. 

Auto closing hinges of GRASS make. 

Magnetic ball catch of approved make. 

All exposed woodwork to be Melamine polished, all internal surfaces to be 

finished with 1.0 mm thick approved shade laminate complete as per drawing 

and directions. 

1.5mm thk. Laminate of approved shade. 

Minor Design change is expected where as no extra will be payable. 

Rate include cutting any cutout required for MEP services. 

Workability should be satisfactory to the EIC / consultant. Anything defective 

or not accepted by EIC / consultant should be removed / rectify without 

delay & with the cost & risk of contractor. The item also includes cost of 

labour, material, its transportation, loading ,unloading, scaffolding, wastage, 

taxes etc. All complete as per approval & instructions of Engineer in charge. 

(No extra payment will be paid for design patterns) 

Acutal executed area will be measured & paid. No deduction below 



contract rate shall be per SqM of Storage unit provided & fixed as per approved 

drawings. 

============================================================== 

Item No.13 : 

Providing & fixing in position Coffered Gypsum Board False Ceiling as per 

manufacturer's specifications & instructions with 12.5mm thick 'Gypboard' Screwfixed 

to the underside of suspended G.I. grid. G.I. grid should be constructed & 

suspended from the main ceiling as per manufacturer's instructions & specifications. 



367 

G. I. grid should consist of ceiling sections at maximum centre to centre distance 

450mm, Perimeter channel intermediate channels at maximum centre to centre 

distance 1200mm. The ceiling sections should be fixed to intermediate channels with 

connecting clips. G.I.grid should be fixed to R.C.C. slab above with the help of 25mm 

x 0.5mm strap hanger & soffit cleat. The joints between soffit cleat & strap hanger 

and G. I. grid & strap hanger should be with 6.4 x 12.7 mm nut & bolt. Soffit cleats 

should be fixed to R. C. C. ceiling with W.E. type 12mm dia, 17/16" long steel Rawl 

plug maximum center to center distance (both ways) of strap hangers should be 

1200mm. The Gypboard should be fixed to G. I. grid with 25mm long Drawall 

screws. 

The 'Gypboard' to be used should be 12.5mm thk tapered edge boards. The boards 

should be taped & filled from underside to ceiling. Item to be completed as per 

manufacturer's specification & instructions. Note: No extra will be paid for ceiling 

drops and it will be considered as flat ceiling and if there is projected drop ceiling 

curved as per design in different level it will also be paid as addition to that but only 

average bottom surface area will be considered. No extra will be paid for light 

cuttings, cutting for glass or stain glass manufacturer's specification & instructions. 

Note : No extra will be paid for ceiling drops and it will be considered as flat ceiling 

and if there is projected drop ceiling curved as per design in different level it will 

also be paid as addition to that but only average bottom surface area will be 

considered. No extra will be paid for light cuttings, cutting for glass or stain glass. 

 

 

 

General 












368 



(No extra payment will be paid for design patterns) 

 


0.05Sq.Mt. cutout area & no deduction for electrical fitting. Nothing will be 

paid extra for additional support required for fixing electrical fittings. 


The contract rate shall be per SqM of false ceiling provided & fixed as per 

approved drawings. 

Item No. 14:- 

Providing & arranging in position Single Bed 2000 x 950 x 450 mm made out of 

T.W frame of required size and 19 mm thk ply wood boxing as per the design 

along with 650 mm high head board. All exposed surface covered with decorative 

veneer and finished with melamine polish all complete along with required 

hardware without matress. etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. 

Description :- Providing and fixing in position Bed unit having wooden frame 

made out of 75 x 38mm ( 3 members on either sides ) covered with 9mm 

thk.marine plywood as per detailed drawing. Sides to be made out of 19mm 

thick marine plywood - all around finished with veneer finishes on all 

exposed surfaces with 3 coats of melamine polish. Rate including cost of 

edge beadings and mouldings (made out of 1st quality matching wood ) 

as shown in the drawing. The bed is supported on four number vertical 

carved legs of size 100 x 65mm tie with wooden section of 125 x 65mm 

made of matching wood finished with 3 coats of melamine polish. All Internal 

wooden frame members, plywood surface to be finished with french polish. 

Cost to include 100mm thick matress consisting of rubberized coir of 

64mm thick and 36mm thick 100% latex rubber foam of appropriate quality 

including quilted fabric cover to matress. 

All exposed wood works to be finished with 3 coats of melamine polish of 

colour and shade matching to veneer complete as per site direction of 

project in charge. (basic rate of quilted fabric Rs.250/- Rmt.) 

Rate including cost of providing & fixing approved design inlay in 

furniture ( 

wherever instructed ). 

Rate including cost of transportation, loading, unloading, scaffolding, 




369 

Workability :- Workability should be satisfactory to the EIC / consultant. 

Anything defective or not accepted by EIC / consultant should be removed 

/ rectify without delay & with the cost & risk of contractor. 

All complete as per approval & instructions of Engineer in charge. 

Mode of measurements :- Number of units supplied will be measured & 

paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No. 15:- 

Providing & arranging in position Single Bed 2000 x 950 x 450 mm made out of rot 

iron of required size and 19 mm thk ply wood for base as per the design along 

with 650 mm high head board. All exposed surface covered with black powder 

coated all complete along with required hardware without matress. etc complete 

as per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. 

Description :- Providing and fixing in position Bed unit using the process 

which conveys strength and solidity to each one of their beds. Starting with 

heavy gauge iron, each horizontal, vertical, or scrolled component of the bed is 

meticulously welded together paying close attention to detail. Then, each 

decorative casting is hand-poured directly over the welded iron to create an 

exceptionally solid one-piece bed. (these decorative iron castings are 

sometimes called "chills" to antique reproduction bed enthusiasts). This 

process produces a bed that is the perfect balance of strength and beauty. It is 

a time-consuming process, but the end result is certainly worth the extra 

consideration given during the manufacturing process. The green, purple, and 

aqua circles in the diagram below highlight areas where the Unibody 

Construction is particularly important. These are finials and decorative 

castings that are directly poured over the iron to create exceptional solidity. 



including quilted fabric cover to matress. (basic rate of quilted fabric Rs.250/- 

Rmt.) 








370 



paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No. 16:- 

Providing & arranging in position Double Bed 1800 x 1950 x 450 mm made out of 

T.W frame of required size and 19 mm thk ply wood boxing as per the design 

along with 650 mm high head board. All exposed surface covered with decorative 

veneer and finished with melamine polish all complete along with required 

hardware without matress. etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. 

Description :- Providing and fixing in position Bed unit having wooden frame 

made out of 75 x 38mm ( 3 members on either sides ) covered with 9mm 

thk.marine plywood as per detailed drawing. Sides to be made out of 19mm 

thick marine plywood - all around finished with veneer finishes on all 

exposed surfaces with 3 coats of melamine polish. Rate including cost of 

edge beadings and mouldings (made out of 1st quality matching wood ) 

as shown in the drawing. The bed is supported on four number vertical 

carved legs of size 100 x 65mm tie with wooden section of 125 x 65mm 

made of matching wood finished with 3 coats of melamine polish. All Internal 

wooden frame members, plywood surface to be finished with french polish. 



including quilted fabric cover to matress. 

All exposed wood works to be finished with 3 coats of melamine polish of 

colour and shade matching to veneer complete as per site direction of 

project in charge. (basic rate of quilted fabric Rs.250/- Rmt.) 

Rate including cost of providing & fixing approved design inlay in 

furniture ( 

wherever instructed ). 









371 


paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No. 17:- 

Bed side Table (size 450 x 450 x 450 mm) made out of 12 mm ply for sides, top, 

shelves, shutter as well as drawer front and 6 mm ply for back. All exposed side 

covered by decorative veneers and finished with melamine polish on all exposed 

side. The side tables cost to include the cost of all required hardware like handle, 

drawer slides, etc. complete as per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. 

Description :- Providing and fixing side unit made out of 19mm thick marine 

plywood for top, sides and bottom, back with 6mm thick marine plywood. 

Drawer boxes - front in 19mm thk. marine plywood rear & sides in 12mm 

thick marine plywood, bottom 6mm thick marine plywood. All exposed 

surfaces to be finished with veneer and 3 coats of melamine polish. All 

internal (except drawer internally) surface to be finished with french polish. 

All drawers to have telescopic sliding drawer fittings. Item to include all 

types of wooden beadings and mouldings finished with 3 coats of 

melamine polish, hardwares, locks, S.S.handles, hinges, inlay patti, screws 

etc. 








paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No. 18:- 

Providing & installation of Dressing table 450 mm deep made out of 12 mm ply 

wood for sides , shelves, top, shutter, drawer fronts etc. & 6 mm ply at back , 

Partly glazed / partly Solid shutter unit covered by decorative veneer and finished 

with melamine polish on all exposed surface. All inclusive of required Hardware 

like drawer slides, hinges, handle lock etc. all complete. with out Mirror etc 

complete as per direction of Engineer - in Charge.. 



372 

Description :- Providing & installation of Dressing table 450 mm deep made 

out of 12 mm ply wood for sides , shelves, top, shutter, drawer fronts etc. & 6 

mm ply at back , Partly glazed / partly Solid shutter unit covered by decorative 

veneer and finished with melamine polish on all exposed surface. All inclusive 

of required Hardware like drawer slides, hinges, handle lock etc. all complete. 

with out Mirror etc. 








paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No.19:- 

Providing & installation of Study table 450 mm deep made out of 12 mm ply wood 

for sides , shelves, top, shutter, drawer fronts etc. & 6 mm ply at back , Partly 

glazed / partly Solid shutter unit covered by decorative veneer and finished with 

melamine polish on all exposed surface. All inclusive of required Hardware like 

drawer slides, hinges, handle lock etc. all complete. with out Mirror etc complete 

as per direction of Engineer - in Charge. 

Description :- Providing and fixing in position Study table having one CPU 

unit, one drawer unit & foot rest top, bottom and sides made of 19mm thk. 

marine plywood finished with veneer on all exposed visible sides of 

approved colour and shade, CPU unit and drawers to be finished with 1mm 

thick laminate internally, shutter to be made of 12mm thick marine ply, the 

drawer unit shall be with 12mm thick marine ply for front sides and back and 

bottom with 6mm marine plywood. 

Drawers to have telescopic sliding drawer fittings. Rate to include all types 

of hardwares, screws, handles etc. complete as per site directions of 

Engineer-In- Charge. The drawer unit shall be with 12mm thick marine ply 

for front sides and back and bottom with 6mm marine plywood. 

Rate to include keyboard & mouse tray with all necessary approved 

hardware, SS wire mangers, handles, commercial grade casters, wooden 

beadings and mouldings complete in all respects as per specification & 

instructions from Project in charge. 




373 







paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No.20 : 

Providing & fixing in position confernance room table (size 4600x1500x750mm)of 

shape shown in drawing. Table top made out of 19 X 19 mm & 38 X 23 mm T.W. 

frame work with both side 6mm thk marine plywood in two layers finished with 

veneer & polycoating. Apron made out of 50 X 50 mm T.W. framework with both 

side 6 mm thk marine plywood finished with veneer and 3 coats of melamine 

polish. Edge of Table finished with 50 X 50 mm T.W. moulding with melamine 

polish. Footrest & skirting made out of 19 mm thk marine plywood finished with 

veneer and 3 coats of melamine polish. Edge of footrest finished with 25 mm thk 

wooden half round moulding with melamine polish. Rate including cost of wooden 

beadings, mouldings, inlays, etc. Top should be finished with veneer & 

polycoating. Sides finished with veneer & melamine polish. 

General 

 

The work shall be executed as per the item wording & as per the directions of 


drawings given by MIDC. The material used for the work shall confirm 

relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. 

 







374 


(No extra payment will be paid for design patterns). 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on No basis. 

The contract rate shall be per No of Board room Table provided & fixed of specified 

size as per approved drawings. 

Item No.21, 22, 23 & 24:- 

Item No. 21 : 

Providing & arranging in position Dining tables made out of Granite top 

and S S stand with proper joinery & hardware as per drawing. the top 

finished with bevelled edges. Item to be completed in all respect as per 

drawing & instructions from Engineer-in-charge 

Dining Table (size 900 X 900 mm) Granite top S S stand 

Item no. 22 : 





Dining Table (size 1200 x 2200 mm) Granite top S S stand 

Item No. 23 : 





Dining Table (size 1000 mm dia) Granite top S S stand 

Item No. 24 : 

Providing & arranging in position Dining & Coffee tables made out of 

Granite top and S S stand with proper joinery & hardware as per drawing. 

the top finished with bevelled edges. Item to be completed in all respect as 

per drawing & instructions from Engineer-in-charge 

Coffee Table (size 900 mm dia) Granite top S S stand 

Description :- Providing & arranging in position Dining & Coffee tables 

made out of Granite top and S S stand with proper joinery & hardware as per 

drawing. the top finished with bevelled edges. Item to be completed in all 

respect as per drawing & instructions from Engineer-in-charge 




375 







paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No.25 : 

Square/circular corner Table - Providing & arranging in position centre tables made 

out of TW members 40X 75 mm with proper joinert & hardware as per drawing. The 

top finished with 12mm thk tinted glass with bevelled edges. Item to be completed 

in all respect as per drawing & instruction from E.I.C. of given size & shape 

(450x450x450mm). 

General 

 














The contract rate shall be per No of Corner Table provided & fixed of specified size 

as per approved drawings. 

============================================================== 



376 

Item No.26 : 

Providing & arranging in position centre tables made out of TW members 40X 75 

mm with proper joinery & hardware as per drawing. The top finished with 12mm 

thk tinted glass with beveled edges. Item to be completed in all respect as per 

drawing & instruction from E.I.C. of given size & shape 

(750 X 750 X 450 mm) 

General 














The contract rate shall be per No of Centre Table provided & fixed of specified size 

as per approved drawings. 

Item No.27 : TV Unit 

Providing and fixing in position TV cabinet with revolving platform with steel 

square feet located on lower cabinet which made out of 19mm thick marine plywood 

for top, bottom, sides, 6mm thick marine plywood for back and 12mm thick marine 

plywood for shelfs(1 No). All exposed surfaces to be finished with combination of 

veneer, alongwith 3 coats of melamine polish and all internal surfaces to be finished 

with 1.0mm thick laminate, rest of the portion of ply finished with 2 coats of french 



377 

polish. The shutters to be made out of 12mm thick marine plywood finished with 

veneer on exposed side and 1.0mm thick laminate for internal sides. Item to be 

completed as per drawing and site directions. Item to include all types of 

hardwares, locks, S.S. handles, tower bolts, ball catches, wooden lipping , beading, 

inlay patti and moulding etc. complete as per site directions. All drawers to have 

telescopic sliding drawer fittings. Rate to include all types of hardwares, screws, 

handles etc. complete as per site directions of Engineer-In-Charge. The drawer unit 

shall be with 12mm thick marine ply for front sides and back and bottom with 6mm 

marine plywood. 

General 













Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on No basis. The 

contract rate shall be per No of TV unit provided & fixed of specified size as per 

approved drawings. 

Item No. 28, :- 

Providing & arranging in position bagguge counter made out of 19, 12, and 6 

mm marine ply and hardware as per drawing. the top finished with 3 mm 

veneer with polish and 1 mm laminate inside 30 x 12 mm thk SS matt brush 

finish patti above counter. Item to be completed in all respect as per drawing 

& instructions from Engineer-in- charge 



378 

Buggage Counter (1200 x 600 x 750 mm) 

Item No. 29: 

Providing & arranging in position bagguge counter made out of 19, 12, and 6 

mm marine ply and hardware as per drawing. the top finished with 3 mm 

vineer polish and 1 mm laminate and polish inside 30 x 12 mm thk SS matt 

brush finish patti above counter. Item to be completed in all respect as per 

drawing & instructions from Engineer-in- charge 

Buggage Counter (1200 x 600 x 750 mm) 

Description :- Providing & installation of bagguage counter of 450mm depth 

made out of 19mm ply for Top, bottom, sides, shelves, drawer face etc. & 

6mm thk. plywood for unit back as shown in drawing. Drawer sides should 

be made of 12mm thk. plywood & bottom of drawer with 6mm thk. 

plywood. The top , sides, front to be finished with 1.5 mm thk Laminate. 

The drawer inside to be finished with 1.0 mm thk laminate of approved 

shade.Rate including edge moulding of approved profile. The item to be 

completed with hardware such as heavy duty hinges, locks, ball catches, 

handles etc 

. Rate including cost of transportation, loading, unloading, scaffolding, 






Mode of measurements :- Elevation area will be measured & paid. 

Units :- Sq.Mt. 

Item No. 30 :- 

Providing & arranging in position Shoe rack made out of 19, 12, and 6 mm 

marine ply and hardware as per drawing. the top finished with 1 mm 

laminate and polish inside 30 x 12 mm thk SS matt brush finish patti above 

counter. Item to be completed in all respect as per drawing & instructions 

from Engineer-in- charge 

Description :- Providing & installation of bagguage counter of 450mm depth 

made out of 19mm ply for Top, bottom, sides, shelves, drawer face etc. & 



379 

6mm thk. plywood for unit back as shown in drawing. Drawer sides should 

be made of 12mm thk. plywood & bottom of drawer with 6mm thk. 

plywood. The top , sides, front to be finished with 1.5 mm thk Laminate. 

The drawer inside to be finished with 1.0 mm thk laminate of approved 

shade.Rate including edge moulding of approved profile. The item to be 

completed with hardware such as heavy duty hinges, locks, ball catches, 

handles etc 

. Rate including cost of transportation, loading, unloading, scaffolding, 







paid. 

Units :- No. 

Item No.31 TO 36 : 

Providing chairs of approved make as per type approved by Engineer in charge. 

a) Conference chair 

b) Dinning chair 

c) Study chair 

d) Dressing chair 

e) Visitor Lounge chair 

f) VIP cheir 

 


Engineer-in-charge. The materials used for the work shall conform to the 

relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. The chair shall 

be got approved from Engineer-in-charge prior to supply. The chairs shall be 

of approved make & of equivalent type as per item wording. 



380 


contract rate shall be per No of Chairs of specified type as per approval of Engineer 

In Charge. 

============================================================= 

Item No.37 : Providing & supplying multi seater sofas with teakwood internal 

frame out of size min. 70x40mm as mentioned in drawing with necessary spring 

/rubberised coir/32 density polyurethane foam/100% latex rubber foam of 

appropriate quality & thickness as shown in the drawing with melamine polish 

on all exposed wooden surface. 75mm thk. for seat & 50mm thk for back. 25mm 

polyurethane in it to give required shape. The rate to include upholstery material 

of approved velvet (fabric) on outer side & on the inner side white cloth of 

approved quality shade etc. The contractor shall use appropriate size of frame 

work instead of mentioned to achieve desired shape & comfort as shown. All as 

per instructions of Engineer-in-charge. 

a) Single Seater Sofa 

b) Two Seater Sofa 

c) Three Seater Sofa 



drawings given by MIDC. The materials used for the work shall conform to the 

relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. The work shall be 

executed as mentioned in the enclosed specifications or as directed by the Engineerin-charge. 


contract rate shall be per No of Sofas of respective type as per approved drawing. 

============================================================ 

Item No.38 : Dust Bin (250mm Dia) 

Providing & arranging in position dust bins out of perforated S.S Sheets (min Size 

350 mm dia x 400 mm Height). Item to completed in all respect as per drg & 

direction of Engineer in charge. 



381 




the relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. 


The contract rate shall be per No of Dust bin provided. 

Item No.39: 12 mm thk Fully Glazed Partition 

Providing and fixing in position 12 mm thick Toughened Clear Glass in partition 

panels by using various glass fittings to be fixed with necessary fittings on the 

ceiling duly finished without giving any load on the false ceiling by using 

necessary hardware what ever necessary and required numbers to complete the 

job in all respect. Rate including cost of door opening with approved hardware 

such as patch fitting lock, handle etc of approved make but with out cost of floor 

spring. Contractor is advised to submit working drawing with details patch 

fitting, sizes of glass panels etc and take approvals of consultants before execution 

of works. complete as per detail drawing, as specified and as directed by 

Architect/Engineer In Charge. 

General 







 







382 




contract rate shall be per Sqm of Fully Glazed Partition provided & fixed. 

Item No. 40: 

a) Curtains - providing and fixing approved make curtains shades. The 

curtains to be fixed and commissioned as per manufacturers specification 

the work to be completed as per satisfaction and approved of EIC 

b) Shear Curtains - providing and fixing approved make curtains shades. The 

curtains to be fixed and commissioned as per manufacturers specification 

the work to be completed as per satisfaction and approved of EIC 




the relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed specifications. 


The contract rate shall be per Sqm basis for Curtain provided. 

Item No.41: Blinds 

Vertical Blinds - providing and fixing approved make vertical blinds shades. The 

blinds to be fixed and commissioned as per manufacturers specification the work to 

be completed as per satisfaction and approved of EIC. 


The work shall be carried out as per the specifications & drawings given 

by MIDC. The materials used for the work shall conform to the relevant IS 




contract rate shall be per Sqm of Vertical blinds provided & fixed. 



383 

============================================================== 

Item No.42: Frost Film 

Providing & fixing in position approved make colour & shade frost film on glass 

complete as per direction of manufacturer & instruction of Engineer - in - Charge. 





mentioned in the enclosed specifications The wood used for the frame work shall be 

yen wood or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 


The contract rate shall be per Sqm of frost film provided & fixed. 

Item No.43 :- 

Providing and fixing 12 mm thick Toughened Clear Glass on top of the roofing 

with all hardware & fitting etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in charge. 

Item is to be carried out as per direction of Engineer-in-charge & item wording. 


Item No. 44: 

Providing & supplying d line make modular floor fixed balustrade system at 

staircase of AISI 316 satin polished steel 54 x12mm solid bar uprights 

(14.6030.34.140) at maximum c/c distance of 1800 mm fixed in RCC with Ø 75 x 140 

mm core & filled with epoxy grout and Ø 38 x 1.5 mm thick handrail 

(14.6039.34.200/300) fit to site at maximum railing height of 1000 mm from FFL. 

Handrail supported by bead blasted unified stem key and fixation adjusted to be 

plum and in-line with all other balustrade posts having 2 number midrail infill of 

Ø 22 x 1.5 mm thick supported with midrail fitting base of Ø 34 mm etc. complete 

with all necessary bends & terminations. 



In Charge 



384 


provide and fix the & railing. The fixtures are included in the item. 


The railing shall be measured of the clear unrebated of the railing in Rmt. The 


The contract rate shall be for one Rmt metre. 

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No. 45: 

Providing & fixing Artificate like Artifical Plant, Picture Frame etc. as per shown in 

drawing & manufacturers specification 

a) Artifical Plants 

b) Picture Frame 





mentioned in the enclosed specifications 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on No. basis. 

The contract rate shall be per No. of Artifical Plant & Picture Frame provided & 

fixed. 

tem No. 46: 

Providing & laying in position cut pile pure wool carpet of 80/20 of approved 

make complete in all respect including matching and finishing joints as per 

drawing & manufacture specification 





mentioned in the enclosed specifications 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on Sqm. basis. 

The contract rate shall be per Sqm. of Carpet provided & fixed. 



385 

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 

Scope of work: 

SUBESTIMATE NO. 4 : 

Electrical works and fire detection works. 

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 

1. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of smoke detection & fire alarm 

system with conventional fire sensors/detectors with new panel with necessary 

cabling for MIDC's premises all complete as per approval of consultant. 

Technical Specifications: 

FIRE DETECTION DEVICES & MODULES 

* Microprocessor Based Fire signaling panel. 

* The Fire Signaling panel (FSP) shall be microprocessor based with its own micro 

controller, memory, communication modules & fire device loop interface cards 

including cards for interfacing with initiating & indicating devices. 

* The FSP shall have its own Operating System in EPROM & shall contain job 

specific data in a EEPROM RSP having data file &/or user programs in volatile 

memory (RAM) shall not be accepted. 

* The FSP shall be a standalone unit that shall function independent of all other 

devices/controllers that it may be communicating with. All the various field 

installed addressable devices shall be wired in loops to the respective loop interface 

cards. 

* The FSP shall have the facility to process all the input signals received & also have 

the facility to control all the output signals connected to various devices in the field 

through any of the loop interface modules/cards. Its functions shall be freely 

programmable as per job's customized logic requirements. 

* The FSP shall be able to connect to analog addressable devices via its loop interface 

cards. FSPs shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 Signaling Line Circuit Styles as 

described below. 

* Two wire (Class-B) loops of addressable analog fire/smoke sensing signaling & 

monitoring devices. 



386 

* Four wire (Class-A) loops of addressable analog fire/smoke sensing signaling & 

monitoring devices. 

* The loops shall be self powered for all sensing, monitoring & communication 

functions. Systems requiring separate power source for the loop devices for their 

functionality are not acceptable. 

* One loop shall accommodate at least 99 Nos. of analog addressable. 

* It shall be possible to connect conventional type fire detectors to the FSP by use of 

suitable interface cards. 

* It shall also be possible to connect, conventional/other alarm initiating devices 

such as manual call points, flow switches, pressure switches, etc. to the FSP by use of 

suitable interface cards. 

* All devices connected to the FSP shall also form part of the FSP point database & 

total input/output,logic & display functionality of the FSP shall be applicable to 

these devices. 

* Each FSP shall be able to accommodate a maximum of 5 addressable device loops. 

* The FSP shall have a modular architecture using different functional interface 

cards/modules for interfacing of loop & other field devices. Failure of one interface 

cared shall not affect the functioning of other interface cards. 

* FSPs in which any loops or Input/Output circuits are resident/generated in the 

CPU/processor card are not acceptable. 

* Upon a loop cable break/failure anywhere on the loop, failure alarm shall be 

reported on the loop interface card as well as on the FSP main display. 

* It shall be possible to connect the following devices to the fSP through the loops. 

* Analog addressable smoke sensors & thermal sensors in the loops located where 

shown (as per job's custom layout plans) shall report sensed levels in analog form to 

the FSP. 

* Addressable Monitor modules in the loops shall be provided where shown (as per 

job's custom layout plans) to monitor pull stations, flow switches & other contact 

input devices shown. 

* Addressable signaling control modules in the loops shall be provided where shown 

to drive signaling circuits. Signal power shall be provided to each signaling module. 



387 

* Fault Isolator modules in the loop shall be provided where shown (as per job's 

custom layout plans) to detect a fault/short circuit in the loop wiring & to 

subsequently isolate the faulty circuit thereby ensuring healthiness & total 

functionality of non-isolated part of the loop. 

* Each detector, monitor module & control module that is connected on the loop 

shall be identified by a unique address that shall be assigned to each device. This 

address shall indicate the individual device address as well as the address of the 

loop to which it is connected to. 

* It shall be possible to create zones or logical groups in an FSP.Each zone may 

contain a number of (group)physical devices & each of these zones shall be 

individually addressable. 

* It shall be possible to program the FSP as per custom job requirements without any 

hardware modifications in the FSP. It shall be possible to program any 

signaling/control/output to be activated based a change-of-state of any point or any 

zone in the FSP. 

* It shall be possible to program any signaling/control/output to be achieved based 

on any change of state of any point or zone in the DSP. ie. the changed states may be 

either trouble, warning or Alarm states. 

* It shall be possible to set a verification time (programmable from 5-450 secs) for 

each detector in the loop. The respective device shall go in alarm state only when the 

device crosses the set threshold limit & stays above the limit for an amount of time 

that exceeds the verification time. 

* It shall be possible to provide an activation delay (programmable from 5-450 secs) 

for each input device in the FSP. The respective device shall report a change of state 

only after the device has remained in the changed state for an amount of time that 

exceeds the activation delay time. 

* It shall be possible to provide a cut-out time (programmable from 5 to 45 secs) for 

each output device in the FSP. It shall be possible to automatically deactivate the 

outputs after the outputs have remained activated for an amount of time that 

exceeds the cut-out time. 



388 

* The FSP shall process all analog values for dual level alarm limits. Limits & sensor 

values shall be displayable, modifiable & reportable in decimal values. 

* If a sensor value transitions from a normal level to a warning level over an 

extended time period (beyond two hours), the sensor shall report a "trouble" 

condition including the analog value in the FSP. 

* If a sensor value transitions from a normal level to a warning level over a time 

period of less than two hours, a warning/pre-alarm message, including the analog 

value shall report in the FSP. 

* Anytime any sensor value transitions beyond the second & higher limit value, an 

alarm initiation & report shall be issued by the FSP. 

* Each sensor shall have FSP resident & unique, warning & alarm limits which shall 

be displayable & on-line adjustable 

* In case any sensor is removed from its base, a trouble will be generated in the FSP 

indicating the address of the point in trouble. 

* In case of a mismatch between the installed sensor type for a particular address & 

the programmed type for that address, a trouble alarm shall be generated for that 

point. 

* In addition to the Trouble, Warning & Alarm levels of each addressable device, it 

shall be possible to segregate the devices in two alarm groups to help operators 

differentiate between detectors & supervised alarm inputs. It shall be possible to 

assign any point to any group. In case of an alarm, the FSP should also indicate the 

alarm group that represents the alarm point. 

* The FSP shall automatically & periodically (at least once every 24 hours) compare 

each sensor's operating characteristics with the set sensitivity & recalibrate the dual 

alarm limits if necessary. 

* The FSP shall be equipped with an integral Power supply unit that shall be 

provided with a supervised automatic battery backup. 

* The power supply unit shall accept 110vac/230vac mains power 

* The power supply unit shall supply DC power to all the interface cards/modules 

within the FSP as well as to all the devices wired on all the FSP Loops. 



389 

* Batteries shall be rechargeable, sealed maintenance free type. The FSP shall 

continuously supervise the battery voltage levels & shall generate a trouble alarm in 

case of low battery voltage. 

* Both mains failure as well as low battery level troubles shall be annunciated by the 

FSP. 

* The following conditions shall be indicated on the FSP by means of different LED 

indicators built in each FSP. 

** Main power fail. 

** CPU running. 

** Low battery. 

** Ground fault. 

** Trouble in system. 

** Warning (prealarm) 

** Alarm in system 

* Additionally each Loop interface card shall be provided with different LED's that 

shall depict trouble, warning or alarm in the specific loop. 

* The Alarm LED's shall be indicated by Red coloured LEDs while all other Trouble 

conditions shall be differentiated by Amber colored LEDs 

* The FSP shall be equipped with 7segment LED display on the FSP that shall 

provide at a glance to the operator the address(es) of the points in 

trouble,warning/alarm states. 

* For ease of operation, operator toggle switches for the following minimum 

functions shall be provided directly on the FSP without having the operator to use 

the operator keypad: 

** Acknowledge alarm. 

** Reset FSP 

** Silence Alarm. 

* Scroll switches to view multiple alarm address. On ogling of this switch, the seven 

segment display shall show the respective alarm while the respective LEDs shall be 

lit showing the condition (Trouble, Warning or Alarm) to enable operator to capture 

the alarm address & alarm type at a glance 



390 

* The FSP shall be equipped with LED test & audible sounder test facility. Activation 

of this test shall test (light up) all LEDs & activate the sounder for as long as the test 

switch is held in toggled condition. 

* The FSP shall equipped with built in emergency toggle switch that shall be used in 

case of emergencies to generate a manual evacuation signal. Toggling of this switch 

shall activate all programmed signaling/indicating outputs in all the loops of the 

FSP. 

* The FSP shall have a built in operators display unit with integral operators keypad 

& a strip printer. The display shall be a backlit LCD type that shall display clear text 

as well as numerics & shall have a minimum of 4 lines & 40 characters per line. 

* The FSP shall allow an operator with the appropriate privilege to directly set 

smoke sensor sensitivity in units of percent per foot obscuration, within predefined 

limits. 

* The display unit shall continuously display date & time & a "System Normal" 

message when no alarms are present in system 

* On a change of state of the devices, the backlighting shall turn on & the display 

shall show the device address,its condition (eg. Warning,alarm,trouble) date & time 

of the state change, the point descriptor & an operator action message. 

* The point descriptors & the action messages shall be programmable as per custom 

requirement, the point descriptions shall be of maximum 32 characters while the 

action message shall be of maximum 40 characters. 

* If the display window is inactive for a specific length of time (eg.5minutes) the 

backlighting shall automatically turn off. 

* It shall be possible to assign at least 2 levels of passwords for granting different 

access levels to operators. 

* It shall be possible for operators (with authorized passwords) to : 

i. Enable/disable & isolate devices 

ii. Initiate (command) devices. 

iii. Display desired device status. 

iv. Test the FSP(run self-diagnostics) 

v. Modify Analog Warning & Alarm limits. 



391 

vi. Modify Action messages, device descriptors. 

vii. Add, modify or delete privileged operators. 

viii.Add, delete devices in the system. 

* Change type of detector. 

* Enable/Disable alarm verification for individual detectors. 

* Run/print-out Reports. 

* It shall be possible to carry out all above operations without having to 

* Power off the FSP or make any hardware changes. 

The operator display unit on the FSP shall allow operators with authorized 

password to generate & print out the following types of reports. 

* Alarm Summary : Report on all points in alarm condition. 

* All Devices status: Report on all points in the system. 

* Disable devices : Report on all points that are disabled. 

* Trouble Summary : Report on all points that are in trouble condition. 

* Detector Sensitivity : Report on Analog sensitivity values for the detectors. 

* History Log: Report on all change-of-state history events & operator actions history 

in chronological order. 

* Logical Groups (Zones): Report on all zones including list of physical points in 

each zone. 

* Isolated device summary : Report on all points that are isolated from the FSP. 

* Device Trend: A trend report on sampled values recorded with date & time stamp 

at each sample. 

* The FSP shall have integral capability to be connected & to communicate with a 

higher order PC based Central Station without any additional hardware 

requirements in the FSP. 

* The communication to the Central Station shall be through a fault tolerant 

redundant network using at least two cable pairs such that communication with the 

Central would continue even in case of breakage/failure of one cable pair. 

* Analog Addressable Detectors - General Operation. 

* Each device shall be assigned a unique address via. Easily understood decade (1 to 

99) switch. Address selection via binary switches or by jumpers is not acceptable. 



392 

* Devices which take their address from their position in the circuit are unacceptable 

because if devices are later added, existing addresses, descriptors & commands must 

be reprogrammed. 

* Devices shall receive power & communication from the same pair of conductors. 

Forices, the backlighting shall turn on & the display shall show the device address,its 

condition ( fault-tolerant circuits, any separate power wiring shall also be made 

fault-tolerant. 

* Each device shall contain screw terminals with rising plates for positive 

termination of upto 12 AWG Wire. 

* Analog Addressable detectors. 

* All fire sensors shall mount on a common base to facilitate the changing of sensor 

type if building conditions change. 

The base shall be incompatible with conventional detectors to preclude the mounting 

on a no-intelligent device. 

* Each sensor shall contain an LED which shall blink each time the sensor is scanned 

by the Fire Signaling panel (FSP). If the FSP determines that the sensor is in alarm, 

the FSP shall command the sensor LED to remain latched on to indicate alarm. 

* Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch such that it can be 

tested for alarm from the sensor location. 

* Each sensor shall be capable of being tested for alarm via command from the FSP. 

* Each sensor shall respond to FSP scan for information with its type identification to 

preclude inadvertent substation of another sensor type. The FSP shall operate with 

the installed type but shall initiate a mismatch(trouble) condition until the proper 

type in installed or the programmed sensor type changed. 

* Each sensor shall respond to FSP scan for information with an analog 

representation of measured fire-related phenomena (smoke density, particles of 

combustion, temperature). Such response proves end-to-end sensor response 

including the operation of the sensor electronics. Systems which only monitor the 

presence of a conventional detector in an addressable base shall not be acceptable. 

* Each Photoelectric detector shall contain an optical sensing chamber with nominal 

sensitivity of 2.3% foot obscuration. 



393 

* Provide lonization Smoke Sensors as indicated on the plans. Each shall contain a 

unipolar dual chamber configuration with nominal sensitivity of 1.55/foot 

obscuration. 

* Each Thermal sensor shall provide temperature measurement when scanned by the 

FSP for information. 

* Temperature Heat Detector. 

* Addressable heat detectors will be of the fixed temperature type or rate or rise of 

temperature with fixed temperature element type. 

* Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors. 

* This detector will be capable of responding when the temperature of the 

surrounding due to a fire exceeds the preset temperature of the detector. 

* The temperature setting, classification with respect to temperature of operation (by 

means of appropriate colour code) & the design & constructional features of the 

detector will be in accordance with IS:2175, BS-5445 Part 5 or 8 (European Standard 

EN 54-5 or 8) or ANSI-UL.521 as applicable. 

* Rate of Rise of Temperature Detectors with Fixed Temperature Element. 

* The rate of rise of temperature element of this detector will be capable of 

responding when the rate of rise temperature at the detector exceeds a 

predetermined value within a given time regardless of the actual temperature. The 

detector will also be provided with a fixed temperature element which will respond 

when the temperature exceeds the preset value. 

* Three detectors will be supplied with grades appropriate to the response time with 

respect to rate of rise of temperature settings of the rate rise of temperature element 

& temperature of operation of the fixed temperature element for particular 

application. The installed spacing & mounting height will be based on the rate or rise 

of temperature element of the detector. 

* All such detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity, listed spacing & 

response grade (or colour coded) as per relevant standards. 

* The sensitivity, setting, response grade, listed spacing, the design & construction of 

the detector will be in accordance with IS:2175, BS-5445 Part 5 to 8 (European 

Standard EN 54-5 or 8) or ANSI-UL.521 as applicable. 



394 

* Photoelectric Smoke Detector 

* This detector working on the light scattering principle will be capable of detecting 

visible smoke from smoldering fires long before the fire breaks out into visible flame. 

* The normal sensitivity/response threshold value,the design & construction of the 

detector will be in accordance with IS:11360, BS:5445 Part 7 (European Standard 

EN54-7) or ANSIUL. 268 as applicable. Smoke detectors will be marked with their 

normal sensitivity & tolerance limits & listed spacing as per relevant standards. 

* Input Module. 

* The Input Device shall provide an addressable input for NO/NC contact devices 

such as manual stations,waterflow switches, sprinkler supervisory devices, etc. 

* The Input Device shall provide a supervised initiating circuit. An open-circuit fault 

shall be annunciated at the FSP (Subsequent alarms shall be reported in spite of the 

fault). 

* The device shall contain an LED which blinks upon being scanned by the FSP. 

Upon determination of an alarm condition, the LED shall be latched on. 

* Output Module. 

* The Output Device shall provide an addressable output for a separately powered 

alarm indicting circuit or for a control relay. 

* The Output Device shall provide a supervised indicating circuit where indicated on 

the plans. An open-circuit fault shall be annunciated at the FSP. (Subsequent alarm 

signalling shall occur in spite of the fault condition). 

* The output Device shall provide a control relay where indicated on the plans. The 

relay contacts shall be SPDT (Form `C') rated at two amps @ 28 V dc. 

* The device module shall contain an LED which blinks upon being scanned by the 

DGP. Upon activation of the device, the LED shall be latched on. 

* The device shall mount in a standard electrical box. 

Manual Call Point: 

* Each Addressable Manual call Point (MCP) comprise of an electronic circuit built 

into it to provide addressing capability & or reputed make push button enclosed in a 

box. The push button will have adequate number of contacts. The push button 



395 

actuator will be unshrouded & the push button will project out from the surface of 

the box. The front part of the Manual call point will be provided with frame having 

breakable glass sheet on the front surface suitably sealed with neoprene gaskets. The 

arrangement will be such that when completely assembled. The front glass sheet 

keeps the push button actuated as long as the glass cover is intact. in case of fire 

when the glass cover is broken to give a fire alarm the push button shall be 

automatically released by its spring action & give necessary signal to the firealarm 

panel for annunciation of fire & address. 

* The enclosure of the MCP will be dust, weather & vermin proof, having a degree of 

protection IP-54 in indoor areas & IP 65 in outdoor areas. 

* The MCP will be suitable for wall mounting. 

* the complete unit will be painted fire red shade No.536 as per IS-5. The internal 

surface of the enclosure will be painted with semi-glossy white. The push button 

knob will be red in colour. 

* A label will be provided on each MCP with an inscription reading "Fire alarm"-In 

case of Fire Break Glass", either on the enclosure or on a separate plate mounted 

behind the glass cover. A translation of this inscription in the vernacular prevailing 

at site will also be provided on the label. The metal plate used as a label will not 

tarnish under the prevalent atmospheric condition. The inscription will be indelibly 

marked on the label. 

* Each MCP will be provided with the following accessories. 

* If not of the press to break type glass or pull type,an iron hammer of sufficient 

weight suitable for breaking the glass cover. The iron hammer will be attached to the 

MCP enclosure by means of non-corrodible iron chain of sufficient length & play to 

facilitate easy breaking of the glass. a hook to support the hammer will also be 

provided on the MCP. 

* An identification plate, with a tag number. The tag number will be identical to that 

displayed o the fire alarm panel. 

* Compression type nickel plated brass cable glands on the external enclosure for the 

connecting cables. Suitable knock outs will be provided on both the top & bottom 



396 

surfaces of the enclosure to facilitate either top or bottom entry of cables. The degree 

of protection will remain intact with knockouts in place. 

* Terminal blocks with the required number of terminals for connecting external 

cables. 

* Earthing studs(if the enclosure is metallic & the operating voltage is greater than 

24V) suitable for connecting to the Purchaser's earthing conductor. 

* The MCP will be addressable type having the following features. 

* Individual addressing capability on the control unit to facilitate precise location of 

fire/manual call point actuated. 

* Continuous monitoring of individual manual call point & operating 

conditions/healthiness. 

Drawing: Fire Alarm system locations of all fire points are indicative in the tender 

drawings, however actual cable route shall be decided at site as per approval of 

MIDC. 

Approvals: It is the absolute responsibility of the contractor to carry out the work in 

accordance with the regulations of the Indian Electricity Act. Fire Insurance 

Regulations. Local Electrical Inspecting Authorities & the Electricity supply 

authorities & to prepare & get necessary drawings approved. No extras will be 

admissible to the Contractor on this account. All those services shall be deemed to 

have been included in the unit rates. 

However, any statutory payment to the Govt. bodies paid by the Contractor on 

behalf of the MIDC will be reimbursed on production of original payment receipts 

made by the Contractor. 

Guarantee: The Contractor must guarantee for the works & equipment & tube lights 

(except GLS lamp) & their performance in a perfect way for one year from the date 

of commissioning of the installation duly approved by consultant. If the part of the 

work 

or equipment is found to be unsound or defective during the period of guarantee, 

the contractor has to repair or replace this at his own cost & responsibility. Any 

delay on the part of the Contractor in doing this gives MIDC the right to do the same 

at the 



397 

cost & risk of Contractor. 

Workmanship: Good workmanship is an essential requirement for compliance with 

the clauses in the specifications. The workmanship shall be in accordance with the 

best accepted practices & installation work will be carried out in a strict accordance 

with the current edition of the IS Specifications & IE/CEIG/MSEB Rules & 

Regulations. 

Completion & Testing: After the completion of the installation, necessary Test Report 

in standard format shall be submitted, where the test results are highlighted. The test 

shall be carried out as explained in Technical Specifications & Tender Documents. 

Electrical Contractor should arrange test certificate. It will be Contractor's 

responsibilities to work five prints to indicate the changes/modifications made 

during the course of execution of work & provide as built drawing giving complete 

details 

of the installation indicating therein the position of switches, fixtures etc. 

Item No.1:- 

Supplying and erecting testing heat detector complete on box as per specification 

no. FF-FAS/HD 

Heat detector 

Specification No 

(FF-FAS-HD) 

Scope: 

Supplying, erecting, and testing heat detector with base erected on 16 gauges 

M.S. sheet box of 100 x 100 x75 mm size duly painted. 

Material: 

Heat detector: UL listed / LPCB marked with 360° blinking LED & having 68° 

C/78°C fixed temperature. 

Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauges 

Red oxide paint: Superior quality 

Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified color 

Hardware: Sheet metal screws 



398 

Plugs: Plastic 

Method of Construction: 

The Heat Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted 

with one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with 

necessary SM screws, plugs, etc on ceiling, duly terminating the provided 

cable with provided glands and making the connection. 



The work shall be carried out as per the specifications & approved drawings. 

The materials used for the work shall conform to the relevant IS Specifications 

& also to the enclosed specifications. The work shall be executed as 

mentioned in the enclosed specifications or as directed by the Engineer-incharge. 

Mode of measurement & payment: The measurement shall be on No basis. 

The contract rate shall be per No. basis of heat detector provided & fixed. 

============================================================== 

Item No. 2 : 

Supplying, erecting and testing optical type smoke detector complete on 

box as per specification No. FFFAS/SD 

Optical type Photo electric smoke detector 


(FF-FAS/SD) 

Scope: 

Supplying, erecting and testing optical type smoke detector complete 

with base erected on 16 gauge CRCA/MS sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75 

mm duly painted. 

Material: 

Smoke detector: 

UL listed / LPCB marked 

Box: 

CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauge 



399 

Red oxide paint: 

Superior quality 

Enamel paint: 

Superior quality of specified colour 

Hardware: 

Sheet metal screws 

Plugs: 

Plastic 


The Smoke Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly 

painted with one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of 

specified shade with necessary SM screws, plugs, etc on ceiling, duly 

terminating the provided cable with provided glands and making the 

connection. 

The work shall be executed as per item wordings & as per the 

directions of Engineer-in-charge. The work shall be carried out as per 

the specifications & approved drawings. The materials used for the 

work shall conform to the relevant IS Specifications & also to the 

enclosed specifications. The work shall be executed as mentioned in the 

enclosed specifications or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 


The contract rate shall be per No. basis of optical type smoke detector 

provided & fixed. 

Item No. 3 : 

Supplying, erecting and testing Ionisation type smoke detector complete on 

box 

Optical type Photo electric smoke detector 


(FF-FAS/SD) 

Scope: 



400 

Supplying, erecting and testing optical type smoke detector complete 

with base erected on 16 gauge CRCA/MS sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75 

mm duly painted. 

Material: 

Smoke detector: 

UL listed / LPCB marked 

Box: 

CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauge 

Red oxide paint: 

Superior quality 

Enamel paint: 


Hardware: 

Sheet metal screws 

Plugs: 

Plastic 


The Smoke Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly 

painted with one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of 

specified shade with necessary SM screws, plugs, etc on ceiling, duly 

terminating the provided cable with provided glands and making the 

connection. 








The contract rate shall be per No. basis of optical type smoke detector 



401 

provided & fixed. 

============================================================= 

Item No. 4 : 

Supplying, erecting, testing and commissioning Manual Call Point (Pill box) with 

break glass push button in metal enclosure complete as per specification No. 

FFFAAS/ MCP 

Pill Box (Manual Call Point [MCP]) 


(FF-FAAS/MCP) 

Scope: 

Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning pill box with break 

glass, push button. MCP is manually operated device used to initiate 

an alarm signal. 

Material: 

Push Button: 

Plastic 

Enclosure: 

CRCA/MS with 100/150 mm round/square with Glass cover 

Hammer with chain: 

Brass 

Enamel paint: 

Superior quality Post Office red colour 

Hardware: 

SM Screw 

Plugs: 

Plastic 


The pill box with break glass cover, push button in circular/ square 

enclosure with push button kept inside per set with a glass outside 

marked “IN CASE OF FIRE BREAK GLASS” provided with a small 

hammer and chain fixed to the pill box shall be mounted on wall or 



402 

any other place as directed and provided with cable entry with suitable 

terminal inside and painted with two coats of red oxide and two coats 

of post office red enamel paint. 








The contract rate shall be per No. basis of Manual Call Point provided & 

fixed. 

============================================================== 

Item No. - 5 

Supply and erecting hooters with CRCA enclosure complete as per specification 

No. FF-FAAS/HTR 

Hooter 


(FF-FAAS/HTR) 

Scope: 

Supply and erecting hooters with CRCA enclosure duly connected to 

main amplifier to radiate two tone sounds for public. 

Material: 

Hooter: 

Electronic type with 6W output, Line matching transformer 

Enclosure: 

CRCA sheet of 14 SWG with perforation 

Enamel paint: 

Superior quality Post Office red colour 

Hardware: 

SM Screw 



403 

Plugs: 

Plastic 

Gutties: 

Wooden 


The electronics hooter with Line matching transformer shall be 

enclosed in suitable size perforated CRCA enclosure and installed as 

per instructions and shall be connected and fixed at suitable site to 

ensure that the alarm is heard anywhere in the protected area. The 

minimum sound level shall be 80 dB. 








The contract rate shall be per No. basis of hooters provided & fixed. 

============================================================== 

Item No. – 6 

Supplying and erecting PVC armoured cable 2 core 1.5 sq.mm. FRLS copper 

conductor complete erected on wall/ ceiling as per specification No.CB-LT/CU 

PVC/XLPE Cables (CB) 

7.1, 7.2, & 7.3 Armoured Cables(HT & LT) 

1. General 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall 

carry ISI mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark 

is not available in market, it shall be as included in approved list. 

Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified 

by BIS. If there is no reference for particular method of construction in 



404 

IS, such work shall be carried out as per the approved method of 

construction specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook. 

Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above 

shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. 

2. Cables: (Armoured) 

The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are 

acceptable as good practice, and accepted standards. 

SP 30: 1984 : National Electrical Code 

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 : 

National Building Code 

IS 1255: 1983 : Code of practice of installation & Maintenance of 

armoured 

cables up to 33 kV. 

IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 : Recommended current ratings of PVC cables. 

IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1 

for 

working voltages up to and including 1100 

Volts. 

IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1 

for 

working voltages up to and including 3.3 

kV to 11 kV. 

IS 10810: Part 63; 1993 : 

of electric 

Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke density 

cables under fire condition. 

3. Scope: (Armoured cables) 

Specification No. 

(CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT) 

Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified 

conducting material Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3 

including required material, hardware's for erection and erecting on 

wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same through pole, pipe, 



405 

laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved 

method of construction including glands, lugs, etc. 

4. Material: 

Cables: 

Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3 

and of required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No, 

manufacturer's name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every 

metre and having the total count of progressive length in meter at each 

mark. 

Earth wire: 

Galvanized Iron (GI) wire of appropriate gauge as per Table No 7/1. 

Glands: 

As per specification (CB-GL) 

Lugs: 

As per specification (CB-CL/AL, CB-CL/CU) 

Saddles: 

Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size depending 

on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality 

enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi 

circular shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for fixing. 

GI Strip: 

22 g x 25 mm width G I Strip. 

Clamps: 

MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size of 

3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size of cable), 

rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the cable. 

Identification tags: 

For identifying root, connection position GI strip with identification 

mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie should be 

fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done. 



406 

Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden gutties, etc. 

5. Method of Construction: 

General: 

a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be 

terminated with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly 

crimped, as directed by Site engineer. 

b) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as 

mentioned in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with 

adequate distance between cables as mentioned in IS so as to 

minimize de-rating. Cables shall be tagged / ferruled with 

identification name / mark at the point from where distribution 

starts and at ends. Bare earth wire of appropriate sizes per Table no. 

7/1 shall run along with the cable. Earth wire running with the 

cable shall be terminated at the earth terminal nearest to cable 

termination. 

5.1 Erection of Cable on Surface: 

Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect 

level and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far 

as possible for good aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of 

required gauge as per Table No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire 

shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to 

wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties, 

etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be maximum 450 

mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for 

stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable 

shall be made good by filling and finishing with plastering the same. 

5.2 Erection of Cable on Trusses: 



407 

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be 

firmly clamped by wrapping GI strip of 22 g, 25 mm width of required 

length fixed to truss with nuts and bolts. 

5.3 Erection of Cable on Pole: 

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be 

firmly clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped 

with 25x3 mm or 50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to 

pole with nuts and bolts. 

5.4 Laying of Cable in provided Trench/Pole: 

While laying Cable along with bare GI earth wire, utmost care shall be 

taken to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open 

end. Cable shall be brought out from trench vertically straight 

(minimum 1.0 metre above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the 

trench so that depth of cable shall not be less than as shown in Table 

No 7/4. Suitable size of cable loops shall be provided near termination 

point at adequate depth. 

5.5 Erecting cable in constructed Trench / duct: 

Erection of cable/s in constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide 

lines of IS 1255. 

5.6 Erection of cable/s on trays: 

Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care 

shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation 

of cable. 

6. Dismantling 

Cable laid underground, or fixed on any surface shall be dismantled 

carefully without damaging complete with ail its accessories, making 

coil and stored as directed. The surface of the dismantled cable shall be 

made clear by removing of unwanted material, cement mortar, etc. 

When cable is dismantled from trench refill back the trench and 

making the surface proper. 



408 

7. The work shall be executed as per item wordings & as per the directions 

of Engineer-in-charge. The work shall be carried out as per the 

specifications & approved drawings. The materials used for the work 

shall conform to the relevant IS Specifications & also to the enclosed 

specifications. The work shall be executed as mentioned in the enclosed 

specifications or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 

Table No 7/1 

Size of Bare GI Earth wire to be used with LT Cables up to 1.1 kV 

S. No. Size of cable Size of bare GI Earth 

wire to be used with 

cable 

1 2.5 Sq. mm. to 50 Sq. mm. of all 12SWG 

cores. 

2 70 Sq. mm. to 95 Sq. mm. of all 10SWG 

cores. 

3 120 Sq. mm. and above of all cores. 8SWG 

Table No 7/2 

Minimum bending Radius for Cables 

S. 

No. 

Voltage level 

of cables 

Single core Multi core 

Un-armoured 

1 Up to 11 kV 20 D 15D 12 D 

2 Up to 22 kV 25 D 20 D 15D 

3 Up to 33 kV 30 D 25 D 20 D 

Multi core 

Armoured 

Note: D diameter of cable. 

Wherever possible, 25 percent larger radii than the specified above 

should be used. 

Table No 7/3 

Current Rating (In Ground) for PVC/ XLPE Insulated 1.1 kV Grade Cables 

Nominal 

area of 

conductor 

Aluminum Conductor 

Copper Conductor 

(Rating in A) 

Single Core Multi Core Single Core Multi Core 

Sq. mm. PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE 

10 51 55 46 50 65 71 60 65 

16 66 74 60 68 85 95 77 87 



409 

25 86 98 76 90 110 125 99 115 

35 100 118 92 108 130 150 120 138 

50 120 137 110 126 155 175 145 161 

70 140 172 135 158 190 220 175 202 

95 175 204 165 187 220 260 210 239 

120 195 234 185 215 250 301 240 276 

150 220 262 210 240 280 336 270 308 

185 240 298 235 273 305 381 300 350 

240 270 344 275 316 345 441 345 405 

300 295 387 305 355 375 496 385 455 

400 325 458 335 420 400 586 425 538 

500 345 495 - - 425 635 - - 

630 390 555 - - 470 710 - - 

800 440 625 - - - - - - 

1000 490 685 - - - - - - 

Rating Factors for Variation in Ambient Air Temperature 

Air Temperature 40 45 50 

(°C) 

Rating Factor 1.00 0.94 0.88 

(XLPE) 

Rating Factor (PVC) 1.00 0.90 0.81 

Table No 7/4 

Minimum laying Depth of cables (IS: 1255) 

S. No. Voltage level of cables Minimum depth from top 

of the cable 

1 Up to 1.1 kV 750 mm 

2 3.3 kV to 11 kV 900 mm 

3 22 kV to 33 kV 1050 mm 

4 At road crossing 1000 mm 

5 

At railway crossing (from 1000 mm 

Bottom of sleepers to Top of 

pipe) 

Notes below Table No 7/4: 

1. PVC Insulated electrical cable for voltage grade up to 

1.1 kV is based on 8 volts drop. 

2. The distances are given in meters and after rounding. 


For Temperature Correction please see as detailed below: 

Ground 20 degree C 25 degree C 30 degree C 35 degree C 

temp. 

Rating 

factors: 

0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 



410 

Table No 7/5 

Distance up to which different sizes of UG Aluminum Conductor 

Cables 1.1 kV grade, can be used for different current ratings of 8 

Volts drop. 

(PVC insulated, PVC Sheathed, 3 cores or 4 cores) 

Maximum Conductor temperature - 70 degree C 

S. Current Distance in meters for the following cable sizes in Sqmm 

No. 

Amp 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300 

1 5 165 260 415 725 895 1300 1925 2360 3065 3555 4300 5770 6460 

2 10 80 130 205 360 450 650 960 1180 1530 1775 2150 2885 3230 

3 15 55 85 140 240 300 430 640 785 1020 1185 1430 1920 2155 

4 20 40 65 100 180 225 325 480 590 765 890 1075 1440 1615 

5 25 30 50 80 145 180 260 385 470 610 710 860 1150 1290 

6 30 25 40 70 120 150 215 320 390 570 590 715 960 1075 

7 40 20 30 50 90 110 160 240 295 380 445 535 720 805 

8 50 - 25 40 70 90 130 190 235 305 355 430 575 645 

9 60 - - 35 60 75 110 160 195 255 295 355 480 535 

10 70 - - 30 50 65 90 135 165 215 255 305 410 460 

11 80 - - - 45 55 80 120 145 190 220 265 360 405 

12 90 - - - 40 50 70 105 130 170 195 235 320 360 

13 100 - - - 35 45 65 95 115 150 175 215 290 320 

14 110 - - - - 40 60 85 105 140 160 195 260 290 

15 120 - - - - 35 55 80 95 125 145 180 240 270 

16 130 - - - - - 50 75 90 115 135 165 220 250 

17 140 - - - - - 45 70 80 110 125 150 205 230 

18 150 - - - - - - 65 75 100 115 140 190 215 

19 160 - - - - - - 60 70 95 110 130 180 200 

20 170 - - - - - - 55 70 90 105 125 170 190 

21 180 - - - - - - 50 65 85 100 120 160 180 

22 190 - - - - - - - 60 80 90 110 150 170 

23 200 - - - - - - - 60 75 90 105 145 160 

24 225 - - - - - - - 65 80 95 125 145 

25 250 - - - - - - - - - 70 85 115 130 

26 275 - - - - - - - - - 80 105 115 

27 300 - - - - - - - - - 70 95 105 

Mode of measurement & payment: The measurement shall be on Rmt basis. 

The contract rate shall be per Rmt of cable of specified size supplied & 

erected. 

============================================================== 



411 

Item No. 7 : 

Supplying, erecting and testing remote response indicators as per specification 

No. FF-FAAS/RRI 


(FF-FAAS/RRI) 

Scope: 

Supplying, erecting, and testing of remote response indicators. 

Application: 

Remote Response Indicators shall be fixed for closed rooms, cabins, or 

for inaccessible rooms, etc. 

Material: 

Indicator: 

5 mm LED (2 Nos) /10 mm LED (1 No) in Red colour 

Enclosure: 

CRCA sheet of 14 SWG with perforation 

Enamel paint: 


Hardware: 

SM Screws 

Plugs: 

Plastic 

Gitties: 

Wooden 


Remote response indicator housed in enclosure shall be fitted out side 

the rooms, cabins at accessible height and shall be clearly visible. 

Mode of Measurement: 

Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis. 



412 

Item No. 8 : 

Supplying, erecting, testing and commissioning the 4 Zones Microprocessor based 

conventional Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with standard accessories complete 

as per specification No. FF-FAAS/FACP 

Fire Alarm Control Panel 

Local Control Panel 


Fire Alarm Control Panel (FF-FAAS/FACP) 

Local Control Panel 

(FF-FAS/LCP) 

Scope: 

Supplying, erecting, testing, & commissioning of Fire Alarm Control 

Panel (FACP) with all accessories. 

Material: 

Panel: 

Microprocessor based Conventional Main Fire Alarm Control Panel 

(FACP) with necessary Test Certificate from ERTL as per IS 2189-1999 

provided with SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) of suitable battery 

(2x12V) 24V, 24 AH capacity maintenance free battery as standby 

supply to switch over automatically for a period of 8 hours in case of 

A.C. supply failure to panel with 7 AH capacity battery charger, panel 

shall have following features. 

a) Visual zone indication in which fire has emerged. 

b) Audio alarm devices. 

c) Acknowledge reset and test devices. 

d) Visual indication (2x20 character LCD display) incorporating 

following indications: 

i. Fire condition 

ii. 

iii. 

iv. 

Fault condition 

A.C. Pilot indication 

Low battery indication 



413 

v. Blown fuse indication A.C. as well as D.C. 

vi. 

vii. 

viii. 

ix. 

Built in electronic hooters of 2 tone round for fire 

condition and single tone for fault condition. 

Open and short circuit fault. 

Push button switches for checking each zone. 

Push button to disable audio alarm. 

x. Reset push button. 

e) Fire protection and alarm circuit shall have modular design 

using electronic plug in type printed circuit boards (PCB) with 

spare cards. 

Method of installation: 

The microprocessor based main fire Alarm control panel designed as 

per IS 2189-1999 with ERTL Test certificate shall be fixed at accessible 

place so that security or fire personal can attend to the fault 

immediately. 

Testing: 

The control shall be tested for following features: 

1. Alarm cancel Test 

2. Reset 1 lamp 

3. Fire Test 

4. Open Test (for detector & hooter) 

5. Short circuit Test (for detector & hooter) 

6. Walk Test(one man test) 

7. Sounder Test 









414 


The contract rate shall be per No. of 4 Zones Microprocessor supplied, erected 

& commissioned. 

============================================================== 

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 

All material shall be conforming to relevant standard as per BIS and shall 

carry ISI mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not 

available in market, it shall either carry valid ‘Quality Control’ certificate 

issued by the Chief Engineer (Elect), P.W. Dept. Maharashtra State Govt. as 

included in approved list. 

Work shall be carried out as per the Method of Construction specified by BIS. 

If there is no reference for particular Method of Construction in IS, such work 

shall be carried out as per the approved Method of Construction specified in 

chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook. Material and Work not qualifying to any 

provision mentioned above shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in 

Charge. 

Material shall be tested in approved Testing Laboratory and shall qualify the 

relevant tests as and when directed by Engineer In-Charge. 

Recommended Standards: 

The following list is showing Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good 

practice, and accepted standards. 

IS 732:1989 

Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installations 

IS 4648: 1968 Guide for Electrical Layout in residential buildings 

IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980 Conduits for Electrical Installations: General 

requirements 

IS 9537 (Part 2): 1981 Rigid Steel Conduits 

IS 9537 (Part 3): 1983 Rigid Plain Conduits of insulating material 

IS 3419: 1989 Specifications for fittings for rigid non metallic 

conduits 

IS 694: 

PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and 



415 

including 1100V 

IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 

PVC insulated (heavy-duty) electric cables for 

working voltages up to and including 1100V 

IS 3961 (Part 5): 1968 

Recommended current ratings for cables: PVC 

insulated light duty cables. 

IS 4288: 1988 

PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables with solid 

aluminium conductors for voltages up to and 

including 1100V 

IS 14772: 2000 

Specifications for Accessories for household and 

similar fixed Electrical Installations 

IS 3043: 1987 

SP 30: 1984 

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 

Code of practice for Earthing 

National Electrical Code 


A. POINT WIRING 

Item No. 9 : 

Point wiring for light/fan/bell concealed type in min 20 mm PVC conduit with 1.5 

sq.mm. FRLS grade copper wires with modular type switch and required accessories 

as per specification No: WGPW/ CW 

1.1 Point wiring (Concealed type) 

Specification No (WG-PW/CW) 

Scope: 

Point wiring (Concealed type): 

Providing all required approved specified material including hardware and 

erecting rigid steel / PVC conduits, junction boxes, provided fan boxes, along 

with required accessories in RCC slabs before casting and in walls, flooring by 

making chases, and refilling the same after erection of conduits, fixing 

concealed type boxes for switch boards in walls, drawing wires through 

conduits, from switch board to outlet for light / fan / bell / independent plug 

point fixing modular type switch for controlling power supply and an 

accessory for outlet of light / fan / bell / plug at other end, with mounting 

plate, and terminating wires within at both ends, as per approved Method of 



416 

Construction, closing all junction boxes with plates; removing all debris and 

testing the installation for safety and beneficial use. 

Material: 

Point wiring (Concealed): 

PVC conduit: 

PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above depending No. of wires to be 

drawn (refer Table No 1 / 2); ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories 

for PVC pipes of the same make that of pipe; such as Spacers & Saddles, 

Couplers, Bends, deep / normal Junction boxes of required ways and resin / 

adhesive to make all joints rigid. Black pipe shall not be used for surface type 

wiring. 

Rigid Steel conduit: 

Rigid steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on 

No. of wires to be drawn as per Table No.1/1, 16 gauge, ISI mark, ERW grade 

duly processed for anti-rust treatment and painted with black enamel paint, 

accessories for rigid steel conduits such as sockets, bends, deep / normal 

junction boxes of required ways all of the same make. 

Sheet metal Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes: 

Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate, fabricated from 16 

gauge CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated with antirust 

treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be 

knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and 

arrangement to fix surface cover plate on it. Cover plate shall be made up of 

fire resistant PVC material / 3mm thick laminate / Bakelite / Hylam / 

transparent acrylic sheet painted from inside to match colour of wall with 

duly tapered edges. 

Wires: phase and neutral wires: 

PVC insulated wires of specified size, 1.1 kV, & minimum FR grade 

insulation, electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) copper conductor, ISI marked, of 

required colour coding as per Table No 1/5 

Earth Continuity Wire: 



417 

PVC insulated minimum FR grade copper wires of electrolytic grade, having 

insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green colour, ISI marked, 2.5 sq. mm. or bare 

copper wire of 14g 

Lugs: 

Pin type Copper lugs. 

1.2 Accessories: 

Switch: 1 or 2 way Modular type switch 6/10 A. 

Outlet: Modular type 6A angle / batten lamp holder or 3 plate ceiling-rose or 

Bakelite / porcelain 3 way connector or if plug point, 6A, 3-pin plug shuttered 

socket. 

Boards: 

Switchboards shall comprise of; concealed type box of required modules 

made of sheet metal or polypropylene material, mounting plate and cover 

plate. The required modules shall be worked out on the basis of points, plug 

socket/sockets, step type fan regulator, etc are to be fixed. For every blank 

module, 1 way blank plate shall be fixed. All the above accessories shall be of 

same make, as that of switch. 

Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, 

washers, rawl / PVC / fill type plugs / wooden gutties, ‘U’ nails, plumbing 

nails, steel binding wire, fish wire 20 gauge, rubber / PVC bushes etc. 

Other material for Surface finishing: 

Sand, Cement, water etc.. 


Point wiring (Concealed): 

Concealing of conduits: 

General: 

Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suit final 

approved layout. Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number of 

wires to be drawn. (Table No. 1/1 for Steel conduits & Table No 1/2 for PVC 

conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and 



418 

for power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like 

data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less 

than 300 mm. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required 

locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with 

colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible 

conduits shall be used at expansion joints. Erection shall be done as per the 

layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, with junction boxes at angular 

junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to 

facilitate drawing of wires. All the bends shall be done with Bending Spring. 

Concealing of conduits: In RCC work 

Work shall be commenced after fixing of steel (re-enforcement) on centering 

material. Conduits shall be firmly fixed on steel of RCC work by binding wire. 

Fixing of conduits shall be such that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, 

beam, and column even after use of vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other 

draw-in boxes shall be such that their open end and centering material will 

not have gap in between so as to avoid concrete entering inside even after 

fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with dry sand. Open ends 

of conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers / 

sockets at ends and be flush with bottom of beam, and at located at the center 

of the beam. As far as possible bunching / grouping of conduits shall be 

avoided so that it will not affect strength of RCC work especially in beams. 

Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through in the conduits for drawing of 

wires later on. 

Concealing of Conduits: In walls 

Chases shall be made in walls of adequate width, with cutter and chiseling 

through it. Necessary finishing of the surface shall be done. Conduits of 

adequate size shall be erected with use of appropriate accessories and ‘U’ 

nails. 

Drawing of wires: 

Use of Steel fish wire shall be made for drawing of wires. Wires shall be 

drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding shall be used for phase, 



419 

neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between 

terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be 

looped within circuit only. For lighting load distribution, wires of two 

different phases shall not be drawn in single pipe. Wires shall be terminated 

in the terminals of accessories only. Adequate extra length shall be left at 

termination points. In case of 2-way point wiring additional wires of phase 

conductor shall be provided between the 2-way switches. 

Fixing Switchboards and accessories: 

Control switchboards shall generally be erected at 1.35m height or as 

specified and fixed with minimum 2 Nos. of screws of length not less than 50 

x 8mm, Boards shall be in line and plum and shall be in level with wail 

surface so as to fix mounting plate flush with wall, Termination of wires shall 

be done in switch and other accessories only by carefully inserting all strands 

in terminals and proper tightening. Switches shall be provided on phase wire 

only. Bare wire shall not be used for looping incoming supply to switches. 

Phase wire shall be routed through switch only. For plug socket phase wire 

shall be connected in right side terminal when seen from front. Proper 

termination of earth wire in Earth terminal shall be ensured. All blank 

modules shall be plugged with blanking plates. 

Testing: 

Insulation resistance test: 

All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase - neutral 

and to Earth. IR value shall not be less than 1 M-ohm. 

Earth continuity: 

Earth continuity shall be ensured at all earth terminals of plug outlets and at 

earth terminals of metal enclosures. 

Polarity test: 

Polarity test shall be carried out for ensuring the correct polarity in the plug. 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per no 

basis. The contract rate shall be on per no. of point provided. 



420 

Item No. 9b : 

Supplying & erecting mains with 2x1.5 sq.mm F.R solid copper PVC insulated 

wire laid in provided conduit/trunking/inside pole/Busbars or any other places as 

per specification No: WG-MA/BW (FOR SECONDARY POINTS) 

2.1 Mains (Concealed type) 

2.1.1 Mains in PVC Conduits in RCC work 

Specification No (WG-MA/CC, WG-MA/BW) 

Scope: 

Concealed Mains in PVC Conduits in RCC work: 

Providing specified PVC conduit, wires and laying / erecting Conduits in 

RCC work, such as slab, beam, column before casting as per approved 

Method of Construction along with of all required material including 

hardware, binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as deep PVC junction 

boxes, PVC / MS junction boxes / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC 

pipe, drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, removing debris from 

site and supervising the work during casting to confirm rigidity, continuity 

and avoid damages and as and when directed drawing of specified wires 

through these conduits with fish wire, tagging with coded ferrules and duly 

connecting with lugs, complete testing the installation for safety and 

beneficial use. 

Material: 

PVC Conduit: 

PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above, depending on number of wires 

to be drawn (refer Table No 1/2, ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), 

accessories for PVC pipes of the same make that of pipe; Couplers, long 

Bends, deep Junction boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to make all 

joints rigid. 

Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes: 

Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to 

accommodate No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet 



421 

steel with earth terminal duly treated with antirust treatment and painted 

with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be knockout holes in required 

numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to fix cover 

plates on it. Hardware: 

‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, checknuts, 

steel binding wire 20g, GI fish wire, etc. 

Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral 

wires): 

PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper 

conductor of electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV 

grade, ISI marked, of required colour coding as per Table No 1/5 


PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper conductor of 

electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green-yellow 

colour, ISI marked, of specified size but not less than 1.5 sq. mm. as per Table 

No 1/5 

Lugs: 

Copper lugs of required size & type 

Other material: 

Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible conduit etc. 


Concealing of PVC conduits: 

General: 

Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suit final 






than 300 mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided. Adequate use of 



422 

conduit accessories shall be made at required locations. Entries in wall shall 

be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. 

(For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints. 

Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, 

with junction boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, 

in such manner so as to facilitate drawing of wires. All PVC conduit bending 

shall be done with Bending Spring. All joints shall be made rigid with resin. 


In RCC work: 


material. Conduits shall be firmly fixed on steel of RCC work by binding wire. 

Fixing of conduits shall be such that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, 

beam, and column even after use of vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other 

draw-in boxes shall be such that their open end and centering material will 

not have gap in between so as to avoid concrete entering inside even after 

fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with dry sand. Open ends 

of conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers / 

sockets at ends and be flush with bottom of beam, and at located at the center 

of the beam. As far as possible bunching / grouping of conduits shall be 

avoided so that it will not affect strength of RCC work especially in beams. 

Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through in the conduits for drawing of 

wires later on. 


General: 

Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table 

No. 1/5 shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have 

intermediate joint in between terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and 

Return wire (neutral) may be looped only within circuit. For lighting load or 

single-phase distribution wires of two different phases shall not be drawn in 

single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and shall 



423 

be terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with appropriate type and 

size of lugs. 


Through PVC conduits: 

Insulated Earth wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm 

or as per specified shall be drawn through pipe. Number of wires shall not 

exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table No. 1/2. 

2.1.2 Concealed Mains in PVC Conduits in walls / flooring: 

Specification No (WG-MA/CC) 

Scope: 

Concealed Mains in PVC Conduits in walls / flooring: 

Providing specified PVC conduit, Wires and laying / erecting the conduits in 

wall, flooring by making chases / grooves / entries as per approved Method 

of Construction along with of all required material including hardware such 

as ‘U’ nails, binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as PVC / MS junction 

boxes / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, drawing fish-wires 

and making all piping rigid, refinishing the surface with cement mortar, 

removing debris from site and as and when directed drawing of specified 

wires through these conduits with help of fish wire, tagging by coded ferrules 

and duly connecting / terminating with lugs, complete testing the installation 

for safety and beneficial use. 

Material: 

PVC Conduit: 

PVC pipe minimum 20mm dia and above depending No. of wires to be 

drawn (refer Table No1/2), ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for 

PVC pipes of the same make that of pipe; Couplers, long Bends, Junction 

boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid. 



accommodate No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16g CRCA sheet steel 

with earth terminal duly treated with antirust treatment and painted with two 



424 

coats of red oxide paint. There shall be knockout holes in required numbers 

and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to fix cover plate on it. 

Hardware: 


steel binding wire 20g, steel fish wire, etc. 


Cement, sand, putty and water. 


wires): 

PVC insulated Wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper 


grade, ISI marked, of required colour coding as per Table No 1/5 





No 1/5 

Lugs: 

Copper lugs of appropriate size & type 

Other material for wire drawing: 




General: 

Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final 






than 300 mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided. Adequate use of 



425 

conduit accessories shall be made at required locations. Entries in wall shall 

be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. 

(For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints. 

Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, 

with junction boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, 

in such manner so as to facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits 

shall be done with Bending Spring. All joints shall be made rigid with resin. 

Concealing of PVC Conduits In walls / flooring: 


through it. Necessary finishing of the wall surface shall be done. Work in 

flooring shall not disturb RCC work, Conduits of adequate size shall be 

erected with use of appropriate accessories, and 'U' nails. All joints shall be 

made rigid with resin. Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed with checknut, 

flush with surrounding surface and earthed. 


General: 







be terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with correct type of and 

correct size of lugs. 


Through PVC conduits: 


or as per specified shall be drawn through pipe. Number of wires shall not 

exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table No. 1/2. At the termination 

end flexible PVC conduit shall be used with gland as per necessity. 

2.2.3 Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work 



426 


Scope: 

Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work: 

Providing specified PVC conduit, Wires and laying / erecting the conduits in 

RCC work, such as slab, beam, column before casting as per approved 

Method of Construction along with continuous earth wire and all required 

material including earth clips, hardware, binding wire, fish wire; accessories 

such as deep PVC junction boxes, PVC / MS junction boxes / inspection 

boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, drawing fish-wires and making all 

piping rigid, removing debris from site and supervising the work during 

casting to confirm rigidity, continuity and avoid damages and as and when 

directed drawing of wires through these conduits with fish wire, ferruling by 

coding tags and duly connecting with lugs, complete testing the installation 

for safety and beneficial use. 

Material: 


Rigid HG steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending 

on No. of wires to be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ERW grade duly 

processed for anti-rust treatment and painted with black enamel paint, 

accessories for rigid steel conduits such as check nuts, long bends, deep 

junction boxes for slab, regular junction boxes for walls; of required ways all 

of the same make. 

Earth Continuity wire: 

GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm ,22g 10mm width, GI earth clips for fixing earth wire 

along with the conduits. 



accommodate No. of entries; fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with 

earth terminal duly treated with antirust treatment and painted with two 


and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to fix cover plates on it. 



427 

Hardware: 


steel binding wire 20g, steel fish wire, rubber / PVC bushes etc. 

Wires: Mains/Sub-mains /Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral 

wires): 


conductor of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, 

of required colour coding as per Table No 1/5 

Earth Wire: PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper 

conductor of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of 

green/green-yellow colour, ISI marked, of specified size but not less than 2.5 

sq. mm. as per Table No 1/5 

Lugs: 

Copper lugs of required size & type. 




Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work: 


General:Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final 


wires to be drawn. (Table No1/1, for Steel conduits) Separate pipe shall be 

used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution 

and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. The 

distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic 

partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made 

at required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit 

with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible 


final approved layout, with minimum sharp bends, with junction boxes at 

angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25 m, in such manner so as 



428 

to facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done approved 

manner without changing the cross-section. 


In RCC work: 


material. Conduits shall be firmly fixed with steel in slab by binding wire. 

Fixing of conduits shall be possibly done with welding tags so that it will 

remain rigid during casting of slab, beam, and column even after use of 

vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other draw-in boxes shall be such that their 

open end and centering material will not have gap in between so as to avoid 

concrete entering inside even after fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and 

be filled with cry sand. Open ends of conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall 

be provided with couplers / sockets at ends and be flush with bottom of 

beam, and located at the center of the beam. As far as possible bunching / 

grouping of conduits shall be avoided so that it will not affect strength of RCC 

work especially in beams. Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through the 

conduits for drawing of wires later on. 


General: 










Through Rigid Steel conduits: 



429 

Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting 

damaged due to burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with 

respect to size of pipe as per Table No. 1/1 

2.1.4 Mains in Rigid steel Conduits in walls / flooring 


Scope: 

Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in walls / flooring: 

Providing specified Metal conduit, Wires and erecting in wall, flooring by 

making chases / grooves / entries as per approved Method of Construction 

along with continuous earth wire and all required material including earth 

clips hardware such as 'U' nails, binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as 

MS junction / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, drawing fishwires 


removing debris from site and as and when directed drawing of wires 

through these conduits with fish wire, ferruling by coding tags and duly 

connecting with lugs, complete testing the installation for safety and 

beneficial use. 

Material: 


Rigid HG steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending 

on No. of wires to be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ERW grade duly 

processed for anti-rust treatment and painted with black enamel paint, 

accessories for rigid steel conduits such as check nuts, long bends, deep 

junction boxes for flooring, regular junction boxes for walls; of required ways 

all of the same make. 

Earth continuity wire: 

GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm 22 gauge 10mm width, GI earth clips for fixing earth 

wire along with the conduits. 



accommodate No. of entries; fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with 



430 

earth terminal duly treated with antirust treatment and painted with two 


and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to fix cover plates on it. 

Hardware: 


steel binding wire 20g, steel fish wire, rubber, PVC bushes etc. 


Cement, sand, putty and water. 

Wires: Mains/Sub-mains/Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral 

wires): 








No 1/5. 

Lugs: 

Copper lugs of appropriate size & type 


Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible conduit etc.. 


Concealed Mains in Metal Conduits in walls / flooring Concealing of 

conduits: 

General: 

Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final 


wires to be drawn. (Table No 1/1, for Steel conduits) Separate pipe shall be 

used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution 

and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. The 



431 


partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made 

at required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit 

with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible 



junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to 

facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done approved 

manner without changing the cross-section. 

Concealing of Conduits in walls/ flooring: 




erected with use of appropriate accessories and hardware like ‘U’ nails, etc. 

Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed with check-nut, flush with 

surrounding surface and earthed. 


General: 


No. 1/5, shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have 








Through Rigid Steel conduits: 

Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting 

damaged due to burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with 



432 

respect to size of pipe as per Table No. 1/1. At the termination end flexible 

metal conduit shall be used with glands as per necessity. 

Testing: 

Insulation resistance test: 

All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase - neutral 

and to Earth. IR value shall not be less than 1M-ohm. 

Earth continuity: 

Earth continuity shall be ensured at all earth terminals and at earth terminals 

of metal enclosures. 

Polarity Test: 

Polarity test shall be carried out for ensuring correct polarity in plug and 

switch. 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per Rmt. basis. 

The contract rate shall be on per Rmt. of wire laid. 

Item No. 9c : 

Supplying and erecting Electronic Type cordless call bell erected on T.W. board 

having portable bell push working on 9 V.D.C. and bell on 250 V A.C. supply. 

effective range upto 45 meter) 






Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per no basis. The 

contract rate shall be on per no. of Electronic Type cordless call bell supplied & 

erected. 

MAINS 



433 

Item No.10a : 

Supplying & erecting mains with 2x2.5 sq. mm. and earth wire 1.5sqmm FRLS 

PVC copper wire in rigid PVC conduitmin.20 mm dia. as per specification No: 

WG-A/PC, Para no. 1.4.1 

AND 

Item No.10b : 

Supplying & erecting mains with 2x2.5 sq. mm. and earth wire 1.5 sqmm FR PVC 

copper wire in rigid PVC conduit min.25mmdia,as per specification No: WG- 

MA/PC, Para no. 1.4.1 

Item No.10c : 

Supplying & erecting mains with 2x4.0 sq. mm. and earth wire 2.5 sqmm FR PVC 

copper wire in rigid PVC conduit min.25mmdia,as per specification No: WG- 

MA/PC, Para no. 1.4.1 

1.1 Mains (surface type) 

1.1.1 Mains in surface PVC conduit 

Specification No (WG-MA/PC) 

Scope: 

Mains in surface PVC conduit: 

Providing specified PVC Conduits, Wires and erecting the conduits as per 

approved Method of Construction; on surface of wall / ceiling, etc. including 

entries through walls / slabs / flooring as per requirement, and with all 

necessary hardware, accessories such as Spacers, Saddles, Bends, Tees, 

Junction boxes, Check-nuts / glands, etc.; making conduits erection work 

rigid; and drawing the specified wires through these conduits and duly 

connecting / terminating with lugs, complete finishing, removing debris from 

site; testing for safety and beneficial use. 

Material: 

PVC Conduit: 

PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia. and above depending on No. of wires to be 

drawn (refer Table No 1/2); ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for 



434 

PVC pipes of the same make that of pipe; such as Spacers & Saddles, 

Couplers, Bends, inspection or non inspection type Elbows, Tees, Junction 

boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid. Black 

pipe shall not be used for surface type wiring. 

Hardware: 


washers, rawl / PVC / fill type plugs, wooden gutties, etc. 


wires) 



grade, ISI marked, of appropriate colour coding as per Table No 1/5 



electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green or green yellow 


No 1/5 

Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate type and size. 

Other material: Rubber grommet, bush, flexible PVC conduit, gland etc. 


Erection PVC Conduits for Surface type wiring: 

General: 

Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, in perfect level and 

plumb. Conduits shall be firmly fixed on spacers with saddles. Fixing of 

spacers shall be equidistant and at ends, bends, elbows, junction boxes, 

couplings, boards. CSK screws of minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall 

be used for fixing spacers and 12x5 mm, round headed screws for fixing 

saddles on spacers. In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in 

wall for fixing of spacers. Distance between 2 spacers shall not be more than 

600 mm. Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be 

drawn (as per Table No. ½ for PVC conduits). Separate pipe shall be used for 



435 

each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution. Also for 

wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling distance between 

pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be 

provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required 

locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of surface conduit with colour 

coding (For Visual identification) as per Table No. 1/4. Flexible conduits shall 

be used at expansion joints. 

Especially for PVC Conduits of surface type wiring: 

In addition to general instructions above, all joints shall be made rigid with 

resin / adhesive. Wherever offsets are necessary, it shall be done with 

bending spring. Size of conduit shall be as per Table No. 1/2 for number of 

wires to be drawn through the conduit. 

Drawing of wires: General 


No. 1/5, shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have 





be terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with appropriate type and 

size of lugs. 

Drawing of wires: through PVC conduits for surface type wiring 


or as per specified shall be drawn through conduit. Number of wires shall not 

exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table No. 1/2. At the termination 

end flexible PVC conduit shall be used with gland as per required. 

1.1.2 Mains in PVC Trunking (casing capping) 

Specification No (WG-MA/PC) 

Scope: 

Surface type Mains in PVC Trunking (casing capping) 



436 

Providing specified PVC Trunking, Wires and erecting the Trunking as per 

approved Method of Construction; on surface of wall / ceiling, etc. including 

entries made with PVC conduit through walls / slabs / flooring as per 

requirement with all necessary hardware, accessories such as inner / outer 

Elbows, Tees, Junction boxes, etc; including erection of specified wires in PVC 

trunking, with coded ferrules and duly connecting with lugs, and finishing, 

removing debris from site; testing for safety and beneficial use. 

Material: 

PVC Trunking: 

PVC Trunking (casing capping) ISI mark, 1.2 mm thick, minimum 20 mm 

width and above depending on No. of wires to be drawn (Refer Table No 1/2 

for the size of trunking and number of wires to be drawn); with double 

locking arrangement, 1.8mm thick push-fit joints/ accessories for PVC 

trunking such as couplers, elbows, internal / external angles, junction boxes 

of required ways of the same make. 

Hardware: 


washers, rawl / PVC / fill type plugs, wooden gutties, etc. 


wires) 






electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green colour, ISI 

marked, of specified size but not less than 1.5 sq. mm. as per Table No 1/5 

Lugs: 

Copper lugs of appropriate type and size. 


Flexible PVC conduit, gland coded ferrules, etc. 



437 


Erection of PVC Trunking for surface type wiring 

Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout. The Trunking shall be 

in perfect level and plumb. Screws of minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs 

shall be used for fixing. In case of unleveled surface number and size of 

screws shall be changed to higher size as per requirement and in case of 

stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in wall for fixing of screws of 

Trunking. Distance between 2 screws shall not be more than 600 mm. Size of 

Trunking shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn as per 

Table No 1/3 but not less than 20mm. Separate Trunking shall be used for 

each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution and also 

for wiring of other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling and distance of 

300 mm shall be maintained between the Trunking or anti electrostatic 

partition is to be provided. Double locking shall be checked while fixing 

capping. Adequate use of accessories shall be made at joints and required 

locations. 

Erecting wires in Trunking: 

Wires shall be erected within Trunking with adequate care. Correct colour 

coding as per Table No. 1/5 shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires 

shall not have intermediate joint in between terminals of the accessories. 

Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only within circuit. For 

lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases shall 

not be erected in single Trunking. Wires shall be terminated in the terminals 

of accessories only, with appropriate type and size of lugs. Insulated Earth 

wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm or as per 

specified shall be erected through Trunking. Number of wires shall not 

exceed with respect to size of Trunking as per Table No. 1/3. After erection of 

wires double locking shall be checked while fixing capping. At the 

termination end flexible PVC conduit shall be used with gland as per 

required. 



438 

Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per Rmt. basis. 

The contract rate shall be on per Rmt. of wire supplied & laid of specified size under 

relevant item. 

Item No. 10d & e : 

Supplying and erecting ISI mark shockproof 3 pin plug socket 6A with porcelain 

base / flush type erected on Filled polypropylene ISI marked (IS:14772-2000) 

board or polished thick varnished double wooden block / folded or screwed board 

with top of either wooden / 3 mm thick hylam sheet/ 4mm thick plywood pasted 

with 1.5 mm thick Sunmica with S M screws and duly connected. 






Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per no basis. The 

contract rate shall be on per no. of modular type 3 pin 6 / 16A combined unit 

supplied & erected. 

B. : LIGHT FIXTURES 

Item No. 11 a & e : 

Supplying and erecting circular type recessed / surface down lighter with reflector 

and glass cover suitable for CFL 1 x 9 to 18 watts with circular stainless steel ring 

including Electronic Ballast having pf > 0.98 and holder duly fixed in false ceiling 

as per specification no. FG -IDF/DL1 

and 

Supply and erecting Decorative light chandeliar of approved type,roof hanging 

with all accessories etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

Scope: 


(FG-IDF/DL1) 



439 

Supplying and erecting circular type recessed down lighter suitable for 2x18 watts 

CFL, including gear box. The luminaire comprises a ceiling ring spun from 

Aluminium attached to mounting unit made of mild steel. The mounting unit has a 

pair of sliding brackets for fixing the luminaire to the ceiling. 

Material: 

Fitting: 

Scientifically designed highly polished & anodized Aluminum reflector ensures 

precise light control with optimum light utilization, leading to substantial savings in 

energy cost and excellent ambient conditions. Reflector is fitted into the frame with 

decorative screw arrangement. Frame is fabricated from CRCA MS sheet and epoxy 

powder coated white. Pre-coated frame ensure corrosion free life. Fitting shall have a 

prismatic acrylic diffuser resting on upper part of reflector to reduce glare. Retaining 

clips facilitate mounting in false ceilings. 

Ballast: 

As per (FG-FG/AS1) specified in chapter 2.4. 

Bi-pin lamp holder: 

Conforming to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1 to the extent possible /applicable. 

Capacitor/Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4. 

Connection wire: 

Flat / round two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI marked. 

Terminal connector: 



The fitting shall be fixed firmly in the designated place (False ceiling / unspecified 

ceiling) with the help of swinging bracket, and making the connection. In case where 

fittings are to be installed flush" with /on false ceiling; layout shall be given to civil 

wing and work shall be done in co-ordination with civil wing e.g. making recesses in 

false ceiling. 


Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis, (i.e. each) 



440 

Item No. 11b : 

Supplying and erecting Darklite 4x18w, Philips TBS 369/418 D6 LP-3390 etc 

complete as per direction of Engineer – in - charge. 






Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per No. basis. 

The contract rate shall be on per No. of Darklite 4x18w, Philips TBS 369/418 D6 LP- 

3390 supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11c : 

Supplying and erecting GE DECORA 1x9w FTL Lo 462 Bracket Light etc 

complete as per direction of Engineer – in - charge. 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of GE DECORA 1x9w FTL Lo 462 Bracket 

Light supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11d : 

Supplying and erecting Single Patti, 1x36w FTL, Philips TMS 303/136 etc complete 

as per direction of Engineer – in - charge. 






441 




The contract rate shall be on per No. of Single Patti, 1x36w FTL, Philips TMS 

303/136 supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11f : 

Supplying table lamp with M.S. tube with flexible joints complete suitable for 

lamp 1XPL- 5 / 7/ 9 W complete with lamp and 3 core round plastic flexible cord 

with 6A 3 pin hand shield type plug top. 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of table Lamp supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11g. Supplying & erecting approved make 1 x T8 40/36W white stove 

enamelled / powder coated box type fluo.fitting with 40 Watts. Polyester heavy 

duty copper wound ballast, fixed at ceiling or on wall as per specification no.FG- 

IDF/BFF 

Scope: 

Specification No (FG-IDF/BFF) 

Supplying & erecting white stove enamelled / powder coated box type fluorescent 

fitting suitable for T 8 tube/ tubes, with specified ballast, and necessary accessories, 

duly wired up for use on 250 V AC, supply and erected if required on varnished 

wooden / PVC block with flexible wire, twin core 24/0.20 mm. and with necessary 

materials complete and marking Sr. No. and date of erection. 

Material: 

Fitting: 



442 

White stove enameled / powder coated box type fluorescent fitting suitable for T 8 

tube, made of CRCA sheet not less than 0.5 mm thick, painted white on the reflector 

side and gray/any other colour (specified by the Engineer in-charge) on other 

surface. Wire ways shall be smooth & free from sharp edges, burrs, flashes & like 

which might cause abrasion of the insulation of the wiring. Parts such as metal set 

screws shall not protrude into wire ways. Fitting shall be duly wired up internally 

with appropriate size of wire. (Refer drawing no.lDF-1 (Fig.1)) 

Ballast: 

As per (FG-FG/AS2) / (FG-FG/AS3) / (FG-FG/AS4) specified in chapter 2.4. 

Tube holders: 

As per (FG-FG/AS8) specified in chapter 2.4 

Starter: 


Condenser: 


Starter holder: 





Fiat / round two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI marked. 

Paint: 

Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour. 

Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc. 

Chain: 

Heavy duty lacquered MS chain with hooks. 

Down Rod: 

Steel conduit as per (WG-MA/CON) specified in chapter for Point wiring. 

Block: 

As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW) 



443 


The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be fixed on wooden / PVC 

block with SM screws (minimum size shall be 25x8 mm). The wooden/PVC block 

shall be fixed on wall/ceiling with SM screws (minimum size shall be 75x8mm) with 

necessary plugs, gutties, etc. S. No and date of erection shall be painted/marked by 

enamel paint. The fitting shall be connected with PVC insulated copper wire leads, 

to the point and testing shall be carried out. 



Item No. 11h. Supplying and erecting fresh air cum Exhaust fan of light duty 250 

V A.C. 50 cycles 300mm. 1400 RPM metallic body, plastic blades, wire mesh, duly 

erected in an approved manner and marking Sr. No. and date of erection. 

Scope: 

Specification No (FG-FN/EXF) 

Supplying and erecting Exhaust fan of specified sweep and speed, with all 

accessories and necessary materials, suitable to work on 230 V / 415 V, AC Supply 

50 Hz, erected in position. 

Material: 

Exhaust Fan: 

ISI marked Exhaust fan suitable for Single/Three phase AC 230/415 Volts 50 Hz, 

capacitor run with mounting ring, four numbers of fixing hole without regulator and 

louvers. The sweep and speed shall be as per table below. Fan motor with moisture 

proof treatment and E class insulation, ISI marked, conforming to IS: 2312/67 with 

amendments 1 to 8. The fan mounting rings shall be proper pre-treatment followed 

with at least two coats of primer; final finish shall be with two coats of grey colour 

paint duly baked. The connecting leads shall be brought out for making connections. 

Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour. 



444 

Table 2.6/2 

Corresponding Speed with Sweep 

R. Sweep Speed in RPM Voltage level CFM in m 3 /hr 

No. 

1 375 mm 900 230 V 2460 

2 375 mm 1400 230 V 4000 

3 450 mm 1400 230 V 6800 

4 450 mm 900 230 V 4350 

5 375 mm 900 415 V 2460 


The Exhaust fan complete with all above accessories and duly wired shall be erected 

at specified position, connected to the supply and tested. 

Testing: 

After erection fan shall be tested by connecting to supply. Also steadiness and 

vibrations if any, of fan shall be checked at full speed, so that there is no wobbling. 



Item No. 11i. Supplying and erecting Five Star Rated Energy Saving Ceiling Fan 

440 V A.C. 50 cycles 1200 mm complete erected in position as per specifcation no. 

FG-FN/CF 

Scope: 

Specification No (FG-FN/CF) 

Supplying and erecting Ceiling fan of specified sweep with all accessories and 

necessary materials, erected in provided hook/clamp. 

Material: 

Ceiling Fan: 

Electric Ceiling fan capacitor type with double ball bearing complete with capacitor, 

300 mm down rod, canopies, shackles, reel insulator, half threaded bolts of 9.53 mm 

(3/8") dia 62.5 mm (2-1/2") to 88 mm (3-1/2") long and 7.94 mm (5/16") dia 44.5 mm 

(1-3/4") to 57 mm (2-1/4") long with nuts, with lock type split pin, spring & plate 



445 

washers, etc.; three number blade made of Aluminium alloy, suitable for single 

phase, AC 210 volts, 50 Hz supply and conforming to class I of IS : 374/1979 with 

amendment no 1 to 6 except for performance parameters to the extent modified as 

details in general requirements. The down rod shall be capable to withstand a tensile 

load of 1000 kg without breakdown and a torsion load of 500 kg/cm without 

breakage as per Clause 10.14.1 of IS: 374/1979 with amendment no.1 to 6. Electrical 

motor should be single phase permanent capacitor type with no. of poles 

12/14/16/18 (As per sweep), Class-I with basic insulation. Class of insulation shall 

be B class. The winding wire used for fan should be synthetic enamelled of 30 to 38 

SWG. 



Paint: 

Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour for marking Sr. No and date of 

erection. 

Table 2.6/1 

Performance Parameters for Fans suitable for Rated Voltage 

SR. 

No. 

Sweep 

Maximum Input 

Power in watts 

Air delivery in 

m 3 /minute at 

Rated Voltage 

1 900 mm 42 140 3.4 

2 1200 mm 50 215 4.3 

3 1400 mm 60 270 4.5 

Minimum 

Service 

Value at 180 

V 


Blades of ceiling fan shall be properly fixed. Down rod, clamp shall be carefully fixed 

with nut bolt and split pin. Canopies shall be tightened on down rod keeping 

sufficient clearance. Wiring connections shall be made with required wire leads. 

Regulator of fan shall be erected on provided switchboard with required wire leads. 

Testing: 

After erection fan shall be tested by connecting to supply at all positions of regulator. 

Also steadiness of fan shall be checked at full speed, so that there is no wobbling. 



446 



Item No. 11j. Supplying and erecting storage / pressure type Horizontal / vertical 

water heater 25 Liters of mild steel body, on wall / loft as per specification No. AP- 

WH/STWH 

Scope: 


(AP-WH/STWH) 

Supplying, erecting and testing of horizontal/ vertical, stove enameled, 

storage/pressure type water heater, suitable for wall / floor mounting, of specified 

capacity, one inlet with non return valve, one outlet with dead weight, pressure 

reducing valve, stop cock; suitable to work on 230/250-V single phase AC Supply, 

heating element of specified wattage, thermostat, control fusible plug, pilot lamp etc. 

ISI mark only and marking of S. No. and date of erection. (IS 2082) 

Material: 

Outer Casing: 

Corrosion proof stove enameled/ powder coated, mild steel / engineering plastic 

body. Colour of the casing shall be as directed by Engineer in-charge. 

Inner tank: 

It should be of electrolytic copper (99% pure) properly fabricated so as to be leak 

proof and of specified capacity. 

Heating Element: 

Mineral filled / tubular / copper cord & nickel plated, and conforming to IS: 4159, of 

specified wattage. 

Pilot Lamp: 

A neon gas field indicating lamp shows functioning of heating elements along with 

thermostat & thermal cut-out. 

Thermal Insulation: 



447 

Resin bonded glass wool slab insulation & should be filled between two casings of 

storage water heater. 

Thermostat: 

A Stem type snap action thermostat, which should cut off the electric supply 

automatically as per setting of temperature & should be ISI mark. 

Thermal Cut-out: 

In case of thermostat failure this cutout should cut off the electric Supply 

automatically and should restart only on pressing the reset knob. 

Pressure Release Valve: 

If pressure exceeds above 50 psi, it should release the pressure & should be fitted on 

the inlet pipe. 

Dead weight: 

It will operate when pressure in inside tank increase beyond specified limit. 

Fusible plug: 

Cast aluminium body with threading, and hole for plug with fusible metal. 

The metal shall be fused, only all the other safeties fails & at high pressure 

Hardware: 

100x10 mm grouting bolts, MS washers, nuts, etc. 

Wall Fasteners: 

100x10 mm with vertical cuts, and pin at the centre, washer and nut, etc., made of 

M.S. (Similar to Anchor bolt fastener) 

Grouting material: 

Cement, Sand, water, etc. 

Paint: 

Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour. 


The water heater shall be erected in required position with necessary hardware's and 

base should be grouted, as per the site situation. The water heater is to be connected 

to water supply on inlet side by valve, mountings and connected to outlet tap. 



448 


Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each) 

Item No. 11k. Supplying & testing Fridge (Refrigerators) ( 80 LTR) etc complete as 

per direction of Engineer – in – charge. (make whirpool, samsung, godrej ) 

Scope: 


(AP-WCR/WC) 

Supplying, erecting, testing and commissioning self contained Refrigerators with 

specified storage capacity & cooling capacity, and marking S No and date of 

erection. 

Material: 

Refrigerators: 

The Refrigerators shall be suitable for operation on 230 V +/-10% , 50 Hz, single 

phase AC supply with hermetically sealed type suction cooled compressor with 

overload protection conforming to IS :-10617(part I): 1983 with amendment no 1&2. 

Tank: 

Tank shall be fabricated from SS sheet of 0.8 mm min. thickness as per ISI 304 and 

shall be made by electrically seam welded lap joints or alternatively from 0.63 mm 

thickness stainless steel sheet with PUF insulation, with required number of Taps. 

However tank fabricated by double seam jointing is also acceptable if the same is 

reinforced and sealed by lead free solder material. Use of lead soldering material for 

sealing the joints of water tank is not permitted. Water tank cover and lid bottom 

shall be made of 1.25 mm aluminum sheet duly anodized / epoxy painted / high 

impact polystyrene (HIP) of 1.5 mm thickness. Positive locking of the lead is to be 

provided (lock with two keys). A drain valve at the bottom of the storage tank to be 

provided to draw out water while cleaning. 

Cabinet (Body): 

The cabinet of the Refrigerators shall be made of GS or SS sheet of 1.0 mm. The front 

panel, below the water outlets in the storage type Refrigerators shall be made of 



449 

stainless steel of 0.8 mm. The drain pan for storage type Refrigerators shall be made 

of stainless steel sheet of 0.63 mm up to size 40 liters/hour and beyond 40 

liters/hour of 0.8 mm thickness. The bottom pedestal shall be made of 2.65 mm 

minimum thick stainless steel sheet. Pedestal shall have a minimum ground 

clearance of 100 mm for ease of cleaning. Pedestal shall be strong enough to 

withstand weight with storage tank full and shall be reinforced to prevent skewing. 

The body shall be held securely with the pedestal with stainless steel nuts and bolts. 

The drain size should be 25 mm or above. In case water outlets are provided on three 

sides then all the three lower panels should be made of aluminium sheet or stainless 

steel sheet. 

The mild steel components used in the manufacture of the cabinet shall be 

individually degreased, pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease, rust, scale or 

any other foreign elements. Immediately after pickling the MS parts shall be given 

phosphate treatment. The components along with the front panels shall then be 

given a primer coat with a finish coat of stove enamel paint. The finish shall be 

smooth and uniform with hard tough film of the enamel adhering to the surface. The 

finish shall be free from all the visible defects and shall not chip when tapped lightly 

with a dull pointed instrument. Alternatively method of corrosion protection like 

plastic powder- coating, electrostatic painting shall be permitted. 

Refrigeration coils to be fully soldered to the outside of the tank for good thermal 

contact and not merely tack welded. 

There shall not be any gap between water tank cover (mask) and water tank to 

prevent rodent/ insect/ dust entry. Water tank overflow should be adequately 

covered with strainer such as wire mesh etc to avoid rodent/ insect/ dust entry. 

Condenser Fan Motor: 

The condenser fan motor shall be capacitor start and capacitor run (CSR) or 

permanently split capacitor (PSC) or alternatively permanently lubricated motor 

may be provided. 

Thermostat: 



450 

The thermostat shall conform to IS: 11338-1985. The position of the thermostat shall 

be adjustable through a rotary switch mounted on the front or side panels. Min and 

max of the thermostat setting shall be from 0 degree Celsius and 25 degree Celsius 

which shall be marked. 


The Refrigerators shall be fixed at designated place or as directed by the site 

engineer, duly connected with inlet and drain by leak proof joints. The Refrigerators 

is to be erected on stand and tested. 



Item No. 11l. Supplying and erecting 2 light fancy wall bracket with arm 

fabricated from brass duly lacquered with suitable holder and fancy glass shade 

duly wired erected on wall with suitable size of polished wooden / laminated 

board. 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of Wall light supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11m. Supplying and erecting approved make recess / surface soft light 

square / rectangular PL fitting suitable for 2 x 36W compact fluo.lamp with 

Electronic Ballast having pf > 0.98 & THD

451 

Supplying & erecting recessed / surface down lighter with mirror optics suitable for 

specified wattage of CFL. 

Material: 

Fitting: 

Housing fabricated from CRCA sheet, epoxy powder coated, white enamelled, with 

mirror assembly comprising of significantly designed high purity aluminium 

reflector for high optical performance back wing light and with improved vertical 

illumination. 

Ballast: 


Bi-pin lamp holder: 

Conforming to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1 to the extent possible / applicable. 



Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc. 

Chain: 

Heavy duty lacquered MS chain with hooks. 

Block: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW) 




Mirror optic fitting suitable for specified wattage of CFL complete erected on 

wooden block/PVC block /on ceiling directly in case of surface mounting fitting, as 

directed by site engineer, with necessary screws of suitable size, with rawl plugs, 

gutties, etc. In case of recesses mounting, the fitting shall be secured and erected by 

fixing the hook at ceiling, and the chain shall be fixed to the fitting, in such a manner 

that the fitting shall be in level with the designated place (false / unspecified 

ceiling). 





452 

Item No. 11n. Supplying and erecting 1 x 9 to 18W PL with electronic ballast 

concealed type foot light having CRCA powder coated body and alluminium step 

type or mirror finish reflector covered with clear acrylic stainless steel mat finish 

frame ( 9x6 inch in size) as per specification no. FG-IDF/FL 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of Wall light supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11o. Supplying & Erecting LED street light suitable with 15 W with 

minimum 10-12 lux level at ground level with p.f. > 0.95 with transparent lens 

(Equivalent to 2 x 18 W CFL ) as per specification no ESD-LED /ODF 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of LED Street Light supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11p. Supplying & fixing Bollard Lights etc complete as per direction of 

Engineer – in - charge. 








453 


The contract rate shall be on per No. of Bollard Light supplied & erected. 

Item No. 11q. Supplying & erecting integral post top lantern fixture similar to 

JUNO type for 70 Watts HPSV lamp consisting of brown painted LM 6 alloy 

cylindrical spigot,decorative acrylic bowl supported by spun aluminum top cover 

complete with accessories such as copper wound choke and condensor housed 

within the lantern with necessary wiring etc. 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of Integral Post Top Lantern supplied & 

erected. 

Item No. 12 a. Supplying, Installing, testing & commissioning of 8 way TPN DB 

with 32/40 A,4 Pole MCB as incomer + 3 no 32/40 A ELCB & 16-25A SPMCBs-24 

nos as outgoing (Lighting) etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

Item No. 12 b. Supplying, Installing, testing & commissioning of 8 way TPN DB 

with 63A, 4 Pole MCB as incomer + 63 A 2 Pole ELCB 3 nos as incomer & 20/25 A 

SPMCBs-24 mos as outgoing ( Raw Power) etc complete as per direction of 


Item No. 12 c. Supplying, Installing, testing & commissioning of 12 way TPN DB 

with 63A, 4 Pole MCB as incomer & 16-25 A SPMCBs-24 nos as outgoing ( 

Outside lighting) etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 






454 




The contract rate shall be on per No. of 8 way TPN DB supplied & erected. 

Item No. 13 a. Supplying & erecting PVC armoured cable 4 core x 2.5 Sq.mm 1100 

V grade with ISI mark etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

Item No. 13 b. Supplying & erecting PVC armoured cable 4 core x 6 Sqmm 1100 V 

grade with ISI mark etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

Item No. 13 c. Supplying & erecting PVC armoured cable 4 core x 4 Sqmm 1100 V 


Item No. 13 d. Supplying & erecting PVC armoured cable 4 core x 10 Sqmm 1100 V 


Item No. 13 e. Supplying & erecting PVC armoured cable 4 core x 16 Sqmm 1100 V 


Item No. 13 f. Supplying & erecting PVC armoured cable 3.5 core x 150 Sqmm 1100 

V grade with ISI mark etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

1. General 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark. If 

any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available in market, it 

shall be as included in approved list. 

Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by BIS. If there 

is no reference for particular method of construction in IS, such work shall be carried 

out as per the approved method of construction specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. 

Handbook. 

Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the 

satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. 

2. Cables: (Armoured) 



455 

The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are acceptable as 

good practice, and accepted standards. 

SP 30: 1984 : National Electrical Code 

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 : 


IS 1255: 1983 : Code of practice of installation & Maintenance of 

armoured 

cables up to 33 kV. 

IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 : 

IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 : 

Recommended current ratings of PVC cables. 

PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1 for 

working voltages up to and including 1100 Volts. 

IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 : 

PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1 for 

working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to 11 kV. 

IS 10810: Part 63; 1993 : Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke density 

of electric 

cables under fire condition. 

3. Scope: (Armoured cables) 


(CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT) 

Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting 

material Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3 including required material, 

hardware's for erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same 

through pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per 

approved method of construction including glands, lugs, etc. 

4. Material: 

Cables: 

Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3 and of 

required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No, manufacturer's name, size, 

duly embossed / screen printed at every metre and having the total count of 

progressive length in meter at each mark. 

Earth wire: 



456 

Galvanized Iron (GI) wire of appropriate gauge as per Table No 7/1. 

Glands: 

As per specification (CB-GL) 

Lugs: 

As per specification (CB-CL/AL, CB-CL/CU) 

Saddles: 

Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size depending on dia of 

cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality enamel black paint with 

necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi circular shaped with extended piece 

having suitable holes for fixing. 

GI Strip: 

22 g x 25 mm width G I Strip. 

Clamps: 

MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size of 3/6 mm thick 

mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size of cable), rounded ends with wooden 

/ resin cast grip for holding the cable. 

Identification tags: 

For identifying root, connection position GI strip with identification mark / name 

embossed / painted with arrangement to tie should be fix on cable or arrangement 

of ferrules to be done. 

Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden gutties, etc. 


General: 

c) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated with 

appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as directed by Site 

engineer. 

d) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as mentioned in 

Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with adequate distance between 

cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize de-rating. Cables shall be tagged / 



457 

ferruled with identification name / mark at the point from where distribution starts 

and at ends. Bare earth wire of appropriate sizes per Table no. 7/1 shall run along 

with the cable. Earth wire running with the cable shall be terminated at the earth 

terminal nearest to cable termination. 

5.1 Erection of Cable on Surface: 

Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect level and in 

plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible for good 

aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of required gauge as per Table No 7/1 

shall be run. Cable with G I wire shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable 

and shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm SM screws with plugs/wooden 

gutties, etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be maximum 450 mm). 

Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for stone wall). The 

entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable shall be made good by filling 

and finishing with plastering the same. 

5.2 Erection of Cable on Trusses: 

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be firmly 

clamped by wrapping GI strip of 22 g, 25 mm width of required length fixed to truss 

with nuts and bolts. 

5.3 Erection of Cable on Pole: 

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be firmly clipped 

by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with 25x3 mm or 50x6 mm MS 

strip of required length and fixed to pole with nuts and bolts. 

5.4 Laying of Cable in provided Trench/Pole: 

While laying Cable along with bare GI earth wire, utmost care shall be taken to 

prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open end. Cable shall be 

brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum 1.0 metre above G L). Care 

shall be taken to inspect the trench so that depth of cable shall not be less than as 

shown in Table No 7/4. Suitable size of cable loops shall be provided near 

termination point at adequate depth. 

5.5 Erecting cable in constructed Trench / duct: 



458 

IS 1255. 

Erection of cable/s in constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide lines of 

5.6 Erection of cable/s on trays: 

Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care shall be taken 

so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of cable. 

5.7 Mode of Measurement: 

cable. 

Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of running metre per run of 

6. Dismantling 

Cable laid underground, or fixed on any surface shall be dismantled carefully 

without damaging complete with ail its accessories, making coil and stored as 

directed. The surface of the dismantled cable shall be made clear by removing of 

unwanted material, cement mortar, etc. When cable is dismantled from trench refill 

back the trench and making the surface proper. 

7. Mode of Measurement: 

cable. 

Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of running metre per run of 

Table No 7/1 

Size of Bare GI Earth wire to be used with LT Cables up to 1.1 kV 

. No. Size of cable Size of bare GI Earth wire to 

be used with cable 

1 2.5 Sq. mm. to 50 Sq. mm. of all 12SWG 

cores. 

2 70 Sq. mm. to 95 Sq. mm. of all 10SWG 

cores. 

3 120 Sq. mm. and above of all cores. 8SWG 

Table No 7/2 

Minimum bending Radius for Cables 

SR. Voltage level Single core Multi core Unarmoured 

Multi core 

No. of cables 

Armoured 

1 Up to 11 kV 20 D 15D 12 D 

2 Up to 22 kV 25 D 20 D 15D 

3 Up to 33 kV 30 D 25 D 20 D 



459 

Note: D diameter of cable. 

Wherever possible, 25 percent larger radii than the specified above should be used. 

Table No 7/3 

Current Rating (In Ground) for PVC/ XLPE Insulated 1.1 kV Grade Cables 

Nomina 

l area of 

conduct 

or 

Aluminum Conductor 

Copper Conductor 

(Rating in A) 

Single Core Multi Core Single Core Multi Core 

Sq. mm. PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE 

10 51 55 46 50 65 71 60 65 

16 66 74 60 68 85 95 77 87 

25 86 98 76 90 110 125 99 115 

35 100 118 92 108 130 150 120 138 

50 120 137 110 126 155 175 145 161 

70 140 172 135 158 190 220 175 202 

95 175 204 165 187 220 260 210 239 

120 195 234 185 215 250 301 240 276 

150 220 262 210 240 280 336 270 308 

185 240 298 235 273 305 381 300 350 

240 270 344 275 316 345 441 345 405 

300 295 387 305 355 375 496 385 455 

400 325 458 335 420 400 586 425 538 

500 345 495 - - 425 635 - - 

630 390 555 - - 470 710 - - 

800 440 625 - - - - - - 

1000 490 685 - - - - - - 

Rating Factors for Variation in Ambient Air Temperature 

Air Temperature (°C) 40 45 50 

Rating Factor (XLPE) 1.00 0.94 0.88 

Rating Factor (PVC) 1.00 0.90 0.81 

Table No 7/4 

Minimum laying Depth of cables (IS: 1255) 

S. Voltage level of cables 

Minimum depth from top of 

No. 

the cable 

1 Up to 1.1 kV 750 mm 



460 

2 3.3 kV to 11 kV 900 mm 

3 22 kV to 33 kV 1050 mm 

4 At road crossing 1000 mm 

5 

At railway crossing (from Bottom of 

sleepers to Top of pipe) 

1000 mm 

Notes below Table No 7/4: 

Table No 7/5 

1. PVC Insulated electrical cable for voltage grade up to 

1.1 kV is based on 8 volts drop. 



For Temperature Correction please see as detailed below: 

Ground 20 degree C 25 degree C 30 degree C 35 degree C 

temp. 

Rating 

factors: 

0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 

Distance up to which different sizes of UG Aluminum Conductor Cables 1.1 kV 

grade, can be used for different current ratings of 8 Volts drop. 

(PVC insulated, PVC Sheathed, 3 cores or 4 cores) 

Maximum Conductor temperature - 70 degree C 

S. Cu Distance in meters for the following cable sizes in Sqmm 

No 

. 

rre 

nt 

A 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300 

mp 

1 5 165 260 415 725 895 130 

0 

192 

5 

236 

0 

306 

5 

355 

5 

430 

0 

577 

0 

646 

0 

2 10 80 130 205 360 450 650 960 118 

0 

153 

0 

177 

5 

215 

0 

288 

5 

323 

0 

3 15 55 85 140 240 300 430 640 785 102 

0 

118 

5 

143 

0 

192 

0 

215 

5 

4 20 40 65 100 180 225 325 480 590 765 890 107 

5 

144 

0 

161 

5 

5 25 30 50 80 145 180 260 385 470 610 710 860 115 

0 

129 

0 

6 30 25 40 70 120 150 215 320 390 570 590 715 960 107 

5 

7 40 20 30 50 90 110 160 240 295 380 445 535 720 805 

8 50 - 25 40 70 90 130 190 235 305 355 430 575 645 

9 60 - - 35 60 75 110 160 195 255 295 355 480 535 

10 70 - - 30 50 65 90 135 165 215 255 305 410 460 



461 

11 80 - - - 45 55 80 120 145 190 220 265 360 405 

12 90 - - - 40 50 70 105 130 170 195 235 320 360 

13 100 - - - 35 45 65 95 115 150 175 215 290 320 

14 110 - - - - 40 60 85 105 140 160 195 260 290 

15 120 - - - - 35 55 80 95 125 145 180 240 270 

16 130 - - - - - 50 75 90 115 135 165 220 250 

17 140 - - - - - 45 70 80 110 125 150 205 230 

18 150 - - - - - - 65 75 100 115 140 190 215 

19 160 - - - - - - 60 70 95 110 130 180 200 

20 170 - - - - - - 55 70 90 105 125 170 190 

21 180 - - - - - - 50 65 85 100 120 160 180 

22 190 - - - - - - - 60 80 90 110 150 170 

23 200 - - - - - - - 60 75 90 105 145 160 

24 225 - - - - - - - 65 80 95 125 145 

25 250 - - - - - - - - - 70 85 115 130 

26 275 - - - - - - - - - 80 105 115 

27 300 - - - - - - - - - 70 95 105 

Item No. 15. Supplying & erecting testing 25 x 3mm G.I earthing of 600x600x3mm 

coper plate type earthing including accessories etc complete as per direction of 


A) Plate type Earthing (With or Without CI Cover. Funnel, etc) (EA-EP) 

Scope: 


(EA-EP) 

Supplying and erecting galvanised cast iron / copper earth plate type / G.I. pipe 

type earthing with / without C.I. cover as per instructions from the site engineer. 

Material: 

Earth Plate: 

Galvanised cast iron / Copper earth plate or G.I. pipe as per specifications given in 

Table No 9.1/1. 

CI Cover: 

As per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. 

Earthing Conductor: 



462 

Copper/G.I strip/Annealed bare copper wire/G.I. earth wire of size as per 

specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. 

GI Pipe: 

As per specification (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned chapter no. 17.5 for watering, and as 

enclosure for Earth wire, refer specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. 

Hardware: 

Screw / nut bolts with required washer of dimensions, Rawl plug / clip/ ‘U’ nails 

and material as per .specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. 

Filling material: 

Coal /Charcoal/ salt as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. as per 

specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. 

Lugs: 

As per specification (CB-LG/AL, CB-LG/CU) mentioned chapter 7.9 & 7.10 Copper/ 

Aluminium lugs as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1. 

Method of construction: 

Pit is to be dug of required dimension and depth for the earthing at site, and laying 

of Galvanised cast iron / Copper earth plate or G.I. pipe shall be as per Table No 

9.1/1. The earth connection to equipment switch gear and earthing electrode shall be 

connected as shown in the diagram and as per IS 3043 amended up to-date. The 

connections shall be made either by strip or double run of earth wire with drilling, 

welding, riveting, brazing and nut bolting to plate or pipe, where ever required in an 

approved manner. As far as possible continuous strip shall be used, but where ever 

jointing of strip is unavoidable; the overlap portion must not be less than 2 1/2 times 

the width of the strip either welded/ brazed/soldered by all sides or 6 inches 

overlap with two nut bolts/ riveting of adequate size with required washer and 

covered by anti-corrosive paint as per approved jointing practice in the industry and 

as per directives from site engineer in charge. 

Pit shall then be filled with screened soil With alternate layer of coal and salt, and if, 

necessary brick masonry work (wherever applicable) shall be done as specified in IS: 



463 

3043, with laying wires in PVC/ G.I. pipe and watering arrangement as per drawing 

no EA-1 and covered with C.I. Cover (Where ever applicable). 

Wherever required, or as specified by Site Engineer, a Test link shall be provided for 

facilitating the testing of resistance of earth electrode. 

Testing: 

The value of each earth electrode shall be measured by earth tester in presence of site 

Engineer and record to be submitted. 


Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each) 

Table No 9.1/1 

Detailed Specifications of various types of Earthing 

Type of earthing 

S. Particulars 

No. 

1) Depth from top 

of plate Up to 

Ground level 

2) Size & type of 

material for pipe 

/ Plate type 

earthing. 

Galvanised cast 

iron earth plate 

type without 

C.I cover 

1.5 m 

Galvanised 

Cast iron earth 

plate size 

60x60x0.6 cms 

3) Salt/charcoal 30 Kg. 

charcoal 

salt each 

and 

4) Type of Wire Double G.I. 

wire 8 SWG 

Copper Galvanised 

earth plate cast iron 

type with earth plate 

C.I cover type with 

C.I cover 

1.5 m 1.5m 

Galvanised 

Copper 

earth plate 

size 

60x60x3.15 

cms 

30 Kg. 

charcoal 

and salt 

each 

Double 

G.I. 8 

SWG 

cast iron 

earth plate 

size 

60x60x0.6 

cms 

40 Kg. 

charcoal 

and salt 

each 

Double 

G.I. 6 SWG 

Pipe type 

earthing 

with out 

C.I cover 

‘B’ grade 

G.I. pipe 

40mm. 

dia. 2.5 

mtr. Long 

or 20 mm 

dia. G.I. 

Rod 

N A 

Double GI 

8 SWG 



464 

Type of earthing Galvanised cast 

S. 

No. 

Particulars iron earth plate 

type without C.I 

cover 

5) Wire 

enclosure 

12mm. dia. G. I. 

pipe 2 mtr. Long 

6) Nut bolts 12 mm dia. 

Cadmium/ GI 

Copper 

earth plate 

type with 

C.I cover 

12mm. 

dia. G. I. 

pipe 2 

mtr. Long 

12 mm 

dia. 

Cadmium 

/ GI 

Galvanised 

cast iron 

earth plate 

type with 

C.I cover 

12mm. dia. 

G. I. pipe 

2.5 mtr. 

Long 

12 mm dia. 

Cadmium 

/ GI 

Pipe type 

earthing 

with out 

C.I cover 

NA 

NA 

7) Washers GI GI GI NA 

8) Watering 19mm. dia. G.I. 19mm. 19mm. dia. NA 

pipe pipe 

dia. 

G.I./pipe 

G.I. pipe 

9) Lugs Yes Yes Yes Yes 

10) funnel No Yes Yes NA 

11) Brick 

Masonry 

No Yes Yes NA 

Item No. 16. Providing & fixing 25x3mm copper strip with necessary supprts, 

changes etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in - charge. 






Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on Kg. basis. The 

contract rate shall be on Kg basis of copper strip supplied & erected. 

Item No. 17 a. Supplying & Installing for telephone RJ 11 DUAL Telephone 

Socket system including wire termination etc complete as per direction of 




465 

Item No. 17 b. Supplying & Installing for telephone RJ 11 Single Telephone 

Socket system including wire termination etc complete as per direction of 







Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on No.. basis. The 

contract rate shall be on per No. basis of Telephone socket supplied & erected. 

Item No. 17 c. Supplying & Installing for telephone 2 pair telephone wire in 

provided PVC conduit system including wire termination etc complete as per 

direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

Item No. 17 d. Supplying & Installing for telephone 5 pair telephone wire in 

provided PVC conduit system including wire termination etc complete as per 

direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

Item No. 17 e. Supplying & erecting telephone cable 50 pair with 0.5 mm dia. laid 

in provided PVC casing / conduit asper specification No. WG-TW 

Item No. 18. Supply & Installation of telephone junction box with 50 pair Krone 

etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

1. General 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI 

mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available 

in market, it shall be approved either by ITD / DOT of Govt. of India. 

Work shall be carried out as per the Method of Construction specified by BIS 

and as specified by DOT (Department of Telephone), Govt. of India. Material 



466 

and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the 

satisfaction of Engineer in Charge. 

2. Scope: 

Specification No (WG-TW) 

To provide wiring for telephone on surface of wall or ceiling concealed in 

slab, wall, under flooring, etc, through existing metallic conduits, rigid PVC 

conduits, PVC trunking, with all necessary hardware, material, etc. as 

specified. 

To provide, install, test & commission the instruments / equipments and 

accessories used in telephone system, such as; Main Distribution Frames 

(MDF), Krone Modules, Over Voltage Magazine, PBX / EPABX, CO-axial 

cable, Rosette box, Jumper wire, etc. 

3. Material: 

PVC Telephone cable: PVC insulated Tinned copper solid conductor with 

minimum 0.5 mm dia. (Single & Multi pair) properly paired and colour 

coded, shall be terminated on KRONE module with suitable tool. 

Jelly filled Armoured Telephone cable: PVC insulated, PVC sheathed with 

steel armouring, Tinned copper solid conductor with minimum 0.5 mm dia 

multi pair, with Jelly, properly paired and colour coded. 

Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge (16/18 gauge) 

either galvanized finish or painted with superior quality enamel black paint, 

with necessary shearing for mechanical strength, semi circular shaped with 

extended piece having suitable holes for fixing on spacer. 

Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gutties, 

etc. 

MDF: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of specified capacity, facility 

for wall mounting, with door & lock, aluminium frame for fixing of KRONE, 

duly enclosed in cabinet made from 18 SWG CRCA sheet with powder 

coating of required colour. 

Junction box: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of specified capacity, 

facility for wall mounting, with door & lock, aluminium frame for fixing of 



467 

Krone, duly enclosed in cabinet made from 18 SWG CRCA sheet with powder 

coating of required colour. The depth of the box should consider the height of 

KRONE module plus protection magazine. 

Over Voltage protection Magazine: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer 

of 10 pair capacity, with 3 pole gas discharge tube should be properly fitted 

on KRONE module in MDF / Junction box. 

Rosette box: PVC / Bakelite box with LED indicator, RJ 11 jack, facility for 

fixing on wall. 

Jumper wire: Twin twisted PVC insulated with Tinned copper solid conductor 

minimum 0.5 mm dia. 

KRONE Module: Disconnection type KRONE module having capacity to 

connect 10 pairs with silver-plated terminal contacts. 

RG-11 Co-axial low voltage grade cable: PVC insulated with Tinned copper 

solid conductor minimum 0.5 mm dia, with connector at both ends suitable 

for termination in RJ type socket. 

PBX (Analogue type): Manufactured by reputed manufacturer and approved 

by Telephone Engineering Certificate (TEC) of specified extensions, having 

following features: 

 

 

 

 

 

Direct inward dialling (DID) with voice guidance facility. 

Caller line Identification (CLI) on Analog as well as digital extension. 

Call Billing software (CB) 

Dynamic STD locking 

Conferencing facility for specified extensions. 

EPABX (Digital type): Manufactured by reputed manufacturer and approved 



 

 

 

 







468 

 


Provision of battery back-up and power failure line transfer. 


4.1 Drawing of telephone wire through Steel conduit / PVC conduit / PVC 

Trunking: 

As specified in Chapter for Point Wiring. 

4.2 Erection of Jelly filled armoured Telephone cable: 

Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, in perfect level and plum. 

Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible for good 

aesthetics look. Cable shall be fixed with saddles firmly clipped on cable. 

Saddles shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50x8 mm SM screws with 

plugs/wooden gutties (Distance between two saddles shall be minimum 600 

mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for stone 

wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable shall be 

made good by filling and finishing with plastering the same. 

4.3 Erection of MDF Junction box / Rosette box / PBX / 

EPABX, etc: 

Specified equipment shall he fixed to wall with minimum 50x8 mm SM 

screws, with necessary plugs, wooden gutties, etc. or may be fixed on Table 

Top if required. 


Work done for telephone in Steel / PVC conduit / PVC Trunking will be 

measured on running meter basis, (i.e. per running meter) for each single run. 

For the other accessories / equipments shall be done as per unit specified. (i.e. 

Job / each) 

Item No. 19. Supplying & Installing for lan system for Cat, UTP cable in provided 

PVC conduit including wire termination at both end etc complete as per direction 

of Engineer – in – charge. 

A) UTP Networking Cable 



469 

General: 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per ISO/IEC11801, CENELEC 

EN50173 & TIA/EIA 568-B2-1; CUL listed & ETL verified. 

Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the 


Scope: 


(WG-COC/NC) 

To lay the cables for Computers on surface of wall or ceiling concealed in slab, wall, 

under flooring etc, through existing metallic conduits, rigid PVC conduits, PVC 

trunking, with all necessary hardware, material, etc. as specified. The cable shall be 

used only for connections between Information Outlet & Patch / Multimax Panel. 

(Exception: For making MDIX patch cord) 

Material: 

UTP cable: 

4 pairs, 100 ohms, unshielded twisted pair (UTP), each pair separated by a PE former 

(Star shaped) solid 23AWG tinned copper conductor rated for temperature of 75° C, 

PVC insulated grey colour with following types as in the table 1.12/1 

Table 1.12/1 

Sr. No. Type Class Tested frequency 

1 Cat 6 E 350MHz 

2 Cat 6+ E 500MHz 

1. The Category 6 cable and Category 6 channel components shall be 

manufactured by a single manufacturer. The manufacturer shall warrant the 

Category 6 channel cable, components, and applications for a period of 20 years. 

2. The Delay Skew on the 100 meter channel shall not exceed 30 ns 

3. The 20 year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and has component 

replacement policy in case of manufacturing defect 

4. Category 6, 100mtr channel, 4-connection model should guarantee 400% 

margin over standard NEXT specification across swept frequency 



470 

5. Category 6, 100mtr channel, 6-connection model should guarantee +4dB 

margin over standard NEXT Specification across swept frequency (1- 

250MHZ) 

6. The high performance Category 6 UTP cable 23AWG shall be of the 

traditional round design with Mylar bisector tape Non-Plenum rated. 

7. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Baseband Video/Audio, Fax, 

Modem,Switched-56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS422, RS-485, 10BASE - T Ethernet, 

Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, 

AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM 

and emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, 

gigabit ATM, IEEE 1394B S100 and S400, as well as all 77 channels (550 MHz) 

of analog broadband video. 

8. The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a non-plenum 

cable. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL® and c (UL®) Listed Type CM. 

9. Performance shall be characterized to 550 MHz to support high-bandwidth 

video applications. 

Non Plenum CAT6 UTP Cable 

1. Weight=25.3lb(1000ft) 

2. Jacket Thickness=.022 in 

3. Outside Diameter=0.232 in 

4. Conductor Diameter=.022 in 

5. Insulation Type=High density Polyethylene 

6. Jacket Material=PVC 

7. Maximum Pulling Tension=25 lbs 

8. Nom. Velocity of Propagation=0.69 

9. Max DC Resistance=9.83 Ohms/100m 

10. Mutual Capacitance @ 1 kHz = 4.95 nF/100m 

11. Operating Temperature= -20 to 60° C 

12. The high performance Category 6 UTP cable shall be of the 

traditional round design with Mylar bisector tape. 

13. The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL Type CM (non-plenum) 



471 

14. Performance shall be characterized to 550 MHz to support highbandwidth 

video applications. 


The cable shall be laid in provided separate casing n capping/ PVC conduit/ 

trunking 400mm away from electrical cables wherever required without sharp 

bends. The cable shall be spliced at both the ends for punching/ crimping at 

keystone jacks / UTP connectors. 

Mode of measurement: 

Executed quantity shall be measured on running metre basis. 

Item No. 19. Supplying & Installing for RJ 45, information outlet etc complete as 

per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

A) UTP connector (RJ-45) (UTPC) 

General: 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per TIA/EIA 568-B2-1. 

Scope: 

Specification No (WG-NAS/UTPC) 

To make MDIX (Cross) patch cord required for cascade connections of switches & 

routers. 

Material: 

UTP connector: 

Assembly of Gold over nickel contacts with 1.5A current carrying capacity, 30V with 

15milli ohms contact resistance, 8P8C connection easy to crimp with crimping tool in 

polycarbonate UL94V housing. 


The UTP cable shall be spliced, untwisted not more than 12mm, inserted into the 

connector with sequence as shown in the diagram as per EIA/TIA 568 B.2-1 & 

crimped firmly with crimping tool. 


Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. 



472 

B) Information Outlet (Ethernet) (IO) 

General: 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per TIA/EIA 568-B2-1. 

Scope: 

Specification No (WG-NAS/IO) 

For connecting computers to wired LAN or external wireless Ethernet interface in 

Wireless LAN. 

Material: 

Information Outlet Flush/ Surface type: 

Spring shuttered front access, high impact plastic body FR grade with high 

performance unshielded RJ-45 keystone jack (conforming to EIA/TIA 568-B.2-1 Cat 

6), 15 milliohms contact resistance, gold over nickel spring contact, 1.5A current 

carrying capacity, with T568A/T568B wiring option, insulation displacement 

connector for cable crimping to accept 22-26AWG solid wire for connections up to 

Gigabit Ethernet. 

1. All Category 6 outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6 transmission 

requirements for connecting hardware, as specified in TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 

Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISO/IEC 

11801:2002 Second Edition. 

2. The Category 6 outlets shall be backward compatible with Category 5E, 5 and 

3 cords and cables. 

3. The Category 6 outlets shall be of a universal design supporting T568 A & B 

wiring. 

4. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being in a modular patching 

situation or as a modular telecommunication outlet (TO) supporting current 

10BASE-T, Token Ring, 100 Mbps TP-PMD, 155 Mbps ATM, 622 Mbps ATM 

using parallel transmission schemes and evolving high-speed, highbandwidth 

applications, including Ethernet, 1000BASE-T and 1.2 Gbps ATM. 

5. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being installed at either a 45° or a 

90° angle in any M-series modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box 

avoiding the need for special faceplates. 



473 

6. The Category 6 outlets shall have improved pair splitters and wider channel 

for enhanced conductor placement. The outlet shall also have a low-profile 

wire cap, which protects against contamination and secures the connection. 

Multicolored identification labels shall be available to assure accurate 

installation. 

Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gutties, etc. 


The Information outlet shall be fixed on the wall with sheet metal (SM) screws, rawl 

plugs / wooden gutties and making due connections as per EIA/TIA 568 B.2-1 by 

splicing the UTP cable, untwisted up to 12mm & punching the 4 pairs in the 

keystone jack with the help of punching tool. Not a single wire shall be left without 

connections. 



Item No. 19iii Patch cord-3 or 4 feet length etc complete as per direction of 

Engineer - in - charge. 

Scope: 

Specification No (WG-COC/PC) 

Structured cabling, to make connections from switch to patch panel or information 

outlet to computer 

Material: 

UTP Patch Cord: 

Assembly (conforming to EIA/TIA 568B-2-1) of Cat 6 type 4 unshielded twisted pair 

24-26AWG (0.51mm-0.40mm), each pair separated by a PE former (Star shaped) 100 

ohms stranded wire PVC insulated cables with modular RJ-45 polycarbonate UL94V 

housing 15milliohms gold over nickel contacts (superior three piece connector) 

crimped on both ends with T568A & T568B wiring schemes with 8P8C connection. 



474 

The cord shall be branded. The cords shall be used in structured cabling in 

accordance with following table 1.12/2. 

Table 1.12/2 

Sr. No. Length Use in 

1 1m from switch to patch panel 

2 3m from computer to information outlet 

1. All patch cords shall exceed TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC Category 6/Classs E 


2. All patch cords shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 

5E systems. 

3. The patch cords shall incorporate an anti-snag feature that provides 

maximum protection from snagging during moves and re-arrangements. 

4. Patch cords shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and AUSTEL approved. 

5. Patch cords shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per 

second. 

Physical Specifications: 

Contact Material: Phosphor Bronze 

Contact Plating: Gold 50 micro-inch (1.27 microns) 

Nickel 100 micro -inch (2.54 microns) 

Insertion Life: 

750 minimum 

Plug Material: 

Polycarbonate UL-rated 94 V-O 

Operating Temperature: 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C) 


The patch cord shall be erected for making connections from switch to patch panel or 

from computer to information outlet. 





475 

Item No. 20 a) Supplying and laying P.V.C. corrugated flexible conduit 20 mm in 

dia. conforming to I.S. and approved make with required number of couplings, 

PVC bushes, check nuts etc. complete. 

Item No. 20 b) Supplying and laying P.V.C. corrugated flexible conduit 25 mm in 

dia. conforming to I.S. and approved make with required number of couplings, 

PVC bushes, check nuts etc. complete. 

Scope: 

Providing specified PVC conduit and erecting / laying in wall, flooring by 

making chases / grooves / entries as per approved Method of Construction 

along with of all required material including hardware such as ‘U’ nails, 

binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as PVC / MS junction boxes / 

inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, glands, drawing fish-wires 


removing debris from site. 

Material: 

PVC Conduit: 

PVC pipe minimum 20mm dia and above depending on No. of wires to be 

drawn (refer Table No. 1/2), ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories 

for PVC pipes of the same make that of pipe; Couplers, long Bends, Junction 

boxes of required ways, type and resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid. 



accommodate No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16 gauge CRCA sheet 

steel with earth terminal duly treated with antirust treatment and painted 

with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be knockout holes in required 

numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to fix cover 

plate on it. Hardware: 


steel binding wire 20 gauge, steel fish wire, etc. 


Cement, sand, putty, and water. 



476 


Concealing of PVC conduits: (General) 

Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work to suit final approved 

layout. Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be 

drawn. (Table No 1/2 for PVC conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each 

phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution and also for 

wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. for which the 


partition is be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at 

required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit 

with colour coding as per table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible 



junctions and for straight, runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to 

facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done with 

Bending Spring. All joints shall be made rigid with resin. 

Concealing of PVC Conduits In walls / flooring: 




erected with use of appropriate accessories, and ‘U’ nails. All joints shall be 

made rigid with resin. Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed with checknut, 

flush with surrounding surface and earthed. 


Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per running meter length of 

PVC Conduits as specified. 

Item No. 20 iv. 24 Port Switch etc complete as per direction of Enigneer – in – 

charge. 

Scope: 



477 

Specification No (WG-NWC/GBS) 

To be used in wired LAN connections. 

Material: 

Gigabit Ethernet Switch: 

24 nos. of 10/100/1000 Base-T Gigabit ports, 2 or 4 combo SFP slots for flexible fibre 

backbone, VLAN, manageable, 19"standard rack mountable, auto detection of 

MDI/MDIX, Layer 2, Safeguard Engine to protect against traffic flooding caused by 

virus/worm outbreaks with rack mountable clips, screws, console utility software. 

1. Feature-rich solution with functionality enabling by Secure Always On access 

to mission critical applications. 

2. High-performance switch architecture and stacking performance delivering 

320Gbps. 

3. High-density 10/100/1000 ports for edge connectivity. 

4. Shared SFP uplinks ports per switch for gigabit fibre connectivity. 

Technical Specifications: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10/100/1000 Ethernet ports: 24 per switch 

SFP Gigabit ports: 4 per switch 

SFP support: SX, LX, XD, ZX, CWDM, 100FX & T1 

Resilient Stacking: up to 8 units 

Stacking ports: 2 built-in ports per switch 

Total stacking capacity: 320 Gbps 

Individual switch packet throughput: 36 Mbps 

Individual switch capacity: 88 Gbps 

Concurrent VLANs: 256 

 

Jumbo Frame Support on Gigabit ports 

Maximum MAC addresses: 8,000 

Standards compliance: 

 

 

IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet 

IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet 



478 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IEEE (ANSI) 802.3 Auto-negotiation 

IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet 

IEEE 802.3x Flow Control 

IEEE 802.1Q VLANs 

IEEE 802.1 p Priority Queues 

IEEE 802.1 D Spanning Tree 

IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree 

IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Groups 

IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation 

IEEE 802.1X Ethernet Authentication Protocol 

IEEE 802.3AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol 

RFC 783 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) 

RFC 791/950 Internet Protocol (IP) 

RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) 

RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 

RFC 854 Telnet Server and Client 

RFC 951 /1542 BOOTP 

RFC 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol v1 

RFC 1215 SNMP Traps Definition 

RFC 1271 /1757/2819 RMON 

RFC 1361 /1769 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) 

RFC 1493 Bridge MIB 

RFC 1573 / 2863 Interface MIB 

RFC 1643 / 2665 Ethernet MIB 

RFC 1905/3416 SNMP 

RFC 1906 / 3417 SNMP Transport Mappings 

RFC 1907/3418 SNMP MIB 

RFC 1945 HTTP v1.0 

 

 

RFC 2011 SNMP v2 MIB for IP 

RFC 2012 SNMP v2 MIB for TCP 



479 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RFC 2013 SNMP v2 MIB for UDP 

RFC 2138 RADIUS 

RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol v2 

RFC 2474 Differentiated Services Support 

RFC 2570/3410 SNMPv3 

RFC 2571 / 3411 SNMP Frameworks 

RFC 2572 / 3412 SNMP Message Processing 

RFC 2573 / 3413 SNMPv3 Applications 

RFC 2574 / 3414 SNMPv3 USM 

RFC 2575 / 3415 SNMPv3 VACM 

RFC 2576 / 3584 Co-existence of SNMP v1/v2/v3 

RFC 2660 HTTPS (Secure Web Server) 

RFC 2665 Ethernet MIB 

RFC 2863 Interfaces Group MIB 

RFC 2674 Q-Bridge MIB 

RFC 2737 Entity MIBv2 

RFC 2819 RMON MIB 

Additional features: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Customizable Auto-negotiation Advertisements (CANA) 

Distributed Link Aggregation Groups 

Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol (VLACP) 

Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree groups 

Single IP address for stack management 

Resilient fail-safe stacking 

Automatic Unit Replacement (Configuration and Software) 

Automatic Detection Automatic Configuration (ADAC) 

802.1 X Single Host Single Authentication 

802.1 X Single Host Multiple Authentication 

802.1 X Multiple Host Multiple Authentication 



480 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

802.1X Guest VLAN 

802.1X Non-EAP (NEAP) access 

DSCP-based Recognition, Marking and Recolouring 

Ingress and Egress Port Mirroring 

Broadcast and Multicast Rate limiting per port 

ASCII Configuration File 

Web, NNCLI, JDM 

SSHv2 and SNMPv3 secure management support 

Nortel Secure Network Access (NSNA) support 

BPDU Filter 

Stack Monitor 

USB software and ASCII configure upload 

New unit quick to configure 

Resiliency Features: 

 

 

 

Should support a technology which will allow multiple physical network 

links between two network switches and another device (which could be 

another switch or a network device such as a server) to be treated as a single 

logical link and load balance the traffic across all available links. 

Generally all the physical ports in the link aggregation group must reside on 

the same switch. It should also support protocols remove this limitation by 

allowing the physical ports to be split between two switches. 

Load balancing mechanism should not be round robin or dynamic which may 

not work with applications like Voice & Video, where session persistence is 

must. 

Main Objective of above features is to achieve Active-Active Cluster 

Switching .And achieve sub second failover in case of Link failure & Device 

Failure which will result in 99.999% uptime 

Electrical specifications: 

Power supply: AC 100-240V, 50-60Hz 

Input current at 110v: 1.3A 



481 

Input current at 220v: 0.7A 

Max power consumption: 150W 

Dimensions: 

Width: 438.2mm (17.25 in) 

 

Height: 1RU 43.7mm (1.72 in) 

Depth: 368.3mm (14.5 in) 

Environmental specifications: 

Operating temperature: 0 to 50 degrees C 

 

 

 

 

Storage temperature: -25 to 55 degrees C 

Relative humidity10% - 90% non-condensing 

Peak noise level: 42.4 dB 

Thermal rating: 290 BTU/hr 

Calculated MTBF: 312,001 hrs 

Safety Agency Approvals: 

IEC 60950 International CB Certification 

 

 

 

EN 60950 European Certification 

UL60950 US certification 

CSA22.2, #60950 Canadian Certification 

 

NOM Mexican Certification 

Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CISPR22, Class A/CISPR24 International 

EN55022, Class A/EN55024 European 

FCC, Past 15, Class A US Certification 

ICES-003, Class A Canadian Certification 

AN/NZS 3548 Australian/NZ Certification 

BSMI - Taiwan - CNS 13438, Class A 

MIC - Korea - MIC, No. 2001-116 

VCCI Class A Japanese Certification 

Hardware: 

Chromium plated brass nuts & bolts with special type of U shaped square washers 

of required sizes. 



482 


The Ethernet switch fitted with rack mountable clips shall be fixed in U Rack 

(Networking Cabinet) with 4 nos. of chromium plated brass nuts & bolts. The switch 

shall be configured for TCP/IP addresses for switch IP & Gateway. 



Item No. 20 iv. 24 Port Cat 6 jack panel etc complete as per direction of Enigneer – 

in – charge. 

Scope: 

Specification No (WG-NAS/PP) 

Structured cabling for the installation of keystone jacks. 

Material: 

Patch Panel: 

Three piece structure including front panel, cable management plate with pre-fitted 

B-clip to help in routing cables & metal case of 1.6mm thick Mild Steel powder 

coated panel of size 442.6mm X 44.5mm with the provision for 1 to 24 high density 

keystone jacks. 

1. 24 and 48 port patch panels with 110 IDC connector terminations on rear. 

2. The patch shall have electrical performance guaranteed to meet or exceed 

TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO/IEC Category 6/Class E 


3. The panel shall have vertical and horizontal cord organizers available as to 

improve; patch cord management. 



483 

4. The panel shall be available in 24-port and 48-port configurations with 

universal A/B labeling and 110 connector terminations on rear of panel 

allowing for quick and easy installation of 22 to 24 AWG cable. 

5. The patch panel shall have a black powder finish over high-strength steel. 

6. The panel shall be equipped with a removable rear mounted cable 

management bar and front and rear labels. 

7. The panel shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and ACA approved. 

8. The panel shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second 

and be backward compatible with Category 5e, 5 and 3 cords and cables. 

9. The Category 6 modular jack panels shall meet or exceed the Category 

6/Class E standards requirements in ISO/IEC 11801, CENLEC EN 50173 and 

TIA/EIA and shall be UL Listed. 

10. The panels shall be either wall or 19-inch rack mountable. 

11. The panels shall meet the following specifications: 

Performance Specifications: 

Category 6 

Patch Panel 

High 

Premium 

Performance Performance 

Solution Solution 

Category 6 Channel (4 Connectors) 

Guaranteed Guaranteed 

Margin** Margin** 

Typical Worst 

Pair Margin* 

Insertion Loss 64.3% 5.0% 7.5% 

NEXT 6.6 dB 6.0 dB 7.0 dB 

PSNEXT 7.3 dB 7.5 dB 8.5 dB 

ELFEXT 6.4 dB 6.0 dB 8.0 dB 

PSELFEXT 6.1 dB 8.0 dB 10.0 dB 

Return Loss 6.6 dB 4.0 dB 4.0 dB 

Frequency 

Range 

1-250 MHz 1-250 MHz 1-250 MHz 

Operational Specifications: 

Operating 

Range: 

Storage 

Temperature 

14°Fto 140°F (-10°Cto 60°C) 

Temperature -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C) 



484 

Range: 

Humidity: 

95% (non-condensing) 

Nominal Solid Conductor 

Diameter: 

0.025 to 0.020 in (0.64 to 0.51 mm) (22 to 

24 AWG) 

Nominal Stranded 0.025 to 0.020 in (0.64 to 0.51 mm (22 to 

Conductor Diameter: 24 AWG) 

Insulation Size: 

0.042 in (1.08 mm) (22 to 24 AWG) 

Maximum DOD 

Insulation Types: 

All plastic insulates (including PVC, 

irradiated PVC, Polyethylene, 

Polypropylene, PTF Polyurethane, 

Nylon, and FEP) 

Insertion Life: 750 minimum insertions of an FCC 8- 

Position Telecommunications Plug 

Front Panel: 

Black powder painted steel. 

Plastic: 

High-impact, flame retardant, UL-rated 

94V-0 

thermoplastic 

Hardware: 

Chromium plated brass nuts & bolts with special type of U shaped square washers 

of required sizes. 


The Patch Panel shall be firmly secured in U Rack (Networking Cabinet) with 4 nos. 

of chromium plated brass nuts & bolts. 





485 

Item No. 20 v. Wall mount network Rack with all accessories,12 U etc complete as 

per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

General: 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, EIA/TIA, and 

CENELEC 

Scope: 

Specification No (WG-NAS/LIU) 

To terminate the fibre backbone cables & the equipment cables. 

Material: 

Lightguide Interconnect Unit: 

Wall mount type Lightguide Interconnect Unit with dimensions shown in the table, 

an interfacing unit for fibre cables coming in from field & those originating from the 

equipments, consisting of fibre spools to provide minimum bending radius & splice 

trays as splice cover for pigtail splicing, two compartment design with adaptor panel 

in the centre, compartmentalizing the box, complete aluminium housing, fully 

powder coated, two doors enclosure with lock & key, rubber grommets at the cable 

entry points for tight sealing; Splice trays of 140 x125 x 10mm complete aluminium 

body fully powder coated with provision for fibre splices fully cushioned splice 

holder containing grooves for fixing splice protective sleeves; FR grade high impact 

resistance plastic two halves design stackable sufficient room for excess cable. 

Sr. No. Ports Dimensions Fibre splices 

1 12 300 x 300 x 80mm 6 

2 24 370 x 350 x 80mm 12 

Hardware: 

Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gutties, etc. 


Supplying & erecting Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU) on wall with 

cable termination complete with sheet metal screws of required size, plugs/ 

wooden gutties. 




486 


Item No. 21. Supplying, installing, testing & commissioning analogue type PBX 4 

x 24 extension as per specification No. WG-TW 

1. General 

All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI 

mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available 

in market, it shall be approved either by ITD / DOT of Govt. of India. 

Work shall be carried out as per the Method of Construction specified by BIS 

and as specified by DOT (Department of Telephone), Govt. of India. Material 

and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the 


2. Scope: 

Specification No (WG-TW) 

To provide wiring for telephone on surface of wall or ceiling concealed in 

slab, wall, under flooring, etc, through existing metallic conduits, rigid PVC 

conduits, PVC trunking, with all necessary hardware, material, etc. as 

specified. 

To provide, install, test & commission the instruments / equipments and 

accessories used in telephone system, such as; Main Distribution Frames 

(MDF), Krone Modules, Over Voltage Magazine, PBX / EPABX, CO-axial 

cable, Rosette box, Jumper wire, etc. 

3. Material: 

PVC Telephone cable: PVC insulated Tinned copper solid conductor with 

minimum 0.5 mm dia. (Single & Multi pair) properly paired and colour 

coded, shall be terminated on KRONE module with suitable tool. 

Jelly filled Armoured Telephone cable: PVC insulated, PVC sheathed with 

steel armouring, Tinned copper solid conductor with minimum 0.5 mm dia 

multi pair, with Jelly, properly paired and colour coded. 



487 

Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge (16/18 gauge) 

either galvanized finish or painted with superior quality enamel black paint, 

with necessary shearing for mechanical strength, semi circular shaped with 

extended piece having suitable holes for fixing on spacer. 

Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gutties, 

etc. 

MDF: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of specified capacity, facility 

for wall mounting, with door & lock, aluminium frame for fixing of KRONE, 

duly enclosed in cabinet made from 18 SWG CRCA sheet with powder 

coating of required colour. 

Junction box: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of specified capacity, 

facility for wall mounting, with door & lock, aluminium frame for fixing of 

Krone, duly enclosed in cabinet made from 18 SWG CRCA sheet with powder 

coating of required colour. The depth of the box should consider the height of 

KRONE module plus protection magazine. 

Over Voltage protection Magazine: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer 

of 10 pair capacity, with 3 pole gas discharge tube should be properly fitted 

on KRONE module in MDF / Junction box. 

Rosette box: PVC / Bakelite box with LED indicator, RJ 11 jack, facility for 

fixing on wall. 

Jumper wire: Twin twisted PVC insulated with Tinned copper solid conductor 

minimum 0.5 mm dia. 

KRONE Module: Disconnection type KRONE module having capacity to 

connect 10 pairs with silver-plated terminal contacts. 

RG-11 Co-axial low voltage grade cable: PVC insulated with Tinned copper 

solid conductor minimum 0.5 mm dia, with connector at both ends suitable 

for termination in RJ type socket. 

PBX (Analogue type): Manufactured by reputed manufacturer and approved 



 




488 

 

 

 





EPABX (Digital type): Manufactured by reputed manufacturer and approved 



 

 

 

 

 






Provision of battery back-up and power failure line transfer. 


4.1 Drawing of telephone wire through Steel conduit / PVC conduit / 

PVC Trunking: 

As specified in Chapter for Point Wiring. 

4.2 Erection of Jelly filled armoured Telephone cable: 

Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, in perfect level and plum. 

Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible for good 

aesthetics look. Cable shall be fixed with saddles firmly clipped on cable. 

Saddles shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50x8 mm SM screws with 

plugs/wooden gutties (Distance between two saddles shall be minimum 600 

mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for stone 

wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable shall be 

made good by filling and finishing with plastering the same. 

4.3 Erection of MDF Junction box / Rosette box / PBX / EPABX, 

etc: 

Specified equipment shall he fixed to wall with minimum 50x8 mm SM 

screws, with necessary plugs, wooden gutties, etc. or may be fixed on Table 

Top if required. 



489 


Work done for telephone in Steel / PVC conduit / PVC Trunking will be 

measured on running meter basis, (i.e. per running meter) for each single run. 

For the other accessories / equipments shall be done as per unit specified. (i.e. 

Job / each) 

The measurement will be as er number for completed job. 

Item No.21 ii & iii. Providing & fixing LCD 42" & 32” with its stand and all 

necessary accessories etc complete as per direction Engineer - in - charge. 

The item includes providing & fixing LCD 42" with its stand and all necessary 

accessories etc complete as per direction Engineer - in - charge. 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of LCD supplied & erected as specified. 

Item No. 21 iv. Providing & erecting Projector with spring loaded white screen 

connected with necessary mains, switchgear etc complete as direction of Engineer 

- in - charge. 

The item includes providing & fixing Projector with spring loaded white screen 

connected with 

necessary mains, switchgear etc complete as direction of Engineer - in - charge. 








490 


The contract rate shall be on per No. of Projector supplied & erected as specified. 

Item No. 21 v. VJA Cable etc complete as per direction of Engineer – in – charge. 

The item includes providing & fixing VJA Cable etc complete as per direction of 







Mode of Measurement & payment : The measurement shall be on per set basis. The 

contract rate shall be on per No. of VJA cable supplied & erected as specified. 

Item No. 22. Main ATS Panel of 1/C 160 A TPN ATS - 1 Set, 160 A 4PMCCB - 1 

No, With Load Managers & Per Phase Indicator Lamp, O/G : 100 A 4P MCCB - 1 

No, 63 A 4P MCCB - 5 Nos, 40 A 4P MCCB - 2 Nos etc complete as per direction of 

Enigneer – in – charge. 

The item includes providing & fixing Main ATS Panel etc complete as per direction 

of Engineer – in – charge. 







The contract rate shall be on per No. of Main ATS Panel supplied & erected as 

specified. 



491 

Item No.23. Supplying, Erecting and Commissioning of Diesel generating set with 

AMF Panel with alternator of 30 kVA output continuous rating, 3 Phase, 415V, 

50c/s 0.8 p. f. A.C a totally enclosed air cooled multy cylinder diesel 

enginedeveloping suitable BHP at 1500 rpm with 10% overload for 1 hour in 24 

hours with standard accessories, self excited self regulated, screen protected 

alternator with static excitation system running at 1500 RPM as per IS 4722-1968 

with voltage regulation +/- 5 % .Both the engine and alternator direct coupled on a 

common fabricated steel base plate with anti vibratring pad with control panel 

comprising of standard meters,switchgears, indicators connected with suitable 

wires/cables.The complete set enclosed in Acoustic enclosure made of 18 SWG 

CRCA Sheet, sound absorbing material,Rockwool covered from inside with ¾ 

mm holes perforated sheet to restrict sound level upto 75 dB at 1.0 m.The engine 

with first filling of oil,diesel etc.obtaining necessary approval from Electrical 

Inspector as per specification no. GEN-DG 

Scope: 


(GEN-DG) 

Providing D.G. Set at site, carrying out all preparatory works, assembling, installing, 

making adjustments, confirming all pre-commissioning requirement as per 

manufacturer's instructions, commissioning, final testing, putting in to operation 

and handing over of the complete system of D.G. set including inspection from 

inspectorate office. The work include necessary minor Civil works including 

opening on wall/Slab/floor and making good as it was etc. & comprehensive 

maintenance of the DG set for 1 year from date of commissioning. 

Material: 

Diesel Generator set with continuous rating, 3 Phase, 415 V., 50 Cycles A.C. supply 

of specified capacity, comprising of totally enclosed air/water cooled diesel engine 

with standard control panel & tool kit. (Refer drawing no. GEN-DG-1 & GEN-DG-2) 

Diesel Engine: 

The engine shall be of standard design of original manufacturers. It should be a 

totally enclosed air/water cooled Diesel engine with 4 stroke multi cylinders 

developing suitable BHP (As per Table 11/3) for giving power rating of (As per table 



492 

11/3) at the load terminals of alternator at 1500 R.P.M., at armature temperature of 

40° C for height at 1000 Meter above M.S.L. at 50% R.H. The engine shall be capable 

of delivering specified power at variable loads for P.F. of 0.8 (lag) with 10% over 

load available in excess of specified output for one hour in every 12 hours. The 

average load factor of the engine over period of 24 hours shall be 0.85 for power 

output. The engine shall confirm to IS: 10000 and Amended up to date. 

The engine shall be fitted with following accessories: 

1. Dynamically balanced fly wheel. 

2. Necessary flexible coupling and guard for alternator and engine applicable 

3. Lubricating oil cooler 

4. Air cleaner Dry/Bath type 

5. Lubricating oil pressure gauge 

6. Lubricating oil filter with replicable element 

7. Dry exhaust manifold with suitable exhausts heavy duty residential type 

exhaust silencer and vertical hot air duct both logged with asbestos rope 

exhaust piping of required length to reduce noise level. 

8. 12/24 V. Electric starting equipment complete with standard batteries, 

dynamo, cut-out, ammeter, necessary wiring, self starter etc. The system shall 

be capable of starting D.G. set within 20 to 30 second even in winter condition 

with an ambient temperature down to 0° C. 

9. Mechanical Governor of Class A2 for up to and including 200 KVA capacity 

and electronic governor of Class A1 for capacity above 200 KVA shall be 

provided as per standard design of manufacturer. Governor shall be a self 

contained unit capable of monitoring speed. 

10. Radiator 

11. Daily fuel Tank 

Daily fuel service tank of minimum capacity as per Table 11/1, below, fabricated 

from M.S. sheet with inlet, outlet connections air vent tap, drain plug and level 

indicator (gauge) M.S. fuel piping from tank to engine with valves, unions, reducers, 



493 

flexible hose connection and floor mounting pedestals, twin fuel filter. The location 

of the tank shall depend on standard manufactures design. 

Table 11/1 

Minimum capacity of Daily fuel tank for Generators 

Sr. No. Capacity of D.G. set Minimum Fuel Tank Capacity 

1. Up to 25 KVA 100 Liters 

2. Above 25 KVA to 62.5 kVA 120 Liters 

3. Above 62.5 KVA to 125 KVA 225 Liters 

4. Above 125 KVA to 200 KVA 285 Liters 

5. Above 200 KVA to 380 KVA 520 Liters 

Engine Control Panel: 

Engine control panel should be fitted with following 

accessories/indicators and shall have display: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Start/stop key switch 

Lube oil pressure indication 

Water temperature indication 

RPM indication 

Engine Hours indications 

Battery charging indication 

Low lube oil trip indication 

High water temperature indication 

Over speed indication 

Battery Charger: 

The battery charger shall be of Trickle & Boost type, and suitable to 

charge required numbers of batteries at 12V/ 24V complete with, 

transformer, rectifier, charge rate selector switch, indicating ammeter, 

voltmeter, battery over charging protection with audible alarm. 

Connections between the battery charger & batteries shall be provided 

with suitable copper leads with lugs. 

Battery: 



494 

Battery capacity and copper cable sizes for various engine capacities 

shall be as per the details given in Table No 11/2. Cable sizes shown 

are for maximum length of 2m length, if higher size of cable is 

required, it shall be selected in such a way that voltage drop does not 

exceed 2 V. 

Table 11/2 

Battery Capacity and Copper Cable Sizes for Various Engine 

Capacities 

SR. D G Set Capacity Battery Capacity Copper Electrical 

No. 

(AH) 

Cable size 

in mm 2 

System 

(Voltage) 

1. Up to 25 kVA 88 35 12 

2. Above 25 kVA up to 62.5 120 50 12 

kVA 

3. Above 62.5 kVA up to 150 50 12 

82.5 kVA 

4. Above 82.5 kVA up to 125 180 50 24 

kVA 

5. Above 125 kVA up to 500 

kVA 

180 70 24 

For AMF applications, a static battery charger working on mains 

supply recommended to keep the batteries charged at all times. 

Alternator: 

Alternator of specified rating, 415 Volts, 1500 RPM, 3 Ph, 50 HZ, A/c 

Supply with P.F 0.8 lagging at 40 C armature temperature for height 

1000 meter. Above MSL at 50 % R.H. alternator shall be brush less type 

self regulated having static excitation system having capacity of 

desired output confirming to IS: 4722-1968 with automatic voltage 

Regulation + 5% operated voltage from no load to full load, two 

numbers of earth terminal on opposite sides. Terminal box shall be 

suitable for underground cables and same shall be with stand 

mechanical and thermal stresses developed due to any short circuit at 

the terminals. The alternator shall be in accordance with following 

standards. 



495 

IS: 4722 The performance of rotating electrical 

machines 

IS: 4889 Rules for method of declaring 

efficiency of electrical Machines 

IS: 13364 Part I 1992 Alternator-voltage Regulation up to 20 KVA 

IS: 13364 Part II 1992 Alternator Voltage regulation above 20 

KVA to 80 KVA 

Performance: 

Voltage dip shall not exceed 20 % of the rated voltage for any step load 

or transient load as per IS: 8528 (Part I). The winding shall not develop 

hot spots exceeding safe limits due to unbalance of 20% between any 

two phases from no load to full load. 

The performance characteristics of the alternator shall be as below: 

a) Efficiency at full load 0.8 P.F. 

i. Up to 25 KVA- not less than 82 % 

ii. Above 25 KVA and up to 62.5 KVA- not less than 86% 

iii. Above 62.5 KVA / up to 250 KVA- not less than 90% 

iv. Above 250 KVA- not less than 93% 

b) Total Distortion factor Less than 3 % 

i. 10 % Overload One Hour in every 12 hrs of continuous operation 

ii. 

50% overload 15 seconds. 

Common Base Plate: 

Engine and alternator shall be coupled by means of flex plate/flexible coupling 

as per manufacturer standard design and both units shall be mounted on a 

common base plate together with all auxiliaries to ensure perfect alignment of 

engine and alternator with minimum vibrations. The base plate shall be suitable 

for installation on suitable anti-vibration mounting system comprising of 6 antivibration 

pads duly provided. 

Control Panel: 



496 

Floor/wall mounted control panel Box comprising of voltmeter, ammeter, 

selector switches MCCB/MCB of adequate capacity, indicator lamp duly wired 

with HRC fuses. Alternator & control panel shall be connected with provided 

suitable capacity armored cable with necessary cable glands & lugs etc. 

Exhaust system: 

It shall comprise of following parameters: 

Exhaust system should create minimum back Pressure. 

Smooth bends shall be used for minimizing the back pressure. 

Minimum number of bends shall be used for minimizing the back pressure. 

Pipe sleeve of larger diameter should be used while passing the pipe through 

concrete wall & gap shall be filled with felt lining. 

Exhaust piping inside the Acoustic enclosure / Generating set room should be 

lagged with asbestos rope and covered with aluminum sheet cladding to avoid 

heating of the area. Class ‘B’ MS pipes and long bend/elbows should be used. 

The exhaust outlet should be in the direction of prevailing winds and should not 

allow exhaust gases to enter air inlet / windows, etc. 

Factory Testing: 

DG set shall be tested in presence of Engineer in charge or his authorized 

representative in the factory for following before dispatch; 

 

 

Full load trial for 12 hour. Fuel, lubricating oil, etc shall be arranged by the 

agency. 

10% overload trial for one hour within 12 hrs test. 

Certificates: 

 

 

 

Manufacturer's test certificates for Engine, Alternator and of the set. 

Necessary certificate for the engine model so selected along with compliance 

of noise and emission norms as per latest CPCB guidelines for D.G. set should 

be furnished from the manufacturer along with manufacturer's technical 

details. 

Permission from Electrical Inspector. 



497 


The DG Set with canopy shall be erected with due care and ensuring the 

perfect level with the help of Sprit level, on provided cement concrete 

foundation and connecting the provided earthing connections. The exhaust 

system shall be connected to the exhaust manifold. After ensuring the filling of 

fuel, lubricating oil and medium of coolant, the set shall be commissioned, 

with giving necessary full load trials or with the available load at site. The set 

shall then be handed over to the department along with the installation report 

given by the manufacturer and with all the necessary certificates and 

permissions obtained. 


Executed quantity will be counted on number basis, (i.e. each) 

Table No 11/3 

Rating of Alternator and minimum BHP of Engine 

S. No. KVA Capacity of 

Alternator 

Minimum BHP of 

Diesel Engine 

1 10 12 3.0 

2 15 19 4.1 

3 20 26 6.0 

4 25 32 6.4 

5 30 42 8.3 

6 40 50.5 10.3 

7 50 65.8 13.0 

8 62.5 76 15.6 

9 75 91 16.0 

10 82.5 102 18.6 

11 100 127 22.8 

12 125 154 28.0 

13 140 166 30.0 

14 160 198 34.3 

15 180 235 30.0 

16 200 254 44.0 

17 250 313 54.0 

Average Fuel 

consumption liter per 

hour at 100 % Load 



498 

SUB ESTIMATE NO. 5 : AIR – CONDITIONIN & HVAC WORKS 

Item No. 1 : Supplying and erecting split type room Airconditioning unit 1,1.5 & 2 

TR capacity 250V, 50 cycles, A.C. supply having 1 & 2 No of air handling unit hiwall 

/ floor mounting type complete at position. ( Make : Diakin, Hitachi) 

As per specification no. AP-AC/SAC 

PART-I: Supply of Equipment 

I - AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 

N Rotary compressor as per enclosed technical specifications. (Cordless Remote 

Control )ON-DUCTABLE SPLIT AIR-CONDITIONER UNITS 

The unit shall consist of one outdoor unit (air-cooled condensing unit), and one 

indoor unit (Evaporating unit), with cordless remote electronic control units. 

Door Unit: The outdoor unit shall house compressor, condenser with fan, in 

a sheet metal cabinet. The cabinet shall be pre-treated and powder coated for 

long life in outdoor installation, and shall have acoustic lining for noise 

reduction. 

The condenser coil shall be made from copper tubes and aluminium fins firmly 

bonded. The condenser fan shall be propeller type with waterproof, design for 

low noise. 

Compressor shall be rotary type suitable for single phase 230 V + 10% AC, 50 Hz 

power supply, with built-in overload protection, mounted on vibration isolator 

rubber mounts. 

Indoor Unit: The Indoor unit shall house the cooling coil, air filter, evaporator 

fan with motor and air filter, installed in an aesthetically appealing plastic 

moulded body made out of ABS or other engineering plastic material. The fan 

motor shall be designed for low noise, maximum speed being limited 900 RPM. 

The unit shall be suitable for high wall or floor mounting as specified. 

Electronic Control Unit: An electronic cordless control unit covering the 

functions of temperature control, ON-OFF for fan & compressor and speed 

control of evaporator fan shall be provided along with the indoor unit. 



499 

2.1. With high wall type indoor unit 

2.1.3 Capacity : 1, 1.5 & 2 TR (1:2) 

Mode of Measurement and Payment :- The measurement shall be for the 

number basis . The contract rate shall be per no of 1, 1.5 & 2 T split type Air 

conditioning unit supplied & erected. 

a) M.S.Stand for outdoor unit duly painted table type only 

1.0/ 1.5/2.0tr 

The item includes providing M.S. Stand for outdoor unit duly painted table type 

only 






Mode of Measurement and Payment :- The measurement shall be for the 

number basis . The contract rate shall be per no of M.S. Stand provided & erected. 

b) Interconnecting Refrigerant piping duly insulated with nitrile rubber 

tubular insulation 

Interconnecting flexible Control cabling between indor & outdoor unit 

Refrigerant piping and wiring 

c) 4core. 2.5 sqmm 

d) 4core ,2.5 sqmm 

The refrigerant piping interconnecting to indoor & outdoor units shall be 

made out of hard copper tubes and shall be joined by brazed type joints. Suction 

line shall be insulated with 12mm thick nitrile or EPDM foam rubber insulation of 

closed cell fire retardant type. The insulation will be in tubular form and fixed and 

sealed with adhesive insulation tape. 

Wiring interconnecting the indoor and 

outdoor unit shall be PVC insulated copper conductor flexible wires of appropriate 

rating. 

All pipe supports/clamps shall be painted with red oxide primer followed by 2 coats 

of synthetic enamel finish paint. 



500 

Mode of Measurement and Payment :- The measurement shall be for the Rmt 

basis.The contract rate shall be per Rmt of respective sub items as specified. 

a) PVC Drain piping duly insulated 3/4"dia 

g) Rigid PVC piping insulated with 4 mm thick expanded LDPE insulation. 

The drain piping shall be made out of rigid PVC pipes of 6 Kg/cm2 class in 

screwed construction. The piping shall be supported by clamping on an M.S. angle 

25mm x 25mm x 3mm running continuously below the pipe. The piping shall be 

insulated with 4mm thick insulation sleeve of nitrile or EPDM foam fire retardant 

type tightly fixed on the outer surface of the pipe. All insulation joints shall be 

sealed by adhesive insulation tape. 

The drain pan shall be connected to rigid PVC pipe by braided PVC flexible pipe 

with appropriate adaptors. 

All pipe supports/clamps shall be painted with red oxide primer followed by 2 coats 

of synthetic enamel finish paint. 

Mode of Measurement and Payment :- The measurement shall be on per 

Running meter basis.The contract rate shall be per Rmt of drain pipe of specified 

diameter supplied & installed. 

============================================================== 



501 

SUB ESTIMATE NO.6 : ROAD DEVELOPMENT WORK 

Item No - 1 

Supplying 50 mm to 75 mm trap stone oversize metal at the road side including 

conveying and stacking etc. complete, including all taxes and royalty and all lead. 

a) Quarry metal 

1.1 General : The item provides the supply of specified type of stone metal 50 mm to 

75 mm oversize at the roadside including obtaining the rubble from approved 

sources and quality and hand breaking to size, conveying to the site of work, 

including all lifts and all leads and stacking in regular stacks as specified. 

1.2 Material : Metal shall be obtained from the approved quarries as specified below 

: 

1.2.1 Quarries : The contractor shall obtain the metal of the approved quality to the 

extent required for the work from the approved and authorized quarries out of 

approved quality rubble. He shall, however, obtain the necessary permissions from 

the competent authorities, pay royalties, duties and if applicable octroi and be liable 

to pay compensation for any damage caused to the quarries or the land or property 

and adjoining properties either deliberately or through negligence or otherwise, or 

from waste of materials in obtaining the requisite quantity of rubble. Blasting, if 

required, shall be done with utmost care according to specification by obtaining 

necessary permission for blasting operation from the competent authorities and the 

contractor shall be fully responsible for any accidents and compensations resulting 

there from. Alternatively, the contractor shall make his own arrangement for supply 

of hand broken metal approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall be 

fully responsible for any and all compensations to be paid as royalty, rents, octroi 

and duties or damages to properties and injuries to persons etc., caused in obtaining 

the metal. No claim on account of any obstruction caused in collection of materials or 

difficulties or action arising out of quarrying in private land shall be entertained and 

MIDC will remain indemnified with regard to such action and payment. Quarrying 

shall be done only from sound portions of approved quarries, the disintegrated and 

weathered portions shall be rejected. The payment of royalty shall be made by the 

contractor and no reimbursement from MIDC is admissible. 

1.2.2 Metal : 

Quality : The metal of the trap stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, 


weathering. Their water absorption shall be as low as possible but not more than 2 

per cent. They shall generally be hand broken metal. The physical test on metal shall 

be conducted by Engineer-in- Charge. The cost of such testing shall be inclusive in 

unit rate of Item. 



502 

Size : The shape of the stone metal shall be regular The stone shall be broken with 

the smallest dimensions equal to the 50 mm thickness of oversize metal. The longest 

dimension shall 

not be more than 75 mm. Before starting collection, the contractor shall get a sample 

conforming to the required quality shape and size approved from the Engineer-in- 

Charge who will preserve it in his site office for reference. The size of the metal shall 

be between 50 to 75 mm 

1.3 Conveyance to Site : Materials shall be brought to site for construction. The 

contractor shall be responsible to see that vehicles used for transporting materials do 

not drop any of the contents on the road and shall not cause nuisance to traffic. The 

contractor shall also be responsible for any damage or accident arising out of any 

such material falling on the road or elsewhere and shall attend and settle to all 

complaints in this regard. The Engineer-in-Charge may order the removal of such 

materials at the expenses of the contractor in case of negligence. Vehicles conveying 

or depositing materials shall not obstruct traffic. All leads and lifts included in the 

rate for the item. 

1.4 Stacking : The metal shall be stacked uniformly along the roadside or as directed 

in regular stacks of 3 m X 2 m X 1 m unless other sizes are ordered by the Engineerin-Charge. 

Stacking shall be done only after the quality, shape and size of the metal 

are approved. The stacks shall be made without appreciable hollows without 

making special efforts to hand-pack the material. The stacks shall be free of earth, 

rubbish, vegetation, inferior or oversize or undersize material. One stack in each unit 

section may be of different length if necessary to make up the total quantity in that 



the carriage way and as far as possible beyond the side widths and the side drains, 

on even ground or in the absence of such even ground the platforms prepared in 

advance for the purpose by the contractor at his cost. If no such land is available, the 

width of the stack may be reduced and the stacks may be laid on the side widths 

with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such stacks shall be protected from 

being disturbed. Necessary precautions to provide barricading, signs and signals 

shall be taken, the contractor being responsible for any accident, injury and 


stacked only at places where narrow width and stacked on the side of the road as 

directed without interfering with free drainage. The Engineer-in-Charge may, if 

required, get the stacks coming in the way of or obstructing the traffic, removed at 

the cost of the contractor and the contractor shall not be entitled to claim for any loss 

or damage to the materials on that account. The stacking operations shall be started 

at the point farthest from the quarry and carried towards the nearest point. The 

stacks shall not be laid at such places where they are likely to be damaged on 

account of the traffic, washing out by rains or floods or drainage, slides of the banks 

or the slopes of cutting. The contractor without extra claims shall make any loss on 

account of these or such other reasons good. As far as possible the metal shall be 

stacked evenly on one side of the road only and in such quantities per unit length as 

will be required for that particular length or as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. 



503 


owners of quarries and lands, payment of royalties, octroi and duties, fees, rents, 

taxes etc. compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in any 

way connected with the execution of this item and for loss of materials due to 

improper stacking etc., and shall make good the losses without extra claims. The 

contractor shall also be responsible for the blasting operations required for obtaining 

the rubble. 


1) Obtaining metal of approved quality, shape and size from quarry metal, boulder 

metal, Laterite metal and making payment of royalties, taxes, fees, rents, octroi and 

duties etc. 

2) Conveying to roadside including all lead and all lifts. 

3) Stacking. 


meter of metal supplied at site in stacks of approved size. When the metal is 

specified to be stacked in stacks of one uniform size, smallest stack may be chosen in 

the particular km or unit section and measured for its length, breadth and depth. The 

cubic contents of this stack shall be multiplied by the number of such stacks in the 

km or unit section to arrive at the quantity in the particular km or unit section. The 

Engineer-in-Charge may measure any other stacks also for verification. When the 

sizes of stacks are not uniform, each stack shall be measured individually. The 

dimensions shall be measured correct to two places of decimal of a meter and 




restacked properly after removing the inferior material as directed by the Engineerin- 

Charge by the contractor at his cost. The measurements of such a stack shall then 

be taken and if they are less than those of a normal heap, the quantity of the 

restacked stack shall be multiplied by the no. of stacks to arrive at the quantity in the 

particular unit or length. No deduction shall be made for voids. Metal shall not be 

used until the full quantity is collected in km or particular unit and measured. All 

stacks measured shall be marked with lime wash bands to distinguish them to avoid 

double measurement. If the material is found to be of inferior quality or of size not 

satisfying the requirements, the same shall be rejected summarily. All labour, 

materials etc. required for measuring, restacking, checking, lime washing, etc. shall 

be at the cost of contractor. 



504 

Item No . 2 : 

Supplying 40 mm trap stone metal at the roadside including conveying and 

stacking complete including all taxes and royalty and All Lead complete. 

a) Quarry metal 

b) Boulder metal 

2.1 General : The item provides the supply of specified type of stone metal 40 mm 

size at the roadside including obtaining the rubble from approved sources and hand 

breaking to size, conveying to the site of work, including all lifts and all leads and 

stacking in regular size as specified including making payment for royalty and other 

taxes, octroi and duties etc. 

2.2 Material : Metal shall be obtained from the approved quarries as specified below: 

2.2.1 Quarries : The contractor shall obtain the metal of the approved quality to the 

extent required for the work from the approved and authorized quarries. The 

contractor shall, however, obtain the necessary permissions from the appropriate 

authorities, pay royalties and will be liable to pay compensation for any damage 

caused to the quarries or the land or property either deliberately or through 

negligence or otherwise, or from waste of materials in obtaining the requisite 

quantity of rubble. The contractor shall make his own arrangement for metal supply 

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall be fully responsible for 

any and all compensations to be paid as royalty, rents, octroi & duties or any other 

statutory charges or damages to properties and injuries to persons etc., caused in 

obtaining the metal. No claim on account of any obstruction caused in collection of 

materials or difficulties or action arising out of quarrying in private land shall be 

entertained and MIDC will remain indemnified with regard to 

such action and payment. Quarrying shall be done only from sound portions of 

approved quarries, the disintegrated and weathered portions being rejected. 

2.2.2 Metal : 

Quality : The metal of the trap stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, 

clean, of close texture and free from unsound material, cracks, decay and weathering 

and scale. The water absorption shall be as low as possible but not more than 2 per 

cent. It shall generally be hand broken metal. The metal shall be cubical in nature 

and shall pass the desired sieve. The physical test on metal shall be conducted by 

approved laboratry in the presence Engineer-in-Charge or his representative. The 

cost of such testing shall be inclusive in unit rate of item. 

Size : The shape of the stone metal shall be cubical. The stone shall be broken with 

the smallest dimensions equal to the 40 mm thickness of size metal. Before starting 

collection, the contractor shall get a sample conforming to the required quality shape 

and size approved by the Engineer-in-Charge who will preserve/keep it in his site 

office for reference. 

The size of the metal shall be 40 mm. 



505 







removal of such materials at the cost of the contractor in case of negligence/or any 

other reason. Vehicles conveying materials shall not obstruct traffic. All leads and 

lifts included in the rate for the item. 

2.4 Stacking : The metal shall be stacked uniformly along the roadside or as directed 

in regular stacks of 3 m X 2 m X 1 m unless stacks of other sizes are ordered by the 

Engineer-in-Charge. Stacking shall be done only after the quality, shape and size of 

the metal are approved. The stacks shall be made without appreciable hollows 

without making special efforts to hand-pack the material. The stacks shall be free of 

earth, rubbish, vegetation and shall confirm size specified. One stack in each unit 

section may be of different length if necessary to make up the total quantity in that 



the carriage way and as far a possible beyond the side widths and the side drains, on 

even ground or in the absence of such even ground the platforms prepared in 

advance for the purpose by the contractor at his cost. If no such land is available, the 

width of the stack may be reduced and the stacks may be laid on the side widths 

with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such stacks shall be protected from 

being disturbed. Necessary precautions such as barricading, signs and signals shall 

invariably be taken, the contractor being responsible for any accident, injury and 


stacked only the side of the road as directed without interfering with free drainage. 

The Engineer-in-Charge, if required, get the stacks coming in the way of or 

obstructing the traffic, removed at the cost of the contractor and the contractor shall 

not be entitled to claim for any loss or damage to the materials on that account. The 

stacking operations shall be started at the point farthest from the quarry and carried 

towards the nearest point. The stacks shall not be laid at such places where they are 

likely to be damaged on account of the traffic, washing out by rains or floods or 

drainage, slides of the banks or the slopes of cutting. The contractor without extra 

claims shall make any loss on account of these or such other reasons good. As far as 

possible the metal shall be stacked evenly on one side of the road only and in such 

quantities per unit length as will be required for that particular length or as ordered 



owners of quarries and lands, payment of royalties, octroi & duties, fees, rents, taxes 

etc. compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in any way 


stacking etc. And shall make good the losses without extra claims. The contractor 



506 

shall be also responsible for the blasting operations required for obtaining the 

rubble. 



metal and making payment of royalties, taxes, fees, rents, octroi & duties etc. 


3) Stacking. 


meter of metal supplied at site in stacks of approved size. When the metal is stacked 

in stacks of one uniform size, smallest stack may be chosen in the particular km or 

unit section and measured for its length, breadth and depth. The cubic contents of 

the stack shall be multiplied by the number of such heaps in the km or unit section to 

arrive at the quantity in the particular km or unit section. The Engineer-in-Charge 

may measure any other heaps also for verification. When the sizes of stacks are not 

uniform, each stack shall be measured individually. The dimensions shall be 

measured correct to two places of decimal of a meter and quantity worked out 

correct to two places of decimals of a cubic meter. If there is reason to believe that 

the stacks are very loose and are having unduly large hollows and or materials not 

satisfying the specifications, the stacks may be got opened and restacked properly 

after removing the inferior material as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge by the 

contractor at his cost. The measurements of such a stack shall then be taken and if 

they are less than those of a normal stack, the quantity of the restacked stack shall be 

multiplied by the no. of stacks to arrive at the quantity in the particular unit or 

length. No deduction shall be made for voids. Metal shall not be used until the full 

quantity is collected in km or particular unit and measured. All stacks measured 

shall be marked with lime wash bands to distinguish them to avoid double 

measurement. If the material is found to be of inferior quality or of size not satisfying 

the requirements, the same shall be rejected entirely. All labour, materials etc. 

required for measuring, restacking, checking, lime washing, etc., shall be at the cost 

of contractor. The contract rate shall be for one cubic meter of specified metal 

supplied at site in stacks of approved size. 

Item No - 3 

Spreading in compact layers oversize and size metal to the required camber and 

gradient. 

3.1 General : This item provides to the labour work for spreading the oversize or size 

metal and spreading it for the road crust. 



507 

3.2 Material : The oversize and size metal shall be supplied and stacked by the 

contractor, or metal obtained by breaking rubble broken and stacked by the 

contractor available from cutting or rubble supplied by MIDC from other sources. 

3.3 Spreading Metal : Before commencement of spreading oversize metal it should 

be ensured that finished embankment/cutting is with proper camber and gradient. 

The metal shall be clean and then spread evenly over the rolled rubble-soling surface 

or on any formation by giving a twisting motion of the basket at the time of 

spreading. In order to ensure that the metal is spread to the exact width on either 

sides, V groove is excavated. To ensure the correct thickness, the road area shall be 

suitably marked so as to receive the contents of one stack for the specified thickness 

in the area marked. The unevenness and undulations after the spreading shall be 

checked by camber boards and line for the camber and grade at intervals of every 10 

meters. The edge line shall be ranged for a sufficiently long length to obtain straight 

lengths and on curves marking outer and inner edges of curves. The sides of the 

metal shall be held by bunds of murum to prevent metal from spreading if side 

widths are not provided at the time. These bunds shall be of such depth as to 

support the metal. The junction of the existing road and the new construction shall 

be diagonal in plan. Between the straight lengths and curves and at the meeting 

points of convex and concave portions of reverse curves the change in the camber 

shall made very gradually as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The thickness of 

spread oversize/size metal shall be uniform through out width of road camber 

should not be adjusted by spreading oversize/size metal of differential depths. 

3.4 Item to Include : Conveying the metal from the road side, stacks and spreading 

evenly to the required depth, width and section. All labour tools and equipment 

required for the satisfactory completion of the item. 

3.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The quantity spread shall be calculated by 

deducting the quantity in balance on site from the total collection existing on the 

roadside before spreading is started. The quantity on site shall be checked before 

spreading. The contract rate shall be for spreading one cubic meter of metal from 

collected stacks as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

Item No - 4 

Earthwork in embankment with approved material having field soak CBR not less 

than 8 and laboratory soak CBR not less than 12 obtained by the Contractor from 

his borrow areas including all lifts and leads including laying in layers of 20cm to 

30cm for power roller and 45cm to 60cm for vibratory compactor, breaking clods, 

and dressing to the required lines, curves and section including payment of 

royalty charges to the Govt. of Maharashtra. 

a) For all Lead. 



508 

4.1 General : The work provides setting out and preparing the ground and 

formation embankment for the road with approved quality materials obtained from 

the contractor’s borrow areas, laying in layers, of 20 cm to 30 cm to the required 

density, lines, curves, grades and cross section and dimensions shown on the plan or 

as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge with due allowance for shrinkage for 

compaction. 

4.2 Material : All the useful and acceptable materials of approved quality obtained 

from the contractor’s borrow areas shall be used for the embankment work. The 

borrow areas shall be got approved prior to bringing material to site of work from 

the Engineer-in-Charge. All the useful and approved material obtained from 

contractor’s borrow areas as directed shall be used for the embankment work. 

Approved quality murum or a mixture of sand, murum, gravel, small boulders or 

rubble as approved shall be used. Black cotton soil, shadu or shrinkable soils shall 

not be used. Murum having laboratory dry density of less than 1.65 gm/cc shall be 

rejected. For embankments upto 3 m in height murum with laboratory dry density of 

less than 1.65 gm/ cc shall not be used. Only the tested materials approved by the 

Engineer-in-Charge shall be used for the embankment. Rejected materials shall not 

be brought to the work site. The perishable materials such as stumps, pieces of 

wood, roots, rubbish, etc. shall be removed from the 

embankment material. The material required for embankment shall be obtained by 

the contractor from the approved quarries by the Engineer-in-Charge: - All lifts and 

specified leads involved in conveying the material to site shall be included in the 

rate. The payment of taxes, duties, octroi and royalty as per rules and regulations 

levied by the Govt. shall have to be paid by the contractor. The Contractor shall be 

responsible regarding any claims if any, that may be made by private owners. The 

payment of royalty charges is to be born by the contractor and no reimbursement 

from MIDC is admissible. 

4.3 Setting Out : Alignment of the road shall be set out as shown in the drawing or 

as directed to true lines, curves, and grades. Profiles shall be set out with stout poles 

to mark the center and edges of the formation width with the top levels of formation 

clearly marked by paint or cut and the slopes with string and pegs at every 30 meters 

on straight portions and 10m or less on curves or as directed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge. The toe line shall be marked with pick marks. Longitudinal and crosssection 

levels shall be taken recorded and signed by the contractor or his authorized 

representative and also by the Engineer-in-charge. All the materials and labour 

required for this item shall be supplied by the contractor and profiles, B.M.s etc. shall 

be put up by the contractor. The cost of these operations is included in the rate of 

this item. Profiles, pegs, benchmarks and other marks shall be maintained without 

any disturbance till the completion of the work, and as directed by the Engineer-incharge. 

4.4 Equipment: Pickaxes, crowbars, phawras, and Ghamelas maybe used for 

carrying out work manually. The scrapers, dozers, graders, shovels, dumpers, 

trucks, trolleys, etc. may be used for executing work using mechanical equipments. 



509 

Three wheels, 8 tones Power Roller giving a pressure required to obtain the specified 

density may be used for compaction. Bullock carts with water tanks or mechanically 

driven water tankers may be used for watering. The contractor shall submit the list 

of equipments available with him and intended to be used on the work and shall got 

approved for their use from the Engineer-incharge. 

4.5 Construction Methods : 

4.5.1 Diversions : If diversions, barricading and signals for day and night are 

necessary, they shall be provided without any extra cost. 

4.5.2 Preparing the Ground for Laying Bank : Before any material is laid for the 

embankment the ground shall be cleared of all rubbish, removing bushes, etc., and 

the holes, if any, filled up. When the embankment is to be laid on hillsides or\ 

slopes, the existing slopes shall be ploughed deeply. If the cross slopes are steeper 

than 1 in 3, steps with reverse slope shall be cut into the slopes to give proper hold 

and seating to the bank as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. On surfaces flatter 

than 1 in 15, no special surface treatment such as cutting steps shall be necessary. 

The top 15 cm of soil shall be scarified and watered as directed and compacted to the 

same density as specified for the embankment before any material is laid for the 

Bank-work. 

When the embankment is to be placed over an existing road, which is within 15 cm 

of the finished formation, the road or other hard surface shall be scarified to a 

minimum depth of 15 

cm for which payment shall be made separately under relevant item of road 

excavation. The rate for embankment includes all the operations for preparing the 

bed for laying the embankment material. 

4.5.3 Laying the Bank : Embankment material shall be placed in successive 

horizontal layers of 20 cm to 30 cm thickness extending to the full width of the 

embankment including the slopes at the level of the particular location and 30 cm 

more on both sides to allow compaction of the full specified section. The extra loose 

stuff at the edges shall be trimmed after completion of the embankment work 

without extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted. Keeping width of the 

bank initially less and widening it later by dumping loose earth on the slopes shall 

not be permitted as the additional width and slopes may remain loose and 

uncompacted and may not have been compacted as earlier carried out work. Similar 

procedure to extend the embankment by dumping the material longitudinally shall 

also not be allowed. When boulders, broken stones, and similar hard materials are 

mixed up with the embankment materials, care shall be taken to see that they are 

distributed uniformly in to the embankment and that no hollows are left near them. 

No stone or hard material shall project above the top of any layer. Each layer of 

embankment shall be watered, leveled and compacted as specified, before the 

succeeding layer is placed. The surface of the embankment shall, at all times during 

construction, be maintained at such a cross fall to shed water and prevent ponding. 

If bridges and culverts on the road are not completed in advance of embankment 

work, a length of 15 m bank shall be left on each side of the structure and these 



510 

lengths shall dealt with later for placing the embankment work. The contractor shall 

construct temporary diversion road till the work of culverts and bridges are 

completed and all type of traffic is allowed to be passed on these bridges and 

culverts. The camber stipulated shall be provided in the embankment only and shall 

not be adjusted in metalling. 

4.6 Protection : Proper care shall be taken to ensure that the method of operation and 

compaction of the bank-work does not cause damage or undue strain to any 

structural element. Embankment over and around bridges or culverts shall be of 

approved materials and carefully placed and compacted. The contractor shall take 

all precautions necessary for the protection of the bank-work by diversions of 

streams, local surface drainage, rain water, etc. likely to damage the bank. Any 

damage to the embankment-work due to no protection or inadequate protection 

shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost. Conveyance of materials shall 

not cause obstruction or nuisance to the nearby property owners and traffic. 

4.7 Finishing : The embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even in 

conformity with the alignment, levels, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the 

drawing with due allowances for shrinkage. On curves, sections shall be provided 

with super elevation and increased widths as shown on the plans or directed by the 

Engineer-in- Charge. All damages caused by rain, flood or any other reasons shallbe 

made good in the finishing operations without any extra cost by the contractor. The 

road land width shall be cleared. 

4.8 Maintenance : The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the work 

satisfactorily at his own cost till the completion of the defect liability period as 

specified in the contract agreement. 

4.9 Test : 

(a) Tests shall be made to determine the required density of the material to be used 

by the Proctor Density Method before starting the work. 

(b) Density tests shall be carried out for the bank-work during the progress of the 

work. One set of three core samples for every 1,000 sqm area of each layer of bankwork 

shall be taken and tested. The average density shall not be less than 95% of the 

standard proctor density. A deviation of 80 kg per cum for fine and 160 kg per cum 

for coarse grained murum shall be permitted in dry density in individual sample if 

the average density reached up to 95% of standard proctor density for each set. 

(c) The required number of CBR tests and plasticity index tests shall be carried out as 

directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

4.10 Item to include : 

1) Setting out alignment including necessary labour and materiel and maintaining it 

as long as required and directed by the engineer-in- charge of the work. 

2) Preparing the ground for laying the embankment. 



511 

3) Providing and maintaining diversions. 

4) Obtaining the embankment materials including all lifts and leads as specified 

under this item and laying embankment in layers, tests and payment of Royalties, 

fees, ocrtoi etc., if any. The cost of testing of material is included in the item of 

embankment. 

5) Protecting and maintaining the embankment. 

6) Finishing the embankment 

7) All labours, materials, use of equipments, machinery, tools, survey instruments 

and plant necessary for completing the work satisfactorily. 

8) Watering to OMC and compaction is not included in the scope of this item and 

shall be paid separately under relevant items incorporated in this tender. 

4.11 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The quantities shall be worked out by 

cross sectional measurement using leveling instruments. The contract rate shall be 

per cum of the finished embankment-work, watered and compacted (watering to 

OMC and compaction shall be 

paid separately). The measurement of the sections shall be limited to the dimensions 

shown on the drawings or those ordered by the Engineers in Charge in writing. The 

dimensions shall be recorded up to two decimals. The sectional areas shall be 

worked out up to two decimals. The quantity shall be worked out up to two 

decimals of a cum. by average area method. The volume of embankment thus 

calculated shall be reduced by 15% for the purpose of payment when the 

measurements are taken for running bills if watering and compaction has not done 

and by 1% in 

final measurements. The final quantity to be paid for under this item shall be the 

total quantity of embankment-work reduced by 1 per cent. 

Item No - 5 

Spreading Hard Murum or Blindage collected in roadside stack over the top of 

soling or oversize metal or size metal, including evening it into top of crevices 

(road side Stacks of murum will be measured including voids, without deducting 

allowance for compaction, separately and paid for under relevant item of 

embankment of road whichever is applicable). 

5.1 General : The item provides the labour for spreading hard murum or blindage 

from the roadside stacks over soling/oversize metal/size metal. 

5.2 Material : The murum or blindage shall be confirming to the approved quality. 



512 

5.3 Spreading Hard Murum : The hard murum or blindage shall be clean and 

without any foreign material, granular and spread evenly over the rubble-soling or 

over the rolled oversize or size metal surface by giving a twisting motion to the 

basket at the time of spreading. In order to ensure the correct thickness, the road area 

shall be suitably marked so as to receive the contents of one stack for the specified 

thickness in the area marked. The spread minimum shall be sweeped by iron fork 

evenly to fill the crevices/interstics of the laid soling/metal surfaces. The 

unevenness and undulations after the spreading of the murum shall be checked by 

using camber boards and line for the camber and grade at intervals of every 10 

meters. The edge line shall be ranged for a sufficiently long length to obtain straight 

lengths and on curves marking inner and outer edge of the curve. In hand packed 

soling or rolled oversize metal the murum equivalent to 33% of cum. quantity of 

rubble soling/oversize metal shall be spread. In respect of size metal the murum 

equivalent to 16% of cum of size metal laid shall be spread over. 

5.4 Item to Include : Conveying the hard murum or blindage from the road side 

stacks and spreading evenly to the required depth, width and section. All labour, 

tools and equipment and required for the satisfactory completion of the item shall be 

provided by contractor. 


deducting the quantity in balance on site from the total collection existing on the 

roadside before spreading is started. The quantity on site shall be checked before 

spreading. The contract rate shall be for spreading one cubic meter of hard murum 

or blindage collected in stacks. 

Item No- 6 

Watering over sub-grade consisting of soling and / or oversize metal. 

Consolidation over sub-grade consisting of soling and / or oversize metal and 

hard murum by 8-10 tonne roller until proper interlocking etc. complete. 

a) with 8 – 10 tonne roller 

6.1 General : The item provides the watering over soling, oversize and size metal. 

6.2 Material and Equipment : Water to be used shall be free of harmful elements, 

which may cause heavy efflorescence, etc. and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

The contractor shall make his own arrangements for getting adequate quantity of 

acceptable water. Only just sufficient water as is necessary shall be sprinkled 

uniformly with the help of water tanker and/or sprinkler over the hard 

murum/blindage so as to obtain maximum compaction with the type of rolling 

adopted without total crushing of the material. The water shall be used profusely 

small fillets shall be provided at edges so that the water will not flow away. The 

roller shall move in water slurry which will penetrate into crevices all voids in metal 

shall feet fill in and proper bond in the metal shall be formed. 



513 

6.3 Item to Include : All clean water, material, machinery, equipment, labour, taxes 

etc. shall be included in the rate. 

6.4 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be the area of 

road surface watered in sqm upto two decimals. The payment shall be at the rate per 

sqm. 

For Consolidation 

6.1 General : The item provides for full compacting/consolidating the sub-grade 

with soling and/or oversize metal layers and hard murum with 8-10 tonne 

roller/vibratory compactor as directed. 

6.2 Consolidating the Sub-Grade and the Soling : The sub-grade, of and soling 

and/or oversize metal and murum layer shall be rolled after it is dressed to the 

required grade, camber and section. The soling shall be rolled dry with 8 to 10 tonne 

roller or vibratory roller 8 to 10 tonne to refusal i.e. till the stones in the soling cease 

to move under the roller and no more compaction can be achieved. In case of 

unevenness, high spots shall be knocked out and depressions filled by spalls and 

recompacted fully. ‘V’ groove shall be cut along the edges and compacted before 

starting rolling on subgrade to prevent spreading of stones. 

6.3 Compaction of Oversize, Size Metal and Murum : The compaction shall be done 

with a 8-10 tonne ordinary or vibratory roller of 8 to 10 tonne capacity as directed by 

Engineer-in-charge. The rolling shall begin with the outside rear wheel of the roller 

covering equal parts of shoulder and metal and the roller shall be run forward and 

backward until the shoulder holds the metal firmly. The rolling shall then progress 

from edges to the center in strips parallel to the centerline of the road. Rolling shall 

be done by lapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one half width of 

the track and shall continue until all the surface has been rolled by the rear wheels 

till the impression of the rear wheels does not appear on road surface. Side fillets 

shall be raised to avoid water flowing away. ‘V’ groove shall be excavated on either 

edges before spreading the metal so that the metal will not move beyond the edges. 

On super elevations, the rolling shall be started at the inner edge and carried 

towards the outer edge. In all cases, the correct cross sections of the road as required 

at straight portions, super elevations and transitions shall be obtained on final 

rolling. During and after rolling, the sections, camber and grades shall be checked 

with camber boards and straight edge and any defect set right at the time of rolling. 

Care shall be taken to see that the rolling work is started and stopped without jerks. 

The roller shall not be stopped in the working section as far as possible. Rolling shall 

not normally be done in lengths of less than 100 m. The stretch started on a 

particular day shall as far as possible be completed on the same day. On completion 

of day’s work, the roller shall be made to stand on the side width of the road and 

shall be guarded by watchmen and conspicuous barricades, caution boards and Red 

light shall be hung on to the roller so as to be visible from both sides of the road. 



514 

6.4 Dry Rolling of Oversize Metal : The layer of metal shall be rolled dry first with 

8-10 tonne roller or vibratory roller as may be specified i.e. till the metal is 

completely interlocked and ceases to move under the roller and no more compaction 

can be achieved. This state can be 

judged by - 

1) metal ceasing to move in front of the roller or, 

2) crushing of the metal with further rolling or, 

3) loaded bullock cart leaving no indentation over the compacted surface. 

In case of uneven spots, high spots shall be lowered by removing necessary metal 

pieces and depressions shall be filled by additional metal and full compaction of 

these portions redone to confirm to the correct section. 

6.5 Wet Rolling : The rolled surface shall then be watered freely (Watering item shall 

be paid under item of watering separately) and rolled again. Blindage shall then be 

spread as per requirement to a uniform thickness of specified thickness as directed 

by the Engineerin- Charge and further rolling done to pack the interstices with 

blindage small fillets shall be provided on either edges of metal width. Watering 

shall be done profusely as directed by Engineer-in-Charge and the surface finally 

rolled to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge. The road roller should move in 

thin slurry so that the slurry penetrates in the crevices of metal leaving no voids and 

thick bond between metal is developed. 

6.6 Item to Include : The item includes all the labour, machinery and equipment for 

rolling over the sub-grade and the soling and gravel including all cost of machinery, 

labour and all other charges involved. Making good unevenness if any by cutting or 

adding is also included. 

6.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be for compacting 

one sqm area of the road surface of the full width of subgrade, soling, oversize metal 

and murum blindage as shown in the section including increased widths on curves, 

road crossings etc. The area of the road compacted shall be measured in sqm. 

Item No – 7 

Spreading blindage collected in roadside stack, over metal, including brooming to 

fill in interstices (road side stacks of soft murum including voids without 

deducting for allowance for compaction will be measured separately and paid 

under relevant item of embankment of road whichever is applicable) 

7.1 General : The item provides the labour work for spreading hard murum or 

blindage from the roadside stacks. 

7.2 Material : The murum or blindage shall be confirming to the approved quality 

granular murum. 



515 

7.3 Spreading Hard Murum : The hard murum or blindage shall be clean and then 

spread evenly over the rolled metal surface by giving a twisting motion to the basket 

at the time of spreading. In order to ensure the correct thickness, the road area shall 

be suitably marked so as to receive the contents of one stack for the specified 

thickness in the area marked. The unevenness and undulations after the spreading 

shall be checked by camber boards and line for the camber and grade at intervals of 

every 10 meters. The edge line shall be ranged for a sufficiently long length to obtain 

straight lengths and uniform curves. 

7.4 Item to Include : Conveying the hard murum or blindage from the roadside 

stacks and spreading evenly to the required depth, width and section. All labour 

tools and equipment required for the satisfactory completion of the item. 


deducting the quantity in balance on site from the total collection of stacks existing 

on the roadside before spreading is started. The quantity on site shall be checked 

before spreading. The contract rate shall be for spreading one cubic meter of hard 

murum or blindage as per satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

Item No - 8 

Watering over size metal and blindage during consolidation by 8-10 tonne roller 

over final surface of size metal and Blindage until proper interlocking etc., 

complete 

a) with 8-10 tonne roller. 

8.1 General : The item provides watering and compacting to the final surface of size 

metal and blindage until proper interlocking. 

8.2 Material and Equipment : Water to be used shall be free from harmful elements, 



acceptable water. The water tankers and 8-10 tonne 3 wheel road roller shall be used. 

If directed vibratory roller shall be used for proper compaction. 

8.3 Watering : Small fillets shall be constructed on either edges of metal width so 

that the water sprinkled will not flow away. Only just sufficient water as is necessary 

shall be sprinkled uniformly with the help of water tanker and sprinkler over the 

size metal and blindage so as to obtain maximum compaction with the type of 

rolling adopted without total crushing of the metal. The water shall be used 

profusely. The roller shall move in plastic murum slurry which will penetrate into 

crevices of in the metal making good bond between metal. 

8.4 Compaction of Size Metal & Murum : The compaction shall be done with 8-10 

tonne ordinary or vibratory roller of 8 to 10 tonnes capacity as directed by the 

Engineer-in-Charge. The rolling shall begin with the outside rear wheel of the roller 



516 

covering equal parts of shoulder & metal & the roller shall be run forward and 

backward, until the shoulder holds the metal firmly. The rolling shall then progress 

from edges to the center in strips parallel to the centerline of the road. Rolling shall 

be done by lapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one half width of 

the track & shall continue until all the surfaces has been rolled by the rear wheels till 

the impression of the rear wheels does not appear. Side fillets shall be raised to avoid 

water flowing away. ‘V’ groove excavated on either edges of metal width will avoid 

sliding metal beyond width of metal and edge will remain in straight line. On super 

elevations, the rolling shall be started at the inner edge and carried towards the outer 

edge. In all cases, the correct cross section of the road as required at straight 

portions, super elevations and transitions shall be obtained on final rolling. During 

and after rolling the sections and grades shall be checked with camber boards and 

straight edges and any defect is set right at the time of rolling. Care shall be taken to 

see that the roller is moved or started and stopped without jerks. The roller shall not 

be stopped in working section as far as possible. Rolling shall not normally be done 

in lengths of less than 100 m. The stretch started on a particular day shall as far as 

possible be completed on the same day. On completion of day’s work, the roller shall 

be parked on the side width of the road and shall be guarded by the watchman and 

conspicuous barricades. Red light shall be hanged on the roller so as to be visible 

from both sides of the road. 

8.5 Dry Rolling of Size Metal : The layer of metal shall be rolled dry first with 8-10 

tonne roller/ vibratory compactor to refusal i.e. till the metal is completely 

interlocked and ceases to move under the roller and no more compaction can be 

achieved. This state can be judged by, 

i) Metal ceasing to move in the front of the roller. 

ii) Crushing of the metal with further rolling or 

iii) Loaded bullock cart leaving no identation over the compacted surface. 

In case of uneven spots, high spots shall be lowered by removing necessary metal 

pieces and depressions shall be filled by additional metal and full compaction of 

these portions redone to confirm to the correct section. 

8.6 Wet Rolling : Small murum fillets shall be constructed on either edges of the 

metal width. The rolled surface shall then be watered freely and rolled again. 

Blindage shall then be spread to a uniform thickness of specified thickness as 

directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and further rolling done to pack the interstices 

with blindage. Watering shall be done profusely as directed by Engineer-in-Charge 

and the surface finally rolled to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. The fillets 

constructed on either edges of metal width will avoid the water flowing away. The 

roller shall move in plastic murum slurry which will penetrate in the crevices in the 

metal and bond will be developed in the metal. 

8.7 Item to Include : all material, machinery equipment, labour, taxes etc. shall be 

included in the rate. 



517 

8.8 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be taken of the 

area of road surface watered and compacted, in sqm upto two decimals. The 

payment shall be at the rate per sqm. 

Item No. 9 : 

Watering to OMC (16 to 24 kg of water per cum) the earthwork in embankment in 

20 to 30 cm layers (95% proctor density). 

9.1 General : The item provides watering the layers of 20 to 30 cm of embankment 

laid. 

9.2 Material and Equipment : Water to be used shall be free of harmful elements, 



acceptable water. The water tankers shall be used, without any additional payment. 

9.3 Watering : When the murum of the 20 to 30 cm layer in embankment road 

contains less than the optimum moisture, water shall be added to the material in the 

embankment layers of the road to bring the moisture, uniformly up to requirement. 

If the material contains more than the required moisture, it shall be allowed to dry 

until the moisture is reduced to the required extent. If due to wet weather etc. the 

moisture contents of the soil cannot be reduced to the appropriate amount by 

exposure, the compaction shall be suspended till suitable conditions prevail without 

contractor’s claiming any compensation. 

9.4 Item to Include : All material, equipment machinery labour, taxes etc. shall be 

included in the rate. 

9.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be taken on Cum. 

basis of the embankment of the road watered. 

Item No. 10 : 

Consolidation with proper ramming / rolling in layers the earthwork in 

embankment. 

a) with 8 – 10 tonne roller in 20 to 30 cms layers 

10.1 General : The item provides consolidation of the earthwork in embankment in 

20 to 30 cm layers for 8 to 10 tonnes roller and 40 to 50 cm layers for vibratory rollers. 

This item is to be executed after laying the earthwork in embankment in the layers of 

20 to 30 cm and the layer is watered. 



518 

10.2 Equipment : The ramming rods and 8-10 tone ordinary or vibratory roller as 

directed shall be used. 

10.3 Consolidation : When a loose layer is leveled manually or mechanically with 

camber provided and moistened or dried to a uniform and required moisture 

content suitable for maximum compaction, it shall be compacted by power rollers, 

vibratory rollers or heavy hauling or dozing equipment to give the specified 95% of 

the standard proctor density. If on testing, the density is found to be less than 95% of 

the standard density the contractor shall do additional compaction necessary to get 

the specified density after adding water if required. When the specified density is 

imperative, the work shall be removed and redone by the contractor at his own cost 

to give the specified density. Proper sequence of all component operations shall be 

maintained to give individual progress. For compaction of embankment the road 

roller shall move longitudinally and rolling shall be done from edges to centre. The 

camber shall be provided in the cutting and shall not be adjusted in metalling. Care 

shall be taken for getting good compaction behind abutments, returns and wing 

walls, etc. Cutting/ Bank-work in areas not accessible to rollers such as those 

adjoining bridges, culverts and other works, shall be carried out independently of 

the main embankment and shall have the layers placed in 10 cm to 15 cm. thickness 

and each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly compacted with mechanical or 

manual tampers. Embankment shall be brought up simultaneously in equal layers 

on each side and compacted carefully to avoid unequal pressure, etc The compaction 

of the embankment shall be done by moving road roller longitudinally from edges to 

centre. 

10.4 Item to Include : The item includes only the compaction of each layer by 8-10 

tonne roller or vibratory roller. All labour and equipment required to execute the 

item as per above specification shall be included in the item. If specified vibratory 

compactors shall be used. 

10.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be taken of the 

earthwork for embankment of road in Cum. upto two decimals. The contract rate 

shall be for a unit of One Cubic meter of the finished bank work. 

Item No. 11 : 

Providing trapstone/granite stone metal at the work site as directed in stacks of 

minimum size 3 x 2 x 1 m or as directed in stacks of higher sizes than the 

minimum stipulated above including all loading/unloading operation and 

conveyance to the site of work all lead, Including all taxes and royalty charges. 

a) Standard size 40 mm (Hand Broken) 

d) Standard size 25mm (Crushed aggregate) 

f) Standard size 12mm (Crushed aggregate) 



519 

11.1 General : The item provides supply of stone aggregate of the specified type and 

size at the site of work, including obtaining the stones of the specified quality from 

approved sources, manually breaking or crushing them in mechanical crushers, 

loading into conveyor and unloading at sit of work conveying within all leads and 

all lifts, stacking in regular heaps as specified. 

11.2 Material : Stones of approved quality shall be used for hand broken or crushed 

aggregate. 

Quality : The rubble of the trap stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, 


weathering. The water absorption shall be as low as possible but not more than 2 per 

cent. They shall generally be broken rubble. 

Stone Aggregate : The aggregates shall be obtained by crushing approved stones of 

specified type in a mechanical crusher and shall be clean, strong, tough, dense, 

durable, close grained and free from soft, decayed and weathered portions and from 

coating of dust, dirt or other objectionable matter. They shall preferably have good 

hydrophobic characteristics. The metal shall generally satisfy the following physical 

requirements:- 

For light or 

Medium traffic 

For light or 

Medium traffic 

Los Angles abrasion test, per cent, fines 

maximum 

Aggregate crushing test: percent, fines 

maximum 

Water absorption by weight after 24 

hours immersion; 

percent. Not more than 

25 17 

23 17 

1 1 

Tests shall be carried out according to I.S.383-1970 

Tests considered necessary shall be carried out in an approved laboratory. 

Size of Metal shall be as under:- 

Standard Size 

Wholly Passing through 

Square 

mesh of internal 

Wholly retained on 

square mesh of internal 

dimension 



520 

dimension 

40 mm 50 mm 25 mm 

25 mm 40 mm 20 mm 

20 mm 25 mm 12 mm 

12 mm 20 mm 10 mm 

10 mm 12 mm 6 mm 

6 mm 10 mm 5 mm 

Note :- Not more than 20% of any sample shall exceed in its greatest dimension 

standard size plus 25 mm. For 40 mm. Standard size, standard size plus 8 mm. For 

25 mm, 20 mm and 12 mm standard sizes and standard size plus 6 mm for 10 mm 

and 6 mm standard sizes plus 4 mm. 

The metal shall be roughly cubical in shape and of uniform size with sharp edges for 

interlocking. Rounded, flaky thin, elongated metal shall not be accepted. Before 

collection, samples of the metal shall be got approved for quality size and shape by 

the Engineer-in-Charge who will preserve them in his site office for reference. They 

shall be completely dry at the time of use. 

11.3 Conveyance : Materials shall be brought to site sufficiently in advance of 






removal of such materials at the expenses of the contractor in case of neglect. 

Vehicles conveying or disposing materials shall not obstruct traffic. All leads and 

lifts included in the rate for the item. 

11.4 Stacking : The material shall be stacked uniformly along the roadside or as 

directed in regular stacks of minimum size 3m X 2m X 1 m unless other sizes are 

ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge, stacking shall be done only after the quality, 

shape and size of the material are approved. The stacks shall be made without 

appreciable hollows without making special efforts to hand-pack the material. The 

stacks shall be free of earth, rubbish, vegetation, inferior or too much oversize or 

undersize material. One stack in each unit section may be of different length if 

necessary to make up the total quantity in that particular section. Low and wide 

stacks with outer retaining walls and the center filled in loosely shall not be 

permitted. The material shall be stacked entirely clear of the carriage way and as far 

a possible beyond the side widths and the side drains, on even ground or in the 

absence of such even ground the platforms prepared in advance for the purpose by 

the contractor at his cost. If no such land is available, the width of the stack may be 

reduced and the stacks may be laid on the side widths with the approval of the 

Engineer-in-Charge. Such stacks shall be protected from being disturbed. Necessary 

precautions such as barricading, signs and signals shall invariably be taken, the 



521 

contractor being responsible for any accident, injury and compensation due to his 

negligence in this respect. On hill roads material shall be stacked only on the side of 

the road as directed without interfering with free 

drainage. The Engineer-in-Charge may, if required, get the stacks coming in the way 

of or obstructing the traffic, removed with the cost of the contractor and the 

contractor shall not be entitled to claim for any loss or damage to the materials on 

that account. The stacking operations shall be started at the point farthest from the 

quarry and carried towards the nearest point. The stacks shall not be laid at such 

places where they are likely to be damaged on account of the traffic, washing out by 

rains or floods or drainage, slides of the banks or the slopes of cutting. The 

contractor without extras claims shall make any loss on account of these or such 

other reasons good. As far as possible the metal shall be stacked evenly on one side 

of the road only and in such quantities per unit length as will be required for that 

particular length or as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. Each size of aggregate 

shall be stacked separately and entirely clear from the carriageway and where 

possible clear of the shoulders also. They shall be stacked in such a manner as to 

prevent mixture, deterioration or contamination 


owners of quarries and lands, payment of royalties, fees, rents, taxes, octroi, duties, 

etc. Compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in any way 


stacking etc. and shall make good the losses without extra claims. The contractor 

shall also responsible for the blasting operations. 



metal, Laterite metal and payment of royalties, taxes, octroi, duties, fees, rents, etc. 


3) Stacking. 


meter of material supplied at site in stacks of approved size. When the material is 

stacked in stacks of one uniform size, smallest stack may be chosen in the particular 

km or unit section and measured for its length, breadth and depth. The cubic 

contents of this heap shall be multiplied by the number of such stacks in the km or 

unit section to arrive at the quantity in the particular km or unit section. The 

Engineer-in-Charge may measure any other stacks also for verification. When the 

sizes of stacks are not uniform, each stack shall be measured individually. The 

dimensions shall be measured correct to two places of decimal of a meter and 




restacked properly after removing the inferior material as directed by the Engineerincharge 

at the contractor’s cost. The measurements of such a stack shall then be 

taken and if they are less than those of a normal heap, the quantity of the restacked 



522 

heap shall be multiplied by the no. of stacks to arrive at the quantity in the particular 

unit or length. 

No deduction shall be made for voids. Material shall not be used until the full 

quantity is collected in km or unit length and measured. All stacks measured shall be 

marked with lime wash bands to distinguish them to avoid double measurement. If 

the material is found to be of inferior quality or of size not satisfying the 

requirements, the same may be rejected entirely. All labour, materials etc. required 

for measuring, restacking, checking, lime washing, etc. shall be at the cost of 

contractor. 

Item No – 12 

Spreading metal on road surface from 40 mm to 10 mm, standard size and 

spreading evenly to required camber and gradient with lead upto 100 m from 

stacks. 

12.1 General : The item covers to provide the labour for conveying the metal of 

standard size from the roadside stacks and spreading it for the road sectioning. 

12.2 Spreading Metal : The metal shall be screened if it contains grass, rubbish dust 

or other deleterious foreign material. ‘V’ groove is excavated on either edges of 

metal width to avoid sliding away spread metal during rolling. The groove will 

ensure clean straight/curve edge of road. The metal shall be spread evenly over the 

rolled rubble soling surface or WBM surface or as directed by giving a twisting 

motion to the basket at the time of spreading. In order to ensure the correct 

thickness, the road area shall be suitably marked so as to receive the contents of one 

stack for the specified thickness in the area marked. The unevenness and 

undulations after the spreading shall be rectified either by thinning the metal or 

adding it as required. The metal so spread shall be checked by camber boards and 

line for the camber and grade at intervals of every 10 meters or so. The edge line 

stakes shall be ranged for a sufficiently long length to obtain straight lengths and 

uniform curves. The sides of the metal shall be held by bunds of murum to prevent 

metal from spreading if side widths are not provided at the time. These bunds shall 

be of such depth as to support the metal. The junction of the existing road and the 

new construction shall be diagonal in plan. Between the straight lengths and curves 

and at the meeting points of convex and concave portions of reverse curves the 

change in the camber shall made very gradually as directed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge. 

12.3 Item to Include : The item includes providing all labour, tools, and equipment 

for conveying the metal from the roadside stacks and spreading even to the required 

depth, width and section. The item includes all leads & lifts as directed by Engineerin-Charge. 



523 

12.4 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The quantity of spreading of metal of the 

specified size shall be arrived at by deducting the quantity in balance in stacks from 

the total collection existing on the roadside before spreading is started. The quantity 

on site shall be checked before spreading is started and after completion of 

spreading. The contract rate shall be for spreading one cubic meter of metal as per 

direction of Engineer-in-Charge. 


Rolling with 8/10 tonne roller over 40 to 25 mm standard size metal to finish the 

surface to required camber and gradient until proper interlocking. 

a) 8-10T power roller 

13.1 General : After spreading 40 to 25 mm standard size metal laid to the required 

thickness, grade and camber the same shall be uniformly compacted to the full 

width with 8 to 10 tonne roller. In portions having unidirectional cross fall/super 

elevation, rolling shall commence from the lower edge and progress gradually 

towards the upper edge. The roller should progress parallel to the centerline of the 

road, from edges uniformly overlapping each preceding track by at least one third 

width until the entire surface has been rolled. Alternate strips of the roller shall be 

terminated in stops at lead 1mt away from any preceding stop. The rolling shall be 

continued till no impression of rear wheels appear. 

Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of the roller or 

from any other cause shall be corrected at once as specified and/or removed and 

made good. Required quantity of water shall be sprinkled over the aggregate to 

remove dust etc. if required. All loose, segregated uneven or otherwise defective 

areas should be made good to the full thickness of the layer and re-compacted. The 

item shall be executed as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

13.2 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be in per sq. mtr 

of the compacted layer of the finished metal surface. 

Item No. 14 : 

Supplying and stacking at works site as directed 30/40, 60/70 and 80/100 

penetration grade asphalt in bulk conforming to IS: 73-1992. (Rate is taken at 

Refinery, in Mumbai). 

b) 60/ 70 

14.1 General : The item provides supplying and stacking at works site of specified 

penetration grade asphalt in bulk 



524 

14.2 Material : Asphalt or bitumen shall be straight run conforming to IS: 73 or 

industrial bitumen as per IS: 702 of suitable consistency satisfying the requirement of 

physical properties as give in table below 

Table 

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN 

Sr. 

No. 

Characteristics Requirements Method of 

Test 

1 Penetration at 250 C in 1/10 20 to 40 IS: 1203 

mm 

2 Softening point (R&B) 50 to 90 IS: 1205 

3 Ductility at 270 C (Min. is 3 IS: 1208 

cms) 

4 Loss on heating percent 1 IS: 1212 

(Maximum) 

5 Solubility in CS2 percent 

(Minimum) 

99 IS: 1216 

14.3 Conveyance and Stacking : The asphalt is to be carried from the refineries in the 

bulk containers approved by the RTO and other authorities. The transportation is 

entire responsibility of the contractor. MIDC is not responsible for any loss or 

damage to asphalt or the vehicle or to any accident, claims etc. The item shall be 

treated as complete only after the asphalt is received at the work site. For stacking 

the asphalt the contractor shall provide the necessary containers of the required 

capacities. 

14.4 Item to Include : Item includes loading of asphalt in bulk container at the 

Mumbai Refinery, unloading in the bulk containers provided at the work site, etc. 

complete, including all the labour, container vehicle its all costs such as fuel, 

insurance, paying of all taxes, claims, damages, depreciation, labour etc., complete. 

The rate is excluding the transportation, which shall be paid at the appropriate rate 

as per Item No.15, for the specified distance from the Mumbai Refinery. The 

contractor shall have to furnish original challan of the refinery alongwith weighment 

slips in original before use and after use of asphalt. 

14.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The quantity of the asphalt/ bitumen, of 

specified penetration grade supplied and stacked at the work site shall be measured 

in Metric tonne. The payments for the quantity stacked shall be at the contract rate 

per MT. The transportation charges shall be paid as per the item No. 15. 



525 

Item No - 15 

Add extra over item no.14 above for transporting asphalt from refinery to site of 

work. 

a) Lead upto 200 km. 

15.1 General : The transportation charges of asphalt, specified as per item No.14 

above, from the Mumbai Refinery to the work site is covered in this item. 

15.2 Conveyance and Stacking : The asphalt in drums/ barrels is to be carried from 

the refineries in the trucks approved by the RTO and other authorities. The 

transportation is the entire responsibility of the contractor. MIDC is not responsible 

for any loss or damage to asphalt or the vehicle or to any accident, claims etc. The 

item shall be treated as complete only after the asphalt is received at the work site. 

15.3 Item to Include : Item includes loading of asphalt in barrels, drums at the 

Mumbai Refinery, unloading drums/ barrels at the work site, etc.complete, 

including all the labour, container vehicle its all costs such as fuel, insurance, paying 

of all taxes, duties, claims, damages, 

depreciation etc. complete. 

15.4 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement of transporting the 

asphalt from Mumbai Refinery to the work site shall be taken as the quantity of 

asphalt transported and stacked at work site in metric tonne and the distance 

traveled by the shortest route in kms. The contract rate shall be for the asphalt 

transported per metric tone per km. The rate shall depend upon the ranges of leads 

as specified. 


Heating asphalt to its boiling point and evenly spreading it over road surface for 

grout treatment/ tack coats/ seal coats. 

A) Penetration grade bitumen conforming to IS:73-1992 

a) Bulk Asphalt. 

16.1 General : The item provides the heating of asphalt supplied at the work site 

under item no. 14 to its boiling point and spreading the same over road surface for 

grout treatment / tack coats/ seal coats. 

16.2 Preparation of Surface : Preparation of road surface shall be carried out under 

appropriate separate item. Prior to the application of the binder, all dust, dirt, caked 

murum, animal dung, loose and foreign material etc. shall be removed 30 cm on 



526 

either side, beyond the full width to be treated, by means of mechanical sweepers 

and blowers, if available or otherwise with wire 

brushes, small picks, brooms etc. The material so removed shall be disposed off as 

directed by the Engineer-in-charge. For WBM surface, the interstices between the 

road metal shall be exposed upto a depth of about 10 mm by means of wire brushes 

picks. The surface shall then be brushed with soft brooms to remove all loose 

aggregates. Finally the traces of fine dust, which gets accumulated while brushing, 

shall be thoroughly removed from the surface by blowing with gunny bags. The 

prepared surface shall be closed to traffic and maintained fully clean till the binder 

bitumen/asphalt is applied. 

16.3 Heating and Applying Asphalt/Binder (Hot Bitumen) : The asphalt/ bitumen 

shall be heated in a boiler to a temperature for 30/40 grade & 60/70 grade up to 1770 

C to 1910 C (3500 F to 3750 F) and for 80/100 grade up to 1630 C to 1770 C (3250 F to 

3500 F) and the temperature shall be maintained at the time of actual application. 

The use of a thermometer being essential. The binder shall be applied evenly to the 

clean dry surface by means of a pressure sprayer at the rate specified. The binder 

shall be applied longitudinally along the length of the road and never across it. The 

edges of the binder surface shall be defined by wire or a rope stretched in position. 

Heating in cut out drums and pouring from perforated tins, cans and such other 

methods shall not be permitted. Except in the case of petty works and repairs with 

the specific approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Excessive deposits of binder caused 

by stopping of the sprayer or through leakage or any other reason shall be suitably 

corrected before the stone chipping are sprayed. 

16.4 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The quantity of asphalt heated and 

applied shall be measured in Metric tonne and also the source of asphalt shall be 

recorded whether from bulk supply or from drum supply. In respect of bulk 

asphalt/bitumen carriers the same shall be weighed before application of 

asphalt/bitumen and also after the application of the asphalt/bitumen. The 

difference in these to weights and/or the quantity worked out with reference to the 

rate of application of the asphalt/bitumen and the area of actual application, 

whichever is lower shall be payable. The weightment slips in original for the 

weighment of asphalt at the approved weigh bridge before use and after use of 

asphalt shall be submitted by the contractor. The item rate shall be per Metric tonne 

of asphalt heated and applied. 


Rolling with 8/10 tonne vibratory roller after grouting the surface and spreading 

the standard size metal 20 mm to 10 mm size. 

17.1 General : The item provides rolling after grouting the surface. 



527 

17.2 Spreading and Rolling : After spreading the 10 mm metal aggregate over the 

grouted surface, in specified quantities. The rolling shall be done over the grouted 

surface uniformly compacted to full width with 8 to 10 tonne vibratory roller. In 

portions having unidirectional cross fall/super elevation, rolling shall commence 

from the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge. The roller 

should progress parallel to the centerline of the road, from edges uniformly 

overlapping each preceding track by at least one third width until the entire surface 

has been rolled. Alternate strips of the roller shall be terminated in stops at lead 1mt 

away from any preceding stop. The rolling shall be continued till no impression of 

rear wheels 

appear. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of the 

roller or from any other cause shall be corrected at once as specified and/or removed 

and made good. Required quantity of water shall be sprinkled over the aggregate to 

remove dust etc. if required. All loose, segregated uneven or otherwise defective 

areas should be made good to the full thickness of the layer and re-compacted. The 

item shall be executed as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

17.3 Item to Include : All the labour, machinery, tools and plants required for rolling 

are included in this item. The supply and spreading the metal over the grouted 

surface shall be paid under relevant item. 

17.4 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate shall be for compacting 

one sqm area of the road of the full width after spreading 12 to 10 mm metal as 

shown in the section including increased widths on curves, road crossings etc. The 

area of the road compacted shall be measured and paid in sqm. 

Item No - 18 

Providing and laying premixed bituminous macadam using 60/70 grade asphalt 

including all materials, heating bitumen, premixing it with stone metal, in a hot 

mix, plant, transporting, laying the mix with sensor paver and compacting with 

vibratory roller, including initial cleaning of surface, tack coat using 80/100 grade 

asphalt etc. complete (Lead up to 100 km from Refineries for bulk asphalt & 

nearest rail head for asphalt in drums). (Asphalt to be used at 4.35% by weight of 

total mix). 

A) By using penetration grade bitumen conforming to IS 73-1992 for tack coat 

a) 50 mm compacted thickness with heating aggregate. 

18.1 General : The work shall consists of construction, in a single course, of 

compacted crushed aggregates premixed bituminous macadam, to serve as base / 

binder course, laid immediately after mixing, on a base prepared previously in 

accordance with the requirement of these specifications and in conformity with the 

line, grades and cross sections shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineerin- 

Charge. 



528 


18.2.1 Bitumen : The Bitumen shall be paving bitumen of suitable penetration grade 

30/40 or 60/70 as per Indian Standard Specification for “Paving Bitumen” IS: 73- 

1961. 

18.2.2 Aggregates : The aggregate shall consists of crushed stone, crushed gravel, 

shingle or other strong, durable fairly cubical shape and free form disintegrated 

pieces organic or other deleterious matters and adherent coating. The aggregate for 

bitumen macadam shall conform to the grading given in Table below : 

Table 

AGGREGATE GRADING OF BITUMINOUS MACADAM 

Sieve Designation 

% Passing the sieve by weigh 

26.50 mm 100 

19.00 mm 90-100 

13.20 mm 56-88 

4.75 mm 16-36 

2.36 mm 4-19 

0.30 mm 2-10 

0.075 micron 0-8 

Bitumen Content 4.35% 

18.2.3 Proportioning of Material : The bitumen content for premixing shall be 4.35% 

by weight of the total mix except when otherwise directed by Engineer-in-Charge. 

The quantities of the aggregates to be used shall be sufficient to yield the specified 

thickness after compaction. 

18.2.4 Variation in Proportion of Material : The contractor shall have the 

responsibility for ensuring proper proportioning of materials and producing a 

uniform mix. A variation in binder content ± 0.3% by weight of total mix shall 

however, be permissible for individual. 

18.3 Construction Operations : 



529 

18.3.1 General : The work of laying shall not be taken up during rainy or foggy 

weather or when the base course is damp or wet, or during dust storm or when the 

atmospheric temperature in 

shade is 150 or less. 

18.3.2 Preparation of the Base : The base on which bituminous macadam is to be laid 

shall be prepared shaped and conditioned to the specified lines, grades and cross 

sections and a priming 

coat shall be applied. 

18.3.3 Tack Coat : A tack coat of asphalt of 80/100 grade shall be applied over the 

base @ 0.50 kg/m2 or as specified or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

18.3.4 Preparation and Transport of Mix : Bituminous macadam mix shall be 

prepared in hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable to yield a mix of proper 

and uniform quality with thoroughly coated aggregate. The plant shall have coordinated 

set of essential units capable of producing uniform mix within the job mix 

formula. 

Bitumen 

Peutratia 

MANUFACTURING AND ROLLING TEMPERATURES 

Bitumen Aggregate Mixed Rolling Laying 

Mixing Mixing (°C) Material (°C) (°C) 

(°C) 

(°C) 

35 160-170 160-175 170 Max 100 Min 130 Min 

65 150-165 150-170 165 Max 90 Min 125 Min 

90 140-160 140-165 155 Max 80 Min 115 Min 

The mix shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in suitable 

tipper vehicles. The vehicles employed for transport shall be clean and be covered 

over in transit if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

18.3.5 Spreading : The mix transferred from the tipper at site to the paver shall be 

spread immediately by means of self propelled mechanical paver with suitable 

screeds capable of spreading, tamping, and finishing the mix true to the specified 

lines, grades and cross sections. The paver finisher shall have the following 

essentials feature : 

a) Loading hoppers and suitable distributing mechanism. 

b) All drives having hydrostatic drive/control. 



530 

c) The machine shall have a hydraulically extendable screed for appropriate width 

requirement. 

d) The screed shall have tamping vibrating arrangement for initial compaction to the 

layers as it is spread without rutting or otherwise marring the surface. It shall have 

adjustable amplitude and infinitely variable frequency. 

e) The paver shall be equipped with necessary control mechanism so as to ensure 

that the finished surface is free surface blemishes. 

f) The paver shall be fitted with an electronic sensing device for automatic leveling 

and profile control within the specified tolerances. 

g) The screed shall have the internal heating arrangement. 

h) The paver shall be capable of either 2.5 to 4.0 m width to 4.0 to 7.0 m width, as 

stipulated in the contract. 

i) The paver shall be so designed as to eliminate skidding/ slippage of the tyres 

during operation. However, in restricted locations and in narrow widths where the 

available plant cannot be operated in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, he may 

permit manual laying of the mix. The temperature of the mix at the time of laying 

shall be in the range of 1200 C to 1350 C. In multi layer construction the longitudinal 

joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer below by about 150 mm. However, the 

joint in the top most layer shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Longitudinal 

joint and edges shall be constructed true to the delineating line parallel to the central 

line of the road. All joints shall be cut vertical to the full thickness of the previously 

laid mix and the surface painted with hot bitumen before placing fresh material. 

18.3.6 Rolling : After the spreading of mix, rolling shall be done by vibratory roller 

or other approved equipment. Rolling should start as soon as possible after the 

material has been spread. Rolling shall be done with care to keep from unduly 

roughening the pavement surface. Rolling of the longitudinal joints shall be done 

immediately behind the paving operation. After this the rolling shall commence at 

the edges and progress towards the center longitudinally except that on super 

elevated portions it shall progress from the lower to the upper edge parallel to the 

central 



531 

line of the pavement. The initial or break down rolling and final rolling shall be 

done, with 8 to 10 tonnes static weight smooth (3wheel steel roller or tandem) as 

soon as it is possible to role the mix without cracking the roll surface or having the 

mix pick up on the roller wheels. The second or intermediate rolling shall follow the 

breakdown rolling with vibratory roller of 8-10 tonne static weight as closely as 

possible to the paver and be done while the paving mix is still at a temperature that 

will result in maximum density. The final rolling shall be done while material is still 

workable enough for removal of roller marks with 8 to 10 tonnes static weight. 

During the initial or break down rolling and final rolling, vibratory system shall be 

switched off. The joints and edges shall be rolled with 8 to 10 tonne static roller. 

When the roller has passed over the whole area once, any high spots or depressions, 

which become apparent shall be corrected by removing or adding mix material. The 

rolling shall then be continued till the entire surface has been rolled to 98% of the 

average laboratory density compaction, there is no crushing of aggregates and all 

roller marks have been eliminated. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap 

not less than one-third of the track made in the preceding pass. The roller wheel 

shall be kept damp if necessary to avoid bituminous material from sticking to the 

wheels and being picked up. In no case shall fuel-lubricating oil be used for this 

purpose, nor excessive water poured on the wheels. Rolling operations shall be 

completed in every respect before the temperature of the mix falls below 1000 C. 

Roller(s) shall not stand on newly laid material while there is risk that it will be 

deformed thereby. The edges along and transverse of the lean bituminous macadam 

laid and compacted earlier shall cut to their full depth so as to expose fresh surface 

which shall be painted with a thin coat of appropriate binder before the new mix is 

placed against it. 

18.4 Item to Include : The item includes providing all material, all labour, plant for 

heating asphalt, mixing plant, trolley/truck/dumper, vibratory roller, paver 

finisher, tools and equipment required to carry out the work as per specifications. 

18.5 Mode of Measurements and Payment : The bituminous macadam of specified 

thickness shall be measured as finished work in Square Meters. The contract rate 



532 

shall be per Sq. Mtr. and shall be paid after satisfactory completion of work as per 

the specifications. 

Item No.19 : 

Providing and laying hot mix, hot laid premixed bituminous concrete using 60 / 70 

grade asphalt/ CRMB/PMB including all materials, heating aggregate, asphalt etc. 

and mixing in hot mix plant, transporting laying with hydrostatic paver, finished 

with sensor control compacting and rolling with smooth wheeled 

tandem 

vibratory roller. Asphalt to be used at 6.25% by weight of total mix (machine laid 

only)(Inclusive of tack coat) 

A) Using 60/70 grade Asphalt 

b) 25 mm thk (for wearing course) 

19.1 General : This work shall consists of constructing a single layer of specified 

thickness of bituminous concrete (Asphalt concrete) on previously prepared 

bituminous base to the requirements of these specifications to serve as a wearing 

course. 


19.2.1 Bitumen : The bitumen shall be paving bitumen of suitable penetration grade 

30/40 or 60/70 as per Indian Standard Specifications for “Paving Bitumen” IS: 73- 

1961. 

19.2.2 Coarse Aggregates : 

The aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel/shingles or other 

stones. They shall be clean, strong, durable and fairly cubical in shape and free from 

disintegrated pieces, organic or other deleterious matter and adherent coating. The 

aggregate shall satisfy the physical requirement as per Table below : 

Table 

PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE AGGREGATE FOR 

BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT LAYERS 

Property Test Specification 

Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis1 Max 5% passing 

0.075mm sieve 

Particle shape 

Flakiness and Elongation 

Index 

Max 30% 

(Combined)2 



533 

Strength* Los Angeles Abrasion 

Value3 

Aggregate Impact Value4 

Max 30% 

Max 24% 

Polishing Polished Stone Value5 Min 55 

Durability 

Soundness6 

Sodium Sulphate 

Magnesium Sulphate 

Max 12% 

Max 18% 

Water Absorption Water absorption7 Max 2% 

Stripping 

Coating and Stripping of Minimum retained 

Bitumen Aggregate coating 95% 

Mixtures9 

Water Sensitivity** Retained Tensile Strength8 Min 80% 

Notes : 1. IS: 2386 Part I 6. IS: 2386 Part 5 

2. IS: 2386 Part II 7. IS: 2386 Part 3 

(the elongation test to be done only on non-flaky aggregates in the sample) 

3. IS: 2386 Part 4* 8. AASHTO T283** 

4. IS: 2386 Part 4* 9. IS: 6241 

5. BS: 812 Part 114 

* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of the tests. 

** Elongation index is wt. of Elongated particles divided by non flaky particles. The 

value of Flakiness index and Elongation index so found are added for total Flakiness 

and Elongation indexes. If crushed gravel/shingle is used, all of the gravel/shingle 

pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The plasticity 

index of the fraction passing the 425-micron sieve shall not exceed 4.0%. 

19.2.3 Fine Aggregates : 

Fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.36 mm sieve and retained on 75 

micron sieve, consisting of crusher run screenings, natural sand or a mixture of both. 

These shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free from any injurious, soft 

pieces and organic or other deleterious substances. 

19.2.4 Filler : 

Filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust, hydrated lime 

or cement as approved by the Engineer-incharge. The filler shall be graded within 

the following limits as per 

Table below : 

The filler shall be free from organic impurities and have a plasticity index not greater 

than 4. The plasticity index requirement shall not apply if filler is cement or lime. 

19.2.5 Aggregate Gradation : 



534 

The material aggregates, including mineral filler shall be so blended or combined as 

to confirm to the grading set forth in 

Table below. The grading shall be decided by the Engineer-in- Charge during 

execution of work at site. 

Table 

COMPOSITION OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE 

PAVEMENT LAYERS 

Grading 1 

Nominal aggregate size 

13 mm 

Layer Thickness 

30-45 mm 

IS Sieve1 (mm) 

45 

37.5 

26.5 

19 100 

13.2 79-100 

9.5 70-88 

4.75 53-71 

2.36 42-58 

1.18 34-48 

0.6 26-38 

0.3 18-28 

0.15 12-20 

0.075 4-10 

19.3 Mix Design : 

19.3.1 Requirement of Mix : 

Apart from conformity with the grading and quality requirements of individual 

ingredients, the mix shall meet the requirements set forth in Table below: 

Table 

Sr. 

No. 

REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE 

Description 

Requirements 

1 Marshall stability (ASTM 

Designation D 

1559) determine in Marshall 

specimens 

compacted by 75 compaction blows 

on each 


820kg mini 


535 

face. 

2 Minimum flow (mm) 2 

3 Marshall flow (mm) 2-4 

4 Maximum flow 4 

5 Percent Air voids in mix 3-5 

6 Minimum percent voids in mineral 10-12 

aggregates 

7 Binder content percent by weight of 

total mix 

6.25% mini 

8 Percent Voids in mineral aggregate 

filled by 

bitumen 

65-75 

9 Minimum Stability (KN at 60° C) 9-0 

19.3.2 Binder Content : 

The binder bitumen content shall be so decided as to achieve the design 

requirements of the mix set forth in Table. The Marshall method for arriving at the 

binder content shall be 

adopted. 

19.3.3 Job Mix Formula : 

The contractor shall intimate to the Engineer-in-Charge in writing, at least 20 days 

before the start of the work, the job mix formula proposed to be used for the work 

and shall give 

the following details : 

a. Source and location of all materials. 

b. Proportions of all materials expressed as follows where each is applicable 

Binder bitumen 6.25% - as percentage by weight of total mix. 

Coarse aggregate - as percentage by weight of total aggregate 

Fine aggregate - including mineral filler 

c. A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mixed aggregate. 

d. The results of test enumerated in Table as obtained by the Contractor 

e. Test results of physical characteristics of aggregates to be used 

f. Mixing and compacting temperature 



536 

While working out the job mix formula, the Contractor shall ensure that it is based 

on a correct and truly representative sample of the materials that will be used 

actually in the work and that the mix and its ingredients satisfy the physical and 

strength requirements of these specifications. Approval of the job mix formula shall 

be based on independent testing by the Engineer-in-Charge for which samples of all 

ingredients of the mix shall be furnished by the Contractor as 

required. 

The approved job mix formula shall remain effective unless and until modified by 

the Engineer-in-Charge. Should a change in the source of materials be proposed, a 

new job mix formula shall be established and got approved from the Engineer-in- 

Charge before actually using the mix and materials. 

19.3.4 Permissible Variations from the Job Mix Formula 

The Contractor shall have the responsibility of ensuring proper proportioning of 

materials in accordance with the approved job mix formula and producing a 

uniform mix. The permissible variations of the individual percentages of the various 

ingredients in the actual mix from the job mix formula may be within the limits as 

specified in Table below. These variations are intended to apply to individual 

specimens taken for quality control tests. 

Table 

PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM THE JOB MIX FORMULA 

Sr. 

No. 

Description Permissible Variations 

Base/binder 

Course 

Wearing 

Course 

1 Aggregate passing 

19 mm sieve or 

larger 


13.2 mm, 9.5 mm 


4.75 mm 


2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, 

0.6 

+ 8% + 7% 

+ 7% + 6% 

+ 6% + 5% 

+ 5% + 4% 



537 

mm 

5 Aggregate passing + 4% + 3% 

0.3 mm, 0.15 mm 

6 Aggregate passing + 2% + 1.5% 

0.075 mm 

7 Binder content + 0.3% + 0.3% 

8 Mixing 

temperature 

+ 10° C + 10° C 

19.4 Construction Operations : 

19.4.1 Weather and Seasonal Limitations : The work of laying shall not be taken up 

during rainy or foggy weather, when the base course is damp or wet, or during dust 

storm or when the atmospheric temperature in shade is 100C or less. 

19.4.2 Preparation of Base : The base on which bituminous concrete is to be laid shall 

be prepared, shaped and conditioned to the specified levels, grade and cross fall 

(camber) in accordance with specifications or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

The surface shall be thoroughly swept clean free from dust and foreign matter using 

mechanical broom and dust removed by mechanical means or blown off by 

compressed air. In portions where mechanical means cannot reach, other approved 

method shall be used as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

19.4.3 Tack Coat : The tack coat @ 0.50Kg./Sqm. shall be applied over the base 

prepared for laying of A.C. The payment of tack coat provided shall be made under 

the relevant item. 

19.4.4 Preparation of Mix : Hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable of 

producing a proper and uniform quality mix shall be used for preparing the mix. 

The plant may be either a batch type or continuous or drum mix type. The Plant 

shall have the following essential features : 

A. General : 

a. The Plant shall have co-ordinated set of essential units capable of producing 

uniform mix as per the job mix formula. 

b. Cold aggregate feed system with minimum 3 bins having belt conveyor 

arrangement for initial proportioning of aggregate from each bin in the required 

quantities. 



538 

c. Dryer unit with burner capable of heating the aggregate to the required 

temperature without any visible unburnt fuel or carbon residue on the aggregate 

and to reduce the moisture content of the aggregate to the specified minimum. 

d. The plant shall be fitted with suitable type of thermometer at appropriate 

locations so as to indicate or record/register the temperature of heated aggregate, 

bitumen and mix. 

e. Bitumen storage unit capable of heating, measuring/metering and spraying of 

bitumen at 

specified temperature with automatic synchronization of bitumen and aggregate 

feed in the required proportion. 

f. A filler system suitable to receive bagged or bulk supply of filler material and its 

incorporation to the mix in the correct quantity/percentage. 

g. A suitable built-in dust control system for the dryer to contain/recycle permissible 

quantity of fines into the mix. It should be capable of preventing the exhaust of fine 

dust into atmosphere for environmental control. 

h. The plant should have centralized control panel/cabin capable of presenting, 

controlling/synchronizing all operations starting from feeding of cold aggregates to 

the discharge of the hot mix to ensure proper quality of mix. It should have 

indicators for any malfunctioning in the operation. 

B. For Batch Type Plant : 

a. Gradation control unit having vibratory screens for accurate sizing of hot 

aggregate and storing them in separate bins. 

b. Proper arrangement for accurate weighing of each size of hot aggregate from the 

control panel before mixing. 

C. For Continuous Type Plant : 

a. Gradation control unit having vibratory screens for accurate sizing of hot 

aggregate and storing them in separate bins. 

b. There should be appropriate arrangement for regulating and volumetric control of 

the flow of hot aggregate from each bin to achieve the required proportioning. 



539 

D. For Drum Mix Plant : 

a. It is prerequisite that only properly screened graded materials are fed to the bins. 

If required a vibratory screening unit should be installed at the plant site to ensure 

the same. 

b. Belt conveyors below each bin and main gathering conveyor should have variable 

speed drive motors. There should be electronic load sensors on the main conveyor 

for measuring the flow of aggregates. The temperature of binder bitumen at the time 

of mixing shall be in the range of 150° C - 165° C and that of aggregate in the range 

of 155°C - 170°C provided also that at no time shall the difference in temperature 

between the aggregate and binder exceeds 14° Centigrade. The temperature of both 

the aggregates and the bitumen at the time of mixing shall be in accordance with the 

job mix formula and strictly controlled. All overheated and carbonized mixtures, 

which form or show indication of excess moisture, will be rejected. Any truck/tipper 

causing excessive segregation of material by its spring suspension or other 

contributing factor or that show undue delays shall be removed from the work until 

such conditions are corrected. 

19.4.5 Spreading : The mix transported from the hot mix plant to the site shall be 

spread by means of self propelled mechanical paver with suitable screeds capable of 

spreading, tamping and finishing the mix to specified grade, lines and cross section. 

The paver finisher shall have the following essential features: 

a) Loading hoppers and suitable distributing mechanism. 

b) All drive having hydrostatic drive/control. 

c) The machine shall have a hydraulically extendible screed for appropriate width 

requirement. 

d) The screed shall have tamping and vibrating arrangement for initial compaction 

to the layer as it is spread without rutting or otherwise marring the surface. 

It shall have adjustable amplitude and frequency. 

e) The paver shall be equipped with necessary control mechanism so as to ensure 

that the finished surface is free from surface blemishes. 

f) The paver shall be fitted with electronic sensing device for automatic thickness 

leveling and profile control within the specified tolerances. 



540 

g) The screed shall have the internal heating arrangement. 

h) The paver shall be capable of laying either 2.5 to 4.0 m width or 4.0 to 7.0 m width 

as stipulated in the contract. 

However, in restricted locations and in narrow width where the available equipment 

cannot be operated the Engineer-in-Charge may permit manual laying of the mix. 

The temperature of mix at the time of laying shall be in the range of 120° C - 130° C. 

Mixes with a temperature of less that 120° C shall not be loaded into paver finisher. 

Longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed true to the delineating lines 

parallel to the centerline of the road. Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be 

offset by at least 250 mm from those in the lower courses and the joint on the top 

most layer shall be allowed to fall within the wheel path. All transverse joints shall 

be cut vertically to the full thickness of the previously laid mix with pneumatic 

cutter and the surface painted with hot bitumen before placing fresh material. 

Longitudinal joints shall be preferably hot joints. Cold longitudinal joints shall be 

properly heated with joint heater to attain a suitable temperature of about 80° C 

before laying of any material. An overlapping of 150 mm may be allowed for making 

the joint. 

19.4.6 Rolling : After spreading the mix by paver, it shall be thoroughly compacted 

by rolling with a set of rollers moving at speed not more than 5 km/hr, immediately 

following close to the paver. Generally the initial or breakdown rolling shall be done 

with 8-10 tonne static weight smooth wheeled roller. The intermediate rolling shall 

be done with 8 to 10 tonne static weight vibratory roller or with a smooth wheeled 

pneumatic tyre roller of 15 to 30 tonne weight having a tyre pressure of 7 kg/cm2. 

The finish rolling shall be done with 8 to 10 tonne weight tandem roller. The exact 

pattern of rolling shall be established after trial compaction as approved by the 

Engineerin- Charge. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the 

direction of a roller or from any other cause shall be corrected at once as specified 

and/or removed and made good. The rollers shall not be permitted to stand on 

pavement which has not been fully compacted and where temperature is still more 

than 70°C. Necessary precaution shall be taken to prevent dropping of oil, grease, 

petrol or other foreign matter on the pavement either when the rollers are operating 



541 

or standing. The roller wheels shall be kept moist to prevent the mix from adhering 

to wheels. But in no case shall fuel/lubricating oil be used for this purpose nor 

excessive water poured on the wheels. Rolling shall commence longitudinally from 

edge and proceed towards the center, except that on portions having unidirectional 

cross fall/super elevation, it shall progress from the lower to upper edge parallel to 

the center line of the pavement. The roller shall proceed on the fresh material with 

rear or fixed wheel loading so as to minimize the pushing of the mix and each pass 

of the roller shall overlap the preceding one by half the width of the rear wheel. 

Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98% of that of 

laboratory Marshall Specimen compacted as defined in Table under 20.3.1 and all 

roller marks are eliminated. Patching of an area that has been rolled will not be 

permitted. Rolling operations shall be completed in all respects before the 

temperature of the mix falls 

below 100° C. 

19.4.7 Opening to Traffic : Traffic may be allowed after completion of the final 

rolling when the mix has cooled down to the surrounding temperature. 

19.5 Surface Finish & Quality Control : 

19.5.1 General : All works performed shall conform to the lines, grades, cross 

sections and dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in- 

Charge, subject to the permitted tolerances described herein after. 

19.5.2 Surface Level : The surface level tolerances shall be as per Table below. 

Provided however, that the negative tolerance for wearing course shall not be 

permitted in conjunction with the positive tolerance for base course, if the thickness 

of the former is thereby reduced by more than 6 mm for flexible pavement and 5 mm 

for concrete pavements. For checking compliance with the below requirement for 

base course measurement of surface level shall be taken on a grid of point place at 

6.25m longitudinally and 3.5m transversely. For any 10 consecutive measurements 

longitudinally or transversely, not more than one measurement shall be permitted to 

exceed the tolerance as above, this one measurement being not in excess of 5 mm 

above the permitted tolerance. For checking the compliance with the above 

requirement for bituminous wearing courses and concrete pavements, 



542 

measurements of the surface levels shall be taken on a grid of points spaced at 6.25m 

along the length and 0.5m from the edges and at the center of the pavement. In any 

length of pavement, compliance shall be deemed to be met for the final road surface, 

only if the tolerance is satisfied for any point on the surface. 

Table 

1 Base course for flexible 

pavement 

a) Bituminous course +/- 6 mm 

b) Other than bituminous 

i) Machine laid +/- 10 mm 

ii) Manual laid 

+/- 15 mm 

2 Wearing course for flexible 

pavement 

a) Machine laid +/- 6 mm 

b) Manual laid +/- 10 mm 

3 Cement concrete pavement + 5 mm 

- 6 mm 

18.5.3 Surface Regularity of Pavement Course : The longitudinal profile shall be 

checked with a 3-meter long straight edge/moving straight-edge as directed by 

Engineer-in-Charge at the middle of each traffic lane along a line parallel to the 

center line of the road. The maximum permitted number of surface irregularities 

shall be as per Table below : 

Table 

Surfaces of Carriageways & 

Paved Shoulders 

Surfaces of Lay-bys, 

service areas and all 

bituminous base courses 

Irregularity 4 mm 7 mm 4 mm 7 mm 

Length (m) 300 75 300 75 300 75 300 75 

National 

20 9 2 1 40 18 4 2 

Highways/Expressways 

Roads of Lower 40 1 4 2 60 27 6 3 

Category* 



543 

* Category of each section of road as described in Contract. 

The maximum allowable difference between the road surface and underside of 3m 

straight-edge when placed parallel with, or at right angles to the center line of the 

road at points decided by 

the Engineer-in-Charge shall be: 

For pavement surface 

3 mm 

(bituminous and cement concrete) 

For bituminous base course 

6 mm 

For granular sub base/ Base course 

8 mm 

19.5.4 Rectification : 

Where the surface regularity of various pavement courses fall outside the specified 

the Contractor shall be liable to rectify these in the manner described below and to 

the satisfaction of 

the Engineer-in-Charge. 

a) Water Bound Macadam/ Wet Mix Macadam (Sub Base/ Base) : Where the surface is 

high or low, the top 75 mm shall be scarified, reshaped with added material as 

necessary and re-compacted. 

b) Bituminous Constructions : For bituminous constructions other than wearing 

course, where the surface is low, the deficiency shall be corrected by adding fresh 

material overall suitable tack coat if needed and recompacting to specifications 

Where the surface is high, the full depth of the layers shall be removed and replaced 

with fresh material and compacted to specifications. 

For wearing course where the surface is high or low, the full depth of the layer shall 

be removed and replaced with fresh material and compacted to specifications. In all 

cases where the removal and replacement of the bituminous layer is involved, the 

area treated shall not be less than 5m in length and not less than 3.5m in width. 

19.6 Quality Control Tests During Construction : The material supplied and the 

works carried out by the Contractor shall conform to the specifications prescribed in 

the preceding Clauses. For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the 

materials and works shall be subjected to quality control tests, as described 



544 

hereinafter. The testing frequencies set forth are the desirable minimum and the 

Engineer-in-Charge shall have the full authority to carry out additional tests as 

frequently as he may deem necessary, to satisfy himself that the materials and works 

comply with the appropriate specifications. However, the number of tests 

recommended in Tables may be reduced at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge 

if it is felt that consistency in the quality of materials can still be maintained with the 

reduced number of tests. Acceptance Criteria for the tests on density and Marshall 

stability shall be subject to the condition that the mean value is not less than 

specified values plus : [ 1.65–{1.65/(No. of Samples)0.5} ] times the standard 

deviation. 

Sr. 

No 

Table 

Minimum Tests Frequency for Bituminous Works 

Type of 

Tests 

Frequency 

Construction 

1 Primer Coat/ 

Tack Coat 

2 Seal Coat/ 

Surface 

Dressing 

Quality of binder 

Binder temperature for 

application 

Rate of spread of Binder 

Quality of Binder 

Aggregate Impact Value 

Two samples per 

lot to be 

subjected to all or 

some tests 

as directed by the 

Engineer-in- 

Charge. 

At regular close 

intervals 

Two tests per day 


lot Dressing 

to be subjected to 

all or some 

tests as directed by 

the 

Engineer-in- 

Charge. 

One tests per 50 m 

3 

representative 



545 

specimens for 

each source of 

supply. 

Subsequently when 

warranted 

by changes in the 

quality of 

aggregates 

3 Open graded 

pre-mix 

carpet/Mix Seal 

surfacing 

Flakiness Index & 

Elongation Index 

Stripping value of the 

aggregate 

Water absorption of 

aggregates 

Grading of aggregates 

Stone polishing value 

Temperature of binder at 

application 

Rate of spread of 

materials 



-- do-- 

Initially one set of 3 


specimens for 


supply. 


warranted 


quality of 

aggregates 

-- do -- 

One test per 25 m3 

aggregate 

As required 

As regular close 

intervals 

One test per 500m2 

of work 


lot to be 


some tests 

as directed by 

Engineer-in- 

Charge. 




546 

3 of 

aggregates 

4 Bituminous 

Macadam 




aggregate 


aggregates 


Stone polishing value 


application 


materials 



-- do-- 



specimens for 


supply. 


warranted 


quality of 

aggregates 

-- do -- 


aggregate 

As required 


intervals 

Regular control 

through checks 

on materials and 

layers 

thickness. 


lot to be 


some tests 


Engineer-in- 

Charge. 


3 of 

aggregates 



547 




aggregate 


aggregates 

Binder content 

Control of temperature of 

binder and aggregate for 

mixing and of the mix at 

the time of laying rolling 

Lab density 


materials 

Density of compacted 

layer 

-- do-- 



specimens for 


supply. 


warranted 


quality of 

aggregates 

-- do -- 

Periodic, subject to 

minimum 

of two test per day 

per plant 


intervals 

For each 400 tonne 

of mix 

produced, a set of 3 

Marshall 

specimens ( 

compacted with 

75 blows each side) 

and tested 

for lab density 

Regular control 

through checks 

on materials and 

layers 

thickness. 


area 



548 

5 Bituminous 

penetration 

Macadam/ Built 

up spray grout 



lot to be 


some tests 


Engineer-in- 

Charge. 

Aggregate Impact Value One tests per 200 

m3 of 

aggregates 

Dense 

Bituminous 

Macadam/ Semi 

dense 

bituminous 

concrete/ 

Bituminous 

concrete 




aggregate 


aggregates 



application 


materials 


-- do-- 



specimens for 


supply. 


warranted 


quality of 

aggregates 

-- do -- 


aggregate 


intervals 


of area. 


lot to be 


some tests 

as directed 

Engineer. 



549 





aggregate 


aggregates 

One tests per 50 m3 

of 

aggregates 

-- do-- 



specimens for 


supply. 


warranted 


quality of 

aggregates 

-- do -- 

Stone polishing value As required for 

semi dense 

bituminous 

concrete/ 

Bituminous 

concrete 

Mix grading 

Stability of Mix 

One set of test on 

individual 

constituents and 

mixed 

aggregate from the 

dryer for 

each 400 tonnes of 

mix subject 

to a minimum of 

two tests per 

plant per day 

For each 400 tonnes 

of mix 

produced, a set of 3 

Marshall 

specimens 



550 

(compacted 75 

blows each side) to 

be 

prepared and 

tested for 

stability, flow 

value, density 

and void content 

subject to a 

minimum of two 

sets being 

tested per plant per 

day. 

Water sensitivity of mix 

(Retention of Marshall 

Stability) 

As required for 

Bituminous 

concrete 

Swell test on the mix -- do -- 

Control of temperature of 

binder in boiler, 

aggregate in the dryer 

and mix at the time of 

laying and rolling 

Control of binder content 

and gradation in the mix 

Rate of spread of mixed 

material 

Density of compacted 

layer 


intervals 

One test for each 

400 tonnes of 

mix subject to a 

minimum of 

two tests per day 

per plant 

Regular control and 

through 

checks on the 

weight of mixed 

material and layer 

thickness. 


area 

Note : Acceptance criteria as specified or directed by Engineer-in-Charge. 



551 

19.7 Item to Include: Item includes all material, machinery, plant, tools and 

equipment for providing and laying hot mixed hot laid premixed bituminous 

concrete, of specified thickness. 

19.8 Mode of Measurement and Payment : Bituminous Concrete shall be measured 

as finished work as square metres of premixed bituminous concrete laid and 

compacted of specified thickness. The contract rate shall be per sqm of the work 

done as per above specifications. 

Item No.20:- 



cum size, including removing the excavated material up to a distance of 50 m 

beyond the edge of excavation, including the all lift, stacking or spreading as 

directed, bailing of sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation etc., and 

backfilling the excavated pit or trench using the excavated material in layers 

including watering and ramming as required or as directed by Engineer-in-charge, 

including all labour and materials complete. 

20.1 General: The item refers to the excavation, in earth, soils of all types, gravel, 

sand, soft and hard murum and boulders up to 0.03 cum size. The excavation 

shall be for trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations, column footings, walls etc. 

and may be in wet or dry, in earth, and similar other soft or loose material. 


construction, as per the drawings, is to be started shall be first cleaned and 

cleared of all obstructions. The loose stones, bushes, rubbish, brushwood, trees 

along with roots, etc. shall be removed. The material shall be stacked or 

disposed off as directed. All the material shall be the property of MIDC. After 

clearing the site, the alignment or center lines or points shall be given by the 

Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall establish the reference marks, 

benchmark pillars in masonry with M.S. Plate top of which shall be bench mark 

connected to GTS. The B.M. Pillars shall be maintained undisturbed by the 

contractor etc. and the widths for excavations shall be clearly marked by the 

contractor as directed, true to line, curve, level and slope. The contractor shall 

provide all labour and marking material such as wooden/steel pegs, white lime 



552 

powder, oil paint, or any other suitable marking material at his own cost and he 

shall be fully responsible for the correctness of the line, curve and levels and 

slopes. 


Engineer-in-charge for taking the necessary measurements of cross sectional 

levels along the alignment for measurement purposes. The levels recorded in 

the field book shall be signed by the Engineer-in-charge and authorised 

representative of the contractor in token of acceptance. The contractor shall 


tools and equipments most suitable for excavation of soft material as 

enumerated in the item in wet or dry conditions. The excavation shall be true to 

line, curve, shape, level grade as per the drawings or as directed. The widths of 

excavations shall be as minimum to the widths required at the bottom and the 

vertical faces shall be as far as possible in plumb. Unless provided in the 

contract, no extra payment shall be made for the excavation on side slopes for 

stability of slopes. Contractor shall be fully responsible for the correctness of the 

excavation. Whenever the strata of different grade of soil not covered in this 

item is met, the excavation shall be stopped and the Engineer-in-charge shall be 

notified to take the cross-sectional levels for taking the measurements and the 

same shall be recorded and practise as mentioned above shall be adhered to. 

The extra excavation in depth or on sides shall not be paid and the contractor 

will have to fill the extra excavated depths in layers to bring the correct level by 

watering and ramming at his own cost. 


components such as wall shall not be provided on soft strata covered under this 

item of excavation. The foundations for rafts, embedment of pipelines for water 

supply or drainage or gas may be laid on the foundation prepared on soft 

strata. The foundation level even if is confined within the soft layer, the final 

layer of excavation watered and brought to the required level and slope by 

ramming. The contractor shall not excavate below the line shown in the 




553 

Engineerin- charge approves the strata on which foundations are to be laid and 

passes the depth of excavation to lay foundation and record the dimensions and 

elevations and types soils of the foundation pit, trench excavated, and shall be 

recorded in the field book adopting system already explained above. 




Charge. 



20.6 Disposal of Excavated Material : All the material obtained from clearing the 

site or from excavation shall be the absolute property of MIDC. All materials 



the Engineer in Charge. Materials suitable for back-filling or other use shall be 



outer top edge of excavation to avoid the falling of the stuff in the pit or trench. 

Surplus materials shall be used for levelling the ground around as directed 

within a lead of 50 meters. If the surplus materials are required to be conveyed 

and used or stacked beyond 50 meters contractor shall be paid for extra lead or 

the extra conveyance as per the terms of contract. 






provide byepass arrangements to avoid entering of water in the excavation at 

his own cost. The drained water shall be properly disposed off, so as not to 

cause any damages to the excavated area nor to the surrounding structures. The 



554 






Engineer in-charge and the foundation raft masonry above is constructed or the 

pipeline is laid, all the shoring shall have to be removed. The backfilling of the 

pit or trench to the original level or as shown in the drawing or as directed shall 

be made from the selected excavated material stacked separately for that 












20.11 Item to Include : The rate for this item, as per the agreement includes all 

labour and tools for clearing the site, marking out the excavation line outs, 

shoring and strutting, excavation of pits or trenches, bailing or pumping out 

water if not provided separately, removal of excavated material and disposal of 

material as directed, refilling of pits or trenches, adequate protective measures 

etc. Contractor shall also make the necessary arrangements for taking 

measurements. The rate also includes the cost of repairs due to excess 

excavations or slips. The item also includes payment of the damages if any, by 

the contractor. 



555 




less or more as directed by the Engineerin- charge or shall be measured as per 



and paid at the rate as per the contract agreement. 

Item No – 21 : 

Conveying material obtained from road cutting, including all lifts, and beyond 

initial lead laying in layers of 20 to 30 cm, breaking clods, dressing to the required 

lines, curves, grades and sections for formation of roads, including leveling, 

disposing off surplus material in desired manner as directed by the Engineer-incharge 

etc. complete, including taxes, royalty, if any beyond 100 m. initial lead. 

b) Lead beyond 5 kms. 

21.1 General : The work provides conveying the material obtained from road 

cutting, and laying the selected material for formation of the road, laying them 

in 20 to 30 cm layers, breaking clods dressing to the required lines, curves, 

grades, cross section etc. (disposing the surplus material as directed by the 

Engineer-in-Charge). The obtained excavated material shall have the CBR value 

more than 8 if it is used for embankment and the max. dry density shall not be 

less than 1.75 

gm/cc. 

21.2 Setting Out : For laying the material, the profile shall be set up with poles to 

mark the center and edges of the formation, top levels. 

21.3 Conveying : All lifts and leads in conveying the material to site shall be 

included in the rate as specified. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the 

vehicles used for transporting the material do not drop any of the contents on 

the road and thus cause nuisance to traffic. The contractor shall be responsible 

for any damage or accident arising out of any such material. The contractor 

shall remove such material at his expenses. The vehicle conveying the material 



556 

shall not obstruct the traffic. The contractor may use manpower scrapers, 

dozers, graders, shovels, dumpers, trucks, trollies, etc. for conveying the 

material. The maintenance of all above equipments, any taxes, insurance, 

depreciation etc. shall be deemed to be included in the item rate. No separate 

claim shall be entertained. If the useful material available from the road cutting 

is not used and materials obtained from other sources are used, by the 

contractor for his own convenience, such materials shall be deemed to have 

been obtained from the road cutting to the extent to which useful materials 

were available for the banking and shall be paid for under this item. 

21.4 Laying the Material : Conveyed material shall be placed in 20 cm to 30 cm thick 

layers, consolidated by 8 to 10 tonne road roller. The conveyed material shall be 

placed in layers 40 cm to 50 cm thick layers if compaction with vibratory 

compactor. The conveyed material shall be spread for full width of 

embankment and compacted full section specified. The extra loose stuff at the 

edges shall be trimmed later without extra cost, leaving the correct section fully 

compacted. The watering every layer to O.M.C. and compaction of the same 

shall be paid of separately under relevant item incorporated in the tender. The 

camber shall be provided while carrying out embankment work and shall not 

be adjusted in metalling (compaction shall be paid under relevant item 

separately). 

21.5 Disposal : The surplus material shall be conveyed and laid at the location as 

directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The cost of the disposing the surplus 

material at a given location as directed is included in the rate. 

21.6 Item to Include : Item includes, conveying the material from road cutting and 

laying the same in layers or (disposing the material as directed), including lead 

as specified the transporting, machinery, labour for loading and unloading, all 

tools and equipment etc. 

complete. 

21.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The contract rate is per cum of the 

excavated material conveyed and laid in layers. The quantity shall be worked 

out by cross sectional measurements using leveling instruments. The 



557 

measurements of the sections shall be limited to the dimensions shown on the 

drawings or those ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The 

dimensions shall be recorded correct up to cm. The sectional areas shall be 

worked out correct upto two places of decimals. 

Item No.22 : 

Supplying and stacking at work site 225 mm size trap stone rubble for soling all 

lead, including all taxes and royalty. 

a) Quarry Rubble 

22.1 General : The item provides the supply of stone rubble of 225 mm size and 

stacking at the road side including obtaining the rubble from approved sources, 

conveying to the site of work including all the lifts and all leads. 

22.2 Material : Rubble shall be obtained from the approved quarries as specified 

below: 

22.2.1 Quarries : The contractor may obtain the rubble of the approved quality to the 

extent required for the work from approved and authorised quarries. He shall, 

however, obtain the necessary permissions from the competent authorities, pay 

royalties and be liable to pay compensation for any damage caused to the 

quarries or the land or property either deliberately or through negligence or 

otherwise, or from waste of materials in obtaining the requisite quantity of 

rubble. Blasting, if required, shall be done with utmost care according to 

specification by obtaining necessary permission for blasting operation from the 

competent authorities and the contractor shall be fully responsible for all 

accidents and compensations resulting there for. 

The contractor shall make his own arrangement for to supply rubble of 

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall be fully responsible 

for any and all compensations to be paid as royalty, rents, octroi & duties or 

damages to properties and injuries to persons etc., caused in obtaining the 

rubble. No claim on account of any obstruction caused in collection of materials 

or difficulties or action arising out of quarrying in private land shall be 



558 

entertained and MIDC will remain indemnified with regard to such action and 

payment. Quarrying shall be done only from sound portions of approved 

quarries, the disintegrated and weathered portions of rock being rejected. No 

rubble shall be obtained from within the road land unless so permitted in 

writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

22.2.2 Rubble : 

Quality : The rubble of the trap stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, 

dense, clean, of close texture and free from unsound material, cracks, decay and 

weathering. The water absorption shall be as low as possible but not more than 

2 per cent. They shall generally be broken rubble. 

Size : The shape of the stones shall be as regular as can be obtained by 

quarrying without attempt at shaping or dressing. They shall be sufficiently flat 

bedded. The stone shall be broken with the smallest dimensions equal to the 

225 mm thickness of soiling. The length and breadth should not 

generally exceed twice its thickness. Before starting collection, the contractor 

shall get a sample conforming to the required quality shape and size approved 

from the Engineer-in-Charge who will preserve it in his site office for reference. 



transporting materials do not drop any of the contents on the road and thus 

cause nuisance to traffic. The contractor shall also be responsible for any 

damage or accident arising out of any such material falling on the road or 

elsewhere and shall attend to all complaints in this regard. The Engineer-in- 

Charge may order the removal of such materials at the expenses of the 

contractor in case of negligence. Vehicles conveying or delivering materials 

shall not obstruct traffic. All lifts and all leads is included in the rate for the 

item. Once the material is brought to site of work, the contractor shall be 

responsible for safety of the material. In case of theft and damages to the 

material is noticed, equal quantity shall be replaced as per the specifications 

without any extra claims and costs. 



559 

22.4 Stacking : The rubble shall be stacked uniformly along the roadside or as 

directed in regular stacks of 6m X 3m X 1 m unless other sizes are ordered by 

the Engineer-in-Charge. The stacking shall be done only after the quality, shape 

and size of the rubble are approved. The stacks shall be made without 

appreciable hollows without making special efforts to hand-pack the material. 

The stacks shall be free of earth, rubbish, vegetation and shall conform size 

specified. One stack in each unit section may be of different length, if necessary, 

to make up the total quantity in that particular section. Low and wide stacks 

with outer retaining walls and the center filled in loosely shall not be permitted. 

The material shall be stacked entirely clear of the carriage way and as far a 

possible beyond the side widths and the side drains, on even ground or in the 

absence of such even ground the platforms prepared in advance for the 

purpose by the contractor at his cost. If no such land is available, the width of 

the stack may be reduced and the stacks may be laid on the side widths with 

the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such stacks shall be protected from 

being disturbed. Necessary precautions to provide barricading, signs and 

signals shall invariably be taken, the contractor being responsible for any 

accident, injury and compensation due to his negligence in this respect. On hill 

roads material shall be stacked only at places on the side of the road as directed, 

without interfering drainage flow and traffic. The Engineer-in-Charge may, if 

required, get the stacks coming in the way of or obstructing the traffic, removed 

at the cost of the contractor and the contractor shall not be entitled to claim any 

loss or damage to the materials on that account. The stacking operations shall 

be started at the point farthest from the quarry and carried towards the nearest 

point. The stacks shall not be laid at such places where they are likely to be 

damaged on account of the traffic, washing out by rains or floods or drainage, 

slides of the banks or the slopes of cutting. The contractor without extra claims 

shall make any loss on account of these or such other reasons good. As far as 

possible the rubble shall be stacked evenly on one side of the road only and in 

such quantities per unit length as will be required for that particular length or 

as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. 



560 


owners of quarries and lands, payment of royalties, fees, rents, taxes, octroi & 

duties etc. compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in 

any way connected with the execution of this item and for loss of materials due 

to improper stacking etc. And shall make good the losses without extra claims. 

The contractor shall also responsible for the blasting operations required for 

obtaining the rubble. 


(1) Obtaining rubble of approved quality, shape and size by blasting if required 

and payment of royalties, fees, rents, octroi, duties etc. where necessary. 

(2) Conveying to roadside including all leads and lifts specified in the item. 

(3) Stacking. 

(4) All sorts of compensations involved in the execution of the item. 

(5) Opening up of new quarries or reopening old ones including removal of 

overburden. 


meter of rubble supplied at site in stacks of approved size. When the rubble 

stacking in instructed in to be of uniform size, smallest stack may be chosen in 

the particular km or unit section and measured for its length, breadth and 

depth. The cubic contents of this stack shall be multiplied by the number of 

such stack in the km or unit section to arrive at the quantity in the particular km 

or unit section. The Engineer may measure any other heaps also for verification. 

When the sizes of stacks are not uniform, each stack shall be measured 

individually. The dimensions shall be measured correct to two places of 

decimal of a meter and quantity worked out correct to two places of decimals of 

a cubic meter. If there is reason to believe that the stacks are very loose and are 

having unduly large hollows and or materials not satisfying the specifications, 

the stacks may be got opened and restacked properly after removing the 

inferior material by the Engineer-in-Charge at the cost of the contractor. The 

measurements of such a stack shall then be taken and if they are less than those 



561 

of a normal heap, the quantity of the restacked stack shall be multiplied by the 

no. of stacks to arrive at the quantity in the particular unit or length. No 

deduction shall be made for voids. Rubble shall not be used until the full 

quantity is collected in km and measured. All stacks measured shall be marked 

with lime wash bands to distinguish them to avoid double measurement. If the 

material is found to be of inferior quality or of size not satisfying the 

requirements, the same may be rejected summarily. All labour, materials etc. 

required for measuring, restacking, checking, lime washing, etc., shall be at the 

cost of contractor. 

Item No – 23 : 

Laying in compact layer rubble duly hand packed for soling in 225 mm layer to 

required camber and gradient including filling in the interstices with stone chips, 

spalls and oversize metal (quantity excluding oversize metal). 

23.1 General : The item provides the labour work for laying rubble soling of 225 mm 

thickness of stones over the subgrade to proper section and hand packing the 

rubble chips to the required line, curve, grade and section. 

23.2 Material : The rubble to be used for soling work, shall be freshly quarried and 

supplied by the contractor or obtained from cutting. The spalls and chips as obtained 

while breaking the rubble shall be used of breaking oversize/size metal. 

23.3 Soling work : 

23.3.1 Laying Soling : Before commencement of soling work it should be ensured 

that sub grade, finished embankment/cutting is with specified camber and 

gradients. The rubble shall be laid with the largest face downwards and interlocked 

with each other. The stones shall break joint. The full layer of the soling shall 

generally be made with one stone only. The junction of the old and the new road 

shall be diagonal in plan and the soling shall be in level with the corresponding 

course of the old road. The width of the soling shall be about 30 cm more than that of 

the road width as specified in the plans or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The 



562 

thickness of soling shall be uniform camber should not be adjusted providing rubble 

of differential depths. 

23.3.2 Hand Packing : The soling shall be hand-packed by wedging and packing 

with oversize metal, chips, spalls in the joints of the soling and driving them by 

hammers in place to fill the voids. The soling shall be laid and hand packed true to 

camber grade and sections and these shall be often checked by boning rods, template 

boards and finish line etc. the grades, sections etc., of the soling shall correspond to 

those of surfacing coming on it. The soling shall be finished by knocking out 

projecting stones and filing depressions by chips to come up to the grade and 

camber. 

23.4 Item to Include : All labour, tools and equipment for conveying the rubble 

from stacks on the roadside and laying the soling to the required line, curve grade 

and section including clearing, sectioning, dressing grades and section and hand 

packing with oversize metal. 


meter of soling laid hand packed and finished of specified thickness. No deduction 

shall be made for voids. 

Item No.24:- 

Providing and laying in position plain cement concrete using granite or black 

trap graded metal including mixing in a mechanically operated mixer, dewatering, 

compacting, curing as required complete for all lifts up to a + 5 M. above or below 

the ground level where concrete is proposed, including shuttering using ordinary 

Portland cement. 

b) In 1:3:6 proportion. 

The Specifications for this item is same as per Item No. 5 of Subestimate No. 1 



563 

Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurements of the concrete laid shall 

be taken on volumetric basis in cum. The openings shall be deducted. The unit rate 

of concrete per cum of specified proportion. 

Item N0.25:- 

Providing Laterite Stone masonry for below plints & above plinth including 

bailing out water striking out joints on exposed faces, curing, scaffolding etc. 

complete (not less than 18% of mortar to be used) 

b) 1:6 Cement Mortar. 


Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement of stone masonry will be 

on volumetric basis in cubic metre (cum). Deductions for rectangular or circular 

openings, shall be as per IS : 1200. 

Item No.26:- 

Providing coping of 1:3:6 concrete over parapet walls, boundary walls, compound 

walls etc. for the thickness of 10 to 15 cm as specified or as per drawings including 

shuttering as may be required and embedding glass pieces at close intervals of not 

more than 3 cm both face with sharp edge pointing upwards after finishing the 

concrete surface with 1:3 cement mortar. All labour and materials complete. 

26.1 General : The item pertains to providing coping in 1:3:6 concrete over parapets, 

boundary and compound walls. 

26.2 Material : Concrete 1:3:6, shall be as per IS:456 of 2000. 

Glass Pieces : The glass pieces shall be obtained by breaking the glass bottles on site 

or shall be directly from the vendor if available. The pieces shall be of 3 to 7.5 cm size 

in breadth and length respectively. The glass pieces shall be sufficiently thick so that 

they can not be easily broken by hand. 

26.3 Construction : The shuttering above parapets, boundary and compound walls 

shall be provided for the required thickness, size and shape as specified in the item 

or drawing or as directed. The concrete 1:3:6 shall be poured in the shuttering for 

coping and the concrete shall be compacted by roding or by using vibrator and then 

the desired shape and finishing shall be given on top by using trowels and wooden 



564 

planks. The shuttering shall be removed immediately after the initial setting of 

concrete and the same shuttering taken to provide coping in the further length of 

wall. The green concrete surface of the coping shall be immediately finished with 

cement mortar 1:3. 

26.4 Fixing of Glass Pieces : The broken glass pieces shall be fixed in the finishing 

mortar and concrete, on both the sides of coping, atleast for the depth of 3 to 4 cm. 

The sharp edges of the glass pieces shall be protruding out. 

26.5 Item to Include : The item includes all material, labour, shuttering, tools and 

equipment etc. for providing coping of specified thickness and fixing of the glass 

pieces etc. 

26.6 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The quantity of concrete placed for 

coping as per the size and shape shall be measured in cum correct upto 2 decimals. 

The finishing of concrete by mortar and fixing of glass pieces are included in the unit 

rate of the item which is per cum of concrete provided for coping. 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

Item No.27:- 

Providing plaster in cement mortar in 1:3 without neeru finishing to concrete or 

masonry surface in all position including scaffolding and curing complete. 



10.12 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The plaster area shall be measured in 

sqm as detailed below and shall be paid at the contract rate per sqm. 

Measurements : 

1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be 

calculated in m2 correct to two places of decimal. 

2. Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. 

grooves, or open joints in brickwork. 

3. The measurement of wall plaster shall be taken between the walls or 

partitions (the dimensions before the plaster shall be taken) for the length and from 

the top of the floor of skirting to the ceiling for the height. Depth of covers or 

cornices if any shall be deducted. 



565 

4. The following shall be measured separately from wall plaster. 

• Plaster bands 30 cm wide and under 

• Cornice beading and architrave’s or architrave’s moulded wholly in 

plaster. 

• Circular work not exceeding 6 m in radius 

5. Plaster over masonry pilasters will be measured and paid for as plaster only. 

6. A coefficient of 1.63 shall be adopted for the measurement of one side 

plastering on honeycomb work having 6 x 10cm opening. 

7. Moulded cornices and coves 

• Length shall be measured at the centre of the girth. 

• Moulded cornices and curves shall be paid in m2 the area being arrived 

at by multiplying length by the girth. 

• Flat or weathered top to cornices when exceeding 15 cm in width shall not 

be included in the girth but measured with the general plaster work. 

• Cornices, which are curved in their length, shall be measured separately. 

8. Exterior plastering at a height greater than 10 m from average ground level 

shall be measured separately in each story height. Patch plastering (in repairs) shall 

be measured as plastering new work, where the patch exceed 2.5 m2 extra payment 

being made for preparing old wall, such as dismantling old plaster, raking out the 

joints and cleaning the surface. Where the patch does not exceed 2.5 m2 in area it 

shall be measured under the appropriate item under sub head ‘Repairs to Building’ 

9. Deductions in measurements for opening, etc. will be regulated as follows. 

No deduction will be made for openings or ends of joints, beams, posts, girders, 

steps etc. up to 2.0 m2 in area and no additions shall be made either for the jambs, 

soffits and sills of such openings. When plastered an one face when plaster is 

provided on both faces the area of opening shall be deducted from one side. In 

respect of large openings with area more than 2.0 Sqm. The deduction for 

opening shall be made and jambs will be paid. The above procedure will apply to 



566 

both faces of wall. 

Item No. 28:- 

Providing & fixing in position Paver Tile Flooring set to pattern as per drawing in 

floor including average30mm thick cement mortar 1:4 bedding floated with neat 

cement slurry, filling the joints with matching color pigment mixed with cement 

laid to perfect line & level & pattern. No extra payment will be made towards 

wastage due to material pattern & design. payment shall be made on finished 

floor area only. Rate shall be applicable to all levels & heights. No extra payment 

shall be paid towards additional thickness of bedding to match adjoining floors. 

28.1 General: The item pertains to providing & laying paver tiles of standard make 

28.2 Material: Paver tiles shall be of approved make & quality & shall conform to 

relevant IS in all respect. Samples of tiles shall be got approved by the 

Engineer-in-Charge, who shall keep them in his office for verification & 




record. 

28.3 Mortar Bedding: The mortar shall be of 1:4 proportion & shall be about 30 mm 

thick average, laid on prepared subbase of appropriate level & grade. The 

amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be the minimum 




base shall be cleaned of all dirt, scum or laitance & loose materials & then well 

wetted without forming any pools by the use of screed battens to proper level 

of slope. The thickness of the bedding shall not be less than 20 mm any one 

place. The tiles shall be laid on the bedding mortar when it is still plastic but 

has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm cushion for the tiles. 

28.4 Fixing Tiles: The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours. 

Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall be so arranged that the 



567 

surface of the round edge tiles shall correspond to the skirting or dado. Neat 

cement grout of honey like consistency shall be spread over the bedding mortar 

just to cover so much area as can be tiled within half an hour. The edges of the 

tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry or coloured cement slurry 

matching colour of the tiles & fixed in this grout one after the other, each tile 

being well pressed & gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly 

bedded & in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows in bed or 

joints. The joints shall be kept as close as possible & in straight lines. The joints 

between the tiles shall not exceed 1.5 mm wide. The joints shall be grouted with 

slurry of white cement. Where ceramic tiles are specified joint shall be grouted 

with a slurry of white cement mixed with appropriate colour. 

28.5 Curing: After fixing the tiles finally in an even plane, the flooring shall be 

covered with wet saw dust & allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days. 

28.6 Cleaning: After the tiles have been laid at the day's fixing work is completed, 

the surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be cleaned 

off before it sets. Once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully washed clean 

& dried. 

28.7 Item to Include: The item shall include all labour, materials, CM.1:4 mortar 

bedding tools & equipment required for the operations to carry out the for 

providing & fixing the paver tiles as specified above 

28.8 Mode of Measurement & Payment: The area of the flooring shall be measured 

in SqM correct up to 2 decimals. 

** The contract rate shall be per SqM for the specified quality of paver tiles as 

specified. 

Item No.29:- 

Providing and fixing in line & level paver blocks as specified. The paver blocks 

shall confirm to BS 6717 ASTM C 936 - 96 including providing and preparing sand 

beds as specified, fixing blocks in position at site, filling the joints by jointing 



568 

sand, compacting the blocks by plate vibrator including filling the side joints by 

m-20 grade cement concrete if required etc. complete. 

a) 60 mm thick (strength 35 M pa) on sand bed 30 mm thick 

29.1 General : The item pertains to provide paving using pavement blocks 60 mm 

thick of approved size with necessary sand bedding. 

29.2 Material : The pavement blocks shall be manufactured of M-20 C.C.( 60mm 

thick having strength 35 Mpa) The blocks shall be manufactured of approved 

size and shape. The moulds for blocks shall be prepared as per approved size 

and shape of blocks to be provided of moulds shall be having depth 80 mm. 

The blocks shall be cast in M-20 grade C.C. using plate vibrator so to have 

dense blocks. The lower 45 mm shall be natural normal cement concrete and 

upper 15 mm layer shall be adding approved coloured cement of approved 

shade in concrete mix with white cement. The blocks shall be compressed using 

hydraulic press so that the same shall be dense without any voids. Alternatively 

blocks shall be compressed using vaccume press. The blocks shall be cured 

placing in the water tank totally submerged for 21 days. Alternatively steam 

curing can also be resorted to : For bedding for placing blocks the pavement 30 

mm thick sand bedding shall be provided. For joints in the block C.M. 1:3 

mortar shall be used. 

29.3 Laying : The area to be paved shall be cleaned, cleared of foreign material and 

leveled properly. The top such prepared surface subgrade shall 150 mm tower 

than finished level of blocks as stipulated. The area shall be thoroughly 

watered. 75 mm thick sand shall be spread over prepared subgrade to proper 

line and level. The sand spread shall be watered and rammed thin layer of the 

fine sand shall be spread to fill in undulations to achieve required line and 

level. The precast pavement blocks shall be laid to required line and level duly 

interlocked. The pavement blocks such laid shall be subjected to surface 

vibrator thereby achieving total interlocking and compaction. The gaps at side, 

if any, shall be filled in with cement concrete M-20 grade for a depth of 45 mm 

and upper 15 mm C.C. M-20 grade with white cement adding colour pigment 



569 

to match the colour of pavement blocks and compacted. The pavement such 

laid shall cured for 21 days. 

29.4 Item to Include : All material, C.C. M-20 grade shuttering, labour, sand for 

bedding equipments such as plate vibrator, surface vibrator, moulds, white 

cement, colour pigments etc. 

29.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The area of provided with pavement 

blocks including gaps at sides if any shall be measured in sq.meters and 

quantity worked out to two decimals. 

Item No - 30 

Providing and fixing at site of work Pre – cast curb stone of required size and 

shape having total depth of 15” including 6” : above finish level, including all 

materials and labours etc. complete. 

30.1 General Requirements: 

Precast kerb stones shall be manufactured either at sire or in the yard of the 

supplier. All precast manufacturing facilities shall be subject to the approval of 

Engineer-in-charge. Precasting work shall be taken up only after permission to 

do so is given by Engineer-in-charge. 

In case the supply of precast curb stones are supplied by an outside agency, the 

contractor shall inform the Engineer-in-charge, name and the details of the 

agency and if desired shall arrange for inspection of the facilities and shall 

procure the materials only after the approved of the Engineer-in-charge in 

writing. 

Contractor shall supply two samples of each of the precast curb stones he 

proposes to use. Contractor shall arrange to get the precast curb stones tested 

appropriately at his cost if ordered to do so by the Engineer-in-charge. 

30.2 Items of Precast Curb Stones; 

The following items are covered under these precast curb stones. 

Kerb Stones, Boundary stones, mile stones/km stones and various other marking 

devices as may be required for road works. 



570 

30.3 Material: 

Cement 

Cement used for the manufacture of precast concrete curb stones shall be 43 

grade or 53 grade as directed, Portland cement conforming to IS:269 or 1489 (part 1 

& 3) or IS ; 8041 or IS:8043 or IS : 8112 or IS: 155. 

Aggregates 

The aggregates used shall be clean and free from deleterious matter and shall 

conform to the requirements of IS:383. The aggregates shall be well graded and 

the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 20mm. 

Concrete 

The mix proportions of concrete shall be determined by the manufacturer and 

shall be such as will produce dense concrete without voids, honeycombing, etc. 

The minimum cement content in the concrete shall be 360 kg/m3 with a 

maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Concrete weaker than grade M-20 (design 

mix) shall not be used. Compacting of concrete shall be done by machine 

vibration. 

Reinforcement 

a) The reinforcement steel shall conform to IS:226 or IS:432 (Part – I) or IS: 1566 

or IS:1786 as specified. 

Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mills scale, loose rust, and 

mud, oil, grease or any other coating, which may reduce or destroy the bond 

between the concrete and steel. 

b) Steel fibres: In association with steel bars reinforcement, steel fibres of 

appropriate types and forms may also be used as secondary reinforcement 

(up to 0.5% by volume). 

c) Plastic: Plastic fibre of polyporpylene fabricated film of suitable type and form 

(0.55 by weight) may also be used as reinforcement in lieu of steel 

reinforcement. 

Reinforcement shall be shown in the drawings, if the drawings are supplied 

by Engineer-in-charge. In case ready made precast items are brought out from 



571 

standard designs, reinforcement shall be as per manufacturers design, subject 

to the approval of Engineer-in-charge. 

30.4 Casting and Erection of Pre-cast curb stones: 

These shall be manufactured according to manufactures design. The material, 

formwork, reinforcement, etc. shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-charge. 

The manufacturing of curb stones shall conform to the general requirements 

specified in standard specifications. The compaction shall be by plate vibrator. 

The finishing of the item, where required shall be with 1:3 cement mortar. 

The detailed manufacturing procedure for Manhole covers and frames is given 

below, which is mostly applicable for other curb stones. The loading tests or 

requirements may differ. 

30.5 Item to Include: 

The item includes all material, labour, equipment, vibrating, plate, tools and 

equipment etc. manufacturing process, finishing of the curb stones, curing, 

testing if required, transporting to site, erection of element, making good of any 

damage to element or to any other component, all taxes, royalties etc. complete. 

30.6 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The measurement shall be on per Rmt 

basis. The contract rate shall be per Rmt of kerb stone provided as specified. 


Providing Mexican blue grass including cleaning & excavating the soil upto 1 ft. 

depth & refilling with sweet earth (soil, sand & manure) either undulating or 

plain. 

Lawn: Mexican blue grass. 

Cleaning & excavating the soil upto 1 ft. depth & refilling with sweet earth (soil, 

sand & manure) either undulating or plain & development of lawn and plantations 

of trees necessary cleaning, excavation, bed preparation etc complete. 

Mode of Measurement & Payment: The area of the flooring shall be measured in 

SqM. The contract rate shall be per SqM of Mexican blue grass provided as specified. 



572 


Development of shrubbery bed including preparing bed of 300 mm thick by 

mixing fertile soil & manure in proportion of 70:30 % & planting shrubs 4 Nos per 

sqm of specified variety with required spacing as directed & maintenance of 

shrubs for the period of six months including watering removing weeds etc 

complete. 

The work shall be carried out as per item wording and as per instructions of 

Engineer In Charge. 

Mode of Measurement & Payment: The area of the flooring shall be measured in 

SqM. The contract rate shall be per SqM of shrubbery bed developed as specified. 


Cleaning & excavating 3’ x 3’ x 3’ pits and refilling with sweet earth (soil & 

manure). 

The item includes cleaning & excavating 3’ x 3’ x 3’ pits and refilling with sweet 

earth (soil & manure) for plantation of trees. 


The contract rate shall be per No.of pit excavated as specified. 


Providing and Plantation of PALM TREES with required excavation of pit 

including footing cow dung manure. Mix with red earth and maintenance of 

plant. Etc complete. 




The contract rate shall be per No. PALM tree planted as specified. 



573 

Item No. 35: 

Providing and erecting railing of galvanized iron pipes of 40 mm diameter 

horizontals in 2 rows and 40 mm f G.I. pipes (medium class) (Blue) vertical having 

a height of 1 m at 2 m. intervals, screwed joints and one coat of anti corrosive and 

two coats of decorative multi-colour paint etc. complete. (G.I. pipe - 'B' class) 

vertical members to be welded with 5 mm thick base plate dutly grouted or 

welded to base slab reinforcement. 

35.1 General : The item is for providing and erecting galvanized iron pipes railing, 

wherever required. 


1. Galvanized iron pipes: The galvanized iron pipes 40 mm dia. (inside bore 

diameter) conforming to IS:2065B Class, commonly used for water supply shall be 

used to form the railing. For detailed specifications as mentioned in the wording of 

item. 

2. Screws, nut, bolts etc.: As per IS.1148 

3. Paint : As specified under item confirming to IS 2932/1961 

35.3 Construction : The vertical pipes at bottom to 5 mm thick M.S. base plate of size 

150 mm x 150 mm duly welded to fix to the anchor bolts provided in the concrete of 

deck slab or on kerbs and can be erected by nut & bolt or welding. Alternatively the 

pipe also can be fixed in the concrete pedestal. The clear height of the vertical pipe 

shall be 1.2 m above the floor level. The vertical pipes shall be fixed in the true 

plumb, line and level at 2.0 m c/c. 

Two horizontal pipes shall be fixed between two vertical pipes one at top and one at 

intermediate level. At top, T- joint at intermediate verticals and Elbow at end 

verticals shall be used to fix the horizontal member. For intermediate horizontals, 

Cross-joint at intermediate verticals and T-joints at end verticals shall be used. All 

the joints shall be screwed joints. All horizontals shall be fixed in true line level, 

curves as directed. The joints shall be tight and should not be easily removable. The 

sharp corners, edges shall be filed smooth. 

35.4 Painting : The verticals and the horizontals shall be painted with one coat of 

anti-corrosive paint/ red oxide zinc chrome, and finished with two coats of enamel 

paint of approved quality and sheds as per drawing or as directed by Engineer-in- 



574 

Charge. Enamel painting shall be as per I.S. specifications code of practice of 

stipulated by the manufacturer. 

35.5 Item to Include : The item includes providing all the material, GI pipes, 

accessories, threaded joints, 5 mm thick M.S. base plate, welding, anchor bolts, 

paints, etc., and all labour, tools and equipment for construction, transportation of 

the railing or material fixing and painting etc. complete. The arrangement of welder 

and welding shall be made by the contractor at his risk and cost. 

35.6 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The length of railing of above 

specifications shall be measured in meter. The railing shall be measured from 

outside to outside of the end posts. The length shall be measured upto cm. The 

contract rate shall be for one meter of the railing provided of specified height and 

fixed at location as per satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

Item No. 36: 

Fabrication of M.S. Cantilever Sliding Gate made from 75mm * 50mm * 2.50mm 

M.S. square pipe encased in 75mm * 75mm * 3mm M.S. square pipe frame with 

bottom frame of 300mm * 75mm * 3mm M.S. square pipe, as per the specifications 

and drawing provided by us, with all necessary fixtures and accessories in best 

workmanship with one coat of red oxide primer, including; 

- Galvanised Support roller (2 Nos) 

- Galvanised Guide roller (2 Nos) 

- Galvanised End Stop (2Nos) 

- Galvanised Fixing bolts kit (4 pieces) with Galvanised Fixing plate (2 Nos) - 

Galvanised Track 




The contract rate shall be per No. M.S Gate as specified. 

Item No. 37: 

Supply, Fabrication and erection of structure made from M.S. square pipes as 

required for the main frame members and purling for fixing of Multiwall 

Polycarbonate sheets. The sheets will be fixed using Aluminium sections (50mm 

width Top & Bottom) with EPDM rubber gaskets and silicon sealants as and 



575 

where required. The structure will be painted with primer and enamel paint of the 

desired shade. 




The contract rate shall be per Sqm. M.S Frame as specified. 

Item No.38: 

Supply and erection of Multiwall Polycarbonate Sheet of 6 mm thk of Sabic 

Lexan Make etc complete as per direction of Engineer - in - Charge. 




The contract rate shall be per Sqm. Mutiwall Polycarbonate as specified. 

Item No. 39:- 

Providing and fixing M.S. grill work to windows or openings mades out of 12 mm 

square bars or MS flats of 20 mm x 4 mm welded to rectangular frame made out of 

50 x 6 mm M .S. flats with necessary holdfast one coat of primer and two coats of 

synthetic enamel paint etc complete. 

39.1 General : The item pertains to providing and fixing mild steel grill prepared to 

the designs and sections of MS as specified in the item description or as shown in the 

drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge for fixing to windows, ventilators 

etc. including the specified mild steel sections, fabrication, fixing in the frame, 

fixtures and painting with one coat of red oxide primer and 2 coats of oil paint of 

approved shade. 

39.2 Materials : 

MS Section : Hot rolled steel section for fabrication of steel grill work for windows, 

ventilators opening shall conform to IS: 7452. Shapes weights and designations of 

hot rolled sections shall be as per IS: 7452. Appendix ‘D’ on page 114-117 indicates 

the purpose or the situation where the sections are normally used. Tolerance in 

thickness of the sections shall be ± 0.2mm. 

The sections shall be squares, flats, rounds, etc. of the specified dimensions shown in 

the drawings. 



576 

39.3 Construction : 

1. The steel window grills shall be according to the specified sizes and design. The 

size of doors and windows shall be calculated, so as to allow 1.25cm clearance on all 

the four sides of opening 

to allow for easy fitting of grill into opening. The actual sizes of windows and 

ventilators shall not vary by more that +1.5mm from those given in the drawing. 

2. Frames : Both the fixed and opening frames shall be made of sections, which have 

been cut to length and mitred. The corner of fixed and opening frames shall be 

welded to form a solid fused welded joint conforming to the requirements given 

below. All frames shall be square and flat. The process of welding adopted shall be 

flash butt welding. 

3. Requirements of Welded Joints : 

I) Visual Inspection Test : When two opposite corners of the frame are cut, paint 

removed and inspected, the joint shall conform to the following :- 

a. Welds should have been made all along the place of meeting the members and 

tack welding shall not be permitted. 

b. Welds should have been properly grinded and 

c. Complete cross section of the corner shall be checked and see that the joint is 

completely solid 

and there are no cavities visible. 

II) Micro and Macro Examinations : From the two opposite corners obtained for 

visual test, the flanges of the sections shall be cut with the help of saw. The cut 

surface of the remaining portions shall be polished and etched faces of the weld and 

the base metal shall be free from cracks and reasonably free from under cutting, 

overlaps, gross porosity and entrapped slag. 

III) Fillet Weld Test : Hammering shall fracture the fillet weld in the remaining 

portion of the joint. The fractured surfaces shall be free from slag inclusion porosity, 

crack penetration defects and fusion defects. The grill shall be fabricated to the 

designs and pattern shown in the drawings in this item and the joints shall be 

welded as shown in the plans or directed by the Engineer in Charge. The grill so 

formed shall be fixed into the frames of the windows, ventilators, etc. before they are 



577 

erected in position. The outside strip frame of the frame shall be housed to its full 

thickness into the recess cut into the frame of the window ventilator, etc. The grill 

shall be fixed to the frame with screws at the rate of one screw per 30 cm of the 

length of the outer strip subject to a minimum of 2 nos. in each side of the frame or 

as indicated on the drawings. The screws shall be countersunk and shall be fixed 

with the tops of their heads flush with the face of the frame strip. In case the grill is 

to be fixed to MS windows or ventilators, it shall be properly welded from all the 

four sides. 

The frame shall be painted with one coast of red oxide primer and 2 coats of oil paint 

of approved shade when the entire work is completed. 

39.4 Item to Include : The item includes all labour, tools and equipments, materials 

such as mild steel sections of specified sizes, screws, necessary welding, painting etc. 

including wastage for fabricating and fixing and completing the item satisfactory. 

39.5 Mode of Measurement and Payment : The item of frame provided is measured 

in kg correct upto 10gm. The contract rate is per kg weight of the grill. 

============================================================= 



578 

SUB ESTIMATE NO.7 : SOLAR SYSTEM WORK 

Item No.1: 

Supplying & Installing, Testing & commissioning of Solar water heating system 

without heat exchanger type of 125 LPD capacity as per specification No. ESD- 

SHWS 

Scope: 


(ESD-SHWS) 

Supplying, erecting, testing and commissioning of Solar Water Heating 

System with & without heat exchanger for cold & warm regions respectively 

with Solar flat plate collector conforming to IS: 12933 (part 1) with amdt.no.1 

and IS: 12933 (Part 2)/2003 suitable for inlet water with chlorine and fluorine 

content up to 100 ppm and supply hot water at the outlet. (Refer drawing 

no.ESD-SHWS-1) 

Material: 

1. Solar water heating system: 

Comprising of solar flat plate collector, collectors stand assembly, stainless 

steel insulated hot water storage tank with heat exchanger and various 

other components. Solar flat plate collector component shall have: 

 

 

 

Solar flat plate collector cover plate made of toughened glass 

Sheet for absorber made of copper 

Absorber made of copper sheet and copper tube. 

2. Solar Flat Plate Collector: 

Solar flat plate collector shall conforming to IS: 12933 (Part 1) with 

amdt.no.1 and IS: 12933 (Part 2)/2003 and various components shall be as 

under: 

Cover plate: Cover plate shall be toughened glass and thickness of 4.0 mm 

(min.) conforming to section-1 of IS: 12933(Part-2)/2003. The solar 

transmittance of the cover plate shall be minimum 82 percent at near 

normal incidence. 



579 

Collector Box: Collector box shall be made of Aluminium sections only. 

Type, grade, size, workmanship and finish of the material used shall be as 

per section-2 of IS: 12933 (pt2)/2003. The minimum thickness of 

Aluminium shall be as under: 

a) Channel section for sides 1.6 mm 

b) Sheet for bottom 0.7 mm 

c) Support for glass retaining 1.2 mm 

d) Sheet for entire body 1.0 mm 

3. Absorber: 

Absorber shall consist of riser, header, and sheet for absorber. The 

Diameter of header shall be 25.4 +/-0.5mm and thickness 0.71mm. The 

Diameter of riser shall be 12.7 +/- 0.5mm and thickness 0.56mm and made 

of copper only. The distance between the risers from center to center shall 

be 120mm. Type grade, size, workmanship and finish of the material used 

shall be as per section-3 of IS: 12933 (Part 2)/2003. 

Riser and header assembly designed for working pressure up to 24.5 K Pa 

(2.5 kg/cm 2 )shall be tested for leakage at a minimum hydraulic pressure 

of 490 K Pa (5 kg/cm 2 ). 

Sheet for absorber: 

Sheet for absorber shall be made of copper only. Type, grade, size, 

workmanship and finish of the material used shall be as per sectiob-3 of IS: 

12933 (pt2)/2003. A sample piece of the absorber for having minimum 

area of 400 square cm. shall be heated in an oven at temperature of 175 

degree C for 2 hours. After heating, the sample shall be taken out from the 

oven and cooled at room temperature. The cooled sample shall be 

inspected visually for damages, if any. There shall not be any appearance 

of blistering/ rupture/peeling off of the coated/painted surface and of 

weakening of the bonding between absorber sheet and risers/headers. 

Collector box insulation: 



580 

Insulation shall be provided at back and sides. Thermal Resistance ® of 

insulation material shall be minimum 0.96 m square degree C/W for back 

insulation and minimum 0.48 m square degree C/W for side insulation. 

This shall be derived after determining thermal conductivity (K) value at 

100 degree C mean temperature in accordance with IS:3346.Collector box 

insulation shall conform to sec.4 of IS: 12933(Part-2)/2003 

Gaskets and Grommets: 

Gaskets and Grommets shall conform to sec.5 of IS: 12933 (Part-2)/2003. 

4. Insulated hot water storage tank: 

The thickness of the water storage tank shall be uniform. 

Material: 

Insulated hot water storage tank shall be non-pressure type and made of 

stainless steel grade (X04Cr19Ni9 or X07Cr18Ni9 of IS: 1570(part 5) /1985), 

TIG welded. 

Insulation: 

Solar water heating system (SWHS) up to and including 500 LPD shall be 

insulated with 40mm thermal grade PUF insulation of 32 Kg/ meter cube 

or higher density. PUF insulation could be pre extruded type fitted with 

FRP exterior cladding or alternatively injection moulded in a twin walled 

steel tank and PPE end cap. Other systems shall be insulated with 100 mm 

thick Rock wool of 48Kg/m3 density with Aluminium cladding. Systems 

up to 500 LPD may also alternatively be installed with 100 mm thick Rock 

wool of same specifications with aluminium or GI powder coated 

cladding. 

Tank stand: 

Tank stand assembly shall be made of MS angle of size (min) 38x38x4 mm 

duly pre-treated and stove enamelled with black Colour paint. 

Alternatively tubular structure with Powder coating could also be 

provided. 

5. Heat Exchanger: 



581 

Heat Exchanger shall be cage type and made of copper/stainless steel 

tubes of grade X04Cr19Ni9 or X07Cr18Ni9 of IS: 1570(part 5)/1985 .Heat 

exchangers shall have a minimum of 0.24 sq. meters heat transfer area per 

100 LPD capacities. 

6. System inter connecting piping: 

ISI marked G.I. pipes, medium class of IS: 1239 duly insulated with 50mm 

thick rock wool of 48 Kg/m3 density and Al cladding. EPDM hose pipes 

can also be used for systems up to and including 500LPD. 

7. Collector stand: 

Collector stand assembly shall be made of MS angle of size 38x38x4 mm 

duly pre-treated and stove enamelled with black Colour paint. 

Alternatively tubular structure with Powder coating could also be 

provided. 

8. Make up water tank: 

The capacity of make up tank shall be 5 litres up to 500 LPD and 10 litres 

for 1000 LPD and above. 

9. Electrical heaters: 

Electrical heater shall be ISI marked. Electrical heater backup shall be two 

nos. each of rating 3 KW for 500 LPD, 3 nos. each of rating 3 KW for 1000 

LPD, 4 nos. each of rating 3 KW for 2000 LPD and 2 nos. of 3 KW rating in 

each of the three phase for 3000 LPD. 

10. Temperature Gauge: 

Dial type, duly calibrated and suitable for temperature range from 0 

degree C to 120 degree C and shall be provided for capacity above 500 

LPD. 

11. Valves: 

3 valves, one for inlet, outlet, and make up tank each. 


The entire Solar Hot water system with all accessories shall be installed at 

designated place, with necessary plumbing, wiring and testing. 



582 


Executed quantity will be counted on number basis, (i.e. each) 

SR 

NO 

LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS FOR CIVIL WORKS 

MATERIAL APPROVED MANUFACTURER / 

SUB CONTRACTOR / 

SUPPLIERS 

CIVIL WORK 

1 Cement L& T, Rajashree, Vasavadtta, ACC 

2 White cement Birla, J.K. 

3 Mild and Tor steel TISCO, SAIL, Metro alloy, 

Rashtriya Ispat 

4 Water-proofing compound BAL adhesives, Pidilite, Ciba geigy. 

5 Tile adhesive cement and joint filling 

compound 

Bal Adhesive, Pidilite Industries, 

Aqua Alliance (India) Pvt. Ltd. 

6 Glazed tiles H & R Johnson,, Somany, Sonora 

7 Vitrified tiles Marbonite-from H & R johnson, 

Granito from Bell ceramic 

8 Glass Mosaic tiles Palladio, Italia 

9 Ceramic tiles H & R Johnson, Bell Ceramic, Nitco 

10 Italian marble Heritage, Litolier 

11 Heavy duty serted tiles Bharat tiles, Shreeji. 

12 Paver block Shreeji(new bombay), Conwood 

13 Water proofing agency Lik-proof,M/S. water proofing 

corporation of India, Nina 

14 Ready Mixed Concrete L&T, RMC of India, Godrej & Boyce 

Mfg. Co. Ltd.,ACC. 

In case of non availability of specified make or brand, equivalent brand make will be 

approved by Engineer-in-charge. 

SR 

NO 



SUPPLIERS 

HARD WARE /PAINT/PLYWOOD 

14 Paint-plastic emulsion Asian paint, Berger & ICI. 

15 Fire retardant paint Fire tard, Shalimar, Viper. 

16 Gypsum board Gypsum India 

17 Locks Godrej, Vision, CIEF, 



583 

Natrag,ACME 

18 Laminate Greenlam, Formica, Decolam. 

19 Plywood Anchor, Greenply, Century 

20 Stainless steel handle NEKI, Magnum or approved 

equivalent 

21 Floor spring / Door closer / fittings Haffle, Everite, Neki. 

22 Hand rail system D – Line, Neki or approved 

equivalent. 

23 Main Entrance Door BOON EDAM 

24 Fire Retardant Flush Doors PROMAT/SUKRI/SHAKTI-MET 

25 Antifungal Paint Asian Paint, Berger Paint, ICI 

26 Cement Paint Snowcem 

27 Synthetic Enamel Asian Paint, Jensen and Nicholson, 

Berger. 

28 Anticorrosive Paint Asian Paint, Berger, Jensen and 

Nicholson, Berger. 

LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS FOR FALSE CEILING 

SR 

NO 



SUPPLIERS 

FALSE CEILING 

1 Gypsum board / E- board false ceiling Gypsum India / Eternit India Ltd.. 

2 Calcium Silicate Board false ceiling Hilux, Promat or approved 

equivalent. 

3 Accoustical false ceiling Armstrong / Ecophon 

In case of non availability of specified make or brand, equivalent brand make will be 

approved by Engineer-in-charge. 

LIST OF APPROVED AND NOMINATED MANUFACTURES/SUPPLIERS OF 

MATERIALS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS / INTERIOR WORKS 

NOTE: - 

1. All materials to be used should be as per the list given below. 

2. Use of equivalent make shall be only with prior approval from consultants & 

MIDC in writing. It must be at par with specified list below – in all respect any 

additional expenditure time due to this will be on contractors account & no 

claims shall be entertained. 

3. Client / Consultant reserve the right to select / prefer the material from the 

approved list. 



584 

SR. 

NO. 

MATERIAL APPROVED MAKE / SUB- 

CONTRACTOR / SUPPLIERS 

REMARKS 

WOOD 

A 

1. Old Burma teakwood No specific supplier, contractor to 

obtain approval for samples 

2. BTC No specific supplier, contractor to 


3. CP – Teakwood No specific supplier, contractor to 


4. Hardwood No specific supplier, contractor to 


5. Wood to match the Jalaram, Anchor, Eakbote. 

veneers to be used 

PLYWOOD 

B 

1. Marine ply (IS: 710) Anchor, Greenply, Century. 

2. Soft Board Jolly Board or approved equivalent. 

Open market 

material 

Open market 

material 

Open market 

material 

Open market 

material 

3. Particle board Novapan,Egger, Duratuff 

Archid 

4. MDF Duratuff or approved equivalent (IS 

approved ) 

5. Flush door Anchor, Century, Mayur. Marine grade 

C 

Decorative Veneers / 

Laminates 

1. Veneers Jalaram, Anchor, Greenply, Group match 

and lot to be 

approved 

2. Laminate Decolam,Greenlam, Merino, Formica, 

Greenply, Century 

GLASS 

D 

1. Glass Asahi, Modiguard, Saint Gobian, 

Float Glass India. 

2. Mirror Modiguard, Asahi, Float Glass India, 

Saint Gobian 

3. Tempering or 

toughening of 

glass 

ADHESIVES 


& 

Modiguard, Prakash Mirror, Float 

Glass India. 


585 

SR. 

NO. 



REMARKS 

E. PRESERVATIVES 

1. Adhesive Fevicol, Vamicol, Kitcol, Araldite , 3M 

2. Preservative Termiseal, Bison, Solignum 

PAINTS 

& 

F POLISHES 

1. Interiors paint , ICI Dulux, Nerolac, Asian.Burger, 

Acrylic, Luster, Oikos. 

Enamel, 

2. Fire retardant paint Fire Tard, Shalimar, Viper, Nobel. 

3. Placating MRF, Solvosol, Asian 

4. Melamine MRF, Solvosol, Asian 

G FALSE CEILING 

1. Gypsum Gypsum India or approved 

equivalent 

2. Acoustical 

a) Gypsum 

b) Fibrous 

c) Metal 

Gypsum India or approved 

equivalent, 

AMF,Armstrong or approved 

equivalent 

Hunter Douglous or approved 

equivalent. 

3 Calcium Silicate Hilux, Promat or approved 

Board 

equivalent. 

HARDWARE 

H 

1. Screws G.K.W. Nettlefold & approved 

equivalent. 

2. Locks for cabinets Godrej, Vijayan, Dorset, ACME. 

Also to be 

used for 

partitions 

Entire 

including 

framework, 

supports, 

hanger etc. is 

to be used of 

same make. 

3. Floor Spring – For Dorma or approved equivalent 

Toughened glass 

4. Floor Springs/ door 

closers 

Hyper, Everite, Garnish, Hamco or 

approved equivalent. 

5. Handles Nikki or approved equivalent. 

6. Hinges GRASS, BLUM, Hefele, 

For cabin doors Brass Shalimar, Vision, Natraj, Earl Bihari 

oxidized (Railway or approved equivalent make. 

type).or S.S finish. 

7. Sliding drawer GRASS, BLUM, Mepla, 



586 

SR. 

NO. 



REMARKS 

channels 

8. Metal side drawer Grass / Mepla / Blum, 

channels. 

9. Lock Doorset, Vijayan, ACME, Neki. 

10. Patch fitting Dorma, Haffel make 

11. Aluminium Jindal or approved equivalent 

12. Tower bolt/ Stopper Magnum, Shalimar, Natraj, EBCO. 

13. Mobile Storage Safeguard or approved equivalent 

SOFT FURNISHING 

I 

1. Carpet Transasia, Interface, Miliken, Shaw 

2. Glass film for 3M or equivalent equivalent 

Tint/ safety/ frosting 

etc. 

BLINDS 

J 

1. Venetian, Vertical Mac, Aerolux, Vista, 

Blinds. 

2. False Flooring Kingspan, Tyco, DG False flooring. 

3. Aluminium sections Jindal, Hindalco. 

4. Roller blinds Shringar or approved equivalent. 

I/We hereby declare that I/We have read and understood the above instructions 

which have been issued as conditions of the contract. 

In case any of the makes for any of the item / material is missed out in the above list, 

then the contractor shall inform the Engineer-in-charge about the same and obtain 

the approval. 

Wherever brand names are specified in this contract, they are for making choice 

depending upon the availability of the materials. However, the option of selection of 

brand name will remain with the Engineer-in-charge. 

Samples of all materials shall be got approved in advance before procurement. 

PREFERED MAKES 

PLUMBING WORKS 

Preferred Makes 

Sr. Material 

As specified or approved equivalent 

No. 

1 Sanitary Ware Hindustan, Parryware, Kohlar 



587 

2 C.P. Fittings Jaquar, Ess-Ess, Parryware 

3 Flush Tanks Gebrit, Viega 

4 Water Heater Sphere Hot, Raclod, Venus 

5 S.S. Sink Nirali, Franki, Diamond 

6 G.I. / M.S. Pipes Tata, Zenith, Jindal 

7 G.I. Fittings Zoloto, Unik, ’R’ Brand 

8 PVC Pipes & Fittings Supreme, Finolex ,Prince 

9 Stone ware pipes 

Gorco, Rajura Ceramics, Khanpur 

Ceramics 

10 

C.I. LA class pipes 

Neco, Kesoram, Electro steel 

Fittings 

A. Hussain Esmailji 

11 RCC Hume pipes 

K.K. Industries, Pranali, Indian Hume 

Pipe Company 

12 C.I. Soil Variety Pipes & Fittings 

Neco, Bengal Iron Co., Hindustan Eng. 

Projects 

13 Copper Pipes Maxel Make, Rajco , Champ, IBP Conex 

14 Copper Pipes Fittings 

IBP Conex, Rajco, Sudo Champ, IBP 

Conex 

15 CPVC Pipe & Fittings Astral Make 

16 Sluice Valve Kirloskar, Indian Valve Co., Zoloto 

17 Brass Ball Valve RB Make (Italy), Zoloto, IBP Conex 

18 Gate Valve (All ISI Mark) Zoloto, Leader , RB 

19 Pressure Reducing Tata Honeywell, Zoloto, RB Make (Italy), 

20 Non Pressure Valve Zoloto, Leader, Danfoss 

Sr. 

Preferred Makes 

Material 

No. 

As specified or approved equivalent 

21 Insulation 

Fiber Glass Pilkingston, Twinga, 

Crosslinked (Supreme) 

22 Strainer Kirloskar, Honeywell , Hammer 

23 Butterfly valve Audco India, R & D, Zoloto 

24 Sensor Auto Urinal Flash Geberit, Askon, Jaquar, Robo 

25 Hydro Panels & Equipments Grundfoss, 

26 

Overhead tank feed vertical 

submersible 

Kirloskar, KSB, Beacon 

27 Sewage Handling plate Kirloskar, Modi 

28 

Dewatering Pumps Submer ible 

Type 

KSB , Modi, Grundfos 

29 

Overhead tank feed pumps 

Monoblock type 

Kirloskar, Bharat Bijlee, KSB 

30 Motor Kirloskar, Bharat Bijlee, ABB 

31 Air Blower KAV 

32 Air Compressor Elgi, Ingersol Rand 

33 Dosing Asia LMI, Dosamatic 

34 Pressure sand filter Thermax, Davey, Watco, ION Exchange 

35 Softener Watco, ION Exchange, Thermax 



588 

36 Activated carbon filter Watco, ION Exchange, Thermax, Davey 

37 Flow Switches 

Viking, Gem, MCDONOLDS, Switzer, 

Precision 

38 

Sprinkler, Hydrant, Booster 

Pumps & Jockey 

Mather Platt, HBD, Kirloskar 

39 Hydrant Valves & branch & Fire 

Minimax, Safe Guard, NEWAGE, Shan 

Bhogilal 

40 Rubber lined hose reel Dunlop, New Age, 

41 Canvas Hose Fire Marshel , New Age, 

42 Sprinkler Heads NEWAGE, H.D., Tyco 

43 Installation H.D. Viking 

Note: 

1) Makes specified in the Schedule of quantities supersedes this List. 

2) All makes shall be IS marked wherever applicable. 

3) Contractor to indicate the make considered from the above make before 

finalization. 



589 

List of Approved Makes for Electrificaiton work 

Sr. 

Materials 

Makes 

No. 

1 Switches and accessories Modular Type 

White colour 

MK, Crabtree, Anchor Roma 

Precision 

All switches and accessories shall be of same make. This category includes 

switches, Step type fan regulators, TV and Telephone sockets, plug sockets, pins etc. 

2 Fan hooks Concealed MS Fan hook Box 

3 Wires Finolex, Anchor, Havells, Polycab 

4 PVC Conduit pipes and accessories Percision, Asian 

5 MS Conduit pipe and accessories BI, BEC, Nagarjuna 

6 PVC casing/caping with accessories Precision, Asian 

7 Switch fuse unit with HRC fuses L&T, Siemens, Indo, Asian, Havells 

Crompton, HPL 

8 HRC fuses L&T Siemens, Indo Asian 

9 MCB, RCCB, ELCB MCB DB L&T ,Hagger, Indo-Asian, MDS- 

Legrand, Siemens, HPL, Havells 

10 MCCB L&T, EE, Crompton, MDS-Legrand, 

HPL, Havells, Indo Asion 

11 Metal clab socket 3/5 pin L&T, MDS-Legrand, Indo Asian, 

Crompton, HPL, Havells 

12 Air Circuit breaker L&T, Siemens, GEC, Croption, ABB 

13 LT Arm, Cables Asian, NICCO, CCI, Polycab 

14 Cable glands brass heavy duty HMI, Comet, EEW 

15 Cable lugs Dowells, Comet 

16 Coaxial Cable Polycab/Phenolex/RR cable 

17 Motor Starter L&T, Siemens 

18 Telephone cables ITL, Finolex, Delton 

19 Telephone tag blocks ITL, Krone type 

20 Terminal Blocks WAGO, Elemex, Connetwell 

21 Push buttons indicating lamps L&T, Siemens, Raas, Taknic 

22 Energy Meter ECE, Trinity, HPL 

23 Smoke Detector Nitan, Apollo, Hochki. 

24 Manual call point Monsher, Nitin 

25 Electronic Hooter Philips or equivalent 

26 Pumps Kirloskar, Jyoti, Crompton 

27 Motor Kirloskar, Jyoti, Cromton 

28 Ceiling, Wall, Table Pedestal and Exhaust 

Fans 

Usha, Crompton, Bajaj, Almonard, 

Orient, Havells 

29 Motor protection relays L&T, Siemens, Universal, EE. 

30 Lift 0 To 15, KONE

A Government - Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?